A1-F18AC-742-100

1 November 2002

TECHNICAL MANUAL

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

RADAR SYSTEM
NAVY MODEL
F/A-18A 161353 THRU 161987,
F/A-18B/C/D 161354 THRU 164279;
ALSO F/A-18C/D 164627 THRU 164897 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 211
AND F/A-18A 162394 THRU 163175 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 292

This manual supersedes A1-F18AC-742-100 dated 15 August 1994, changed 1 May

2002.

This manual is incomplete without classified supplement A1-F18AC-742-150/(C).

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C. Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies

and their contractors to protect publications required for official use or for
administrative or operational purposes only, determined on 1 April 1999. Other
requests for this document shall be referred to Commanding Officer, Naval Air
Technical Data and Engineering Service Command, Naval Air Station North Island
P.O. Box 357031, Building 90 Distribution, San Diego, CA 92135-7031.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE - For unclassified, limited documents, destroy by any method

that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

Published by Direction of the

Commander, Naval Air Systems Command

0801LP1022421

NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL

A1-F18AC-742-100
1 November 2002 Page A

NUMERICAL INDEX OF EFFECTIVE WORK PACKAGES/PAGES

List of Current Changes

Original ............0 ............1 Nov 02

Only those work packages/pages assigned to the manual are listed in this index. Insert Change dated . Dispose of
superseded work packages/pages. Superseded classified work packages/pages shall be destroyed in accordance with applicable security
regulations. If changed pages are issued to a work package, insert the changed pages in the applicable work package. The portion of text
affected in a change or revision is indicated by change bars or the change symbol “R” in the outer margin of each column of text.
Changes to illustrations are indicated by pointing hands, change bars, or MAJOR CHANGE symbols. Changes to diagrams may be
indicated by shaded borders.

Total number of pages in this manual is 502 consisting of the following:

WP/Page Change WP/Page Change WP/Page Change WP/Page Change

Number Number
Title .............................................0
A...................................................0
B...................................................0
C...................................................0
TPDR-1.......................................0
TPDR-2 blank ...........................0
001 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
001 01
1................................................0
2 blank ....................................0
002 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
002 01
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6 blank ....................................0
003 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
004 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
Number Number
14 blank ..................................0
005 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8 blank ....................................0
006 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
007 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8 blank ....................................0
008 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6 blank ....................................0
009 00
1................................................0
Number Number
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
010 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
011 00
1................................................0
2 blank ....................................0
011 01 deleted ............................0
011 02
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
17..............................................0
18 blank ..................................0
011 03
1................................................0
Number Number
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
17..............................................0
18..............................................0
19..............................................0
20..............................................0
21..............................................0
22 blank ..................................0
012 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
012 01 deleted ............................0
012 02 deleted ............................0
013 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
A1-F18AC-742-100
1 November 2002
WP/Page Change
Number Number
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
17..............................................0
18..............................................0
19..............................................0
20..............................................0
013 01 deleted ............................0
013 02 deleted ............................0
014 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
014 01 deleted ............................0
014 02 deleted ............................0
015 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
17..............................................0
18 blank ..................................0
015 01 deleted ............................0
015 02 deleted ............................0
016 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
WP/Page Change
Number Number
10..............................................0
016 01 deleted ............................0
016 02 deleted ............................0
017 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
17..............................................0
18..............................................0
19..............................................0
20..............................................0
21..............................................0
22..............................................0
23..............................................0
24..............................................0
25..............................................0
26..............................................0
27..............................................0
28..............................................0
29..............................................0
30..............................................0
31..............................................0
32..............................................0
017 01 deleted ............................0
017 02 deleted ............................0
018 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
018 01 deleted ............................0
018 02 deleted ............................0
019 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
019 01 deleted ............................0
019 02 deleted ............................0
WP/Page Change
Number Number
020 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12 blank ..................................0
021 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
022 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
023 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6 blank ....................................0
024 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
025 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
026 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
Page B
WP/Page Change
Number Number
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
027 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
028 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
029 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
030 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10 blank ..................................0
031 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10 blank ..................................0
032 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
A1-F18AC-742-100
1 November 2002
WP/Page Change
Number Number
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
033 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6 blank ....................................0
034 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6 blank ....................................0
035 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
036 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12 blank ..................................0
037 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
13..............................................0
14..............................................0
15..............................................0
16..............................................0
Page C
WP/Page Change WP/Page Change WP/Page Change
Number Number Number Number Number Number
17..............................................0 042 00 deleted ............................0
18..............................................0 043 00
19..............................................0 1................................................0
20..............................................0 2................................................0
21..............................................0 3................................................0
22..............................................0 4................................................0
23..............................................0 5................................................0
24..............................................0 6................................................0
25..............................................0 7................................................0
26..............................................0 8................................................0
27..............................................0 9................................................0
28..............................................0 10..............................................0
29..............................................0 11..............................................0
30..............................................0 12..............................................0
038 00 13..............................................0
1................................................0 14..............................................0
2................................................0 043 01 deleted ............................0
3................................................0 043 02 deleted ............................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12..............................................0
039 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
040 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10..............................................0
11..............................................0
12 blank ..................................0
041 00
1................................................0
2................................................0
3................................................0
4................................................0
5................................................0
6................................................0
7................................................0
8................................................0
9................................................0
10 blank ..................................0
041 01 deleted ............................0
041 02 deleted ............................0
A1-F18AC-742-100 TPDR-1
1 November 2002 (TPDR-2 blank)

LIST OF TECHNICAL PUBLICATION DEFICIENCY REPORTS INCORPORATED

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

RADAR SYSTEM

1. The TPDRs listed below have been incorporated in this issue.

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER/
LOCATION
QA SEQUENCE NUMBER

NONE
A1-F18AC-742-100 001 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

RADAR SYSTEM

WP
Title Number
Component Locator ..................................................................................................................................... 004 00
Description.................................................................................................................................................... 003 00
Controls and Indicators ...................................................................................................................... 006 00
Radar Set Components ....................................................................................................................... 005 00
System Components ............................................................................................................................ 007 00
Functional Operation
Antenna Control................................................................................................................................... 033 00
Built-In Test......................................................................................................................................... 035 00
Cooling and Pressurization................................................................................................................. 034 00
Data Processing.................................................................................................................................... 032 00
Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic ............................................................................ 039 00
Electronic Counter - Countermeasures (ECCM) (See A1-F18AC-742-150/C)
Maintenance BIT Mode...................................................................................................................... 041 00
Mode Dependent Data Processing .................................................................................................... 038 00
Mode Dependent Signal Processing.................................................................................................. 036 00
Non-Cooperative Target Recognition (NCTR) (A1-F18AC-742-150/C)
Power Control Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 025 00
Radar Electrical Power Function ...................................................................................................... 024 00
Radar Set Receiving Function ........................................................................................................... 030 00
RF Power Development Block Diagram........................................................................................... 029 00
RF Power Function ............................................................................................................................. 028 00
Track While Scan Function ............................................................................................................... 043 00
Transmitter Drive Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 027 00
Transmitter Drive ................................................................................................................................ 026 00
Signal Processing Function ................................................................................................................ 031 00
Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic.......................................................................... 037 00
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 002 00
Content.................................................................................................................................................. 002 00
Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................... 002 00
Effectivities ........................................................................................................................................... 002 00
Manual Issue Date ............................................................................................................................... 002 00
Manual References to IETM ............................................................................................................. 002 00
Navy (AN) Standard/ Common Name Nomenclature .................................................................. 002 00
Purpose.................................................................................................................................................. 002 00
Record of Applicable Technical Directives ...................................................................................... 002 00
Requisition and Automatic Distribution of NAVAIR Technical Manuals ................................ 002 00
A1-F18AC-742-100 001 00
Page 2

WP
Title Number
Schematic Highlights .......................................................................................................................... 002 00
Technical Directives ............................................................................................................................ 002 00
Technical Publications Deficiency Report (TPDR) ....................................................................... 002 00
Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 009 00
Functional ............................................................................................................................................. 009 00
Radar Set .............................................................................................................................................. 009 00
Sequence of ........................................................................................................................................... 009 00
Radar Set Block Diagram........................................................................................................................... 010 00
Radar Set Doppler Display Diagrams....................................................................................................... 023 00
Radar Set Doppler Operation .................................................................................................................... 022 00
Radar Set Receiving Function Simplified Schematic ............................................................................ 040 00
Radar System Sequence of Operation
Air to Air Search Mode Displays, Diagrams.................................................................................... 015 00
Air to Air Search Mode Displays, Operation................................................................................... 014 00
Air to Air Track Mode Displays, Diagrams ..................................................................................... 019 00
Air to Air Track Mode Displays, Operation .................................................................................... 018 00
Air to Ground Displays, Diagrams .................................................................................................... 017 00
Air to Ground Displays, Operation ................................................................................................... 016 00
Block Diagrams .................................................................................................................................... 008 00
Head-Up Displays, Diagrams ............................................................................................................. 021 00
Head-Up Displays, Operation ............................................................................................................ 020 00
Mode Selection and Video Displays, Diagrams............................................................................... 012 00
Mode Selection and Video Displays, Operation.............................................................................. 011 00
Target Acquisition, Operation ................................................................................................................... 013 00
Track While Scan
Air to Air Search Mode Displays....................................................................................................... 014 00
Air to Air Track Mode Displays ........................................................................................................ 018 00
Data Processing Function................................................................................................................... 032 00
Mode Selection and Video Displays.................................................................................................. 011 00
Target Acquisition ............................................................................................................................... 013 00
Track While Scan Function ............................................................................................................... 043 00
A1-F18AC-742-100 001 01
1 November 2002 Page 1/(2 blank)

WORK PACKAGE INDEX

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

RADAR SYSTEM

WP WP
Title Title
Number Number
001 00 Alphabetical Index 020 00 Operation - Head-Up Displays
001 01 Work Package Index 021 00 Diagrams - Head-Up Displays
002 00 Introduction 022 00 Operation - Radar Set Doppler
002 01 Nonstandard Abbreviations and 023 00 Diagrams - Radar Set Doppler Displays
Symbols 024 00 Operation - Radar Electrical Power
003 00 Description Function
004 00 Component Locator 025 00 Block Diagram - Power Control
005 00 Description - Radar Set Components 026 00 Operation - Transmitter Drive
006 00 Description - Controls and Indicators 027 00 Block Diagram - Transmitter Drive
007 00 Description - System Components 028 00 Operation - RF Power Function
008 00 Block Diagram 029 00 Block Diagrams - RF Power
009 00 Operation Development
010 00 Block Diagram - Radar Set 030 00 Operation - Radar Set Receiving
011 00 Operation - Mode Selection and Video Function
Displays 031 00 Operation - Signal Processing Function
011 02 Operation - Mode Selection and Video 032 00 Operation - Data Processing Function
Displays - WITH COMPUTER- 033 00 Operation - Antenna Control Function
POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 034 00 Operation - Cooling and Pressurization
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP Function
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) 035 00 Operation - Built-In Test
011 03 Operation - Mode Selection and Video 036 00 Operation - Mode Dependent Signal
Displays - WITH COMPUTER- Processing
POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 037 00 Simplified Schematic - Signal
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP Processing Function
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) 038 00 Operation - Mode Dependent Data
012 00 Diagrams - Mode Selection and Video Processing
Displays 039 00 Simplified Schematic - Data Processing
013 00 Operation - Target Acquisition Function
014 00 Operation - Air To Air Search Mode 040 00 Simplified Schematic - Radar Set
Displays Receiving Function
015 00 Diagrams - Air To Air Search Mode 041 00 Operation - Maintenance BIT Mode
Displays 042 00 Deleted
016 00 Operation - Air To Ground Displays 043 00 Operation - Track While Scan
017 00 Diagrams - Air To Ground Displays Function
018 00 Operation - Air To Air Track Mode
Displays
019 00 Diagrams - Air To Air Track Mode
Displays
A1-F18AC-742-100
1 November 2002
INTRODUCTION
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
RADAR SYSTEM
1. PURPOSE.
2. This manual provides the technician with a
general understanding of how the various
components function in the system.
3.REQUISITION AND AUTOMATIC
DISTRIBUTION OF NAVAIR TECHNICAL
MANUALS.
4. Procedures to be used by Naval activities and
other Department of Defense activities requiring
NAVAIR technical manuals are defined in
NAVAIR 00-25-100 and NAVAIRINST 5605.5.4A.
5. To automatically receive future changes and
revisions to NAVAIR technical manuals, an activity
must be established on the Automatic Distribution
Requirements List (ADRL) maintained by the
Naval Air Technical Data and Engineering Service
Command (NATEC). To become established on the
ADRL, contact your activity central technical
publications librarian. If your activity does not have
a library, you may establish your automatic
distribution by contacting the Commanding Officer,
NATEC, Attn: Distribution, NAS North Island,
Bldg. 90, P.O. Box 357031, San Diego CA
92135-7031. Reconfirmation of these requirements is
required once a year to remain on automatic
distribution. Please use your NATEC assigned
account number when referring to automatic
distribution requirements.
6. If more or replacement copies of this manual are
required with no attendant changes in the ADRL,
they may be ordered by submitting a MILSTRIP
requisition in accordance with NAVSUP 485 to
Routing Identifier Code ″NFZ″. MILSTRIP
002 00
Page 1
requisitions can be submitted through your supply
office, Navy message, or SALTS to DAAS (Defense
Automated Address System), or through the DAAS
or NAVSUP web sites. For assistance with a
MILSTRIP requisition, contact the Naval Inventory
Control Point (NAVICP) Publications and Forms
Customer Service at Defense Switched Network
442-2626 or (215) 697-2626, Monday through
Friday, 0700 to 1600 Eastern Time.
7. CONTENT.
8. Work packages contain description and operation
of systems, subsystems, and components. The text
is supported by component locators, block diagrams
and simplified schematics.
9. COMPONENT LOCATOR. The component
locator shows aircraft component location. The
illustration shows the technicians view when
possible.
10. BLOCK DIAGRAMS. Block diagrams are made
up primarily of blocks connected by lines. These
diagrams portray the function of a system or
subsystem.
11. SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATICS. Simplified
schematics are made up primarily of blocks
connected by single lines with limited use of
symbols and pictorial drawings of units. These
schematics simplify system functions as much as
possible. All schematics are shown with electrical
power off, switches in off positions, and relays in
deenergized position unless noted on schematic.
12. SCHEMATIC HIGHLIGHTS.
13. For schematic highlights, see figure 1.
DA-100C10
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 2

14. MANUAL ISSUE DATE. NOTE

15. The date on the title page is the copy freeze
date. No additions, deletions, or changes are made
after the manual issue date except last minute
safety of flight or required maintenance changes.
Data collected after the manual issue date will be
included in later changes or revisions of the manual.
F/A-18D aircraft after bureau number
164967 was referred to as bureau number
F/A-18D D-140. Now, F/A-18D aircraft
after bureau number 164967 is 165409.
b. Bureau number (tail number)

16. EFFECTIVITIES. c. Combination of type, model, series, and

17. Effectivity notes on manual title pages, work
package title pages, and within a work package
indicate the aircraft or software program to which
the data applies. If no effectivity note appears on
the work package title page, the work package has
the same effectivity as shown on the manual title
page. The effectivity notes may use:
a. Type, model, and series
bureau numbers
d. Part number or serial number
e. Technical directive number
f. Configuration/identification number
18. The table below shows examples of effectivity
notes and their meanings:

Effectivity Note Examples

Effectivity Note Definition

160777 AND UP Applicable to all F/A-18A, F/A-18B, F/A-18C and F/A-18D

for bureau numbers listed.

F/A-18A, F/A-18B Applicable to all F/A-18A and F/A-18B.

F/A-18C, F/A-18D Applicable to all F/A-18C and F/A-18D.

F/A-18A Applicable to all F/A-18A, but not F/A-18B, F/A-18C and

F/A-18D.

F/A-18B Applicable to all F/A-18B, but not F/A-18A, F/A-18C, and

F/A-18D.

F/A-18C Applicable to all F/A-18C, but not F/A-18A, F/A-18B, and

F/A-18D.

F/A-18D Applicable to all F/A-18D, but not F/A-18A, F/A-18B, and

F/A-18C.

F/A-18A, F/A-18C Applicable to all F/A-18A and F/A-18C, but not to F/A-18B
and F/A-18D.

F/A-18B, F/A-18D Applicable to all F/A-18B and F/A-18D, but not to F/A-18A
and F/A-18C.

F/A-18A 160775, 160777 THRU 160782 Only applicable to some bureau numbers of F/A-18A. Not
applicable to any F/A-18B, even if a F/A-18B bureau num-
ber is within the numbers listed.
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 3

Effectivity Note Examples (Continued)

Effectivity Note Definition

F/A-18C 163427, 163430 THRU 163456 Only applicable to some bureau numbers of F/A-18C. Not
applicable to any F/A-18D, even if a F/A-18D bureau num-
ber is within the numbers listed.

F/A-18B 160784 AND UP Only applicable to some bureau numbers of F/A-18B. Not
applicable to any F/A-18A, even if an F/A-18A bureau num-
ber is within the numbers listed.

F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163457 Only applicable to some bureau numbers of F/A-18D. Not
applicable to any F/A-18C, even if a F/A-18C bureau num-
ber is within the numbers listed.

F/A-18B 160784 AND UP, F/A-18D Applicable to some bureau numbers of F/A-18B. Not appli-
cable to any F/A-18A, even if an F/A-18A bureau number is
within the numbers listed. Also applicable to all F/A-18D
aircraft.

F/A-18C, F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163457 Applicable to all F/A-18C aircraft. Applicable to some bu-
reau numbers of F/A-18D.

F/A-18D D-140 AND UP OR F/A-18D Applicable to all F/A-18D aircraft after bureau number
165409 AND UP 164967.

160775 THRU 160785 BEFORE F/A-18 Applicable to F/A-18A and F/A-18B for bureau numbers
AFC 772 listed, before modification by technical directive.

161213 AND UP; ALSO 160775 THRU Applicable to aircraft modified during production; also ap-
160785 AFTER F/A-18 AFC 772 plicable when affected aircraft have been modified by tech-
nical directive.

160775 THRU 160785; WHEN NO. 2 CON- Applicable to F/A-18A and F/A-18B for bureau numbers
TROL PANEL P/N XXXX-X IS IN- listed if panel P/N XXXX-X is installed. (Configuration
STALLED before AVC)

161213 AND UP; ALSO 160775 THRU Applicable to aircraft modified during production; also ap-
160785; WHEN NO. 2 CONTROL PANEL plicable to aircraft components modified to the production
P/N XXXX-Y (AVC-102) IS INSTALLED configuration by technical directive. (Configuration after
AVC)

P/N MBEU65101-9, MBEU65101-10 & Applicable to assemblies which are interchangeable between
MBEU65105-3 aircraft.

ENGINE NO. 215101 THRU 215109 Applicable to assemblies which are interchangeable between
aircraft, but configurations can not be identified by part
number.

CONFIG/IDENT NUMBER 84A The CONFIG/IDENT number is the program load identifi-
cation number which identifies the software program loaded
in specific programmable units. Refer to A1-F18AC-SCM-
000 for CONFIG/IDENT number tables.
A1-F18AC-742-100
19. TECHNICAL DIRECTIVES.
20. Technical directives are documents which
provide instructions to add and record retrofit
configuration modifications or inspection
instructions to delivered aircraft, or aircraft
components.
21. AIRFRAME CHANGE (AFC) AND AIRBORNE
SOFTWARE CHANGE (ASC) . Technical directives
which change configuration of aircraft structure or
equipment installation, i.e. AFC, will list aircraft
bureau numbers in effectivity notes and show
before and after the AFC. Technical directives
which change configuration of operational flight
programs (OFP), i.e. ASC, will list the OFP
CONFIG/IDENT NUMBER in effectivity notes
and show the latest two authorized OFP programs.
See AFC and ASC effectivity examples in
Effectivity Note Example Table.
22. AIRCRAFT COMPONENT CHANGES.
Technical directives which change configuration of
aircraft components are listed below:
AAC Aviation Armament Change for
armament equipment
ACC Aircrew System Change for aircrew
survival equipment
AFC Airframe Change for aircraft
structure and equipment
ASC Airborne Software Change for
operational flight programs
AVC Avionics Change for airborne
electronic equipment, including
wiring changes
AYC Accessory Change for mechanical
system
PPC Power Plant Change for engines
23. Component changes will list part numbers in
the effectivities. See AVC effectivity examples in
Effectivity Note Example table.
002 00
Page 4
24.RECORD OF APPLICABLE TECHNICAL
DIRECTIVES.
25. The technical directives affecting this manual
are listed in the Record of Applicable Technical
Directives of each affected work package. Because
an ASC directs all aircraft be modified within 30
days, ASC’s are not listed. When all affected
aircraft are modified, the before configuration is
removed from the manual, and the technical
directive entry is removed from the Record of
Applicable Technical Directives.
26. TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
DEFICIENCY REPORT (TPDR).
27. The TPDR (OPNAV FORM 4790/66) is the
form for reporting errors and suspected omissions in
the technical manuals. The TPDR WP lists the
TPDR’s that are included in the current issue of
the manual.
28. TPDR reporting procedures are in
OPNAVINST 4790.2 SERIES.
29. DIAGRAMS.
30. Simplified schematics and block diagrams are in
this manual. System schematics are in
A1-F18A( )-( )-500 series manuals.
NAVY (AN) STANDARD/COMMON
31.
NAME NOMENCLATURE.
32. When an item has both Navy (AN) standard
and common name nomenclature assigned, the
common name nomenclature will be used in text
and on illustrations. Full Navy (AN) standard
nomenclature will be used in the Illustrated Parts
Breakdown (IPB).
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 5

33. MANUAL REFERENCES TO IETM.

PUBLICATION PUBLICATION
NUMBER NUMBER
34. The manuals listed below have been converted
into an Interactive Electronic Technical Manual
A1-F18AC-SRM-200 A1-F18AE-SRM-661
(IETM) format. When an IETM is available, all
A1-F18AC-SRM-250 A1-F18AE-SRM-662
references to the manuals below should be directed
A1-F18AC-SRM-300 A1-F18AE-SRM-700
to the IETM.
A1-F18AC-SRM-310 A1-F18AE-SRM-710
A1-F18AC-SRM-410 A1-F18AE-SRM-750
A1-F18AC-SRM-420 A1-F18AE-SRM-760
PUBLICATION PUBLICATION A1-F18AC-SRM-430 A1-F18AE-WDM-000
NUMBER NUMBER A1-F18AC-SRM-440 A1-F18AE-WDM-010
A1-F18AC-SRM-500 A1-F18AE-WRM-000
A1-F18AC-120-100 A1-F18AC-570-210 A1-F18AE-120-100 A1-F18AE-WRM-010
A1-F18AC-120-200 A1-F18AC-570-220 A1-F18AE-120-200 A1-F18AE-WRM-020
A1-F18AC-120-300 A1-F18AC-570-300 A1-F18AE-120-300 A1-F18AE-WRM-100
A1-F18AC-120-310 A1-F18AC-570-310 A1-F18AE-460-100 A1-F18AE-WRM-200
A1-F18AC-130-100 A1-F18AC-570-600 A1-F18AE-460-200 A1-F18AE-WRM-300
A1-F18AC-130-200 A1-F18AC-600-100 A1-F18AE-460-210 A1-F18AE-WRM-800
A1-F18AC-130-300 A1-F18AC-600-200 A1-F18AE-460-300 A1-F18AF-WDM-000
A1-F18AC-130-310 A1-F18AC-600-300 A1-F18AE-460-310 A1-F18AF-WDM-010
A1-F18AC-130-320 A1-F18AC-730-100 A1-F18AE-460-320 A1-F18AF-WRM-000
A1-F18AC-240-100 A1-F18AC-730-200 A1-F18AE-460-330 A1-F18AF-WRM-010
A1-F18AC-240-200 A1-F18AC-730-300 A1-F18AE-580-100 A1-F18AG-731-100
A1-F18AC-240-300 A1-F18AC-742-100 A1-F18AE-580-200 A1-F18AG-731-200
A1-F18AC-270-100 A1-F18AC-742-200 A1-F18AE-580-300 A1-F18AG-731-300
A1-F18AC-270-200 A1-F18AC-742-300 A1-F18AE-630-100 A1-F18AG-745-100
A1-F18AC-270-210 A1-F18AC-743-100 A1-F18AE-630-200 A1-F18AG-745-200
A1-F18AC-270-300 A1-F18AC-743-200 A1-F18AE-630-300 A1-F18AG-745-300
A1-F18AC-270-310 A1-F18AC-743-300 A1-F18AE-740-100 A1-F18AG-746-100
A1-F18AC-410-100 A1-F18AC-744-100 A1-F18AE-740-110 A1-F18AG-746-200
A1-F18AC-410-200 A1-F18AC-744-200 A1-F18AE-740-200 A1-F18AG-746-300
A1-F18AC-410-300 A1-F18AC-744-300 A1-F18AE-740-210 A1-F18AG-LMM-050
A1-F18AC-410-310 A1-F18AC-745-100 A1-F18AE-740-220 A1-F18AH-710-100
A1-F18AC-420-100 A1-F18AC-745-200 A1-F18AE-740-230 A1-F18AH-710-200
A1-F18AC-420-200 A1-F18AC-745-300 A1-F18AE-740-300 A1-F18AH-710-300
A1-F18AC-420-300 A1-F18AC-750-100 A1-F18AE-741-100 A1-F18AH-740-100
A1-F18AC-420-310 A1-F18AC-750-200 A1-F18AE-741-200 A1-F18AH-740-110
A1-F18AC-440-100 A1-F18AC-750-300 A1-F18AE-741-300 A1-F18AH-740-200
A1-F18AC-440-200 A1-F18AC-770-100 A1-F18AE-760-100 A1-F18AH-740-210
A1-F18AC-440-300 A1-F18AC-770-200 A1-F18AE-760-200 A1-F18AH-740-220
A1-F18AC-450-100 A1-F18AC-770-300 A1-F18AE-760-300 A1-F18AH-740-230
A1-F18AC-450-200 A1-F18AC-FIM-000 A1-F18AE-FIM-100 A1-F18AH-740-300
A1-F18AC-450-300 A1-F18AC-FIM-010 A1-F18AE-FRM-000 A1-F18AH-742-100
A1-F18AC-510-100 A1-F18AC-LMM-000 A1-F18AE-MRC-000 A1-F18AH-742-200
A1-F18AC-510-200 A1-F18AC-LMM-010 A1-F18AE-MRC-250 A1-F18AH-742-300
A1-F18AC-510-300 A1-F18AC-LMM-030 A1-F18AE-MRC-300
A1-F18AC-560-100 A1-F18AC-LMM-040 A1-F18AE-SGF-000
A1-F18AC-560-200 A1-F18AC-PCM-000 A1-F18AE-SRM-600
A1-F18AC-560-300 A1-F18AC-PIM-000 A1-F18AE-SMR-601
A1-F18AC-570-100 A1-F18AC-PIM-010 A1-F18AE-SRM-610
A1-F18AC-570-200 A1-F18AE-SRM-660 A1-F18AE-SRM-611
A1-F18AE-SRM-650
A1-F18AE-SRM-651
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Schematic Highlights (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Schematic Highlights (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 002 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Schematic Highlights (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 002 01
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

SYSTEM SCHEMATICS

NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
None

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Nonstandard Abbreviations, Table 1 ....................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Nonstandard Symbols, Figure 1 .............................................................................................................. 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations

(Continued)
2. This work package supports all schematics Abbreviation Term
contained in this manual.
ACQ1 Acquisition One
3. Table 1 contains nonstandard abbreviations used
on the schematics in this manual. ACQ2 Acquisition Two

Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations ACS Armament Control Set

Abbreviation Term
ADT Auxiliary Data Table
A&C Arithmetic and Control
AGR Air to Ground Ranging
A/A Air to Air
ASC Analog Signal Converter
A/D/A Analog Digital Analog
ASE Allowable Steering Error
A/G Air to Ground
BIT Built-In Test
AACQ Automatic Acquisition
BST Boresight
ACM Air Combat Maneuvering
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 01
Page 2

Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations

(Continued) (Continued)
Abbreviation Term Abbreviation Term

CAGC Course Automatic Gain Control EXP2 Expand 2 (Mode)

CSC Communication System EXP3 Expand 3 (Mode)

Control
FACQ Fast Acquisition
DAGC Digital Automatic Gain Control
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
DBS Doppler Beam Sharpened
(Mode) FMR Frequency Modulation Ranging

DBSP Doppler Beam Sharpened With FOV Field of View

Patch (EXP2 Mode)
FTA Fixed Target Acquisition
DBSS Doppler Beam Sharpened
Sector (EXP1 Mode) FTT Fixed Target Track (Mode)

DBS SAR Doppler Beam Sharpened GMT Ground Moving Target (Mode)
Synthetic Aperture Radar
(EXP3 Mode) GMTA Ground Moving Target
Acquisition
DDI Digital Display Indicator
GMTI Ground Moving Target
DEGD Degrade Indicator

DI Discrete Input GMTT Ground Moving Target Track

(Mode)
DO Discrete Output
GPS Global Positioning System
DP Data Processor
GTWT Gridded Traveling Wave Tube
DVFO Digital Variable Frequency
Oscillator H/M INTL High/Medium Interleave

EEPROM Electrically Erasable PROM HACQ Head Up Display Acquisition

EGI Embedded GPS/INS HOTAS Hands On Throttle and Stick

ELBAR Elevation Bar HPRF High Pulse Repetition

Frequency
EMCON Emission Control
HPRFMC High Pulse Repetition
ENV Envelope Frequency Missile Compatible

ERD Equipment Ready HUD Head Up Display

ETI Elapsed Time Indicator HUDACQ Head Up Display Acquisition

(Same as HACQ)
EXP1 Expand 1 (Mode)
I/Q In Phase/Quadrature
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 01
Page 3

Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations

(Continued) (Continued)
Abbreviation Term Abbreviation Term

IBIT Initiated Built-In Test MLV Memory Loader Verifier

ID Identification MPRF Medium Pulse Repetition

Frequency
IDU Instrumentation Data Unit
MRSAR Medium Resolution Synthetic
IFA Inflight Alignment Aperture Radar (EXP3 Mode)

INS Inertial Navigation System/Set MSI Multi-Source Integration

INTL Interleave NCTR Noncooperative Target

Recognition
IOB Input/Output Buffer
NIRD Normalized In Range Display
IOC Input/Output Controller
NWS Nose Wheel Steering
IR Instruction Register
ORT Operational Readiness Test
JEM Jet Engine Modulation
PBIT Periodic Built-In Test
L and S Launch Range and Steering
PDI Pulse Doppler Illuminator
LCS Liquid Coolant System
PEN Pencil Beam
LDC Left Designator Control
PLA Programmable Logic Array
LDDI Left Digital Display Indicator
PRI Pulse Repetition Interval
LEA Long Ensemble Average
PS Power Supply
LEX Leading Edge Extension
PSP Programmable Signal Processor
LPRF Low Pulse Repetition
Frequency PVU Precision Velocity Update
(Mode)
LTWS Latent Track While Scan
RBGM Real Beam Ground Map
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply (Mode)

MAP Real Beam Ground Map RCURS Cursor Range

(RBGM Mode)
RDC Right Designator Control
MAR Memory Address Register
RDDI Right Digital Display Indicator
MC Mission Computer (System)
RDP Radar Data Processor
MDR Memory Data Register
R MAX 1 Range Maximum
MLC Main Lobe Cutter
A1-F18AC-742-100 002 01
Page 4

Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations Table 1. Nonstandard Abbreviations

(Continued) (Continued)
Abbreviation Term Abbreviation Term

R MAX 2 Range Maximum STT Single Target Track (Mode)

(Maneuvering)
SURF/AIR/ Surface/Air/Reject
RMIN Range Minimum REJ

RMG Right Main Gear T&C Timing and Control

RMUX Internal Radar Mux Bus TA Terrain Avoidance (Mode)

RSP Radar Signal Processor TD Transmitter Drive

RWS Range While Search (Mode) TDC Throttle Designator Control

SAR Synthetic Aperture Radar TX Transmit

(EXP3 Mode)
VACQ Vertical Acquisition
SCS Sensor Control Switch
VC Closing Velocity
SDI Serial Data Interface
VS Velocity Search
SEA Sea Surface Search (Mode)
VSRWS Vector Scan Range While
SF Self Search

SIL Silent WACQ Wide Acquisition

SP Signal Processor WOW Weight On Wheels

SRPS Space Roll Pitch Stabilized WRA Weapon Replaceable Assembly

SRT Short Range Track X Horizontal (Axis)

SST Sea Surface Track (Mode) Y Vertical (Axis)

STABCD Stabilized Cue Command ZRD Zero Range Display

STABCUE Stabilized Cue

A1-F18AC-742-100 002 01
Page 5/(6 blank)

INDICATES RADAR COOLANT PRESSURE LINE

INDICATES RADAR COOLANT RETURN LINE

Figure 1. Nonstandard Symbols

A1-F18AC-742-100 003 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DESCRIPTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Components .............................................................................................................................. 2
System Components ................................................................................................................................... 2
System Controls and Indicators................................................................................................................ 2
System Description ..................................................................................................................................... 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. b. detection of air and surface targets.

2. The descriptions provided in this WP are listed c. automatic acquisition of short range air
below: targets.

d. track of air and surface targets.

a. system description
e. target illumination for AIM-7 missiles.
b. radar set components
f. air to ground (A/G) mapping.
c. system components
g. air to air (A/A) and A/G display data.
d. system controls and indicators.
h. terrain avoidance.
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.
i. precision velocity update.
4. Refer to component locator (WP004 00) for j. A/G ranging.
location of radar system components. The radar
system provides: k. data link support for AIM-120 AMRAAM
missiles.
a. air target range, range rate, antenna angles,
and antenna rates for use in computation of weapon 5. The radar system interfaces with other avionic
parameters and launch equations. subsystems to complete its mission. It
A1-F18AC-742-100 003 00
Page 2

communicates directly with the interference blanker e. master arm control panel assembly.
system, missile auxiliaries illumination set, signal
data computer, right digital display f. master mode select panel assembly.
indicator, and left digital display indicator.
Communication is made through the mission g. lock/shoot light assembly.
computer (MC) system with the subsystems listed
below: h. SNSR pod control box panel assembly.

a. navigation system i. digital display indicator.

b. flight control system j. nose wheelwell DDI.

c. stores management system k. left digital display indicator.

d. maintenance status display and recording
system - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B
e. flight incident recorder and monitoring
system - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D
l. rear left digital display indicator.
m. right digital display indicator.
n. rear right digital display indicator.

f. remaining multipurpose display group o. Rear Center Digital Display Indicator

IP-1318( )-F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU
g. other tactical sensors 163778.

h. armament computer. p. rear aircraft controller grip assembly -

F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO
6. RADAR SET COMPONENTS. 163986 AND UP TRAINER CONFIGURATION.

7. Refer to WP005 00 for radar set component q. rear right throttle grip - F/A-18B; F/A-18D
description. 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO 163986 AND UP
TRAINER CONFIGURATION.
8. SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
r. rear left throttle grip - F/A-18B; F/A-18D
9. Refer to WP007 00 for radar system 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO 163986 AND UP
components. TRAINER CONFIGURATION.

10. SYSTEM CONTROLS AND s. rear left hand controller - F/A-18D 163986
INDICATORS. AND UP NIGHT ATTACK CONFIGURATION.

11. Radar system controls and indicators include t. rear right hand controller - F/A-18D 163986
the: AND UP NIGHT ATTACK CONFIGURATION.

a. aircraft controller grip assembly. u. map gain control panel assembly.

b. right throttle grip. v. emergency brake/parking brake.

c. left throttle grip. 12. If a detailed description of controls and

indicators is required, refer to control and
d. GND PWR control panel assembly. indicators description (WP006 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

COMPONENT LOCATOR

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
None

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar System Locator, Figure 1 ............................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This locator supports the radar system

description principles of operation (WP003 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 9

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 11

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 10)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 12

LEGEND

1. AIRCRAFT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ARE SHOWN IN A1-F18A( )-WDM-000.

2
Ñ F/A-18B AND F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778.
3
Ñ DELETED.
4
Ñ 161353 THRU 163782
5
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18B.
6
Ñ F/A-18C AND F/A-18D.
7
Ñ F/A-18B AND F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778; ALSO 163986 AND UP TRAINER
CONFIGURATION.
8
Ñ F/A-18D 163986 AND UP.
9
Ñ F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK CONFIGURATION.
10
Ñ 163985 AND UP.
11
Ñ 161353 AND UP.

Index
Nomenclature Ref Des
No.

AIM-7 TRANSMISSION LINE COUPLER 51 60A-P008

AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER GRIP ASSEMBLY 29 52A-J501
6
Ñ AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INDICATOR 53 85A-G003
ANTENNA 1 60E-A501
ANTENNA TO RECEIVER-EXCITER WAVEGUIDE
ASSEMBLY 7 60W-A521
ANTENNA TO TRANSMITTER WAVEGUIDE ASSEMBLY 8 60W-A519
COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY 12 60A-A505
5
Ñ DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 52 85A-G003
ELECTRICAL BORESIGHT COMPENSATION
ASSEMBLY 45 85A-F007
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK SUBASSEMBLY 3 60MPA502
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK SUPPORT 4 60MPA509
EMERG BRK/PARK CONTROL 25 13MPH501
FLOOD ANTENNA 2 60E-A512
FLOOD ANTENNA TO TRANSMITTER WAVEGUIDE
ASSEMBLY 6 60W-A517
GND PWR CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 28 1A-H004
GUARD HORN 9 60W-0510
HEAD-UP DISPLAY CAMERA BLANK PANEL 21 -
HEAD-UP DISPLAY 20 79A-J001
INTERFERENCE BLANKER 46 66A-F001
LEFT AIM-7 FUSELAGE ANTENNA 50 60E-S011
LEFT AIM-7 WING ANTENNA 49 60E-U013
LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 19 80A-H001
9
Ñ LEFT HAND CONTROLLER 41 52A-K314
LEFT THROTTLE GRIP 26 52A-H049
LOCK/SHOOT LIGHT ASSEMBLY 30 8DSJ150
MAP GAIN CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 23 52A-J076
MASTER ARM CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 18 52A-H075
NO. 7 CIRCUIT BREAKER/RELAY PANEL
ASSEMBLY 43 52A-C057
NO. 8 CIRCUIT BREAKER/RELAY PANEL ASSEMBLY 42 52A-C159

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 11)

A1-F18AC-742-100 004 00
Page 13/(14 blank)

Index
Nomenclature Ref Des
No.

NO. 2 RELAY PANEL ASSEMBLY 44 52A-F058

PANTOGRAPH ASSEMBLY 5 60W-A516
RADAR RECEIVER-EXCITER 11 60A-A506
RADAR TARGET DATA PROCESSOR 13 60A-A503
RADAR TRANSMITTER 14 60TRA504
7
Ñ REAR AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER GRIP ASSEMBLY 35 52A-L504
2
Ñ REAR CENTER DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 34 80A-L016
2
Ñ REAR LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 32 80A-K019
8
Ñ REAR LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 38 80A-K019
7
Ñ REAR LEFT THROTTLE GRIP 36 52A-K301
2
Ñ REAR RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 33 80A-L017
8
Ñ REAR RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 39 80A-L017
7
Ñ REAR RIGHT THROTTLE GRIP 37 52A-K302
RIGHT AIM-7 FUSELAGE ANTENNA 47 60E-T014
RIGHT AIM-7 WING ANTENNA 48 60E-V016
RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR 24 80A-J002
9
Ñ RIGHT HAND CONTROLLER 40 52A-L315
RIGHT THROTTLE GRIP 27 52A-H048
SERVO ELECTRONICS GIMBAL ASSEMBLY 10 60A-A511
SNSR POD CONTROL BOX PANEL ASSEMBLY 31 52A-J080
4
Ñ TELEVISION CAMERA MK-10403 22 79A-J022
10
Ñ TELEVISION CAMERA MK-10987 22 79A-J022
TRANSMITTER TO ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE ASSEMBLY 16 60W-A520
TRANSMITTER TO FLOOD ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE
ASSEMBLY 17 60W-A518
TRANSMITTER TO RECEIVER-EXCITER WAVEGUIDE
ASSEMBLY 15 60W-A522

Figure 1. Radar System Locator (Sheet 12)

A1-F18AC-742-100 005 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DESCRIPTION - RADAR SET COMPONENTS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Antenna ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
Computer-Power Supply............................................................................................................................ 2
Electrical Equipment Rack........................................................................................................................ 4
Electrical Equipment Rack Support ................................................................................................ 4
Flood Horn........................................................................................................................................... 4
Pantograph........................................................................................................................................... 4
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Pertinent Data............................................................................................................................................. 4
Pertinent Data, Table 1 ............................................................................................................................. 4
Radar Receiver-Exciter .............................................................................................................................. 3
Radar Target Data Processor .................................................................................................................... 3
Radar Transmitter ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. e. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65.

2. The Radar Set AN/APG-65 description in this f. Electrical Equipment Rack

WP includes the: MT-4955/APG-65.

a. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65 g. pertinent data.

(CPS).
3. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
b. Radar Target Data Processor
CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP). 4. The antenna, radar transmitter and R/E make
up the microwave part of the radar set. The RTDP
c. Radar Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65 and CPS make up the processing and low voltage
(R/E). power supply part of the radar set. The electrical
equipment rack provides the aircraft mechanical
d. Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65. interface for radar set components.
A1-F18AC-742-100
5. COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY.
6. The CPS is a stored program digital processor
and low voltage power supply. It provides:
a. radar management control
b. selected data processing
c. performance monitoring and measurement
d. with the exception of the RTDP, low
voltages required by the radar set.
7. The CPS is the input/output device for signal
handling and conditioning between the radar set
and the mission computer (MC) system. Data is
interchanged between the CPS and the MC by way
of a serial multiplex bus called the avionic mux
channel.
8. MC data received by the CPS is as listed:
a. mode commands
b. primary stabilization and navigation
information
c. backup stabilization and navigation
information
d. input validity
e. display pushbutton conditions
f. memory inspect command
g. built-in test (BIT) commands.
9. CPS data transmitted to the mission computer
system is as listed:
a. mode operating conditions
b. target information
c. output validity
d. display conditions
e. memory inspect reply
f. BIT conditions.
10. The CPS receives data from or transmits data
to the MC only when commanded by the MC.
005 00
Page 2
11. Display data is transmitted from the CPS to the
multipurpose display group indicators by way of
two serial multiplex buses; a clock bus and a data
bus. The CPS provides digital data to position,
shape, and control the intensity of the acquisition
symbol, antenna azimuth symbol, antenna elevation
symbol, and target symbol. Depending on modes
selected, the MC determines if the symbols are
displayed.
12. The CPS transmits to and receives data from
the antenna, radar transmitter, and R/E by way of
the radar multiplex subchannel (RMUX). The
RMUX subchannel is made up of three
bidirectional subchannels. RMUX operation is half
duplex, and over one subchannel (either antenna,
radar transmitter or R/E) at a time. The CPS
transmits to and receives data from the RTDP by
way of the RTDP subchannel. The RTDP
subchannel is made up of two sets of dedicated
unidirectional lines. These lines provide for all
communication.
13. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-130
THRU 3525681-145, the CPS has three program
overlays (A/A, A/G, and BIT) which it retrieves
from a pre-programmed disc memory depending on
the mode of operation commanded. This
information is processed and used to load the
memory of the RTDP, and to command the other
radar set components to the correct mode of
operation.
14. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-150
AND LATER CONFIGURATIONS, the CPS has
three program overlays (A/A, A/G, and BIT) which
it retrieves from an EEPROM depending on the
mode of operation commanded. This information is
processed and used to load the memory of the
RTDP, and commands other radar set components
to the correct mode of operation.
15. The low voltage power supply converts and
conditions aircraft power to the voltages required
by the transmitter, antenna, R/E, and internally by
the CPS.
16. The CPS, on receiving the correct commands
from the MC, controls the periodic and/or initiated
BIT functions of the radar set. The CPS sets the
fault indicators on the components, and supplies
the MC with BIT status information.
A1-F18AC-742-100
17. RADAR TARGET DATA PROCESSOR.
18. The RTDP is a high speed, software
programmed, digital processor. On receiving the
correct commands from the CPS, the RTDP
provides radar timing, mode control, and target
data interpretation functions.
19. The RTDP is software programmed by the CPS
for its individual modes of operation. It then
provides the R/E with:
a. automatic gain control (agc) commands.
b. phase shifter commands.
c. transmitter drive gates.
d. receiver blanking pulses.
e. transmitter gates.
f. analog-to-digital commands.
The R/E supplies digitized video to the RTDP. The
RTDP uses the digitized video to provide target
parameters to the CPS. The target parameters are
used for internal computations, display on the
multipurpose display group indicators, and
transmission to the MC.
20. During A/G mode, the RTDP supplies, by way
of a composite video line, video and raster symbols
to the multipurpose display group indicators. The
symbols positioned by the RTDP are:
a. range grid lines
b. azimuth grid lines
c. terrain avoidance arc
d. DBS patch and sector
e. tracked target symbol
f. stabilized cue
g. in-video cursor.
When not in A/G mode, the composite video is set
at a zero video level. Depending on modes selected,
the MC determines if composite video is displayed.
21. RADAR RECEIVER-EXCITER.
22. The R/E is a low level radio frequency (rf) drive
generator, a heterodyning receiver, and an
005 00
Page 3
analog-to-digital converter. On receiving the correct
commands from the RTDP, the R/E provides rf
channel selection and produces the modulated low
level rf drive for the transmitter gridded traveling
wave tube. The R/E also provides low noise
amplification of the received rf signal, heterodynes
the rf to an intermediate frequency (if) signal, then
converts the if signal to a digital signal for use by
the RTDP.
23. RADAR TRANSMITTER.
24. The radar transmitter is a high power rf
amplifier. It accepts the low level rf drive from the
R/E and amplifies it, using a gridded traveling wave
tube, to provide a high level pulse rf output. A
three port waveguide switch routes the rf to either a
dummy load, main antenna, or flood antenna. A
part of the amplified rf is coupled to the missile
auxiliary illumination set for use during AIM-7
operation.
25. ANTENNA.
26. The antenna is a high gain, low side lobe,
planar array driven by direct coupled electric
motors on a two axis gimbal assembly. It provides
the required rf radiation and reception abilities for
radar operation.
27. The rf part of the antenna contains a planar
array, guard horn, null horn, and other waveguide
components. The planar array, during transmit
time, is used to radiate the high power rf in a high
gain pencil beam with low side lobes, or a shaped
elevation (mapping) beam pattern, depending on
mode selection. The planar array, during receive
time, processes the received rf signal into a
main/guard signal during search operation, or a
sum/difference signal during track. The guard horn
is used to suppress signals received in the array side
lobes. The null horn is used to fill the null between
side lobes of the pencil beam for AIM-7
illumination.
28. The drive part of the antenna is controlled by
the servo electronics which positions, stabilizes, and
electronically drives the azimuth and elevation
gimbals. Commands received from the CPS are
decoded and converted to drive signals which
position the antenna.
A1-F18AC-742-100 005 00
Page 4

29. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK.
30. The electrical equipment rack is the mounting
base for the radar components. It provides physical
support, electrical wiring, coolant lines, and
waveguides. It provides cooling air to the
components, and isolates the components from
aircraft vibrations.
31. PANTOGRAPH. The pantograph is part of the
electrical equipment rack. The pantograph provides
the electrical connection between the radar set
components and aircraft wiring. It contains the
liquid coolant lines and air pressure line used by
the transmitter and waveguides.
32. FLOOD HORN. The flood horn is part of the
electrical equipment rack. It provides backup
illumination for the AIM-7 missile if the radar is
not tracking when the missile is launched.
33. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK SUPPORT.
The electrical equipment rack support provides
radar set mechanical connection with the aircraft.
This assembly allows the radar set to be extended
from the aircraft nose for maintenance. It also
provides protection from gun barrel high
temperature and gases.
34. PERTINENT DATA.
35. See table 1 for description of radar system
pertinent data.

Table 1. Pertinent Data

Data Description

Service requirements

power 115vac, 400Hz, 3-phase 8300VA

28vdc, 20A max

cooling air Varies with temperature 6.0 lb/min standard condition

liquid coolant 3.4 gallons per minute at 135° F

pressurization Nominal 17 psia, 50 cubic in/min max

Physical Five replaceable components mounted on a retractable electrical equipment

rack in the forward fuselage.

Shock mounted

Emi protection

Electrical, liquid coolant, and pressurization lines aircraft interconnect by way

of rear bulkhead pantograph; cooling air by way of telescoping duct to rear
bulkhead.

Weight 455 lbs approx

Signal interface

X-band rf Radome

AIM-7 rear illumination

A1-F18AC-742-100 005 00
Page 5

Table 1. Pertinent Data (Continued)

Data Description

digital Avionic mux bus

TTL differential Display data and clock

Mission computer system equipment ready.

Receiver blanking pulse

AIM-7 launch initiate

coaxial/triaxial 1
Ñ Radar system blanking pulse

Composite video

Switched 28 volts Radar on select

Radar operate select

Radar emergency select

Weight on wheels interlock

Switched gnd discretes Aircraft controller grip assembly auto acq commands

Operate switch monitor

Map gain control

Prf mode to blanker

Characteristics X-band transmitter, low to high power.

Medium, high, or interleaved prf

Manual or automatic rf channel selection

Dual channel receiver

Velocity, range, and angle tracking

Manual or automatic target acquisition

Periodic and initiated BIT, and Operational Readiness Test (ORT)

Software programmed digital signal processing

20, 40, 60, 80, and 140° azimuth scan in A/A aircraft master mode

20, 45, 90, and 120° azimuth scan in A/G aircraft master mode
A1-F18AC-742-100 005 00
Page 6

Table 1. Pertinent Data (Continued)

Data Description

Minus 60 to plus 60° positionable elevation scan

1, 2, 4, and 6 elevation bar scan

5, 10, 20, 40, 80, and 160 nmi range scales

Modes of operation

A/A Velocity search (VS)

Range while search (RWS)

3
Ñ Vector scan range while search (VSRWS) (RWS submode)

3
Ñ Vector 1 range while search (VEC1) (RWS submode)

3
Ñ Vector 2 range while search (VEC2) (RWS submode)

Track while scan (TWS)

Scan RAID

Air combat maneuvering (ACM)

Single target track (STT)

Raid assessment (RAID)

3
Ñ Situation awareness mode (SAM)

3
Ñ One-look RAID

Special short range track (gunsight director mode)

A/G Real-beam ground map (MAP)

3
Ñ Real-beam navigation map (NAVMP)

Ground moving target (GMT)

Sea surface search (SEA)

Ground moving target/ Real-beam ground map interleaved (GMT/MAP)

2
Ñ Sea surface search/Real-beam ground map interleaved (SEA/MAP)

Doppler-beam-sharpened sector (EXP 1)

Doppler-beam-sharpened patch (EXP 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 005 00
Page 7/(8 blank)

Table 1. Pertinent Data (Continued)

Data Description

2
Ñ Doppler-beam-sharpened synthetic aperture radar (EXP 3)

A/G ranging (AGR)

Ground moving target track (GMTT)

Fixed target track (FTT)

Precision velocity update (PVU)

Terrain avoidance (TA)

LEGEND

1
Ñ 161353 THRU 161528; ALSO 161702 THRU 163175 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 50.
2
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
3
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DESCRIPTION - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly ........................................................................................................... 2

Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly, Table 1............................................................................................ 2
Aircraft Maintenance Indicator ID-2388/ASQ-194 - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D .................................. 14
Aircraft Maintenance Indicator ID-2388/ASQ-194 - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D, Table 9................... 14
Digital Display Indicator ID-2150/ASM-612 - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B............................................. 13
Digital Display Indicator ID-2150/ASM-612 - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B, Table 8 ............................. 13
Emergency Brake/Parking Brake ............................................................................................................. 16
GND PWR Control Panel Assembly........................................................................................................ 9
GND PWR Control Panel Assembly, Table 4 ........................................................................................ 9
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Left Digital Display Indicator .................................................................................................................. 15
Left Throttle Grip....................................................................................................................................... 6
LOCK/SHOOT Light Assembly ............................................................................................................... 11
LOCK/SHOOT Light Assembly, Table 6................................................................................................ 11
Map Gain Control Panel Assembly .......................................................................................................... 16
Master Arm Control Panel Assembly ...................................................................................................... 10
Master Arm Control Panel Assembly, Table 5....................................................................................... 11
Rear Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO
163986 AND UP TRAINER CONFIGURATION ............................................................................ 2
Rear Center Digital Display Indicator - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778 ....................... 16
Rear Left Digital Display Indicator ........................................................................................................ 15
Rear Left Throttle Grip - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO 163986 AND UP
TRAINER CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................... 6
Rear Right Digital Display Indicator ....................................................................................................... 16
Rear Right Throttle Grip - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778, ALSO 163986 AND UP
TRAINER CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................... 6
Right Digital Display Indicator ............................................................................................................... 16
Right/Left Hand Controller - F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK
CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................................ 6
Right/Left Hand Controller - F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK
CONFIGURATION, Table 3 ................................................................................................................ 7
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 2

Alphabetical Index (Continued)

Subject Page No.

Right Throttle Grip .................................................................................................................................... 6

Right Throttle Grip, Table 2..................................................................................................................... 6
SNSR Pod Control Box Panel Assembly ................................................................................................ 12
SNSR Pod Control Box Panel Assembly, Table 7................................................................................. 12

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

Type/ Num-
Date Title and ECP No. Date Incorp. Remarks
ber

F/A-18 AFC 2 May 89 Incorporation of Video Recording Set (ECP- 1 Apr 87 -

54 MDA-F/A-18-00027)

1. INTRODUCTION. to air (A/A) weapon type during a hands on throttle

and stick (HOTAS) tactical maneuver. See table 1
2. The descriptions in this WP includes the controls for description of the radar related switches
and indicators that control or indicate radar system contained on the aircraft controller grip assembly.
operation.
6. REAR AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER GRIP
3. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator. ASSEMBLY - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434
THRU 163778, ALSO 163986 AND UP
4.AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER GRIP TRAINER CONFIGURATION.
ASSEMBLY.
7. The rear aircraft controller grip assembly is in
5. The aircraft controller grip assembly provides the rear cockpit. Refer to AIRCRAFT
the ability to select radar modes, displays, and air CONTROLLER GRIP ASSEMBLY, this WP.

Table 1. Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly

Control/Indicator Function

1. Sensor control switch - DIGITAL DATA Four position, center off switch which selects auto
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP acquisition mode or HOTAS priority.

a. Fwd In air to ground (A/G) and navigation (NAV)

aircraft master mode, assigns throttle designator
control (TDC) priority to Head-Up Display (HUD);
in A/A aircraft master mode, puts radar in
boresight.

b. Aft On 161353 THRU 163872, in A/G and NAV aircraft

master mode, assigns TDC priority to Horizontal
Indicator IP-1350/A (HI). On 163985 AND UP, in
A/G and NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC
priority to Multipurpose Color Display (MPCD). In
A/A aircraft master mode, puts radar in vertical
acquisition (VACQ).
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 3

Table 1. Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

c. Right Ñ 1 In A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC

priority to the RDDI. If TDC priority is already
assigned to the RDDI and RDDI is radar display,
commands breaklock (not undesignate).

In NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority

to the RDDI. If TDC priority already assigned to
the RDDI and RDDI is radar display, commands
long range automatic acquisition (AACQ) or fast
acquisition (FACQ) to the radar system.

In A/A aircraft master mode, commands AACQ or

FACQ to the radar system.

d. Left Ñ 1 In A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC

priority to the LDDI. If TDC priority is already
assigned to the LDDI and LDDI is radar display,
commands radar to track. If radar tracking,
commands breaklock (not undesignate).

In NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority

to the LDDI.

In A/A aircraft master mode, commands wide

acquisition (WACQ) to radar system.

2. Sensor control switch - DIGITAL DATA Four position, center off switch which selects auto
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP acquisition mode or assigns TDC priority.

a. Fwd In A/G and NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC

priority to HUD.

In A/A aircraft master mode, commands radar to

boresight (BST) and causes the sensor control
switch to be air combat maneuvering (ACM) mode
configured.

b. Aft - not ACM mode configured (see fwd)
Assigns TDC priority to Multipurpose Color Display
(MPCD). If the current MPCD display can not take
TDC priority then the HSI/data display replaces
the current MPCD display and TDC priority is
assigned to the HSI/data display.

c. Aft - ACM mode configured (see fwd) Commands the radar system to vertical acquisition
(VACQ).
A1-F18AC-742-100
Table 1. Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly (Continued)
Control/Indicator
d Right - not ACM mode configured (see fwd)
e. Right - ACM mode configured (see fwd)
f. Left - not ACM mode configured (see fwd)
g. Left - ACM mode configured (see fwd)
3. Air to air weapon select switch - F/A-18A AND
F/A-18B
006 00
Page 4
Function
In A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority
to the RDDI. If the current RDDI display can not
take TDC priority then the radar attack display
replaces the current RDDI display and TDC
priority is assigned to the radar attack display. If
the radar attack display is already displayed on
another DDI it is replaced by a tactical MENU
display. If TDC priority is already assigned to the
RDDI and RDDI has a radar attack display,
commands breaklock (not undesignate).
In A/A or NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC
priority to the RDDI. If the current RDDI display
can not take TDC priority then the radar attack
display replaces the current RDDI display and TDC
priority is assigned to the radar attack display. If
the radar attack display is already displayed on
another DDI it is replaced by a tactical MENU
display. If TDC priority already assigned to the
RDDI and RDDI has a radar attack display,
commands long range automatic acquisition (AACQ)
or fast acquisition (FACQ) to the radar system.
Commands the radar system to AACQ or FACQ.
In A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority
to the LDDI. If TDC priority is already assigned to
the LDDI and LDDI is radar display, commands
radar to track. If radar tracking, commands
breaklock (not undesignate).
In A/A aircraft master mode, selects
azimuth/elevation display and assigns TDC priority
to the azimuth/elevation display when TDC is not
currently assigned to LDDI and current LDDI
display can not take TDC priority. If
azimuth/elevation display was already displayed on
another DDI it is replaced with a tactical MENU
display. Assigns TDC priority to the LDDI when
current LDDI display can take TDC priority.
In NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority
to the LDDI.
Commands the radar system to wide acquisition
(WACQ).
On F/A-18A, a three position switch which selects
A/A weapon and commands A/A master mode.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 5

Table 1. Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

On F/A-18B, a three position switch which selects

A/A weapon when A/A master mode is the
operating mode.

a. Sparrow (fwd) Ñ 1 Activates AIM-7 function, starts launch

preparation and displays the priority missile.
Commands a radar antenna four bar elevation, 140°
azimuth scan with 40 mile range selection and
interleaved prf.

b. Sidewinder (center pressed down) Activates AIM-9 function, starts launch preparation
and displays the priority missile. Commands a radar
antenna four bar elevation, 90° azimuth scan with
40 mile range selection and interleaved prf.

c. Gun (aft) Ñ 1 Activates gun function, starts gun firing

preparations and displays gun. Commands GACQ to
the radar system, a range of 5nmi, radar antenna
azimuth scan of five bars, with 20° elevation scan
(vertical scan pattern).

4. Air to air weapon select switch - F/A-18C AND On F/A-18C, a four position switch which selects
F/A-18D A/A weapon and commands A/A master mode.

On F/A-18D, a four position switch which selects

A/A weapon when A/A master mode is the
operating mode.

a. Sparrow (fwd) Activates AIM-7 function, starts launch preparation,

and displays the priority missile. Commands a radar
antenna four bar elevation, 140° azimuth scan, 40
mile range selection, and interleaved prf.

b. Sidewinder (center pressed down) Activates AIM-9 function, starts launch preparation,
and displays the priority missile. Commands a radar
antenna four bar elevation, 90° azimuth scan, 40
mile range selection, and interleaved prf.

c. Gun (aft) Activates gun function, starts gun firing

preparations, and displays gun. Commands GACQ
to the radar system, a range of 5nmi, radar antenna
azimuth scan of five bars, with 20° elevation scan
(vertical scan).Ñ 2 Configures sensor control
switch to the ACM condition.

d. AMRAAM (right) Activates AIM-120 function, starts launch

preparation, and displays priority missile.
Commands a radar antenna four bar elevation, 140°
azimuth scan, 40 mile range selection, and
interleaved prf.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 6

Table 1. Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

5. Undesignate/nose wheel steer switch Ñ 2 Dual function momentary pushbutton

switch. With weight on wheels, actuates nose wheel
steering. With weight off wheels, commands radar
return to search and undesignates targets in all
radar modes except track while scan (TWS). In
TWS, steps launch and steering target to next lower
priority target.

LEGEND:

1
Ñ COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT NO. 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
2
Ñ COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT NO. 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

8.REAR RIGHT THROTTLE GRIP - 14. RIGHT THROTTLE GRIP.

F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778,
ALSO 163986 AND UP TRAINER
CONFIGURATION.
9. The rear right throttle grip is in the rear cockpit.
Refer to RIGHT THROTTLE GRIP, this WP.
10. LEFT THROTTLE GRIP.
11. The left throttle grip has the HARM target
sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID switch. The switch may
be used to select the RAID mode when the radar
set operating mode is track while scan or single
target track.
12. REAR LEFT THROTTLE GRIP -
F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778,
ALSO 163986 AND UP TRAINER
CONFIGURATION.
15. The right throttle grip provides the ability to
select radar modes, designate and lock on targets,
and control antenna elevation during a HOTAS
tactical maneuver. See table 2 for the description of
the radar related controls contained on the throttle
grip.
16. RIGHT/LEFT HAND CONTROLLER -
F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK
CONFIGURATION.
17. The right/left hand controller provides the
ability to select radar modes, designate and lock on
targets, and control antenna elevation during a
HOTAS tactical maneuver. See table 3 for the
description of the radar related controls contained
on the right/left hand controller .

13. The rear left throttle grip is in the rear cockpit.

Refer to LEFT THROTTLE GRIP, this WP.

Table 2. Right Throttle Grip

Control/Indicator Function

1. Throttle designator control Force control type momentary switch which can be
set in any direction. Provides x and y outputs for
sensor control and target designation ability.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 7

Table 2. Right Throttle Grip (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

a. Not pressed, with left or right force applied Positions acquisition symbol left or right at rate
proportional to pressure applied to control.

b. Not pressed with up or down force applied Positions acquisition symbol up or down at rate pro-
portional to pressure applied to control.

c. Pressed Starts acquisition phase. Positions acquisition sym-

bol or designator cursors depending on direction of
force applied to control.

d. Released (cursor in tactical area of display) Commands radar lockon, target designation, or ac-
tive processing depending on mode of operation.

e. Released (cursor in border area) Commands mode or option selection.

2. Cage/uncage switch In A/A mode with Sparrow missile selected, com-

mands radar into STT on the L and S target.

3. Radar elevation control Spring loaded potentiometer which controls antenna

elevation.

a. Up Positions radar antenna up at a rate proportional to

position of control.

b. Neutral Supplies a zero elevation rate command to radar

antenna.

c. Down Positions antenna down at a rate proportional to

position of control.

Table 3. Right/Left Hand Controller - F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK

CONFIGURATION
Control/Indicator Function

1. Sensor control switch - right hand controller Four position, center off switch which selects
throttle designator controller (TDC) priority.

a. Fwd No function.

b. Aft No function.

c. Right In A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority

to the RDDI. If TDC priority is already assigned to
the RDDI and RDDI is radar attack display, com-
mands track (FTT or GMTT) or breaklock (not un-
designate).
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 8

Table 3. Right/Left Hand Controller - F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK

CONFIGURATION (Continued)
Control/Indicator Function

In A/A or NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC

priority to the RDDI. If TDC priority already as-
signed to the RDDI and RDDI is radar attack dis-
play, commands long range automatic acquisition
(AACQ) or fast acquisition (FACQ) to the radar sys-
tem.

d. Left Assigns TDC priority to the Rear Multipurpose

Color Display IP-1556/A.

2. Sensor control switch - left hand controller Four position, center off switch which selects
TDC priority.

a. Fwd No function

b. Aft No function

c. Right Assigns TDC priority to the Rear Multipurpose

Color Display IP-1556/A.

d. Left In A/A or A/G aircraft master mode, assigns TDC

priority to the LDDI. If TDC priority is already as-
signed to the LDDI and LDDI is radar display,
commands radar to track. If radar tracking, com-
mands breaklock (not undesignate).

In NAV aircraft master mode, assigns TDC priority

to the LDDI.

3. Undesignate switch Momentary pushbutton switch. Commands radar

return to search and undesignates targets in all ra-
dar modes except track while scan (TWS). In TWS,
steps launch range and steering target to next lower
priority target.

4. Throttle designator controller Force control type momentary switch which can be
set in any direction. Provides x and y outputs for
sensor control and target designation ability.

a. Not pressed, with left or right force applied Positions acquisition symbol left or right at rate
proportional to pressure applied to control.

b. Not pressed with up or down force applied Positions acquisition symbol up or down at rate pro-
portional to pressure applied to control.

c. Pressed Start acquisition phase. Positions acquisition symbol

or designator cursors depending on direction of
force applied to control.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 9

Table 3. Right/Left Hand Controller - F/A-18D 163986 AND UP NIGHT ATTACK

CONFIGURATION (Continued)
Control/Indicator Function

d. Released (cursor in tactical area of display) Commands radar lockon, target designation, or ac-
tive processing depending on mode of operation.

e. Released (cursor in border area) Commands mode or option selection (HOTAS).

5. Radar elevation control Spring loaded potentiometer which controls antenna

elevation.

a. Up Positions radar antenna up at a rate proportional to

position of control.

b. Neutral Supplies a zero elevation rate command to radar

antenna.

c. Down Positions antenna down at a rate proportional to

position of control.

6. HARM sequence-cage/uncage-RAID/FOV switch Pressing switch down selects the RAID mode when
the radar set operating mode is track while scan or
single target track.

GND PWR CONTROL PANEL

18. systems. See table 4 for description of switches
ASSEMBLY. contained on GND PWR control panel assembly.

19. The GND PWR control panel assembly is used

to apply ground power to the various avionic

Table 4. GND PWR Control Panel Assembly

Control/Indicator Function

1. 1 switch Three position toggle switch with holding contacts

in the ON position. Applies ground power to avionic
systems.

a. A ON On F/A-18A AND F/A-18B, applies ground power

to digital data computer no. 1, LDDI and Signal
Data Recording Set AN/ASM-612. Automatically
resets to AUTO when ground power is removed.

On F/A-18C AND F/A-18D, applies ground power

to digital data computer no. 1, LDDI and Signal
Data Computer CP-1726/ASQ-194. Automatically
resets to AUTO when ground power is removed.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 10

Table 4. GND PWR Control Panel Assembly (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

b. B ON Applies ground power to digital data computer no.

2, and all avionic systems energized by A ON. Auto-
matically resets to AUTO when ground power is re-
moved.

c. AUTO Inflight normal operating position.

2. 2 switch Three position toggle switch with holding contacts

in the ON position. Applies ground power to avionic
systems.

a. A ON Applies ground power to radar set, RDDI, HUD,

INS, and HI Automatically resets to AUTO when
ground power is removed.

b. B ON Applies ground power to various avionic systems

and all avionic systems energized by A ON. If re-
quired, refer to Electrical System A1-F18AC-420-
100, WP005 00 for other systems energized. Auto-
matically resets to AUTO when ground power is
removed.

c. AUTO Inflight normal operating position.

3. 3 switch Three position toggle switch with holding contacts

in the ON position. Applies ground power to avionic
systems.

a. A ON If required, refer to Electrical System, A1-F18AC-

420-100, WP005 00 for systems energized.

b. B ON Enables power to SMS, forward looking infrared

system, and laser detector tracker/strike camera sys-
tem. Automatically resets to AUTO when ground
power is removed.

c. AUTO Inflight normal operating position.

MASTER ARM CONTROL PANEL

20.
ASSEMBLY.
21. The master arm control panel assembly selects
and indicates the master modes of operation. These
are A/A, A/G, and navigation modes. If A/A or A/G
mode is not selected, the aircraft operates in the
navigation mode. See table 5 for description of
switches and indicators contained on master arm
control panel assembly.
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 11

Table 5. Master Arm Control Panel Assembly

Control/Indicator Function

1. A/A switch Momentary pushbutton light/switch which selects

and indicates A/A master mode.

a. Lit Indicates A/A master mode is selected. Is lit by

pressing and releasing A/A switch or by selecting
A/A weapon using A/A weapon select switch on the
aircraft controller grip assembly.

b. Pressed and released when lit Turns off A/A switch, deselects A/A master mode,
and selects navigation master mode.

c. Pressed and released when not lit Lights A/A switch. If A/G switch is lit, deselects
A/G master mode, selects A/A master mode, and
turns off A/G switch. If A/G switch is not lit, dese-
lects navigation mode and selects A/A master mode.

2. A/G switch Momentary pushbutton light/switch which selects

and indicates A/G master mode.

a. Lit Indicates A/G master mode is selected. Is lit by

pressing and releasing A/G switch.

b. Pressed and released when lit Turns off A/G switch, deselects A/G master mode,
and selects navigation master mode.

c. Pressed and released when not lit Lights A/G switch. If A/A switch is lit, deselects
A/A master mode, selects A/G master mode, and
turns off A/A switch. If A/A switch is not lit, dese-
lects navigation mode and selects A/G master mode.

3. A/A and A/G switch not lit
Indicates navigation master mode is selected. Navi-
gation mode is commanded if A/A or A/G master
modes are not selected. Radar A/A and A/G modes
of operation can be selected in the navigation mas-
ter mode.

22. LOCK/SHOOT LIGHT ASSEMBLY. aircraft location in relation to selected A/A weapon
envelope. See table 6 for a description of indicators
23. The LOCK/SHOOT light assembly supplies a contained on LOCK/SHOOT light assembly.
head-up indication of radar lockon condition and

Table 6. LOCK/SHOOT Light Assembly

Control/Indicator Function

1. LOCK light When lit, indicates radar is tracking an A/A target.

A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 12

Table 6. LOCK/SHOOT Light Assembly (Continued)

Control/Indicator Function

2. SHOOT light An incandescent light used during day or night op-

eration. When lit, (steady or flashing) indicates
launch criteria is satisfied for weapon delivery.

3. Strobe light An xenon discharge light used during day operation.

When flashing, indicates launch criteria is satisfied
for weapon delivery.

SNSR POD CONTROL BOX PANEL

24.
ASSEMBLY.
25. The SNSR pod control box panel assembly
(SNSR panel) controls the power condition of the
radar set and the inertial navigation system. See
Table 7 for description of switches contained on
SNSR panel.

Table 7. SNSR Pod Control Box Panel Assembly

Control/Indicator Function

1. RADAR switch Four position rotary switch which controls all oper-
ating power applied to radar set.

a. OFF Removes all radar set power.

b. STBY Activates all components except for high voltage.

Allows radar set to warmup before application of
high voltage, or, removes high voltage but maintains
radar for immediate application of high voltage.

c. OPR Commands radar to full operation if all safety inter-

locks have been satisfied and initial warmup time is
complete.

d. EMERG With weight off wheels, bypasses temperature and

pressure interlocks and allows full radar operation.
With weight on wheels, EMERG is disabled.

2. INS switch Eight position rotary switch which controls INS op-
erating power.

a. TEST Provides discrete bit to radar set for use during ini-
tiated built-in test.

b. IFA Commands radar mode to Precision Velocity Up-

date (PVU).
A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 13

26.DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR switches and indicators contained on digital display

ID-2150/ASM-612 - F/A-18A AND indicator.
F/A-18B.

27. The digital display indicator displays

maintenance codes. See table 8 for description of

Table 8. Digital Display Indicator ID-2150/ASM-612 - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B

Control/Indicator Function

1. MAINTENANCE CODE DISPLAY switch Pushbutton switch. Enables MAINTENANCE

CODE display. One maintenance code is displayed
each time switch is pressed. If pressed and held,
displays one maintenance code per second.

2. DDI BIT/RESET switch Guarded pushbutton switch. Starts built-in test

(BIT) and resets (clears) all stored maintenance
codes if BIT is satisfactorily completed.

3. MAINTENANCE CODE display 3-digit light-emitting diode display. Displays stored

three digit maintenance codes when
MAINTENANCE CODE DISPLAY switch is
pressed. Radar set maintenance codes are:

010 - Computer-Power Supply

CP-1325/APG-65 terminal fail

040 - Radar Target Data Processor

CP-1326/APG-65 fail

041 - Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65

fail

042 - Radar Receiver-Exciter

R-2089/APG-65 fail

043 - Computer power supply fail

044 - Antenna AS-3254/APG-65 fail

045 - Antenna servo electronics fail

046 - Transmitter coolant flow low

047 - Waveguide pressure low

048 - WOW/Inflight disagree

052 - Do initiated built-in test

068 - Launch initiate fail

A1-F18AC-742-100 006 00
Page 14

Table 8. Digital Display Indicator ID-2150/ASM-612 - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B

(Continued)
Control/Indicator Function

069 - EMERG Selected on SNSR panel

4. DDI FAIL indicator Latch type fault indicator. Sets to fault (black and
white) when failure is detected in digital display
indicator.

5. WPN SYS FAIL indicator Latch type fault indicator. Sets to fault (black and
white) when weapon systems fail data is stored in
digital display indicator.

6. FLUIDS CHECK switch Pushbutton switch. Starts fluids level test of

consumable fluids.

7. FLUIDS LOW indicator Latch type fault indicator. Sets to fault (black and
white) to indicate fluids level test completion and to
verify FLUIDS CHECK functioned correctly.

28.AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INDICATOR switches and indicators contained on aircraft

ID-2388/ASQ-194 - F/A-18C AND maintenance indicator.
F/A-18D.

29. The aircraft maintenance indicator displays

maintenance codes. See table 9 for description of

Table 9. Aircraft Maintenance Indicator ID-2388/ASQ-194 - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D

Control/Indicator Function

1. MAINTENANCE CODE DISPLAY switch Pushbutton switch. Enables MAINTENANCE

CODE display. One maintenance code is displayed
each time switch is pressed. If pressed and held,
displays one maintenance code per second.

2. AMI BIT/RESET switch Guarded pushbutton switch. Starts built-in test

(BIT) and resets (clears) all stored maintenance
codes if BIT is satisfactorily completed.

3. MAINTENANCE CODE display 3-digit light-emitting diode display. Displays stored

three digit maintenance codes when
MAINTENANCE CODE DISPLAY switch is
pressed. Radar set maintenance codes are:

010 - Computer-Power Supply

CP-1325/APG-65 terminal fail

040 - Radar Target Data Processor

CP-1326/APG-65 fail
A1-F18AC-742-100
Table 9. Aircraft Maintenance Indicator ID-2388/ASQ-194 - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D
(Continued)
Control/Indicator
4. CONSUMABLES CHECK switch
30. LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR.
31. The left digital display indicator (LDDI) is the
primary indicator used for the display of stores
management system displays and cautions, and
advisory information. It contains the required
switches, and provides the displays for the selection
of radar initiated BIT. If a detailed description of
controls and indicators is required, refer to mode
selection and video displays (WP011 00).
32. If a failure is detected by periodic BIT during
radar operation, a BIT advisory is displayed on the
LDDI. This advisory indicates that the radar set is
not completely functional and radar operation may
be degraded.
33. A BIT control panel is displayed on the LDDI
when the BIT pushbutton is pressed. A radar status
006 00
Page 15
Function
041 - Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65
fail
042 - Radar Receiver-Exciter
R-2089/APG-65 fail
043 - Computer power supply fail
044 - Antenna AS-3254/APG-65 fail
045 - Antenna servo electronics fail
046 - Transmitter coolant flow low
047 - Waveguide pressure low
048 - WOW/Inflight disagree
052 - Do initiated built-in test
068 - Launch initiate fail
069 - EMERG selected on SNSR panel
389 - Indicates RTDP does not have
AMRAAM hardware installed
Pushbutton switch. Starts fluids level test of
consumable fluids.
message is displayed on the BIT control panel. This
message indicates if the radar set is not ready, in
test, degraded, overheated, in a no-go condition,
requesting a restart, or in go condition.
34. The left and right digital display indicators are
functionally interchangeable giving the ability to
display and control information on either indicator.
If both indicators are on, cautions and advisories
are displayed on the LDDI.
35. REAR LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY
INDICATOR.
36. The rear LDDI is in the rear cockpit on
F/A-18B AND F/A-18D aircraft. Operation,
controls, and indications, are the same as the LDDI.
On 161704 THRU 163778 ; ALSO 161354 THRU
161360 AFTER F/A-18 AFC 54, a HUD select
A1-F18AC-742-100
switch provides HUD symbology to be displayed if
selected. On 163986 AND UP, HUD symbology is
displayed by selecting the HUD pushbutton on the
DDI. Refer to LEFT DIGITAL DISPLAY
INDICATOR this WP.
37. RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY INDICATOR.
38. The right digital display indicator (RDDI) is
the primary indicator used for the display of radar
information. It contains the required switches to
select controls and display the various radar A/A
and A/G modes of operation. If a detailed
description of controls and indicators is required,
refer to mode selection and video displays
(WP011 00).
39. The radar displays on the RDDI are determined
by pushbutton switches on the indicator, HOTAS
selection using the TDC, and the aircraft master
mode. The pushbutton switches around the
periphery of the display are used to select radar
modes, channels, azimuth scans, elevation bar scans,
range scales, prf, and so on. The TDC is also used
to select these options by positioning the acquisition
symbol on the readout, then pressing and releasing.
The operating aircraft master mode determines if
A/A or A/G displays can be selected.
40. The LDDI and RDDI are functionally
interchangeable giving the ability to display and
control information on either indicator. Radar
displays can be on the LDDI, and BIT information
on the RDDI.
41.REAR RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY
INDICATOR.
42. The rear RDDI is in the rear cockpit on
F/A-18B AND F/A-18D aircraft. Operation,
006 00
Page 16
controls, and indications are the same as the RDDI.
Refer to RIGHT DIGITAL DISPLAY
INDICATOR, this WP.
43. REAR CENTER DIGITAL DISPLAY
INDICATOR - F/A-18B; F/A-18D 163434
THRU 163778.
44. The rear CDDI is in the rear cockpit of
F/A-18B AND F/A-18D aircraft. The rear CDDI
has the same cathode ray tube (crt) display as the
Horizontal Indicator IP-1350/A. However, the
moving map display is not available in the rear
cockpit. Pressing a pushbutton switch on either
indicator changes the display.
MAP GAIN CONTROL PANEL
45.
ASSEMBLY.
46. The map gain control panel assembly contains
the MAP GAIN switch. The MAP GAIN switch
supplies three digital discrete bits which control the
gain of the radar map display.
EMERGENCY BRAKE/PARKING
47.
BRAKE.
48. The parking brake is set during initiated
built-in test. When set, it provides a discrete bit to
the radar set, by way of the INS.
A1-F18AC-742-100 007 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DESCRIPTION - SYSTEM COMPONENTS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Block Diagram........................................................................................................... WP008 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
System Components ................................................................................................................................... 2
Aircraft Controller Grip Assembly ................................................................................................... 4
Armament Computer.......................................................................................................................... 7
Electrical Power .................................................................................................................................. 3
Emergency Brake/Parking Brake ..................................................................................................... 7
Environmental Control System......................................................................................................... 2
Flight Incident Recorder and Monitoring System (FIRAMS) - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D ....... 6
Interference Blanker........................................................................................................................... 3
Maintenance Status Display and Recording System (MSDRS) - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B .... 6
Map Gain Control Panel Assembly .................................................................................................. 3
Missile Auxiliaries Illumination Set ................................................................................................. 4
Mission Computer System................................................................................................................. 4
Multipurpose Display Group............................................................................................................. 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,

operation (WP014 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required refer to the work packages listed (3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
below: (WP016 00)

a. Sequence of operation:
(4) Target acquisition, operation
(1) Mode selection and video displays, (WP013 00)
operation (WP011 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100 007 00
Page 2

(5) A/A track displays, operation 5. This WP relates radar system operation with
(WP018 00) other assemblies and avionic systems. This includes:

(6) Head-up displays, operation a. environmental control system

(WP020 00).
b. electrical power
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
c. emergency brake/parking brake
c. Functional operation:
d. map gain control panel assembly
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00) e. interference blanker

(2) Transmitter drive, operation f. missile auxiliaries illumination set

(WP026 00)
g. mission computer system
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00) h. aircraft controller grip assembly

(4) Radar set receiving function, operation i. armament computer

(WP030 00)
j. multipurpose display group
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00) k. maintenance status display and recording
system - F/A-18A AND F/A-18B
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00) l. flight incident recorder and monitoring
system - F/A-18C AND F/A-18D.
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00) 6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.

(8) Cooling and pressurization function, 7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM.

operation (WP034 00) Environmental services include radar liquid coolant,
conditioned air, and pressurization.
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
8. Radar Liquid Coolant. Liquid coolant is
(10) Mode dependent signal processing, supplied to the radar transmitter. Transmitter
operation (WP036 00) subassemblies are flushed or conduction cooled.
Flush cooled subassemblies are the microwave
(11) Mode dependent data processing, processor, the high voltage power supply, and the
operation (WP038 00) gridded traveling wave tube (GTWT). Low voltage
modules are conduction cooled to a cold wall
(12) Radar set doppler, operation flushed with coolant.
(WP022 00)
9. Fault detection circuits in the radar transmitter
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation detect low coolant flow and GTWT
(WP041 00) overtemperature conditions. The radar liquid
coolant system detects and sets a fault latch for low
(14) Track while scan function, operation pressure, overtemperature, and dirty coolant system
(WP043 00). filter. The low coolant flow detect circuits are
inhibited from latching a fault for 51 seconds during
3. SYSTEM COMPONENTS. initial warm up.

4. Refer to WP008 00 for radar system block 10. Conditioned Air. The avionic cooling system
diagram. supplies conditioned air to a plenum chamber in the
A1-F18AC-742-100
electrical equipment rack. The plenum chamber
directs the flow of air to all radar set components
except the radar transmitter. Cooling air flows
through these components and is vented overboard.
11. Thermal interlocks in the receiver-exciter, radar
target data processor, computer-power supply, and
the antenna detect overtemperature conditions. Low
flow and air overtemperature conditions are
detected by the avionic cooling system.
12. Pressurization. Pressurized dry air is provided
to the radar set by the waveguide pressurization
system. Radar set components pressurized include
the radar transmitter, waveguides, and the transmit
channel of the antenna.
13. Fault detection circuits in the transmitter
detect low pressure.
14. ELECTRICAL POWER. Electrical power (28vdc
and 115vac 3-phase) is supplied to the radar set
power supplies by way of the no. 8 circuit
breaker/relay panel assembly.
15. Power On. Radar system power on sequence is
controlled by 28vdc switched discretes from the
SNSR pod control box panel assembly (SNSR
panel). The 28vdc source for these discretes is
supplied by the ground power relay or the weight
off wheels interlock.
16. The radar on signal exists when the RADAR
switch on the SNSR panel is set to STBY, OPR, or
EMERG. When first set to STBY, aircraft power
and liquid coolant is applied, and a 3-minute high
voltage interlock is enabled.
17. The interlock inhibits high voltage application
in OPR or EMERG until high voltage components
warm up, and the interlock is maintained when
made. During the 3-minute warmup, the radar set
executive program is loaded. If program loading is
satisfactory, the radar ready A and B lines go true.
Radar set Operational Readiness Test (ORT) is
done automatically during warmup.
18. Radar on signal is also applied to the armament
computer. The radar on signal tells the stores
management system to provide 3-phase power to all
AIM-7 missiles loaded on the aircraft.
19. Operate select signal exists when the RADAR
switch on the SNSR panel is set to OPR or
EMERG. This applies high voltages to the radar
007 00
Page 3
set, if the high voltage interlock is made. The
application of high voltage allows the radar
transmitter to operate. When the weight on wheels
signal exists (ground operation), radar transmission
is to a dummy load only.
20. Emergency select signal exists when the
RADAR switch on the SNSR panel is set to
EMERG. Emergency is used in a weight off wheels
condition to prevent radar set shutdown if
overtemperature occurs. Shutdown is inhibited for
30 seconds when the thermal sensor sets. During
this delay, the pilot is told on the multipurpose
display group of the overtemperature condition, and
can switch to EMERG to prevent shutdown; if not,
emergency operation is locked out.
21. The radar equipment ready A and B signal is
TTL differential (A-B) logic. The signal is true (2.5
to 5 volts) when the radar is initialized.
22. The radar is initialized when the radar set
executive program is loaded into operate mode
memory. When true (1), the signal informs the
mission computer system that valid radar data is
available. If the signal is false (0) the mission
computer system assumes the radar has not
initialized, or radar power is off.
23. MAP GAIN CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY. The
map gain control is an eight position rotary control,
continuously rotatable clockwise or
counterclockwise. The gain control provides three
ground switched discretes, binary encoded 000 to
111, representing 0 to 12 dB gain respectively.
24. Manual gain control is used in real beam
ground map (RBGM) and doppler beam sharpened
(DBS) air to ground (A/G) map modes. Initial gain
is provided automatically in RBGM and DBS. The
map gain control is used to optimize the display as
required.
25. INTERFERENCE BLANKER. The radar set
provides low blanking pulses, medium blanking
pulses, and pulse-repetition frequency (prf) mode
signals to the interference blanker. The blanking
pulses are used to blank the countermeasures set
(ALQ-126), countermeasures warning and control
system (ALR-67 system), and highspeed
anti-radiation missile (HARM) system.
26. On 161353 THRU 161528; ALSO 161702 THRU
163175 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 50, the blanking
pulse to the radar set blanks the radar
A1-F18AC-742-100
receiver-exciter when the radar beacon or
countermeasures set is transmitting. Blanking the
radar prevents interference that could degrade
radar system operation.
27. MISSILE AUXILIARIES ILLUMINATION SET.
The missile auxiliaries illumination set provides a
prelaunch radio frequency (RF) sample to the
AIM-7 missiles. The RF sample is a 5-second radar
transmitter frequency sample to tune the missile to
the frequency channel of the radar transmitter.
When tuned, the missile has the frequency
signature to provide radar antenna and missile rear
antenna lockup after launch. The illumination
antennas are also used for the AIM-120 for data
link tests.
28. MISSION COMPUTER SYSTEM. The mission
computer system has digital data computer no. 1,
digital data computer no. 2, and avionic mux buses.
The mission computer system provides radar system
control as listed below:
a. computes and controls data transfer with
the multipurpose display group
b. commands all input/output data on avionic
mux bus 1 and 2
c. provides mode selection control for the
hands on throttle and stick (HOTAS) controls,
master mode selection, and multipurpose display
group mode selection
d. controls periodic and initiated BIT
e. monitors radar set status and provides
cautions and BIT advisories to the multipurpose
display group.
29. Digital Data Computer No. 1 (MC1). Digital
data computer no. 1 is referred to as the navigation
computer. It provides processing for BIT, status
monitoring, and provides limited backup for digital
data computer no. 2. All navigation processing is
done by MC1 for use by the radar system.
30. Digital Data Computer No. 2 (MC2). Digital
data computer no. 2 is referred to as the weapon
delivery computer. It provides processing and
control/display management for air to air (A/A)
aircraft master mode, A/G aircraft master mode,
navigation aircraft master mode, and backup for
digital data computer no. 1.
007 00
Page 4
31. Avionic Mux Buses. For the avionic mux buses,
their locations and interfaces; ON F/A-18A AND B
see A1-F18AC-741-100, ON F/A-18C AND D see
A1-F18AE-741-100.
32. AIRCRAFT CONTROLLER GRIP ASSEMBLY.
WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) acquisition mode select is
provided by the sensor control switch on the
aircraft controller grip assembly. WITH DIGITAL
DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND
UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) acquisition mode select is
provided by the sensor control switch on the
aircraft controller grip assembly when it is
configured for air combat maneuvering (ACM)
modes by initially positioning it forward.
Acquisition mode selections are four switched
ground discretes used to set up the radar system for
the air combat maneuvering (ACM) modes. The
sensor control switch positions that command ACM
modes are listed below:
a. sensor control switch forward - boresight
mode
b. sensor control switch aft - vertical acquisition
mode
c. sensor control switch left - wide acquisition
mode
d. sensor control switch right - automatic
acquisition mode.
33. When one of the discrete selects is true
(ground), the radar set is commanded to the
selected mode. Acquisition mode select also goes to
the armament computer for use by the stores
management system. Digital data computer no. 2
commands displays for the selected acquisition
mode.
34. Launch Initiate. The launch initiate exists
when a tuned missile is selected, and the trigger is
pressed to the second detent. If the radar is in track
while scan, the radar switches to single target track
(STT) in pulse doppler illuminate (PDI). If the
radar is in search (range while search), a compatible
PDI waveform is radiated by the flood antenna.
35. Between the time the trigger is pressed and the
missile is launched, signals are provided as listed
below:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. The radar sends a rear signal RF to the
missile, and the missile starts rear signal search.
b. Missile parameters (range, head aim, true
airspeed) are stabilized and applied to the missile
by way of the stores management system.
36. MULTIPURPOSE DISPLAY GROUP.
Multipurpose display indicators normally used by
the radar system are listed below:
a. left digital display indicator (LDDI)
b. right digital display indicator (RDDI)
c. head-up display (HUD)
d. On F/A-18B AND F/A-18D, rear left digital
display indicator (rear LDDI)
e. On F/A-18B AND F/A-18D, rear right digital
display indicator (rear RDDI).
37. Twenty pushbutton switches on the LDDI and
RDDI select radar display, initiated BIT, and select
radar modes. The HOTAS controls can also be used
to select radar modes and displays.
38. The LDDI and RDDI display functions are
interchangeable; they can be displayed on either, if
requested. Except for the MENU, they cannot have
the same display at the same time.
39. Left Digital Display Indicator. The LDDI main
function is the display of stores management,
cautions, advisories, and initiated BIT. If failures
are detected during radar set periodic BIT, a BIT
advisory is displayed indicating that radar operation
may be degraded.
40. Initiated BIT is selected by pressing the BIT
pushbutton on the LDDI. This causes a BIT control
panel and pushbutton legends to be displayed.
Pressing RDR pushbutton switch initiates BIT. On
F/A-18A AND F/A-18B failures during initiated
BIT are recorded by the nose wheelwell DDI. On
F/A-18C AND F/A-18D, failures during initiated
BIT are recorded by the signal data computer.
41. Right Digital Display Indicator. The RDDI
main function is to provide radar displays and radar
mode selection. Selection of radar displays and
modes are described below:
a. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
007 00
Page 5
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) radar information is
displayed when RDR option is selected from the
tactical menu. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) radar information is
displayed when RDR ATTK option is selected from
the tactical menu.
b. Radar display when an aircraft master mode
selected by way of the master mode select panel
assembly. Display and parameters are set to best
levels for the selected weapon. Alternate weapons
and radar parameters can be selected.
c. Radar display when A/A weapon select
switch on the aircraft controller grip assembly is
used to select an A/A weapon. Radar display and
parameter are optimized for the selected weapon.
Alternate radar parameters can be selected.
d. Radar mode selections can be made by
pressing the required pushbutton switch identified
by calligraphic option displays on the indicator.
e. Radar mode selection can be made using the
calligraphic option display and the HOTAS
controls. To do this, the throttle designator control
(TDC) on the right throttle grip positions the
acquisition cursor (two vertical parallel lines) over
the calligraphic display for the required mode.
When the acquisition cursor is positioned, the TDC
is pressed down, then released.
42. Head-Up Display. During normal operation,
the HUD provides aircraft attitude, steering,
navigation, A/A, and A/G displays. The RDDI
produces the HUD symbology. The HUD uses radar
positioned symbols during head-up attack.
43. Rear Left Digital Display Indicator - F/A-18B
AND F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778. The rear
LDDI receives display symbology and video from
the forward LDDI. The information displayed is
identical to that of the forward indicator. Display
selection can be controlled from the rear LDDI by
pressing the selection pushbutton switches.
44. On F/A-18B 161354 AND UP AND F/A-18D
163434 THRU 163778, HUD symbology can be
displayed on the rear LDDI by selecting HUD on
the select display control panel. In the HUD
position, the rear LDDI HUD display is produced
by the RDDI, and is only rear LDDI display until
NORM is selected on the select display control
panel.
A1-F18AC-742-100
45. Rear Left Digital Display Indicator - F/A-18D
163986 AND UP. The rear LDDI receives display
symbology and video from the forward LDDI. The
information displayed is independent to that
displayed on the forward indicator. Display
selection can be controlled from the rear LDDI by
pressing the selection pushbutton switches.
46. Rear Right Digital Display Indicator - F/A-18B
AND F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778. The rear
RDDI receives display symbology and video from
the forward RDDI. The information displayed is
identical to that of the forward indicator. Display
selection can be controlled from the rear RDDI by
pressing the selection pushbutton switches.
47. Rear Right Digital Display Indicator - F/A-18D
163986 AND UP. The rear RDDI receives display
symbology and video from the forward RDDI. The
information displayed is independent to that
displayed on the forward indicator. Display
selection can be controlled from the rear RDDI by
pressing the selection pushbutton switches.
48. Display Timing and Data. Display timing and
data are the clock and data words used to display
calligraphics, and position radar display symbols
required for A/A and A/G modes.
49. Display data words are serial 16-bit digital
words. A minimum of three 16-bit words are
required for symbol display and positioning. The
first word is a control word indicating the number
of data words to follow. The first or odd data word
usually has the intensity code and X-position
(horizontal displacement), second or even data word
contains symbol type and Y-position (vertical
displacement). If more than one symbol is
displayed, more odd and even data word pairs are
required.
50. Digital transmission is limited to 269 words in
A/A search and 33 words in A/A track and A/G.
The display data and symbols are listed below:
a. A/A search has three symbols (acquisition
cursor, antenna elevation caret, and B-sweep) and
targets.
b. A/A track has acquisition cursor, B-sweep,
and track target symbols.
c. A/G has antenna elevation caret, acquisition
symbol, and computed antenna elevation symbol.
Track target symbol is used in track modes.
007 00
Page 6
51. Control and timing for digital display data uses
a 1MHz clock, and a vertical blank pulse to clock
data to the multipurpose display group. The total
digital data transmission is completed within a
symbol window. The 1MHz clock must be true and
data exists on line 200 nanoseconds before trailing
edge of clock for valid data. Digital data
transmission is synchronized with composite video
used in A/G modes.
52. Composite Video. Composite video provides
A/G video and in-video symbols. The video is 675
line TV with 512 active lines (60 frames/second).
The video frame is divided into 256 even line
sweeps and 256 odd line sweeps. The 163 inactive
lines are zero video level. Composite video is
synchronized with digital video to provide digital
symbols in A/G displays.
53. MAINTENANCE STATUS DISPLAY AND
RECORDING SYSTEM (MSDRS) - F/A-18A AND
F/A-18B. The MSDRS is made up of the signal
data converter, signal data recorder, and nose
wheelwell DDI. The MSDRS interface with the
radar set is by way of the mission computer system
on the avionic mux buses.
54. During periodic and initiated BIT, any
maintenance codes that occur are transferred by the
signal data recorder to the nose wheelwell DDI and
stored. The nose wheelwell DDI displays stored
maintenance codes when the maintenance code
display switch is pressed.
55. FLIGHT INCIDENT RECORDER AND
MONITORING SYSTEM (FIRAMS) - F/A-18C AND
F/A-18D. The FIRAMS is made up of the memory
unit, signal data computer, and aircraft
maintenance indicator nose wheelwell DDI. The
FIRAMS interface with the radar set is by way of
the mission computer system on the avionic mux
buses.
56. During periodic and initiated BIT, any
maintenance codes that occur are sent to the signal
data computer and stored. The maintenance codes
are sent to the nose wheelwell DDI for display when
the maintenance code display switch is pressed.
A1-F18AC-742-100
57. EMERGENCY BRAKE/PARKING BRAKE. The
parking brake must be set during initiated built-in
test. When set, it provides a discrete bit to the INS,
then by way of the mission computer system to the
radar set. The mission computer system also
supplies a parking brake discrete bit when all the
below conditions exist:
a. weight is on wheels
b. both engines are not running
c. INS is off
d. radar is in test.
If the parking brake discrete bit is not set, some
antenna motion sensitive tests done during initiated
built-in test are bypassed.
007 00
Page 7/(8 blank)
58. ARMAMENT COMPUTER. The armament
computer is a software programmable computer
that controls the functions of SMS components.
The armament computer interfaces with the MC by
way of avionic mux channel 1. The armament
computer sends the MC inventory data, aircraft
switching functions, and system BIT status. The
MC provides the multipurpose display group with
data for stores display. Data sent to the armament
computer provides weapon select, weapon
programming, and prelaunch data for selected
weapons.
A1-F18AC-742-100 008 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BLOCK DIAGRAM

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Description - System Components ......................................................................... WP007 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar System Block Diagram, Figure 1 .................................................................................................. 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

Type/ Date
Date Title and ECP No. Remarks
Number Incorp.

F/A-18 AFC - Automatic A/C Bus Isolation 1 Aug 95 -

48 (ECP MDA-F/A-18-00121 A1301)

F/A-18 AFC - Incorporation of EGI 1 Apr 99 -

231 (ECP MDA-F/A-18-521)

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This block diagram supports the radar system

components description principles of operation
(WP007 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 008 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Radar System Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 008 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Radar System Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 008 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Radar System Block Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 008 00
Page 5/(6 blank)

LEGEND
RADAR COOLANT PRESSURE LINE
RADAR COOLANT RETURN LINE

1
Ñ F/A-18B, F/A-18C 163985 AND UP, F/A-18D 163434 THRU 163778.
2
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18C 163434 THRU 163778.
3
Ñ 161702 AND UP.
4
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18B.
5
Ñ F/A-18C AND F/A-18D.
6
Ñ F/A-18D 163986 AND UP.
7
Ñ 162394 AND UP; ALSO 161353 THRU 161987 AFTER F/A-18 AFC 48.
8
Ñ 161353 THRU 161987 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 48.
9
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18B BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 231.
10
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18B AFTER F/A-18 AFC 231.

Figure 1. Radar System Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 009 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Block Diagram - Radar Set ..................................................................................... WP010 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Functional Operation.................................................................................................................................. 7
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Operation................................................................................................................................... 1
Antenna ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Computer-Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 2
Radar Receiver-Exciter ...................................................................................................................... 4
Radar Target Data Processor ............................................................................................................ 3
Radar Transmitter .............................................................................................................................. 6
Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................................................... 7

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. 5. RADAR SET OPERATION.

2. Radar system operation in this manual is divided 6. Radar Set AN/APG-65 operation includes
as listed below: operation of functional blocks or modules within the
radar set components listed below:
a. Radar set operation
a. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65
(CPS)
b. Sequence of operation
b. Radar Target Data Processor
c. Functional operation. CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP)

3. Refer to WP010 00 for radar system block c. Radar Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65

diagram. (R/E)

4. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator. d. Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65

A1-F18AC-742-100
e. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65.
7. COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY. The CPS is made
up of a low voltage power supply (lvps), data
processor, and the signal interface.
8. LVPS. When the radar on signal exists, the
28vdc and 115vac contacts apply operating power.
The 3-phase 115vac is rectified and regulated to 5.1
and plus and minus 11, 15, 20, and 30vdc for use
within the CPS and other radar set components.
Low voltages used internally are linear regulated to
required voltages, and are overvoltage and crowbar
protected. Low voltages to other radar set
components are used to produce their low voltages.
They are also linear regulated and protected.
9. The 115vac, phase A, and 28vdc radar is sent to
all radar set components at power on. The 115vac,
phase A is used by the total time indicators.
10. The lvps has a thermal sensor and 30-second
time delay circuit. If an internal overtemperature
condition exists, or a thermal cutoff discrete is
received from any component, the timer starts. If
the thermal cutoff clears within 30 seconds, the
timer resets. If not, a shutdown signal removes
operating power from the radar set.
11. When the timer starts, the mission computer
system commands an advisory to the multipurpose
display group. In a weight off wheels condition, the
pilot has 30 seconds to select EMERG on the SNSR
pod control box panel assembly to prevent radar set
shutdown.
12. Data Processor. The data processor part of the
CPS is a stored program digital processor.
Functional operation includes arithmetic and
control (A&C), input/output (i/o) control and
interface, and memory.
13. A&C provides the logic operation of the
computer instruction set. The A&C logic also
directs data interchange required for instruction
addressing, execution and sequence, and priority
interrupt processing.
14. The i/o control logic directs data interchange
between memory buffers and the i/o interface,
controls CPS power up state, and controls bulk
storage memory. The i/o interface is the device for
data interchange with the radar target data
processor, avionic mux bus 2, radar mux (R-mux)
buses, and i/o discretes.
009 00
Page 2
15. Data processor memories are A&C
microprogram, i/o controller microprogram, i/o
buffer, operating mode memory, scratch pad, and
bulk program storage (executive stored). The
microprogram memories are programmable read
only memory. I/O buffer memory is the source of
outputs and the destination for inputs to the data
processor. Operating mode and scratch pad
memories are committed to the instruction set and
A&C operations.
16. Signal Interface. The i/o interface is made up
of an arrangement of i/o subchannels: avionic mux,
discrete i/o muxes, R-mux, digital display mux, and
the RTDP interface mux. These subchannels
interface with components of the data processor by
way of the i/o bus. If interface with the radar
system is required, refer to radar system interface
WP007 00.
17. When the data processor is functioning as a bus
device, the avionic mux is independent from the
data processor. During this time, the mission
computer provides commands to the mux to control
data transfer. When the data transfer is established
in the i/o controller, transfers are interrupt driven.
18. When the mux requires the next word from the
bus, or has the next word from the bus, an interrupt
is sent to the i/o controller. If the interrupt is not
serviced within a specified time, the data is
destroyed. The i/o controller monitors the word
count and disables the mux when complete.
19. The discrete i/o muxes store various internal
and external discrete signals. These signals
represent various commands, mode control, and
radar set conditions. The discrete i/o task is under
control of the A&C logic by way of the i/o
controller. Function of the internal discretes are
described as listed below:
a. R-mux clocks. The R-mux clocks are 1MHz
clocks to control the flow of data on the R-mux
buses.
b. Transmit/receive commands. Enables
applicable radar set component to transmit or
receive on its R-mux bus.
c. RTDP clock and mode control. These signals
coordinate the digital data interchange between the
CPS and the RTDP.
d. 58.22MHz valid. Indicates radar set
58.22MHz synchronization is valid.
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. Display sync. Synchronization for the digital
display symbols produced in the RTDP.
f. RTDP power status. A discrete that indicates
lvps voltages produced in the radar processor are
valid.
g. Low/medium blanking pulse. A pulse to
blank transmitters in the electronic warfare systems
when radar set transmission could cause
interference.
20. The R-mux interfaces three serial half duplex
R-mux buses. These buses are the digital data
interchange between the CPS, R/E, radar
transmitter, and antenna. Only one R-mux bus
operates at a time. Digital data words on R-mux
buses are 16-bit serial.
21. The digital display mux provides digital display
data interface for the radar set and the
multipurpose display group. This mux is under
control of the A&C unit, and is interrupt driven.
22. Radar Target Data Processor Interface Mux.
The RTDP interface mux has two sets of
unidirectional lines committed to data transfer
between the CPS and the RTDP. The mux has a
digital transfer and direct memory address (DMA)
controller. The interface does the data
manipulation, and the DMA provides the timing
and control. The mux is controlled by the A&C
logic, but does not require the i/o controller for
servicing. The mux also controls the bulk storage
memory to RTDP memory transfer.
23. RADAR TARGET DATA PROCESSOR. The
RTDP is a software controlled programmable signal
processor. Main functional blocks are:
a. lvps
b. control interface unit
c. interface assembler
d. programmable signal processor
e. timing and control no. 1 (TC1)
f. timing and control no. 2 (TC2).
24. The main inputs to the RTDP are digitized
radar video from the R/E and command and
program data from the CPS. The main outputs are
009 00
Page 3
digital target data to the CPS and composite video
to the multipurpose display group. Also, the RTDP
provides timing and control for the other radar set
components.
25. The RTDP is software controlled by the CPS.
This control commands operating modes,
pulse-repetition frequency (prf), provides doppler
corrections, thresholds, and target or ground ranges.
RTDP outputs are described as listed below:
a. Air to air (A/A) mode outputs include target
hit/miss data, target range and frequency data, and
tracking discriminant data.
b. The air to ground (A/G) mode output is a
composite video (analog) in 512 line, 60-frame/sec
tv format supplied to the multipurpose display
group.
c. Timing and control outputs include
analog-to-digital (a/d) sampling, prf generation,
transmit/receiver keying, pulse compression, and
receiver gain controls.
26. LVPS. The lvps is similar to the CPS lvps in
form and function. Refer to COMPUTER-POWER
SUPPLY, this WP for lvps functional operation.
27. When radar processor on command is received
by the lvps, 115vac is applied to the power supply.
When the low voltages become correct, a radar
processor power status signal is sent to the CPS. If
the lvps overheats, a thermal cutoff signal is sent to
the CPS 30-second timer.
28. Control Interface Unit. The control interface
unit provides the primary control functions for the
radar processor. These functions include clock and
mode control, CPS/RTDP data interchange, D-bus,
I-bus, P-bus, and memory control. The function of
the buses is listed below:
a. D-bus provides A&C logic data to all of the
data memories.
b. I-bus provides control interface unit data,
bulk memory data, bulk memory data control to the
data memories, and program memory control.
c. P-bus provides control interface unit data to
the timing and control modules.
29. Interface Assembler. The interface assembler
produces composite video and symbols for the A/G
A1-F18AC-742-100
mode. Coarse automatic gain control (CAGC) and
digital automatic gain control (DAGC) is produced,
buffered, and output to the R/E.
30. Programmable Signal Processor. The
programmable signal processor (PSP) has the
program memory control, data memories, A&C
logic, bulk memory, and bulk memory control.
When programmed, the PSP operates
independently from the CPS until reprogrammed.
31. The PSP controls the read/write memory
operations. These are pipelined instructions that
retrieve, process, do A&C, then execute. The
instruction is interfaced into memory or on one of
the buses. The PSP can process up to 10
instructions simultaneously.
32. Timing and Control No. 1 (TC1). TC1
provides the basic internal synchronization signals
for the PSP and to other radar units. These signals
include:
a. R/E transmit gate pulse
b. R/E blanking pulse
c. transmitter drive gate pulse
d. frequency agility clock
e. a/d sample enable
f. low/medium blanking pulse
g. pulse compression command.
33. TC1 receives a thresholded grid pulse from the
grid modulator, in the radar transmitter, for use in
producing the R/E blanking pulse.
34. Timing and Control No. 2 (TC2). TC2
produces the clock for the PSP. It receives a/d data
from the a/d converter, in the R/E for use in timing
and control.
35. RADAR RECEIVER-EXCITER. The R/E
provides the radar sets receiver function, and
provides the radio frequency (rf) drive for the radar
transmitter. Main functional blocks of the R/E are:
a. power and control
b. exciter
c. receiver.
009 00
Page 4
36. Power and Control. Power and control
includes lvps regulators, fault sensors and indicator,
serial interface, and digital module. Lvps regulators
and fault indicator circuits are described in
COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY, this WP.
37. The serial interface provides the R/E with
series digital data to and from the R-mux bus.
Receiver and exciter command words are serially
loaded using the R-mux clock. On receiving the R/E
R-mux execute command, the serial data is parallel
shifted. This provides instant commands for the
R/E.
38. The digital module provides buffering for
RTDP input and transmitter output discretes. It
also provides control for the a/d converter (adc)
bus. Main signals buffered are described below:
a. A/D sample enable. Starts the a/d conversion
cycle in the a/d converter.
b. R/E transmit gate pulse. Gates the radar
transmitter.
c. 58.22MHz reference. Timing for radar
transmitter and R/E.
d. DAGC command. Provides digital automatic
gain control to DAGC/variable frequency oscillator
(vfo) module.
e. CAGC command. Coarse automatic gain
control to the rf electronics.
f. Serial Interface Control. Provides controls for
the parallel shifted serial data, and controls
commands out of the serial interface.
39. Exciter. The exciter has three modules: the
reference oscillator (ro), the local oscillator (lo) and
the transmitter driver.
40. The ro is the primary frequency source for the
exciter. The ro is a voltage controlled crystal
oscillator (vco) operated in phase loop mode. The ro
is temperature and voltage regulated, and shielded
to provide transmitter low noise characteristics.
41. A frequency modulation ranging (fmr) ramp is
received by the ro producing a linear frequency
sweep output from the vco. This ramp modulation
output of the exciter provides the radar transmitter
fmr mode of operation.
42. The lo is a gunn diode vco operated in coherent
or noncoherent modes to produce the transmitter
A1-F18AC-742-100
drive reference. In the coherent mode, the vco is
phase locked above the ro input frequency. If
coherent mode with frequency agility (fa) is
selected, eight crystal oscillators are multiplexed to
produce the frequencies required by fa. If fa is not
selected, only one of the crystal oscillators is used
by the vco.
43. Noncoherent mode is also used in fa. In this
mode, the vco is not phase locked. The vco
reference frequency is established and the frequency
voltage is controlled by analog conversion. The
frequency of the lo is stepped through the fa
channels at the fa clock rate.
44. The 1st and 2nd lo outputs to the receiver are
used to produce the 1st and 2nd intermediate
frequency (if) of the receiver.
45. The transmitter driver module has an
upconverter to the transmitter radio frequency (rf)
drive using the lo input. The upconverter rejects the
lo center and upper sidebands, and tunes to the
lower sideband. The transmitter drive is offset by
the if frequency.
46. Transmitter rf drive is sent to the radar
transmitter. Transmitter drive is also monitored for
BIT, and part is selected and sent to the antenna to
produce BIT targets.
47. Receiver. The receiver has two parallel
channels (main/sum and guard/difference). The
main/sum channel receives target returns from the
antenna by way of the radar transmitter. This
channel processes main array targets returned in
search modes, and sum pattern returns in
monopulse track mode. The guard/difference
channel receives target returns directly from the
antenna. This channel receives guard horn returns
in search mode and difference pattern returns in
the track mode.
48. The receiver main components are the rf
electronics, (1st if) if electronics (2nd if) DAGC and
vfo module, and the a/d converter-I/Q (in-phase
quadrature) detector.
49. The rf electronics has the microwave and 1st if
parts of the two receiver channels. The 1st if
frequency is down heterodyned using the 1st lo
reference. The two channel if frequencies are phase
balanced, amplified, and gain controlled (CAGC)
before being sent to the if electronics.
009 00
Page 5
50. A rf generator signal is injected into the
guard/difference channel. This signal is used to do a
calibration test of the fmr on the transmitter drive
pulse.
51. The if electronics provides the remainder of the
receiver gain. The if frequency is down heterodyned
using the 2nd lo reference. The two receive channels
will operate independently or be combined at
receiver output, depending on mode of operation.
52. The if electronics is blanked during transmit
time by the R/E blanking pulse from the radar
processor.
53. On 161353 THRU 161528; ALSO 161702 THRU
163175 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 50, the avionic
blanking pulse blanks the if electronics when other
aircraft high energy systems are transmitting.
54. The DAGC circuits on this module provide
attenuation for the main/sum and guard/difference
channels as commanded by the radar target data
processor.
55. The vfo circuits produce a synchronous detector
reference signal. In high prf, the vfo switches to the
receiver reference. In other modes, the vfo is turned
on at a reference frequency centered on the if
signal. Vfo switching is controlled by the I/Q
reference select from the serial interface.
56. The gain controlled main if, guard if, and the
vfo output are mixed in four in-phase I/Q detectors.
The four I/Q signals are produced by power
splitting the input main and guard if, then shifting
by 90° from the vfo output. Vfo is used to simplify
digital processing and compensate for doppler shift
during pulse compression. In high prf modes the vfo
is turned off and the receiver reference is used.
57. The balance modulators produce bipolar video
that is the difference between the main or guard if
and the I/Q reference. Dc offset is applied to the
modulators to compensate for dc biases that occur
during a/d conversion. Bandwidth (bw) control is
provided at this time to select one of 16-video bw
available. Video is then sent to the sample and hold
logic in the a/d converter.
58. The I/Q detected video is sent to sample and
hold circuits under control of the RTDP. The video
signals are multiplexed and a/d converted. Digital
video words are sent to the RTDP.
A1-F18AC-742-100
59. RADAR TRANSMITTER. The main function of
the radar transmitter is to amplify and modulate rf
drive for transmission through the antenna. Other
functions include receiver protection and duplexing
of main/sum channel rf, and backup illumination
for AIM-7 missiles by way of the flood antenna.
60. Main parts of the radar transmitter include the
high voltage power supply (HVPS), timing and
control, gridded traveling wave tube (GTWT), and
microwave processing components.
61. High Voltage Power Supply. The HVPS
provides the high voltages required by the GTWT.
When the radar set is turned on, 7.5 volts filament
power is sent to the GTWT and a 3-minute timeout
in the HVPS starts. Until satisfied, the timeout
circuit inhibits high voltage application. When
timeout is complete, an operate command applies
high voltage to the GTWT.
62. Timing And Control. The timing and control
module interfaces the transmitter with the radar set
and provides internal control. This module is
controlled by the CPS using the R-mux bus, R-mux
clock, and transmit/receive command.
63. The timing and control circuits provide the
modulator enable signal to the grid modulator. If an
antenna rf interlock discrete is received, the grid
modulator is inhibited to prevent radar
transmission.
64. Gridded Traveling Wave Tube. The GTWT is
a beam powered amplifier which provides the high
power rf for radar set operation. The GTWT
operates when high voltage is applied, a gate of
transmitter rf is received from the R/E, and the
grid modulator is enabled. The grid modulator
signals are described below:
a. 58.22MHz transmitter reference. Provides
synchronous operation with the R/E.
b. Threshold grid pulse. A pulse output to the
RTDP used to produce the R/E blanking pulse.
c. Transmitter gate pulse. Provides radar set
pulse width and prf.
65. Microwave Processing Components. The
microwave processing components function is to
couple the transmit/receive rf between the radar
transmitter, antenna, and R/E. The components
009 00
Page 6
that do this processing are the directional coupler,
duplexer, and waveguide switch.
66. The directional coupler provides three rf test
signals. These are incident power monitor, reflected
power monitor, and AIM-7 illumination sample.
The power monitor signals are used to protect the
GTWT from excessive reflected rf power signals.
67. The duplexer isolates the GTWT from antenna
mismatch to prevent reflected signals. Reflected
signals are dissipated in a dummy load. The
transmit rf is coupled to the waveguide switch, and
the received rf is coupled to the multipactor. The
multipactor ionizes during transmit time to protect
the R/E.
68. The waveguide switch is used to direct the
GTWT output to the dummy load, main antenna,
or the flood antenna.
69. In weight on wheels condition, the waveguide
switch routes the rf transmission to the dummy
load. This is for personnel safety.
70. ANTENNA. The antenna functional blocks are:
planar array, gimbal assembly, servo electronics
assembly, and the serial interface.
71. Planar Array. The planar array receives the
high power rf from the radar transmitter, and
radiates a pencil or map beam. Pencil beam is a
narrow beam used for target illumination. Map
beam is a narrow azimuth (az), cosecant squared
(spoiled) elevation (el) beam pattern. Other rf
components of the planar array include waveguide,
null filling horn, guard horn, and the channel select
switch.
72. The null filling horn is used during AIM-7
illumination. Transmitter rf is coupled to the null
horn switch which turns the null filling horn on and
off when commanded.
73. The guard horn is used during receive to reduce
side lobe targets. The R/E uses the guard horn
returns to reject returns from side lobe areas.
74. The channel select switch combines az and el
difference signals and guard horn signals into one
time-shared rf channel. This guard/difference
channel rf is routed by waveguide to the R/E. The
channel select switch provides the az and el signals,
and couples BIT target rf to the guard channel.
Channel selection is controlled by the radar
processor.
A1-F18AC-742-100
75. Gimbal Assembly. The main function of the
gimbal assembly is to position the planar array as
commanded. The rotary joints and the servo
electronics are located on the gimbal assembly.
76. The gimbal positioning is provided by torquer
motors; one for az, and two for el. These motors
position the planar array ±70° in az, and ±60° in el.
Analog drive signals are provided by the servo
electronics.
77. Servo Electronics Assembly. The servo
electronics assembly has analog and digital circuits
to position, stabilize, and electronically drive the az
and el gimbals in rate and position modes.
78. The az and el servo channel operations are
primarily the same. Each channel operates in either
the rate or position mode. The only difference is the
mechanization of the stabilization loops. The az
gyro is mounted on the el gimbal, and varies with
the cosine of the angle. This is corrected by gain
commands on the antenna R-mux bus.
79. In the position mode, the servo channels use the
position feedback loop. The loop is closed by
summing gimbal assembly precision potentiometers
(el pot, az pot) with the position command to
produce an error signal. This error signal drives the
gimbal until the error is nulled. Antenna position is
a/d converted and put on the antenna R-mux bus.
80. In the rate mode, the position loop is switched
out and the rate integrating gyros are switched into
the servo channels. The rate gyros provide accurate
line-of-sight (los) and space stabilization. Space
stabilization is produced by aligning the gimbal
position with the gyro inertial reference. The los, so
stabilized in space, can be processed by driving the
gyro torquer. The precession rate (los rate) is
determined by monitoring the gyro torque current.
81. Signal Interface. Main signal interface for the
antenna is by waveguide and analog-digital-analog
(A/D/A) converters. The waveguide provides low
loss rf transmission between the antenna, the radar
transmitter, and the R/E. The A/D/A interfaces the
antenna with the R-mux bus. Digital signals on the
bus are converted to analog for the servo channels.
Analog servo signals are converted to digital for
output on the bus.
82. A status monitor circuit on the antenna
produces an antenna rf interlock discrete. This
009 00
Page 7
discrete inhibits GTWT grid pulses with
malfunction or loss of +5vdc, +20vdc, or −20vdc.
83. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION.
84. Sequence of operation in this manual is
described in the WP list below:
a. Mode selection and video displays, operation
(WP011 00)
b. Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00)
c. Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
(WP016 00)
d. Target acquisition, operation (WP013 00)
e. A/A track mode displays, operation
(WP018 00)
f. Head-up displays, operation (WP020 00).
85. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION.
86. Functional operation in this manual is described
in the WP list below:
a. Radar Electrical power function, operation
(WP024 00)
b. Transmitter drive, operation (WP026 00)
c. RF power function, operation (WP028 00)
d. Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
e. Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
f. Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
g. Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
h. Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
i. Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
j. Mode dependent signal processing, operation
(WP036 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100 009 00
Page 8

k. Mode dependent data processing, operation m. Track while scan function, operation
(WP038 00) (WP043 00).

l. Radar set doppler, operation (WP022 00)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BLOCK DIAGRAM - RADAR SET

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Radar Set .............................................................................................. WP009 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Block Diagram, Figure 1 ......................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This simplified schematic supports the radar set

operation Principles of Operation (WP009 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 9

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 11

Figure 1. Radar Set Block Diagram (Sheet 10)

A1-F18AC-742-100 010 00
Page 12

LEGEND

1 IF POWER CONTROL IS REQUIRED, REFER TO WP025 00.

2 IF RADAR SYSTEM INTERFACE IS REQUIRED, REFER TO WP008 00.
3 IF MISSILE ILLUMINATION IS REQUIRED, REFER TO WP029 00.
4
Ñ 161353 THRU 161528.
5
Ñ 161702 AND UP.
6
Ñ 161353 THRU 161528; ALSO 161702 THRU 163175 BEFORE F18 AFC 50.
7
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-130 THRU
3525681-145.
8
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-150 AND
LATER CONFIGURATIONS..

Figure 1. Radar System Block Diagram (Sheet 11)

A1-F18AC-742-100 011 00
1 November 2002 Page 1/(2 blank)

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MODE SELECTION AND VIDEO DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

WP
Title Number
Deleted ......................................................................................................................................................... 011 01
Mode Selection and Video Displays, Operation - WITH COMPUTER - POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) .................................... 011 02
Mode Selection and Video Displays, Operation - WITH COMPUTER - POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) .................................... 011 03
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 02
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MODE SELECTION AND VIDEO DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

EFFECTIVITY: WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT

92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000)

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Diagrams - Mode Selection and Video Displays .................................................. WP012 00
Target Acquisition - Operation............................................................................... WP013 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Mode Selection ............................................................................................................................................ 2
A/A Aircraft Master Mode ................................................................................................................ 3
A/A HOTAS Controls ................................................................................................................ 7
A/A Pushbutton Switch Controls ............................................................................................. 3
A/G Aircraft Master Mode ................................................................................................................ 8
A/G HOTAS Controls ................................................................................................................ 11
A/G Pushbutton Switch Controls ............................................................................................. 9
Miscellaneous Controls....................................................................................................................... 13
HSI Display Pushbutton Switch Controls .............................................................................. 13
Map Gain Control Panel Assembly .......................................................................................... 14
NAV Aircraft Master Mode............................................................................................................... 13
NAV HOTAS Controls............................................................................................................... 13
NAV Pushbutton Switch Controls ........................................................................................... 13
Operating Status ................................................................................................................................. 13
Not Ready Legend ...................................................................................................................... 13
STBY, OPR, or EMERG Legends ........................................................................................... 13
TEST Legend .............................................................................................................................. 13
Video Displays ............................................................................................................................................. 14
Composite Video Logic....................................................................................................................... 16
Digital Display Logic .......................................................................................................................... 15
MC Positioned Symbols..................................................................................................................... 15
Radar Positioned Symbols................................................................................................................. 14
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 02
Page 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (8) Cooling and pressurization function,

operation (WP034 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set is required refer to the work packages listed (9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
below:
(10) Mode dependent signal processing
operation (WP036 00)
a. Sequence of operation
(11) Mode dependent data processing
(1) Mode selection and video displays, operation (WP038 00)
operation (This WP)
(12) Radar Set doppler, operation
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays, (WP022 00)
operation (WP014 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode operation
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (WP041 00)
(WP016 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(4) Target acquisition, operation (WP043 00)
(WP013 00)
3. This WP describes the operation of mode
(5) A/A track mode displays, operation selection and video display logic produced. Included
(WP018 00) in mode selection is aircraft master mode selection,
radar operating mode selection, and controls and
(6) Head-up displays, operation indicators on the multipurpose display group that
(WP020 00) affect mode selection.

4. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.

b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
c. Functional operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
5. Refer to WP012 00 for diagrams and video
displays.
6. MODE SELECTION.
7. Pushbutton switch controls are on the Left or
Right Digital Display Indicator (LDDI/RDDI),
depending on which indicator is selected to display
the radar display. During normal operating
conditions, the RDDI is used to display the radar
display.

(4) Radar set receiving function, operation 8. The radar display is divided into tactical and
(WP030 00) nontactical areas. The tactical area is a 4 inch by 4
inch area inside the radar border. The nontactical
(5) Signal processing function, operation area is the 1/2-inch display area outside the radar
(WP031 00) border. The nontactical display area is reserved for
calligraphic displays to identify pushbutton switches
(6) Data processing function, operation or hands on throttle and stick (HOTAS) selections
(WP032 00) available.

(7) Antenna control function, operation 9. The mode or mode option labeled next to a
(WP033 00) pushbutton in the nontactical display area indicates
A1-F18AC-742-100
the function of that pushbutton. With different
radar mode displays, the function of a pushbutton
changes with exception to the MENU option.
Pressing a pushbutton selects the option labeled
next to the pushbutton.
10. When the acquisition cursor is positioned into
the nontactical display area (HOTAS area),
acronyms of the selections available are displayed.
HOTAS selection is done by positioning the
acquisition cursor over the acronym using the
throttle designator control (TDC) and pressing and
releasing the TDC. When the TDC is released, the
selection is commanded and in most cases, the
acquisition cursor is stowed in the upper left
quadrant of the display by the mission computer
system (MC) (WP012 00, figure 2, sheet 2).
11. When an option or mode is selected on the
display (by either pushbutton or HOTAS), normally
the MC commands the radar to do the selected
command and then reads the radar mode data to
verify the radar has changed modes before the MC
changes the display.
12. The displays on the LDDI and RDDI are
selected by pressing the MENU pushbutton switch.
Refer to Selected MENU Displays, WP012 00. The
center pushbutton switch at the bottom of the two
displays is always labeled MENU. Pressing the
MENU switch replaces the radar display (or any
other sensor display) with the MENU display. The
MENU display lists the displays available
depending on the systems operating/installed or
weapons selected.
13. The required display can then be selected by
pressing the applicable switch. Pressing the BIT
switch gives BIT control display. Pressing the RDR
switch gives a radar display. When power is turned
on, the LDDI and RDDI are initialized to the last
selected display.
14. There are three primary aircraft master modes
in which the radar set provides data for the
displays. These are:
a. Air to air (A/A) aircraft master mode
b. Air to ground (A/G) aircraft master mode
c. Navigation (Nav) aircraft master mode.
011 02
Page 3
15. A/A AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE.
16. In A/A aircraft master mode, the A/A radar
modes available are:
a. Range While Search (RWS)
b. Velocity Search (VS)
c. Track While Scan (TWS)
d. Single Target Track (STT)
e. Raid Assessment (RAID)
f. Automatic and Manual Acquisition.
17. A/A aircraft master mode is selected by the A/A
switch on the master arm control panel assembly or
by selecting an A/A weapon with the A/A weapon
select switch on the aircraft controller grip
assembly.
18. If A/A aircraft master mode is entered with no
weapon selected, the MC initializes sidewinder as
the selected weapon and RWS as the radar mode.
19. When A/A aircraft master mode is selected, the
TDC is automatically assigned to the radar display
and a TDC assignment indicator is displayed on the
radar display. This indicates that HOTAS controls
are available to select options on the radar display.
20. A/A Pushbutton Switch Controls. Refer to
figure 2, Mode Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
21. Mode Select. The MC initializes the radar to
RWS. Consecutive pressing of the mode pushbutton
switch selects VS, TWS, and RWS again. If a mode
has failed, an X is placed over the mode acronym.
22. ECCM Select. Initializes selected. When boxed,
activates ECCM circuits within the radar system.
23. The RTS (return to search) mode (RTS VS,
RTS RWS, RTS TWS, RTS GACQ) is displayed at
the mode pushbutton switch with the radar in STT
or RAID. The RTS mode is changed by pressing the
mode pushbutton switch or HOTAS.
24. Speed Gate Select. The speed gate is initialized
to normal (NORM). Pressing the speed gate switch
selects wide (WIDE) or NORM speed gate. If
WIDE is selected, only fast moving targets are
displayed. If NORM is selected, medium and fast
A1-F18AC-742-100
moving targets are displayed. Speed gate selection is
available in RWS, VS, and TWS only.
25. Pulse - Repetition Frequency (prf) Select. PRF
is initialized by the MC to interleaved (INTL).
Pressing the prf switch selects high (HI), medium
(MED), or INTL prf. If 5 nmi range is selected in
RWS or 5/10 nmi ranges selected in TWS, the radar
switches to medium prf and the prf can not be
selected. PDI is displayed when a sparrow missile is
selected and radar is tracking exclusively in PDI
(pulse doppler illumination).
26. Selecting PRF pushbutton when radar is in
STT with a sparrow missile selected, and no
AMRAAM missile inflight will command the radar
to PDI and box PDI on the radar display. A boxed
PDI indicates pilot selected PDI and an unboxed
PDI indicates radar selected PDI.
27. Expand Select. EXP option is displayed when
radar is in TWS with an L & S target (not AOT
target). EXP is not displayed in SCAN RAID and is
deselected if any of the below conditions exist:
a. an AMRAAM is launched (may be reselected
with AMRAAM inflight)
b. L & S target range is less than five miles
c. no L & S target
d. RSET is selected.
28. Selection of EXP provides a radar display
where the L & S target is centered in an area 10
nmi range by 20° azimuth. The range readout along
the right border of the display indicates the range
of the EXP display, but the azimuth scan is
unchanged, as the radar continues to scan the
selected TWS parameters. The B-sweep is frozen at
the azimuth position where the L & S target is
located. Track files that fall outside the EXP
display area are displayed along the perimeter at
their relative location from the L & S target. As the
L & S target is bumped from track file to track file
the EXP display adjusts about the new L & S
target.
29. Azimuth (AZ) Scan Select. The scan switch
provides selection of AZ sector scan patterns of 20°,
40°, 60°, 80°, and 140°. Each pressing of the switch
selects the next higher scan. If 140° scan is being
used and the scan switch is pressed, 20° AZ scan is
selected. The scan width selected is also indicated
by the B-sweep travel along the AZ grid.
011 02
Page 4
30. Latent TWS (LTWS) Select. LTWS option is
displayed when aircraft master mode is not air to
ground and radar operating mode is RWS. LTWS
option is initially boxed, indicating LTWS option is
selected. The radar maintains up to 10 trackfiles in
RWS with LTWS selected. Selection of RWS from
TWS causes existing TWS trackfiles to become
latent TWS trackfiles. Selection of TWS from RWS
causes existing latent TWS trackfiles to become
TWS trackfiles. When LTWS option is selected
TWS type trackfile symbology is displayed if a
trackfile is associated with the hit under the
acquisition cursor. If no trackfile is associated with
the selected hit, its altitude is displayed on the
right side of the acquisition cursor and its closing
velocity and range caret is displayed on the right
radar border. Pressing the boxed LTWS option
pushbutton deselects LTWS and unboxes the
LTWS option.
31. Channel (CHAN) Select. If the CHAN select
switch is pressed, it is relabeled AUTO/MAN and
the DCLTR (declutter) switch is relabeled with the
last rf channel or channel set selected.
32. Consecutive pressing of the AUTO/MAN switch
alternates the selection of AUTO (frequency agility)
or MAN (single rf channel) operation. AUTO
channel operation is automatically selected if any of
the below occurs:
a. transitioning to A/A or to A/G aircraft
master mode.
b. gun is selected with the A/A weapon select
switch.
c. at MC power up with weight on wheels.
d. MC2 fails.
e. radar processing requires frequency agility.
If AUTO is selected, AUTO is boxed. If MAN is
selected, MAN is boxed.
33. When AUTO is boxed, the rf channel set that is
selected is displayed. Pressing the rf channel set
switch increments the channel set to the next
higher channel set. The channel sets are A, B, C, D,
E, F, G, and *. The channel set letters and their
corresponding channel numbers are:
a. A = 17 and 25.
b. B = 10, 18, and 26.
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. C = 11, 19, and 27.
d. D = 12, 20, and 28.
e. E = 13, 21, and 29.
f. F = 14, 22, and 30.
g. G = 15 and 31.
h. * = 10 through 15, 17 through 22, and 26
through 31.
34. When MAN is boxed, the rf channel and its
corresponding channel set letter that is selected is
displayed. The channel set letter is displayed only
for reference to the applicable AUTO channel set
that would be selected if AUTO is selected. Pressing
the rf channel increments the rf channel to the next
higher rf channel. The manually selected rf
channels and corresponding set letters are: 10B,
11C, 12D, 13E, 14F, 15G, 17A, 18B, 19C, 20D, 21E,
22F, 26B, 27C, 28D, 29E, 30F, and 31G.
35. If the rf channel or set selected is not equal to
the radar operating channel, the rf channel or set
selected is not displayed. If neither AUTO/MAN
nor rf channel is pressed after 5 seconds, the switch
labels revert to CHAN and DCLTR.
36. AOT Select - AOT is available when the radar
is in full active STT on the MSI L & S target and
SIM mode is selected on the stores display
(WP015 00). Pressing the AOT pushbutton switch
causes the below:
a. AOT option to box when selected and unbox
when not selected
b. digital data computer to process MSI L & S
target as an AOT target.
The digital data computer will ignore range and
velocity inputs from the radar and do passive
ranging functions on the MSI L & S targat using
angle inputs only. This option provides practice
with angle only track targets and passive ranging.
37. Declutter (DCLTR) 1/2 Select. There are two
levels of declutter while operating in an A/A radar
mode. Pressing the DCLTR switch selects and
displays DCLTR 1 and removes the artificial
horizon and velocity vector. Pressing DCLTR 1
selects and displays DCLTR 2 and also removes the
relative altitude characters range rate caret and
011 02
Page 5
numeric, and target heading from the display in
TWS and STT.
38. Silent (SIL) Select. SIL is boxed if selected.
When selected, it inhibits radar transmission,
provides passive radar processing of received
signals, and freezes the display. If the ACTIVE
pushbutton switch is selected, the radar transmits
for one antenna frame and the display is updated.
When the ACTIVE option is selected by HOTAS,
the acquisition cursor remains in its existing
position and does not return to the stowed position.
This enables ACTIVE to be reselected without
moving the acquisition cursor again.
39. Silent is deselected by pressing the boxed SIL
switch or by selecting long range automatic
acquisition (AACQ) with the sensor control switch.
Silent is not available if:
a. TWS, STT, or RAID is the radar operating
mode.
b. AIM-7 missile tuning is in progress.
c. AACQ has been selected.
40. Reset (RSET) Select. RSET is available only in
TWS. When selected, all manual filed targets are
cleared, normal track file priority assignment is
resumed, and launch and steering (L&S)
designation is assigned to the highest ranked target.
RSET also deselects SCAN RAID, EXP, BIAS scan
centering, and HITS.
41. Set (SET) Select. SET is available only when
the below conditions are met:
a. A/A aircraft master mode is selected.
b. RWS is operating radar mode.
c. A/A missile is selected.
42. The parameters listed below can be changed
from the initialized MC settings when an A/A
missile is selected. They are:
a. target aging.
b. elevation bar.
c. azimuth scan.
d. prf.
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. range scale.
43. The parameters can be changed by being in
RWS, selecting an A/A missile, changing the above
parameters to new values, then pressing the SET
pushbutton. When SET is selected, the SET legend
is boxed for two seconds indicating that the new
parameters have been stored. The parameters
remain as the initialized parameters until new
parameters are set or with weight on wheels and
aircraft power is shut down.
44. Automatic/Manual (AUTO/MAN) Scan
Centering Select. This option is used to select either
automatic or manual scan centering in TWS only.
Either AUTO or MAN is selected and boxed.
45. AUTO is initialized when entering TWS from
STT. With AUTO selected, the azimuth and
elevation scans and scan center are positioned
automatically to display as many track files as
possible.
46. Bias scan centering allows the radar scan
center to be moved while maintaining TWS track
files. Positioning the acquisition cursor in the
desired area with no targets under the cursor and
then pressing and releasing the TDC will cause a
new scan center about the cursor. A boxed BIAS
legend replaces the boxed AUTO legend. During
bias scan centering priority targets (L & S target,
DT2 target, and any target under AMRAAM
attack) are maintained within 5° of the scan limits
and at the same time biased toward the inserted
heading by shifting the scan center. Bias scan
centering is deselected when any of the below
conditions exist:
a. platform heading and bias heading differ by
more than 90°.
b. RSET is selected.
c. TWS is deselected.
d. SCAN RAID is selected.
e. MAN scan centering is selected.
f. an AMRAAM is launched.
g. a track file no longer exists.
47. MAN is initialized when entering TWS from
either RWS or VS. With MAN selected, the scan
011 02
Page 6
center can only be changed manually using HOTAS
controls.
48. To change the azimuth center, the TDC is
pressed with the acquisition cursor in the azimuth
select area and the acquisition cursor is centered on
the display. With the TDC pressed, the acquisition
cursor is moved either left or right with the TDC.
When the TDC is released, the position of the
acquisition cursor becomes the new azimuth center.
49. With MAN selected, the elevation scan center
can be changed using HOTAS controls. The radar
elevation control switch on the right throttle grip is
used to move the scan center in elevation.
50. Scan size with MAN selected is done with the
elevation bar scan select pushbutton. Refer to
elevation bar scan select, this WP.
51. Range Increment and Decrement Select. The
range increment and decrement switches have
arrows pointing up and down, respectively. Pressing
the range increment switch selects the next higher
range scale. Pressing the range decrement switch
selects the next lower scale.
52. Range scales available are 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 and
160 nmi. If the 5 nmi range scale is selected,
pressing the range decrement switch has no effect.
If 160 nmi range scale is selected, pressing the range
increment switch has no effect.
53. In STT and RAID, range selection is not
available and the arrows are removed from the
display. In VS, two velocity scales can be selected;
2400 knots and 800 knots. When VS is entered,
2400 knot scale is initialized.
54. The selected range scale or velocity scale is
displayed above the range increment scale. The
range scale is initialized at different ranges
depending on the mode or weapon selected.
55. Target Aging Select. This option selects the
time in seconds that targets are stored on the
display. Repeat pressing of the switch commands 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 second storage, then back to 2
seconds. The selected target aging time is displayed
below the switch.
56. Target aging options are available in VS, RWS,
and TWS. In TWS, target aging can be selected for
unfiled targets and fixed at 2 seconds for filed
targets.
A1-F18AC-742-100
57. TWS Option Select. This option is available
only in RAID or STT with sidewinder or sparrow
selected. Pressing the TWS switch changes the
radar mode to TWS.
58. Active Select. ACTIVE is displayed when SIL
has been selected. Pressing ACTIVE updates the
display for one radar antenna scan.
59. Flood Select. FLOOD option is displayed when
radar is in STT and a sparrow missile is inflight
and is being supported with PDI. The FLOOD
option is removed when selected or when sparrow
maximum time of flight expires.
60. Erase Select. Pressing ERASE commands the
radar set to erase the existing target aging on the
display. During silent operation, this option erases
the frozen display. ERASE is available in VS and
RWS.
61. Hits Select. This option provides search type
‘‘raw hit‘‘ target symbols on the radar display when
the radar operating mode is TWS. The raw hit
symbols are displayed at a lower intensity level than
track file symbols at the same selected target aging.
62. Elevation Bar Scan Select. This option provides
selection of antenna scans in elevation (el).
Consecutive pressing of the switch selects 1B, 2B,
4B, or 6B. In TWS, 1B is not available and
selecting the el bar assigns the azimuth scan if
manual scan centering is selected.
63. The TWS azimuth scans available with each el
bar are:
a. 2B selectable 80°, 60°, 40°, or 20° az scan
b. 4B selectable 40° or 20° az scan
c. 6B selects 20° az scan.
The largest azimuth scan is automatically selected
unless a smaller azimuth scan had been previously
selected.
64. In RWS or VS with 5 nmi range scale selected,
el bar spacing is 4.2°. In TWS with 2B selected, the
el bar spacing is 2°. El bar selection is not available
in STT or RAID.
65. TRAIN select. Selection of this training option
disables frequency diversity during VS, RWS, and
TWS. This option is initialized as selected
011 02
Page 7
(frequency diversity disabled) at power up with
weight on wheels. The pushbutton legend is
unboxed when the radar indicates frequency
diversity is enabled.
66. A/A HOTAS Controls. Refer to figure 2, Mode
Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
67. The HOTAS controls during A/A aircraft
master mode that control radar mode selection are:
a. throttle designator control (TDC)
b. radar elevation control
c. HARM target sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID
switch
d. undesignate/nose wheel steer switch and on
F/A-18D 163986 AND UP, undesignate switch
e. sensor control switch
f. air to air weapon select switch.
68. Throttle Designator Control (TDC). The TDC
is used for HOTAS display controls. When the TDC
positions the acquisition cursor in the nontactical
display area and the cursor brackets the display
option and the TDC is pressed and released, the
option is commanded. The HOTAS display options
available are:
a. mode select
b. prf select
c. azimuth scan select
d. silent select
e. reset select
f. set select
g. range increment/range decrement select
h. target aging select
i. erase select
j. elevation bar scan select
k. active select
l. hits select.
A1-F18AC-742-100
69. For a description of each selection listed above,
refer to each item under A/A pushbutton switch
controls, this WP.
70. The MENU, CHAN, DCLTR, speed gate,
FLOOD, and EXP options cannot be selected by
HOTAS controls using the TDC.
71. In RWS or VS, manual target acquisition occurs
when the acquisition cursor is in the tactical display
area and the TDC is pressed and released. The
radar antenna is driven to the position of the cursor
and lock on (track) is commanded if a target is
found under the acquisition cursor.
72. If the radar is operating in TWS and the TDC
is pressed and released with the acquisition cursor
over a filed target, the filed target becomes the DT2
target.
73. If the TDC is pressed and released while
operating in STT, the radar is commanded to
return to search.
74. Radar Elevation Control. In RWS or VS, this
spring loaded potentiometer controls the radar
antenna elevation scan. In TWS with MAN scan
centering selected, the elevation scan center is
positioned with this potentiometer.
75. HARM Target Sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID
Switch. If the radar is operating in STT or TWS,
pressing this switch commands the radar to enter
RAID mode. While operating in RAID, pressing this
switch commands the radar to return to STT or
TWS.
76. Undesignate/Nose Wheel Steer Switch. In STT
and RAID, activation of this switch commands the
radar to return to search (VS or RWS depending on
how track was entered) and to undesignate the
tracked target.
77. In TWS, this switch steps the L & S target to
the next lower priority (next higher number) target
when no DT2 target exists. When a DT2 target does
exist, actuating this switch causes the L & S target
and the DT2 target to switch positions.
78. Sensor Control Switch. In A/A aircraft master
mode with the radar operating in RWS, TWS, or
VS, this switch selects four automatic acquisition
modes. The position of the switch and the
acquisition mode it selects are:
011 02
Page 8
a. forward position selects Boresight (BST).
After track is entered (STT), reselecting BST
selects bump acquisition (the radar rejects the track
target, forms an exclusion zone around it, and tries
to lock on another target for two seconds).
b. left position selects wide acquisition
(WACQ). WACQ operates in either caged or
uncaged mode.
c. right position selects long range automatic
acquisition (AACQ). If selected, the radar first
acquires any target under the acquisition cursor.
This is named Fast acquisition (FACQ). If no target
is under the acquisition cursor, the nearest target in
range is acquired. After track is entered, reselecting
AACQ selects bump acquisition. If in TWS and
AACQ is selected, the radar transitions to STT on
the L & S target if no target is under the
acquisition cursor.
d. aft position selects Vertical acquisition
(VACQ). After track is entered, reselecting VACQ
selects bump acquisition for two seconds.
79. BST, WACQ, and VACQ are called air combat
maneuvering (ACM) modes. The ACM modes are
considered to be short range automatic acquisition
modes; but AACQ is a long range automatic
acquisition mode. If a further description of
automatic acquisition is needed, refer to target
acquisition operation, WP013 00.
80. Air to Air Weapon Select Switch. This switch
selects A/A weapons. If the radar is not in track and
a missile is selected, the radar is commanded to
RWS with best parameters for the missile selected.
81. If gun is selected and the radar is not in track,
GUN acquisition (GACQ) mode is commanded by
the MC. GACQ is an automatic acquisition mode. It
acquires and tracks the first target detected within
the scan volume. The GACQ scan pattern covers
the HUD field of view of 20°.
82. A/G AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE. In A/G
aircraft master mode, the A/G radar modes
available are:
a. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP)
b. Ground Moving Target (GMT)
c. Sea Surface Search (SEA)
d. Terrain Avoidance (TA)
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. Precision Velocity Update (PVU)
f. Air to Ground Ranging (AGR)
g. GMT/MAP Interleave (INTL)
h. SEA/MAP INTL
i. Doppler Beam Sharpened (DBS)
(1) Expand 1 (EXP1) Sector
(2) Expand 2 (EXP2) Patch
(3) Expand 3 (EXP3) Sar
j. Track:
(1) MAP-Fixed Target Track (FTT)
(2) GMT Track (GMTT)
(3) SEA Track (FTT)
(4) AGR Track
(5) EXP1, EXP2, EXP3 (FTT).
83. Also in A/G aircraft master mode, the A/A
radar modes available are:
a. Range While Search (RWS)
b. Velocity Search (VS).
84. A/G aircraft master mode is selected with the
A/G switch on the master arm control panel
assembly. When A/G aircraft mode is selected,
pushbutton switches and HOTAS controls can be
assigned to the radar.
85. The sensor select switch is used to assign the
TDC to the radar display. If the sensor control
switch is pressed to the right and the radar display
is on the RDDI, a TDC assignment indicator is
displayed on the display. This indicates that
HOTAS controls are available to select options on
the radar display.
86. A/G Pushbutton Switch Controls. Refer to
figure 2, Mode Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
87. Mode Select. The MC initializes the radar mode
to MAP. Consecutive pressing of the mode select
switch selects GMT, SEA, TA, and then MAP
again.
011 02
Page 9
88. ECCM Select. Initializes selected. When boxed,
activates ECCM circuits within the radar system.
89. Air (AIR) Select. If AIR is selected, the MC
commands the radar to RWS. In A/G aircraft
master mode, the only other A/A radar mode
available is VS, so pressing the mode select switch
selects VS and then RWS again. DCLTR 2 and the
SET option are not available. Automatic acquisition
modes and STT are not available.
90. Surf (SURF) Select. In A/G aircraft master
mode with an A/A radar display, the SURF option
is displayed. Pressing SURF returns the radar mode
to MAP with 40 nmi range selected.
91. Map Gain Increase/Decrease Select. Displayed
in A/G aircraft master mode when radar system is
in acquisition and not track and radar operating
mode is MAP, EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3. Also GMT
or SEA if interleave (INTL) is selected. Pressing
map gain increase or decrease pushbutton switch
controls the gain of the radar map display.
92. Fast (FAST) Select. The FAST legend is
displayed when the radar is operating in either
EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 mode. Pressing the FAST
switch boxes the FAST legend and provides a rapid
buildup of the DBS displays but resolution is
decreased. Without FAST selected, the buildup
time is approximately three times longer.
93. Azimuth Scan Select. The azimuth scan select
provides selection of az sector scan patterns of 20°,
45°, 90°, and 120°. Each time the switch is pressed,
the next higher scan is selected. If 120° scan is
selected, the next pressing of the scan switch selects
a 20° scan. All scan widths are not available in the
A/G radar modes.
94. Channel (CHAN) Select. If the CHAN select
switch is pressed, it is relabeled AUTO/MAN and
the DCLTR (declutter) switch is relabeled with the
last rf channel or channel set selected.
95. Consecutive pressing of the AUTO/MAN switch
alternates the selection of AUTO (frequency agility)
or MAN (single rf channel) operation. If AUTO is
selected, AUTO is boxed. If MAN is selected, MAN
is boxed.
96. When AUTO is boxed, the channel set that is
selected is displayed. Pressing the rf channel set
switch increments the channel set to the next
higher channel set. The channel sets are A, B, C, D,
A1-F18AC-742-100
E, F, G, and *. The channel set letters and their
corresponding channel numbers are:
a. A = 9, 17, and 25.
b. B = 10, 18, 23, and 26.
c. C = 8, 11, 19, and 27.
d. D = 4, 12, 20, and 28.
e. E = 5, 13, 21, and 29.
f. F = 6, 14, 22, and 30.
g. G = 7, 15, and 31.
h. * = 10 thru 15, 17 thru 22, and 26 thru 31.
97. When MAN is boxed, the rf channel and its
corresponding channel set letter that is selected is
displayed. The channel set letter is displayed only
for reference to the applicable AUTO channel set
that would be selected if AUTO is selected. Pressing
the rf channel switch increments the rf channel to
the next higher rf channel. The rf channels and
corresponding set letters are: 04D, 05E, 06F, 07G,
08C, 09A, 10B, 11C, 12D, 13E, 14F, 15G, 17A, 18B,
19C, 20D, 21E, 22F, 23B, 25A, 26B, 27C, 28D, 29E,
30F, and 31G.
98. If the rf channel or set selected is not equal to
the radar operating channel, the rf channel or set
selected is not displayed. If neither AUTO/MAN
nor rf channel is pressed after five seconds, the
switch labels revert to CHAN and DCLTR.
99. AUTO channel operation is automatically
selected if any of the below occurs:
a. TA mode selected
b. transitioning to A/A or to A/G
c. at MC power up with weight on wheels
d. MC 2 fails
e. radar processing requires frequency agility.
100. Declutter (DCLTR) Select. Pressing the
DCLTR switch boxes DCLTR and removes the
artificial horizon line and velocity vector from the
display.
101. Silent (SIL) Select. SIL is boxed when
selected. When selected, it:
011 02
Page 10
a. freezes the video display of the last antenna
scan
b. inhibits radar transmission
c. has the radar provide passive processing of
received signals
d. displays ACTIVE switch label
e. boxes FRZ.
102. When the boxed SIL switch is pressed, the
radar resumes normal operation and the switches
revert to their initial identity. Silent is not available
in PVU or TA. If the radar mode is changed with
silent selected, the video is blanked.
103. Reset (RSET) Select. Pressing the RSET
switch initializes video gain, pencil or fan beam, and
antenna elevation angle for the selected range and
existing aircraft altitude. RSET is available in
MAP, SEA, GMT, EXP1, EXP2, and EXP3,
provided that no offset aimpoint (OAP) or target
designation has taken place.
104. Freeze (FRZ) Select. If FRZ is selected and
SIL is not boxed, the display is frozen and FRZ is
boxed. If reselected, FRZ is unboxed and the
display is updated normally. Selecting FRZ (with
SIL not selected) does not stop radar transmissions.
105. When silent is selected, selection of the boxed
FRZ option commands the radar to blank the video
in the tactical display area and the box is removed
around FRZ. Video will not be displayed until an
active scan is done either by selection of the
ACTIVE option or until silent is deselected. The
FRZ option is available in all modes except TA,
PVU, and AGR.
106. Range Increment and Decrement Select. The
range increment and decrement switches have
arrows pointing up and down next to them,
respectively. Pressing the range increment switch
selects the next higher range scale. Pressing the
range decrement switch selects the next lower range
scale.
107. Range scales available are 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, and
160 nmi. If the 5 nmi range scale is selected,
pressing the range decrement switch has no effect.
If 160 nmi range scale is selected, pressing the range
increment switch has no effect.
108. Range increment and decrement options are
available in MAP, SEA, GMT, and TA modes.
A1-F18AC-742-100
Range increment and decrement are not available if
an OAP or a target is designated because the MC
increments/decrements the range scale
automatically if the OAP or target designation
exceeds 93 percent/45 percent of the range scale.
109. The selected range scale is displayed above
the range increment scale. Range scales available in
each of the A/G radar modes are:
a. TA - 5 and 10 nmi
b. MAP - all available
c. GMT - 5, 10, 20, and 40 nmi
d. SEA - 5, 10, 20, 40, and 80 nmi
e. GMT/MAP INTL - 5, 10, 20, and 40 nmi
f. SEA/MAP - all available (SEA targets shown
only to 80 nmi.).
110. Active Select. ACTIVE is displayed when SIL
has been selected. Pressing ACTIVE updates the
display for one radar antenna scan.
111. Pencil/Fan (PEN/FAN) Beam Select. Manual
selection of the fan or pencil beam is done by
consecutive pressing of the PEN/FAN pushbutton
switch in MAP, SEA, GMT, and EXP1 modes.
Beam selection is indicated by boxing the PEN or
FAN part of the PEN/FAN option. The PEN/FAN
option is displayed in MAP, SEA, GMT, EXP1,
EXP2, and EXP3 modes. Automatic selection of the
fan or pencil beam is done by the Computer-Power
Supply AN/APG-65 if manual selection is not
attempted or if the RSET pushbutton switch is
pressed. In MAP, SEA, and GMT modes, FAN is
automatically selected if the elevation angle of the
antenna is greater than 5.5° down. In EXP1 mode,
FAN is automatically selected if the angular
amount of the ground coverage is greater than 5.5°.
In EXP2 and EXP3 modes, PEN is boxed and FAN
cannot be selected.
112. Expand 1/Expand 2/Expand 3 (EXP1, EXP2,
EXP3) Select. EXP1, 2, and 3 DBS options are
displayed when the radar is operating in the MAP
mode. Selection of EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 while in
the MAP mode with no OAP or target designated
removes the acquisition cursor from the display and
the EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 indicator is
superimposed on the MAP display. These display
modes are called MAP W/SECTOR, MAP
011 02
Page 11
W/PATCH, and MAP W/SAR, respectively. The
TDC is used to position the indicator on the
display. When the TDC is pressed and released, the
area inside the indicator is expanded and displayed
and the applicable EXP mode pushbutton switch
that was pressed is boxed.
113. Selection of EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 while in
the MAP mode with an OAP or target designated
commands the applicable EXP mode to be entered
and the applicable EXP mode pushbutton switch
that was pressed is boxed. The OAP or target
designation area is expanded on the display.
114. When operating in EXP1 mode (EXP1 boxed)
and either EXP2 or EXP3 mode switch is pressed
with no OAP or target designated, the applicable
expand indicator is superimposed on the EXP1
display. The TDC is used to position the indicator
on the display. When the TDC is pressed and
released, the area inside the indicator is expanded
and displayed and the applicable EXP mode
pushbutton switch that was pressed is boxed. The
same mechanization occurs when operating in
EXP2 and EXP3 is selected.
115. When operating in EXP1 mode (EXP1 boxed)
and either EXP2 or EXP3 switch is pressed with an
OAP or target designated commands the applicable
EXP mode to be entered and the applicable EXP
mode pushbutton switch that was pressed is boxed.
The OAP or target designation area is expanded on
the display. The same mechanization occurs when
operating in EXP2 and EXP3 is selected.
116. When operating in EXP3 mode (EXP3 boxed)
and either EXP1 or EXP2 mode switch is pressed,
the applicable mode is entered and the EXP switch
that was pressed is boxed. The same mechanization
occurs when operating in EXP2 and EXP1 is
selected.
117. Interleave (INTL) Select. When GMT or SEA
is the operating mode, the EXP1 switch is relabeled
INTL and EXP2 and EXP3 switch labels are
blanked. During GMT mode, selection of INTL
superimposes synthetic moving targets on the MAP
display (GMT/MAP INTL). During SEA mode,
selection of INTL superimposes synthetic SEA
targets on the MAP display (SEA/MAP INTL).
118. A/G HOTAS Controls. Refer to figure 2,
Mode Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
A1-F18AC-742-100
119. The HOTAS controls during A/G aircraft
master mode that control radar mode selection are:
a. throttle designator control (TDC)
b. radar elevation control
c. sensor control switch
d. undesignate/nose wheel steer switch and on
F/A-18D 163986 AND UP, undesignate switch.
120. Throttle Designator Control (TDC). If
assigned to the radar display, the TDC is used for
HOTAS display controls. When the TDC positions
the acquisition cursor in the nontactical display
area and the cursor brackets the display option and
the TDC is pressed and released, the option is
commanded. The HOTAS display options available
are:
a. mode select
b. map gain increase/decrease select
c. air select
d. surf select
e. azimuth scan select
f. silent select
g. reset select
h. range increment/range decrement select
i. active select
j. pencil/fan beam select
k. EXP1/EXP2/EXP3 select
l. interleave select.
121. For a description of each selection listed
above, refer to each item under A/G pushbutton
switch controls, this WP.
122. The MENU, CHAN, and DCLTR options
cannot be selected by HOTAS controls using the
TDC.
123. In MAP, SEA, and GMT, manual radar
designation occurs if the acquisition cursor is in the
011 02
Page 12
tactical display area and the TDC is pressed and
released. When the TDC is pressed, the acquisition
cursor is blanked and the in-video cursor is
displayed. When the TDC is released, a stabilized
cue is displayed where the in-video cursor
intersected.
124. After manual radar designation has taken
place, the range increment/range decrement arrows
and reset options are removed from the display and
the radar antenna elevation control cannot be
adjusted.
125. Radar Elevation Control. In MAP, GMT, or
SEA, this spring loaded potentiometer controls the
antenna in elevation. If manual radar designation
has taken place, it is not operable.
126. Sensor Control Switch. In A/G aircraft master
mode, this switch is used to assign the TDC to a
sensor/display.
127. If the radar is being displayed on the RDDI
and the sensor control switch is pressed to the right,
the TDC is assigned to the radar and a TDC
assignment indicator is displayed. If the sensor
control switch is pressed again to the right, the
radar is commanded to acquisition, and when
released, the radar is commanded to track.
128. If a designation has previously taken place, the
radar will go to track on the designation. If track is
commanded and no previous designation has taken
place, track is commanded at the position of the
in-video cursor. The in-video cursor can be slewed
using the TDC with the sensor control switch still
held to the right.
129. If the sensor control switch is pressed to the
right with the radar in track (FTT or GMTT),
breaklock is commanded (aimpoint is not
undesignated) and the radar returns to the search
mode (MAP, SEA, or GMT) it was in before
entering track.
130. When the radar is on the LDDI, pressing the
sensor control switch to the left does the same
actions described when the radar was on the RDDI.
131. Pressing the sensor control switch forward
assigns the TDC to the HUD and the radar is
commanded to the AGR mode if the radar is not
tracking. If the sensor control switch is pressed
toward the radar display, the radar returns to the
mode previously selected before AGR was
commanded.
A1-F18AC-742-100
132. Undesignate/Nose Wheel Steer Switch. When
pressed, the radar is commanded to return to search
and the aimpoint designation is undesignated.
133. NAV AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE. In NAV
aircraft master mode, all the radar modes are
available. However, some options in some modes are
not available.
134. NAV aircraft master mode is selected if
neither A/G nor A/A aircraft master modes on the
master arm control panel assembly is selected.
135. NAV Pushbutton Switch Controls. The
differences between A/A and A/G radar display
pushbuttons while operating in NAV aircraft master
mode are described below.
136. Air (AIR) Select. AIR is displayed when A/G
radar modes are selected. Pressing AIR commands
the RWS mode and display. AIR is not displayed if
the radar is in A/G track.
137. With AIR selected, all A/A radar modes are
available. The only option not available is the SET
option. Also, the launch envelope is not computed
for the selected weapon in STT.
138. Surf (SURF) Select. SURF is displayed in all
A/A radar modes except track. Pressing SURF
commands the MAP mode and display.
139. With SURF selected, all A/G radar modes can
be selected as if in A/G aircraft master mode except
for the selection of AGR. AGR can only be selected
when a discrete target is provided by another
aircraft tactical sensor.
140. NAV HOTAS Controls. The differences
between A/A and A/G radar HOTAS controls while
operating in NAV aircraft master mode are
described below.
141. With NAV aircraft master mode selected, the
sensor control switch retains the same functions as
in A/G aircraft master mode with some differences.
Since the sensor control switch assigns TDC priority
to different indicators, ACM options of BST,
WACQ, and VACQ are not available with A/A radar
modes selected.
142. If the TDC is assigned to the RDDI and the
RDDI is displaying an A/A radar search display (VS
or RWS), pressing the sensor control switch to the
right commands AACQ (as in A/A aircraft master
mode) to the radar.
011 02
Page 13
143. After track has been entered (STT), pressing
the sensor control switch to the right commands
bump acquisition.
144. OPERATING STATUS. Refer to Mode
Selection Block Diagram (WP012 00). The
operating status of the radar set is displayed on the
digital display indicator. The legend displays are
not ready (RDY with a line through it), TEST,
STBY, OPR, or EMERG.
145. Not Ready Legend. The not ready legend
indicates that the radar set has not established
communication with the MC. Not ready is displayed
for 30 seconds when the RADAR switch on the
SNSR pod control box panel assembly (SNSR
panel) is set from OFF to any other position. Not
ready will be displayed during radar set operation if
the input/output terminal fails. When the
input/output terminal fails, the only radar displays
available are the artificial horizon line and the
velocity vector.
146. TEST Legend. The TEST legend indicates
that the radar set has established communication
with the MC and that the radar mode is in an
operational readiness test (ORT) or initiated BIT
(IBIT).
147. STBY, OPR, or EMERG Legends. STBY,
OPR, or EMERG indicate the position of the
RADAR switch on the SNSR panel after the
Operational Readiness Test (ORT).
148. MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS. Other radar
controls not located on the radar displays or on
HOTAS controls are described.
149. HSI Display Pushbutton Switch Controls.
Selection of some options on the HSI display affect
radar operation and radar displays.
150. Velocity (VEL) Update Select. Pressing VEL
on the HSI update option display commands the
radar to PVU if in NAV or A/G aircraft master
mode with the radar not in track.
151. Land (LAND) or Sea (SEA) Select. When
VEL is pressed on the HSI update option display,
HSI velocity update display is commanded and the
LAND and SEA options are displayed. Pressing the
LAND or SEA switch commands the radar antenna
to higher or lower look angles, respectively.
A1-F18AC-742-100
152. Accept (ACPT) or Reject (REJ) Select. After
the velocity update, PVU is deselected when ACPT
or REJ is pressed on the HSI update option display
or by pressing the sensor control switch in the
direction of the radar display. Either action returns
the radar to the previous search mode selected
before entering PVU.
153. Continuous (CONT) PVU Select. When the
INS mode switch on the SNSR pod control box
panel assembly is set to IFA (inflight align) in NAV
aircraft master mode, the HI displays the HSI IFA
display with CONT PVU, LAND, and SEA options.
CONT PVU and SEA options are initialized as
selected (boxed) and the radar is commanded to
PVU.
154. During IFA with CONT PVU boxed, pressing
the CONT PVU switch deselects continuous PVU
and commands PVU for 10 seconds of each minute
alternating with the last selected radar mode.
155. During IFA with CONT PVU boxed and if
AGR is commanded (as if the TDC is assigned to
the HUD), continuous PVU is deselected, 20
seconds of AGR is commanded, then PVU is
commanded for 10 seconds of each minute
alternating with AGR.
156. In IFA, the LAND and SEA options operate
the same as during velocity updates.
157. PVU is deselected and the radar returns to the
last selected mode when the INS mode switch is set
to any position from IFA.
158. Waypoint (WYPT) A/A Select. This option is
displayed on the HSI data display. When selected,
WYPT is boxed and the waypoint or designated
target is displayed on the radar display in RWS,
TWS, or STT modes. If the waypoint or designated
target is not within the tactical border area, it is not
displayed.
159. Map Gain Control Panel Assembly. The
MAP GAIN switch on the panel supplies three
digital discrete bits which control the gain of the
radar map display.
160. The gain setting is applicable in MAP, EXP1,
EXP2, and EXP3 modes. It is also applicable in
GMT and SEA modes if interleave (INTL) is
selected.
011 02
Page 14
161. VIDEO DISPLAYS.
162. Video displays in this WP include operation
of:
a. radar positioned symbols.
b. MC positioned symbols.
c. digital display logic.
d. composite video logic.
163. RADAR POSITIONED SYMBOLS. Refer to
Radar Symbols and Video Displays detail A
(WP012 00). Radar positioned symbols are unique
symbols produced and positioned by the radar set.
Radar symbols are used in both A/A and A/G
modes. In A/G modes, the symbols are time shared
with composite video (detail B).
164. Radar positioned symbols are listed below:
a. antenna elevation caret
b. target symbols
c. B-sweep
d. acquisition cursor
e. iron cross.
165. Antenna Elevation Caret. The antenna
elevation caret symbol indicates antenna elevation
in the vertical plane. The symbol is pitch and roll
stabilized in reference to own aircraft horizontal. In
search modes the symbol responds to radar
elevation control on the right throttle grip.
166. Target Symbols. Target symbols are
displayed as solid rectangles. The horizontal
position of the target symbol indicates angular
position in respect to own aircraft heading. The
vertical position indicates range or velocity
depending on radar mode of operation.
167. B-sweep. The B-sweep is a vertical sweep
scanned horizontally on the display. Indicates
instantaneous az position of the antenna.
168. Acquisition Cursor. The acquisition cursor is
two parallel lines displayed in the A/A search
modes and some A/G search modes. The cursor is
positioned on the display in response to TDC
A1-F18AC-742-100
commands. When not TDC positioned, the cursor is
stowed in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
169. When the cursor is in the tactical area of
display, numbers are displayed above and below the
cursor to represent altitude coverage of the radar
beam.
170. Iron Cross. Refer to Mode Selection Block
Diagram (WP012 00) and Maintenance BIT Mode
(WP041 00). The iron cross is displayed in the
lower left corner of the radar display. The iron cross
is displayed when the radar transmitter RF power is
degraded or none at all. In short range track modes
the RF power monitor is not used to set the iron
cross, only true hardware failures are used.
171. When the radar set is turned on from a
coldstart, a large X is displayed in the iron cross
location after test number 4 of the operational
readiness test. This remains until the transmitter
times out, and the transmitter gate pulse is received
by the transmitter.
172. When the iron cross is displayed, and the iron
cross is flashing, a transmitter failure has occurred.
If the iron cross is steady, a normal operation as the
radar set status is STBY on SNSR panel, or
EMCON has been commanded. Any of the below
conditions can cause the iron cross to be displayed.
a. Transmitter timed out, and RDR switch on
SNSR panel set to STBY.
b. Weight on wheels/inflight disagree (MMP
code 048 set).
c. EMCON on the Electronic Equipment
Control C-10380/ASQ panel set to on.
d. Degraded RF power detected by RF power
monitor during any track or search mode.
e. Short range track and a transmitter failure
detected (MMP code 041 set).
f. When true air speed is less than 80 knots for
more than 30 seconds, the transmitter is inhibited.
g. Weight on wheels.
173. MC POSITIONED SYMBOLS. MC positioned
symbols are MC commanded and positioned even
though they may use radar parameters for
orientation. Radar Symbols and Video Displays,
011 02
Page 15
detail B (WP012 00), has several examples of MC
positioned symbols: stabilized cue, A/G designation
cursors (in-video cursor), EXP2 indicator, and
azimuth grid lines.
174. The A/A and A/G radar mode displays have
many common MC positioned symbols. These
symbols are described for each display in its
applicable WP.
175. DIGITAL DISPLAY LOGIC. Refer to Digital
Display Logic Diagram (WP012 00). Digital display
symbols are made up of 16-bit binary coded words
produced in the Computer-Power Supply
CP-1325/APG-65. Each digital transfer has one
control word and two or more data words. Two
digital words are required for each symbol
displayed. The 2 digital display logic functions are
timing and control and digital display data.
176. Timing and Control. Timing and control for
digital transfer is made up of blanking pulses, data
windows, and a 1MHz clock. Correct MC commands
and logic of these control signals are required for
digital transfer.
177. The 60 Hz vertical blanking pulse must be true
(high) for data transfer to occur. When low, the
digital symbols are blanked from the multipurpose
display group. The 60 Hz rate and 16.67 msec time
between pulses allow the digital symbols to be
synchronized with the composite video.
178. The data window goes true (high) with the
vertical blanking pulse. A command from the MC to
supply digital symbols must occur at this time. All
data for one frame of a digital symbol display is
transferred within the data window.
179. The 1 MHz clock is the method to input
digital data into the multipurpose display group
indicators. For one clock cycle the logic is true, then
false for equal periods. The display data must be
true 200 nsec before the clock goes false.
180. Digital Display Data. Each digital transfer in
the radar search mode has one control word and up
to 268 odd and even data words. The radar track
mode has one control word and up to 33 odd and
even data words. A typical data transfer is listed
below:
a. control word
b. odd and even acquisition symbol words
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. odd and even antenna elevation symbol
words
d. odd and even B-sweep (antenna azimuth
position) words
e. up to 256 (128 odd, 128 even) target symbols
in search, and 28 (14 odd, 14 even) in track.
181. Control word fields are described and coded
as listed below:
a. operation (op) code. A fixed binary 10010,
bits 0 thru 4
b. symbol size. Bits 5 and 6 representing
symbol size
Example:
Bit 5 6 = symbol size
0 0 = minimum
0 1 = size 2
1 0 = size 3
1 1 = maximum
c. word count. Bits 7 thru 15 binary coded
indicating number data words to follow.
182. Refer to Digital Display Logic Diagram, detail
B (WP012 00). Typical odd and even data word
fields are described below:
a. Odd words are made up of intensity, unique
symbol designator, and X-position data:
(1) Intensity bits 0, 1, and 2 represent not
displayed (000) and dim (001) thru bright (111).
(2) Bits 3, 4, and 5 are not used.
(3) Bit 6 must be logic “1” for radar
positioned symbols.
(4) Bits 7 thru 15 are the X-position (detail
A) of the symbol.
b. Even words are made up of symbol type and
Y-position data:
(1) Bits 0 thru 6 when logic “1” designates
which symbol is displayed: bit 0 indicates B-sweep,
bit 1 indicates acquisition cursor, bit 3 indicates
antenna elevation, bit 4 indicates target. Bits 2, 5,
and 6 are spares.
011 02
Page 16
(2) Bits 7 thru 15 are the Y-position (detail
A) of the symbol.
183. COMPOSITE VIDEO LOGIC. Refer to
Composite Video Logic Diagram (WP012 00).
Composite video is a 675 line, high resolution, tv
display with 512 active lines. Characteristics are
listed below:
a. the 512 active lines have 256 odd and 256
even lines per frame
b. thirty frames per second
c. vertical sync pulse at 60Hz
d. odd and even field vertical blanking
e. active horizontal time of 256 elements with
black and white video thresholds
f. synchronized with digital display data
g. in video symbology.
184. The composite video is transferred to the
multipurpose display group indicators in a 4-inch
by 4-inch grid. The indicator converts the grid to
the arc rasters required by the A/G displays. The
composite video display is synchronized with the
digital data input to the indicators to provide out of
raster acquisition cursor and antenna elevation
symbols. The B-sweep symbol is not used in A/G,
and target symbols are synthetic.
185. In-video symbology is provided by the
composite video. These symbols are positioned in
512 vertical elements and 256 in horizontal. In-video
symbols are listed below:
a. range grid lines
b. azimuth grid lines
c. terrain avoidance arc
d. DBS patch, sector, and sar outlines
e. tracked target symbol
f. stabilized cue
g. in-video cursor.
186. The in-video symbols are produced at a
maximum brightness. These symbols are provided
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 02
Page 17/(18 blank)

by the Radar Target Data Processor

CP-1326/APG-65 memory. The symbols are MC
commanded and positioned by the radar and the
MC.
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 03
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MODE SELECTION AND VIDEO DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

EFFECTIVITY: WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP

(A1-F18AC-SCM-000)

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Diagrams - Mode Selection and Video Displays .................................................. WP012 00
Target Acquisition - Operation............................................................................... WP013 00
Air to Air Search Mode Displays - Diagrams ....................................................... WP015 00
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-150/(C)
ECCM Displays ......................................................................................................... WP003 00
Operation - Silent Displays ..................................................................................... WP007 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Mode Selection ............................................................................................................................................ 3
A/A Aircraft Master Mode ................................................................................................................ 3
A/A HOTAS Controls ................................................................................................................ 10
A/A Pushbutton Switch Controls ............................................................................................. 4
Multi-Source Integration ........................................................................................................... 3
A/G Aircraft Master Mode ................................................................................................................ 12
A/G HOTAS Controls ................................................................................................................ 15
A/G Pushbutton Switch Controls ............................................................................................. 13
Miscellaneous Controls....................................................................................................................... 18
HSI Display Pushbutton Switch Controls .............................................................................. 18
Map Gain Control Panel Assembly .......................................................................................... 18
NAV Aircraft Master Mode............................................................................................................... 17
NAV HOTAS Controls............................................................................................................... 17
NAV Pushbutton Switch Controls ........................................................................................... 17
Operating Status ................................................................................................................................. 17
Not Ready Legend ...................................................................................................................... 17
STBY, OPR, or EMERG Legends ........................................................................................... 18
TEST Legend .............................................................................................................................. 17
Video Displays ............................................................................................................................................. 18
Composite Video Logic....................................................................................................................... 20
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 03
Page 2

Alphabetical Index (Continued)

Subject Page No.

Digital Display Logic .......................................................................................................................... 19

MC Positioned Symbols..................................................................................................................... 19
Radar Positioned Symbols................................................................................................................. 18

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (5) Signal processing function, operation

(WP031 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required, refer to the work packages listed (6) Data processing function, operation
below: (WP032 00)

a. Sequence of operation (7) Antenna control function, operation

(WP033 00)
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (This WP) (8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00) (9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (10) Mode dependent signal processing,
(WP016 00) operation (WP036 00)

(4) Target acquisition, operation (11) Mode dependent data processing,

(WP013 00) operation (WP038 00)

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (12) Radar Set doppler, operation
(WP018 00) (WP022 00)
(6) Head-up displays, operation
(13) Maintenance BIT mode, operation
(WP020 00)
(WP041 00)
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
c. Functional operation (WP043 00).

(1) Radar electrical power function, 3. This WP describes the operation of mode
operation (WP024 00) selection and video display logic produced. Included
in mode selection is aircraft master mode selection,
(2) Transmitter drive, operation radar operating mode selection, and controls and
(WP026 00) indicators on the multipurpose display group that
affect mode selection.
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00) 4. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.

(4) Radar set receiving function, operation 5. Refer to WP012 00 for diagrams and video
(WP030 00) displays.
A1-F18AC-742-100
6. MODE SELECTION.
7. Pushbutton switch controls are on the left or
right digital display indicator (LDDI/RDDI),
depending on which indicator is selected to display
the radar attack display. During normal operating
conditions, the RDDI is used to display the radar
attack display.
8. The radar attack display is divided into tactical
and nontactical areas. The tactical area is a 4 inch
by 4 inch area inside the radar border. The
nontactical area is the 1/2-inch display area outside
the radar border. The nontactical display area is
reserved for calligraphic displays to identify
pushbutton switches or hands on throttle and stick
(HOTAS) selections available.
9. The mode or mode option labeled next to a
pushbutton in the nontactical display area indicates
the function of that pushbutton. With different
radar mode displays, the function of a pushbutton
changes with exception of the MENU option.
Pressing a pushbutton selects the option labeled
next to the pushbutton.
10. When the acquisition cursor is positioned into
the nontactical display area (HOTAS area),
acronyms of the selections available are displayed.
HOTAS selection is done by positioning the
acquisition cursor on the acronym using the throttle
designator control (TDC) and pressing and releasing
the TDC. When the TDC is released, the selection
is commanded and in most cases, the acquisition
cursor is stowed in the upper left quadrant of the
display by the mission computer system (MC)
(WP012 00, figure 2, sheet 2).
11. When an option or mode is selected on the
display (by either pushbutton or HOTAS), normally
the MC commands the radar to do the selected
command and then reads the radar mode data to
verify the radar has changed modes before the MC
changes the display.
12. The displays on the LDDI and RDDI are
selected by pressing the MENU pushbutton switch
to select either the TAC (tactical) or SUPT
(support) MENU displays. Refer to Selected Menu
Displays (WP012 00). The center pushbutton switch
at the bottom of the two displays is always labeled
MENU. Pressing the MENU switch replaces the
radar display (or any other sensor display) with the
TAC MENU display. The TAC MENU display lists
the displays available depending on the systems
011 03
Page 3
operating/installed or weapons selected. Pressing
the MENU switch on the TAC MENU display
replaces the TAC MENU display with the SUPT
MENU display. The SUPT MENU display lists the
displays available depending on the systems
operating/installed or weapons selected.
13. The required display can then be selected by
pressing the applicable switch. Pressing the BIT
pushbutton switch on the SUPT MENU display
gives the BIT control display. Pressing the RDR
ATTK pushbutton switch on the TAC MENU
display gives a radar attack display.
14. There are three primary aircraft master modes
in which the radar set provides data for the
displays. These are:
a. Air to air (A/A) aircraft master mode
b. Air to ground (A/G) aircraft master mode
c. Navigation (Nav) aircraft master mode.
15. A/A AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE. In A/A
aircraft master mode, the A/A radar modes
available are:
a. Range While Search (RWS)
b. Velocity Search (VS)
c. Track While Scan (TWS)
d. Single Target Track (STT)
e. Raid Assessment (RAID)
f. Automatic and Manual Acquisition.
16. A/A aircraft master mode is selected by the A/A
switch on the master arm control panel assembly or
by selecting an A/A weapon with the A/A weapon
select switch on the aircraft controller grip
assembly.
17. If A/A aircraft master mode is entered with no
weapon selected, the MC initializes sidewinder as
the selected weapon and RWS as the radar mode.
18. Multi-Source Integration. The digital data
computer accomplishes multi-source integration
(MSI) by taking trackfile information from various
sensors and combining the various associated
trackfiles into MSI trackfiles. The radar system,
A1-F18AC-742-100
forward looking infrared (FLIR) system, data link,
high-speed antiradiation (HARM) missile, and
overlay controlled stores (OCS) are used to provide
sensor inputs to MSI. The MSI mechanization is
operational in A/A and NAV aircraft master modes.
MSI displays are selected from the TAC MENU
and are made up of the below:
a. radar attack display
b. azimuth/elevation display
c. situation awareness display.
19. Azimuth/Elevation Display. Refer to
Azimuth/Elevation Display Diagram (WP015 00).
Pressing the AZ/EL pushbutton on the TAC
MENU display selects the azimuth/elevation
(AZ/EL) display. The AZ/EL display can also be
selected by moving the aircraft controller grip
assembly sensor control switch towards the LDDI if
the display on the LDDI does not currently have
and can not receive TDC priority. When the aircraft
controller grip assembly sensor switch is used to
select this display, TDC priority is automatically
assigned to it. The AZ/EL display is only available
in A/A aircraft master mode. It provides an azimuth
versus elevation view of MSI targets to improve
total situation awareness. Modification of sensor
scan patterns, display of sensor field of view,
display expansion, and sensor selection are all
provided by this display. This display can also be
expanded around the L and S target by pressing the
EXP pushbutton. Refer to Expanded
Azimuth/Elevation (AZ/EL) Display Diagram
(WP015 00). The top 6% of the tactical display area
is the angle only track (AOT) zone. Angle tracks are
displayed in the AOT zone.
20. Situation Awareness Display. Pressing the SA
pushbutton on the TAC MENU display selects the
situation awareness (sa) display. The sa display is
available in A/A and NAV aircraft master modes.
Available sensors and their field of view cues are
displayed along with cues to indicate the tactical
area of each. Pressing the SENSR pushbutton on
the sa display allows the selection of contributors to
MSI. All sensors are initially selected as
contributors to MSI and their pushbutton options
are boxed to indicate this. An X covering a sensor’s
pushbutton option indicates the sensor is not
on/installed. When a sensor’s pushbutton option is
not boxed, that sensor is not contributing to MSI.
011 03
Page 4
21. Radar Attack Display. Pressing the
RDR ATTK pushbutton on the TAC MENU
display selects the radar attack display. The radar
attack display is also selected by moving the aircraft
controller grip assembly sensor control switch
towards the RDDI if the display on the RDDI does
not currently have and can not receive TDC
priority. When the aircraft controller grip assembly
sensor control switch is used to select this display,
TDC priority is automatically assigned to it. The
radar attack display is available in A/A and NAV
aircraft master modes. The top 6% of the tactical
display area is the angle only track (AOT) zone.
Angle tracks are displayed in the AOT zone. The
radar attack display provides pushbutton options
and cues used to operate the radar system. Some of
the pushbutton options are HOTAS available. The
trackfiles displayed on the radar attack display are
MSI trackfiles which are made by the digital data
computer using all reported sensor targets. Also
displayed on this display are the radar raw hits.
22. A/A Pushbutton Switch Controls. Refer to
Mode Selection Block Diagram (WP012 00).
23. Mode Select. The MC initializes the radar to
RWS. Consecutive pressing of the mode pushbutton
switch selects TWS, and RWS again. If a mode has
failed, an X is placed covering mode acronym.
24. The RTS (return to search) mode (RTS VS,
RTS RWS, RTS TWS, RTS GACQ) is displayed at
the mode pushbutton switch with the radar in STT
or STT RAID. The RTS mode is changed by
pressing the mode pushbutton switch or HOTAS.
25. Radar/Jammer Filter Priority. The RDR/JMR
option is provided if the digital data computer
determines a electronic countermeasures set is on
board. The RDR or JMR part of the option is
boxed to indicate which filter priority is selected.
Radar priority is automatically selected for
AMRAAM or sparrow missile launches or if manual
channel radar operation is selected. Selection of
jammer priority causes auto channel radar operation
to be selected. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 17C
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), JAMMER ON will be
displayed on the upper part of the MPD when JMR
is selected and boxed.
26. Pulse - Repetition Frequency (PRF) Select.
PRF is initialized by the MC to interleaved (INTL).
Pressing the PRF switch selects high (HI), medium
(MED), or INTL prf. If 5 nmi range is selected in
A1-F18AC-742-100
RWS or 5/10 nmi ranges selected in TWS, the radar
switches to medium prf and the prf is not available.
Pulse doppler illumination (PDI) is displayed when
a sparrow missile is selected and radar is tracking
exclusively in PDI.
27. Instantaneous prf. While operating in INTL
mode, an instantaneous prf indication is displayed
directly above the INTL selection. This shows the
currently active prf.
28. Expand Select. EXP option is displayed in STT
(not STT RAID), TWS, or SCAN RAID when all
the below conditions exist:
a. a range resolved or angle only track (AOT)
L and S target exists.
b. L and S target range is greater than 5 nmi
or L and S target is an AOT target.
c. L and S target is within the tactical area.
29. Selecting the EXP option causes the radar
attack display to be expanded about the L and S
target. The radar freezes the B-sweep at the
azimuth of the L and S target based on a 140°
azimuth scale. The radar scales all raw hit data
relative to the L and S target. The display is
expanded in azimuth only for an AOT L and S
target or in both azimuth and range for a range
resolved L and S target. Automatic range scale
adjustment is enabled at expand mode entry. For
an AOT L and S target, manual range scale
adjustment remains selected. Expand mode will be
exited when any of the below conditions exist:
a. EXP pushbutton pressed.
b. sparrow missile is launched.
c. L and S target range is less than 5 nmi.
d. L and S target exits the tactical area.
e. L and S target no longer exists.
f. RSET pushbutton pressed.
30. The expand display for a range resolved
L and S target represents 20° in azimuth by 10
nmi of range centered about the L and S target. All
launch zones are removed from the expand display.
However, launch zones are still computed and
applicable. SHOOT and IN RNG cues are displayed
011 03
Page 5
at the bottom center of the expand display when
they are applicable. Track files that fall outside the
expanded display area are displayed along the
perimeter at their relative location from the
L and S target. As the L and S target is bumped
from track file to track file the expand display
adjusts about the new L and S target.
31. The expand display for an AOT L and S target
represents 20° in azimuth with a selected range
scale. The L and S target is displayed at the center
of the AOT zone. Range resolved targets are
positioned in azimuth relative to the L and S
target and in range with respect to the selected
range scale. Launch zones continue to be displayed.
32. Azimuth (AZ) Scan Select. The scan switch
provides selection of AZ sector scan patterns of 20°,
40°, 60°, 80°, and 140°. Each pressing of the switch
selects the next higher scan. If 140° scan is being
used and the scan switch is pressed, 20° AZ scan is
selected. The scan width selected is also indicated
by the B-sweep travel along the AZ grid. In RWS
the radar does not make trackfiles if the selected
EL bar/azimuth scans are: 4B/40°, 6B/80°, or
6B/140°.
33. Channel (CHAN) Select. If the CHAN select
switch is pressed, it is relabeled AUTO/MAN and
the DATA switch is relabeled with the last RF
channel or channel set selected.
34. Consecutive pressing of the AUTO/MAN switch
alternates the selection of AUTO (frequency agility)
or MAN (single RF channel) operation. AUTO
channel operation is automatically selected if any of
the below occurs:
a. transitioning to A/A or to A/G aircraft
master mode
b. gun is selected with the A/A weapon select
switch
c. at MC power up with weight on wheels
d. MC2 fails
e. radar processing requires frequency agility.
If AUTO is selected, AUTO is boxed. If MAN is
selected, MAN is boxed.
35. When AUTO is boxed, the RF channel set that
is selected is displayed. Pressing the RF channel set
A1-F18AC-742-100
switch increments the channel set to the next
higher channel set. The channel sets are A, B, C, D,
E, F, G, and *. The channel set letters and their
corresponding channel numbers are:
a. A = 13, 21, and 29
b. B = 9 and 25
c. C = 11 and 27
d. D = 7, 15, and 23
e. E = 6, 22, and 30
f. F = 10 and 26
g. G = 12, 20, and 28
h. * = 6, 7, 9 through 13, 15, 20 through 23, and
25 through 30.
36. When MAN is boxed, the RF channel and its
corresponding channel set letter that is selected is
displayed. The channel set letter is displayed only
for reference to the applicable AUTO channel set
that would be selected if AUTO is selected. Pressing
the RF channel increments the RF channel to the
next higher RF channel. The manually available RF
channels and corresponding set letters are: 6E, 7D,
9B, 10F, 11C, 12G, 13A, 15D, 20G, 21A, 22E, 23D,
25B, 26F, 27C, 28G, 29A, and 30E.
37. If the RF channel or set selected is not equal to
the radar operating channel, the RF channel or set
selected is not displayed. If neither AUTO/MAN
nor RF channel is pressed after 5 seconds, the
switch labels revert to CHAN and DATA.
38. Silent (SIL) Select. SIL is boxed if selected.
When selected, it inhibits radar transmission,
provides passive radar processing of received
signals, and freezes the display. For silent operation,
including QUICK LOOK and STOW pushbutton
options, see A1-F18AC-742-150/(C). If the ACTIVE
pushbutton switch is selected the radar transmits
for one antenna frame and the display is updated.
When the ACTIVE option is selected by HOTAS,
the acquisition cursor remains in its existing
position and does not return to the stowed position.
This enables ACTIVE to be reselected without
moving the acquisition cursor again.
39. Silent is deselected by pressing the boxed SIL
pushbutton switch. Silent is not available if:
011 03
Page 6
a. ACM condition exists.
b. FLOOD pushbutton option is selected.
c. RWS submode selected.
40. AOT Select. AOT is available when the radar is
in full active STT on the MSI L and S target and
SIM mode is selected on the stores display
(WP015 00). Pressing the AOT pushbutton switch
causes the below:
a. AOT option to box when selected and unbox
when not selected.
b. digital data computer to process MSI
L and S target as an AOT target.
The digital data computer ignores range and
velocity inputs from the radar and starts passive
ranging functions on the MSI L and S target using
angle inputs only. This option provides practice
with angle only track targets and passive ranging.
41. Reset (RSET) Select. RSET is available when
the radar is not in acquisition or flood. Pressing the
RSET pushbutton switch causes the below:
a. deselects RAID.
b. deselects EXP.
c. deselects BIAS scan centering.
d. deselects second designated (DT2) target.
e. enables automatic range scale adjustment
(ARSA).
RSET is boxed for 2 seconds after it is selected.
42. With the radar in STT and RSET selected, the
radar STT target is designated as the L and S
target and the L and S designation is removed
from any previously selected target. If radar is not
in STT and FLIR is in autotrack and RSET is
selected then the FLIR autotrack target is
designated as the L and S target and the L and S
designation is removed from any previously selected
target. If RSET is selected with no sensor in track
the L and S target designation is removed from
any previously selected target and not reassigned
until a manual designation is entered or the
undesignate switch is pressed.
43. Set (SET) Select. SET is available only when
the below conditions are met:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. A/A aircraft master mode selected..
b. RWS is operating radar mode without RWS
submode selected..
c. A/A missile selected.
44. The parameters listed below can be changed
from the initialized MC settings when an A/A
missile is selected. They are:
a. target aging.
b. elevation bar.
c. azimuth scan.
d. prf.
e. range scale.
45. The parameters can be changed by being in
RWS, selecting an A/A missile, changing the above
parameters to new values, then pressing the SET
pushbutton. When SET is selected, the SET legend
is boxed for two seconds indicating that the new
parameters have been stored. The parameters
remain as the initialized parameters until new
parameters are set or with weight on wheels and
aircraft power is shut down.
46. Automatic/Manual (AUTO/MAN) Scan
Centering Select. This option is used to select either
automatic or manual scan centering in TWS only.
Either AUTO or MAN is selected and boxed.
47. AUTO is initialized when entering TWS from
STT. With AUTO selected, the azimuth and
elevation scans and scan center are positioned
automatically to display as many track files as
possible.
48. Bias scan centering allows the radar scan
center to be moved while maintaining TWS track
files. Positioning the acquisition cursor in the
desired area with no targets under the cursor and
then pressing and releasing the TDC causes a new
scan center about the cursor. A boxed BIAS legend
replaces the boxed AUTO legend. During bias scan
centering L and S target and DT2 target, are
maintained within 5° of the scan limits and at the
same time biased toward the inserted heading by
shifting the scan center. Bias scan centering is
deselected when any of the below conditions exist:
a. platform heading and bias heading differ by
more than 90°.
011 03
Page 7
b. RSET is selected.
c. TWS is deselected.
d. RAID is selected.
e. MAN scan centering is selected.
f. a track file no longer exists.
49. MAN is initialized when entering TWS from
either RWS or VS. With MAN selected, the scan
center can only be changed manually using HOTAS
controls.
50. To change the azimuth center, the TDC is
pressed with the acquisition cursor in the azimuth
select area and the acquisition cursor is centered on
the display. With the TDC pressed, the acquisition
cursor is moved either left or right with the TDC.
When the TDC is released, the position of the
acquisition cursor becomes the new azimuth center.
51. With MAN selected, the elevation scan center
can be changed using HOTAS controls. The radar
elevation control switch on the right throttle grip is
used to move the scan center in elevation.
52. Scan size with MAN selected is done with the
elevation bar scan select pushbutton. Refer to
elevation bar scan select (This WP).
53. Manual Range Scale Adjustment. The range
scale is manually controlled by using the range
increment and decrement switches. These are
labeled with arrows pointing up and down,
respectively. Pressing the range increment switch
selects the next higher range scale. Pressing the
range decrement switch selects the next lower range
scale.
54. Automatic Range Scale Adjustment. Automatic
range scale control is enabled when the radar is
operating in STT, or if the RSET pushbutton
switch is pressed. If the L and S, DT2, or STT
target has a valid range and is within the tactical
area, then it is used as a range scale control target.
The digital data computer automatically adjusts the
range scale so that the furthest range scale control
target is displayed at between 40% and 90%of the
selected range scale. When the display is expanded
about a range resolved L and S target, the digital
data computer dynamically adjusts the range scale
so that the L and S target range is at the center
and the display range limits are that range ±5 nmi.
A1-F18AC-742-100
Automatic range scale control increments and
decrements the range scale in STT, but only
increments the range scale in TWS. If the range
scale is manually adjusted then automatic range
scale control is disabled until the RSET pushbutton
switch is pressed.
55. The range scales available are 5, 10, 20, 40, 80
and 160 nmi. If the 5 nmi range scale is selected,
pressing the range decrement switch has no effect.
If 160 nmi range scale is selected, pressing the range
increment switch has no effect.
56. In RAID, range selection is not available and
the arrows are removed from the display. In VS,
two velocity scales are available; 2400 knots and 800
knots. When VS is entered, 2400 knot scale is
initialized.
57. The selected range scale or velocity scale is
displayed above the range increment pushbutton
switch. The range scale is initialized at different
ranges depending on the mode or weapon selected.
58. TWS Option Select. This option is available
only in STT with sidewinder or sparrow selected
and sparrow is not inflight. Pressing the TWS
switch changes the radar mode to TWS and exits
the ACM condition.
59. Active Select. ACTIVE is displayed when SIL
has been selected. Pressing ACTIVE updates the
display for one radar antenna scan.
60. Flood Select. FLOOD option is displayed when
radar is in STT and a sparrow missile is inflight
and is being supported with PDI. The FLOOD
option is removed when selected or when sparrow
maximum time of flight expires.
61. Erase Select. Pressing ERASE commands the
radar set to erase the existing target aging on the
display. During silent operation, this option erases
the frozen display. ERASE is available in VS and
RWS.
62. Hits Select. At mission computer power up with
weight on wheels, the HITS option is initialized as
selected (boxed). This option provides search type
‘‘raw hit’’ target symbols on the radar display when
the radar operating mode is TWS. The raw hit
symbols are displayed at a lower intensity level than
track file symbols at the same selected target aging.
63. Elevation Bar Scan Select. This option provides
selection of antenna scans in elevation (el).
011 03
Page 8
Consecutive pressing of the switch selects 1B, 2B,
4B, or 6B. In TWS, 1B is not available and
selecting the el bar assigns the azimuth scan if
manual scan centering is selected. In TWS auto
scan centering the radar is able to provide 3B and
5B el bar scans when it is beneficial, independent of
the digital data computer commanded el bar scan.
When the radar is doing a 3B or 5B el bar scan, it
indicates 4B or 6B to the digital data computer
respectively. In RWS the radar does not make
trackfiles if the selected el bar/azimuth scans are:
4B/40°, 6B/80°, or 6B/140°.
64. The TWS azimuth scans possible with each EL
bar are:
a. 2B selects 80°, 60°, 40°, or 20° AZ scan.
b. 4B selects 40° or 20° AZ scan.
c. 6B selects 20° AZ scan.
The largest azimuth scan is automatically selected
unless a smaller azimuth scan had been previously
selected.
65. In RWS or VS with 5 nmi range scale selected,
el bar spacing is 4.2°. In TWS with 2B selected, the
el bar spacing is 2°. El bar selection is not available
in STT or STT RAID. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 09C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the current elevation bar
number is displayed directly to the right of the
elevation bar select.
66. RWS Submode Select. The MODE pushbutton
switch selects the RWS submodes of VSRWS,
VEC1, and VEC2. RWS submodes are only
available when radar operating mode is RWS.
67. Data Select. This option selects and deselects
the A/A data sublevel display. Refer to A/A Data
Sublevel Display (WP015 00). This display provides
the capability to select the functions below:
a. low duty factor (LDF)
b. speed gate
c. ECCM
d. target aging
e. One-look RAID
f. color
A1-F18AC-742-100
g. multi-source integration (MSI)
h. latent TWS (LTWS)
i. declutter (DCLTR)
j. TRAIN
k. GHOST.
68. Low Duty Factor (LDF) Select. This option
commands the radar to low duty factor operation.
69. Speed Gate Select. The speed gate is initialized
to normal (NORM). Pressing the speed gate switch
selects wide (WIDE) or NORM speed gate. If
WIDE is selected, only fast moving targets are
displayed. If NORM is selected, medium and fast
moving targets are displayed. Speed gate selection is
available in RWS, VS, and TWS only.
70. ECCM Select. Refer to ECCM Displays,
A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
71. Target Aging Select. This option selects the
time in seconds that targets are stored on the
display. Repeat pressing of the switch commands 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 second storage, then back to 2
seconds. The selected target aging time is displayed
below the switch.
72. Target aging options are available in VS, RWS,
and TWS. In TWS, target aging is available for
unfiled targets and fixed at 2 seconds for filed
targets .
73. One-Look RAID Select. One-look RAID is
initially enabled at power up with weight on wheels.
When one-look RAID is enabled and the radar is in
STT then one-look RAID processing is started and
the 1LOOK part of the 1LOOK RAID option is
boxed. One-look RAID processing produces
trackfiles for targets in close proximity to the STT
target and sends these to the mission computer for
display. Pressing the boxed 1LOOK RAID option
disables one-look RAID processing in STT.
One-look RAID processing is done in RAID
independent of the selection of the 1LOOK RAID
option.
74. Color Select. This option enables color for the
top eight priority targets and the target under the
acquisition cursor. When selected, The HAFU
symbol, mach number, altitude, aspect vector,
acceleration vector, and rank number or symbol are
011 03
Page 9
all colored. The target identification determines the
color. Friendly targets are green, hostile targets are
red, and unknown targets are yellow. The
acquisition cursor and altitude coverage values are
yellow. Low priority target symbols are also colored.
This color is also determined by target
identification, as explained above.
75. MSI Select. The MSI option is always displayed
on the A/A data sublevel display. MSI is only
applicable with the radar operating in the RWS
mode. Selection of the MSI option allows the digital
data computer to display HAFU symbols for MSI
trackfiles that have other than radar contribution.
In RWS mode HAFU symbols are not displayed on
the radar attack display for MSI trackfiles that are
only supported by the radar (radar only MSI
trackfiles). The only indication of a radar only MSI
trackfile is the radar raw hit or acquisition point
cue. Deselecting MSI causes HAFU symbols to be
displayed only for the L and S target, radar only
MSI trackfiles under the acquisition cursor (LTWS
selected), and trackfiles under AMRAAM attack.
76. Latent TWS (LTWS) Select. The LTWS option
is always displayed on the A/A data sublevel
display. LTWS option is initially boxed, indicating
LTWS is selected. LTWS is only applicable with
the radar operating in the RWS mode. In RWS
mode HAFU symbols are not displayed on the radar
attack display for MSI trackfiles that are only
supported by the radar (radar only MSI trackfiles).
The only indication of a radar only MSI trackfile is
the radar raw hit or acquisition point cue. Selection
of the LTWS option allows the digital data
computer to display a HAFU symbol for a radar
only MSI trackfile that is under the acquisition
cursor. If the MSI trackfile under the acquisition
cursor is one of the top eight priority MSI trackfiles
the digital data computer displays launch zones if
two sets of launch zones are not already displayed.
Pressing the boxed LTWS option deselects LTWS
and unboxes the LTWS option. When LTWS is not
selected the hidden radar only MSI trackfile HAFU
symbol is not displayed when the acquisition cursor
is placed on it. The altitude of a radar raw hit
under the acquisition cursor is displayed to the
right of the acquisition cursor independent of
LTWS selection.
77. Declutter (DCLTR) 1/2 Select. There are two
levels of declutter while operating in an A/A radar
mode. Pressing the DCLTR switch selects and
displays DCLTR 1 and removes the artificial
horizon and velocity vector. Pressing DCLTR 1
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 03
Page 10

selects and displays DCLTR 2. DCLTR 2 removes 82. A/A HOTAS Controls. Refer to Mode Selection
the below from the display in TWS and STT: Block Diagram (WP012 00).

a. relative altitude 83. The HOTAS controls during A/A aircraft

master mode that control radar operation are:
b. closing velocity value from the L and S
target a. throttle designator control (TDC)

c. launch zones from the DT2 target b. radar elevation control

c. HARM target sequence/FLIR fov/RAID

d. tracked target heading.
switch
78. TRAIN select. Selection of this training option d. undesignate/nose wheel steer switch and on
disables frequency diversity during VS, RWS, and F/A-18D undesignate switch
TWS. This option is initialized as selected
(frequency diversity disabled) at power up with e. sensor control switch
weight on wheels. The pushbutton legend shall be
unboxed when the radar indicates frequency f. air to air weapon select switch
diversity is enabled.
g. cage/uncage switch.
79. GHOST select. Initialized as enabled (boxed),
the GHOST option displays the last known position 84. Throttle Designator Control (TDC). The TDC
of an L and S target for up to 30 seconds after the is used for HOTAS display controls. When the TDC
L and S target is dropped from the radar display positions the acquisition cursor in the nontactical
because of radar gimbal limits. This ghost target is display area and the cursor brackets the display
functionally not an MSI trackfile, and so cannot option and the TDC is pressed and released, the
come back if the target is reacquired. The newly option is commanded. The HOTAS display options
acquired target is displayed as an independent available are:
trackfile. The ghost target is displayed as a yellow
L and S star, with an altitude readout displayed to a. mode select
the right of the star.
b. prf select
80. ACM Select. When the sensor control switch is c. azimuth scan select
positioned forward or GUN is selected by the A/A
weapon select switch, the ACM condition is entered. d. reset select
In this condition the sensor switch is configured to
command the ACM modes (WACQ, AACQ , FACQ, e. set select
VACQ). During the ACM condition a boxed ACM is
displayed in place of the SIL option. The ACM f. range increment/range decrement select
option is temporarily removed during the HOTAS
selection of el bar. If GUN is not selected, pressing g. erase select
the ACM pushbutton deselects the ACM condition.
When ACM is deselected the sensor control switch h. active select
returns to its TDC assignment configuration and
the SIL option replaces the boxed ACM. The radar i. hits select
is commanded to return to search if it was in
j. AUTO/MAN scan centering select
acquisition.
k. elevation bar scan select
81. Angle Only Track (AOT) Zone. The top 6% of
the tactical area in all A/A radar modes is the AOT l. angle only track select.
zone or dugout. All AOT targets are displayed in
this zone. No radar raw hits are displayed in this 85. For a description of each selection listed above,
zone. The upper azimuth marks start at the bottom refer to each item under A/A pushbutton switch
edge of the AOT zone. controls, this WP.
A1-F18AC-742-100
86. The MENU, CHAN, DATA, MODE, SIL, and
EXP options cannot be selected by HOTAS
controls using the TDC.
87. When the acquisition cursor is placed on a
radar raw hit, the closing velocity is displayed to
the left and the altitude is displayed to the right of
the acquisition cursor. When the TDC is pressed
and released with the acquisition cursor on a radar
raw hit the radar does one of the below:
a. commands manual acquisition in RWS and
VS.
b. makes a TWS trackfile for radar raw hit in
TWS.
c. redesignates target in STT RAID.
88. When the acquisition cursor is on a MSI
trackfile that is not a DT2 or L and S target and
the TDC is pressed and released then the digital
data computer does one of the below:
a. designates the MSI trackfile as the MSI
L and S target if no L and S target exists.
b. designates MSI trackfile as the DT2 target if
an L and S target already exists and removes any
previous DT2 designation.
89. When the acquisition cursor is on the DT2
target and the TDC is pressed and released, the
digital data computer designates the DT2 target as
the L and S target and undesignates the previous
L and S target. When the acquisition cursor is on
the L and S target which is not the radar STT
target and the TDC is pressed and released, the
digital data computer commands the radar to STT
on L and S target.
90. Radar Elevation Control. In RWS or VS, this
spring loaded potentiometer controls the radar
antenna elevation scan. In TWS with MAN scan
centering selected, the elevation scan center is
positioned with this potentiometer.
91. HARM Target Sequence/FLIR FOV/RAID
Switch. If the radar is operating in STT or TWS,
pressing this switch commands the radar to enter
RAID mode, or SCAN RAID mode, respectively.
While operating in RAID, pressing this switch
commands the radar to return to STT or TWS.
Selection of RAID causes deselection of SIL.
92. Undesignate/Nose Wheel Steer Switch. When
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch pressed and
011 03
Page 11
GUN is not the selected weapon then digital data
computer deselects the ACM condition. Switch
activation causes the digital data computer to
command return to search from TWS RAID,
AACQ, STT, acquisition, flood, or spotlight. When
radar is not operating in TWS RAID, AACQ, STT,
acquisition, flood, or spotlight and no MSI L and S
target exists then switch activation causes the rank
one MSI trackfile to be designated as the MSI
L and S target. If an L and S target already exists
then swap DT2 and L and S targets. If no DT2
target exists then step L and S designation to the
next lower ranking trackfile that is within the
tactical area when no DT2 target exists.
93. Sensor Control Switch. In A/A aircraft master
mode with TDC priority assigned to the radar
attack display and the sensor control switch moved
toward the radar attack display, then the digital
data computer commands the radar to do one of the
below:
a. start bump acquisition when the acquisition
cursor is on the radar STT MSI trackfile.
b. STT on MSI trackfile under acquisition
cursor and designate that MSI trackfile as the MSI
L and S target when the acquisition cursor is on a
non-radar L and S target.
c. AACQ when the acquisition cursor is not on
any MSI trackfile.
94. In A/A aircraft master mode with the radar
operating in RWS, TWS, or VS, this switch selects
four automatic acquisition modes after it is initially
positioned forward. The position of the switch and
the acquisition mode it selects are:
a. forward position selects boresight (BST),
configures the sensor switch to the ACM condition,
and a boxed ACM option replaces the SIL option
on the radar attack display. After track is entered
(STT), reselecting BST selects bump acquisition
(the radar rejects the track target, forms an
exclusion zone around it, and tries to lock on
another target for two seconds).
b. left position selects wide acquisition
(WACQ). WACQ operates in either caged or
uncaged mode.
c. right position selects long range automatic
acquisition (AACQ). If selected, the radar first
acquires any target under the acquisition cursor.
A1-F18AC-742-100
This is named fast acquisition (FACQ). If no target
is under the acquisition cursor, the nearest target in
range is acquired. After track is entered, reselecting
AACQ selects bump acquisition. If in TWS and
AACQ is selected, the radar transitions to STT on
the L and S target if no target is under the
acquisition cursor.
d. aft position selects vertical acquisition
(VACQ). After track is entered, reselecting VACQ
selects bump acquisition for two seconds.
95. BST, WACQ, and VACQ are called air combat
maneuvering (ACM) modes. The ACM modes are
considered to be short range automatic acquisition
modes while AACQ is a long range automatic
acquisition mode. If a further description of
automatic acquisition is needed, refer to target
acquisition operation, WP013 00.
96. Air to Air Weapon Select Switch. This switch
selects A/A weapons. If the radar is not in track and
a missile is selected, the radar is commanded to
RWS with the best parameters for the missile
selected.
97. If gun is selected and the radar is not in track,
GUN acquisition (GACQ) mode is commanded by
the MC and the sensor control switch is configured
to the ACM condition. GACQ is an automatic
acquisition mode. It acquires and tracks the first
target detected within the scan volume. The scan
volume covers the HUD field of view of 20°.
98. Range Increment/Range Decrement Select.
Another way to change the range scale with HOTAS
controls is described in this paragraph. If the
acquisition cursor is moved up out of the tactical
area and back into the tactical area within 0.8
second, the range scale is incremented one scale. If
the acquisition cursor is moved down out of the
tactical area and back into the tactical area within
0.8 second, the range scale is decremented one scale.
The scale wraps-around when either limit is
reached. If the 160 nmi range scale is displayed and
cursor is moved up then back into the tactical area,
the range scale is changed to 5 nmi. If the 5 nmi
range scale is displayed and cursor is moved down
then back into the tactical area, the range scale is
changed to 160 nmi.
99. Azimuth Scan Select - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 09C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Another way to change the
azimuth scan select with HOTAS controls is
011 03
Page 12
described in this paragraph. If the acquisition
cursor is moved right out of the tactical area and
back into the tactical area within 0.8 second, the
azimuth scan is incremented one scale. If the
acquisition cursor is moved left out of the tactical
area and back into the tactical area within 0.8
second, the azimuth scan is decremented one scale.
The scale wraps-around when either limit is
reached. If at the 140° azimuth scan scale and
cursor is moved right then back into the tactical
area, the azimuth scan scale is changed to 20°. If at
the 20° azimuth scan scale and cursor is moved left
then back into the tactical area, the azimuth scan
scale is changed to 140°.
100. The cage/uncage switch in the A/A aircraft
master mode with the sparrow missile selected,
commands the radar into STT on the L and S
target.
101. A/G AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE. In A/G
aircraft master mode, the A/G radar modes
available are:
a. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP)
b. Ground Moving Target (GMT)
c. Sea Surface Search (SEA)
d. Terrain Avoidance (TA)
e. Precision Velocity Update (PVU)
f. Air to Ground Ranging (AGR)
g. GMT-MAP
h. SEA-MAP
i. Doppler Beam Sharpened (DBS)
(1) Expand 1 (EXP1) Sector
(2) Expand 2 (EXP2) Patch
(3) Expand 3 (EXP3) Sar
j. Track:
(1) MAP-Fixed Target Track (FTT)
(2) GMT Track (GMTT)
(3) SEA Track (FTT)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(4) AGR Track
(5) EXP1, EXP2, EXP3 (FTT).
102. Also in A/G aircraft master mode, the A/A
radar modes available are:
a. Range While Search (RWS)
b. Velocity Search (VS).
103. A/G aircraft master mode is selected with the
A/G switch on the master arm control panel
assembly. When A/G aircraft mode is selected,
pushbutton switches and HOTAS controls can be
assigned to the radar.
104. The sensor select switch is used to assign the
TDC to the radar display. If the sensor control
switch is pressed to the right and the radar display
is on the RDDI, a TDC assignment indicator is
displayed on the display. This indicates that
HOTAS controls are available to select options on
the radar display.
105. A/G Pushbutton Switch Controls. Refer to
figure 2, Mode Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
106. Mode Select. The MC initializes the radar
mode to MAP. Consecutive pressing of the mode
select switch selects GMT, SEA, TA, and then
MAP again.
107. NAVMP Select. The NAVMP pushbutton
switch selects the real beam navigation ground map
mode. This mode is available when the radar is
operating in MAP, SEA-MAP, or GMT-MAP mode.
108. Air (AIR) Select. If AIR is selected, the MC
commands the radar to RWS. In A/G aircraft
master mode, the only other A/A radar mode
available is VS, so pressing the mode select switch
selects VS and then RWS again. DCLTR 2 and the
SET option are not available. Automatic acquisition
modes and STT are not available.
109. Surf (SURF) Select. In A/G aircraft master
mode with an A/A radar display, the SURF option
is displayed. Pressing SURF returns the radar mode
to MAP with 40 nmi range selected.
110. Fast (FAST) Select. The FAST legend is
displayed when the radar is operating in either
EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 mode. Pressing the FAST
switch boxes the FAST legend and provides a rapid
011 03
Page 13
buildup of the DBS displays but resolution is
decreased. Without FAST selected, the buildup
time is approximately three times longer.
111. Azimuth Scan Select. The azimuth scan select
provides selection of AZ sector scan patterns of 20°,
45°, 90°, and 120°. Each time the switch is pressed,
the next higher scan is selected. If 120° scan is
selected, the next pressing of the scan switch selects
a 20° scan. All scan widths are not available in all
A/G radar modes.
112. Channel (CHAN) Select. If the CHAN select
switch is pressed, it is relabeled AUTO/MAN and
the DCLTR (declutter) switch is relabeled with the
last RF channel or channel set selected.
113. Consecutive pressing of the AUTO/MAN
switch alternates the selection of AUTO (frequency
agility) or MAN (single RF channel) operation. If
AUTO is selected, AUTO is boxed. If MAN is
selected, MAN is boxed.
114. When AUTO is boxed, the channel set that is
selected is displayed. Pressing the RF channel set
switch increments the channel set to the next
higher channel set. The channel sets are A, B, C, D,
E, F, G, and *. The channel set letters and their
corresponding channel numbers are:
a. A = 5, 13, 21, and 29
b. B = 9, 17, and 25
c. C = 11, 19, and 27
d. D = 7, 15, 23, and 31
e. E = 6, 14, 22, and 30
f. F = 10, 18, and 26
g. G = 4, 12, 20, and 28
h. * = 10 thru 13, 23, and 25 thru 27.
115. When MAN is boxed, the RF channel and its
corresponding channel set letter that is selected is
displayed. The channel set letter is displayed only
for reference to the applicable AUTO channel set
that would be selected if AUTO is selected. Pressing
the RF channel switch increments the RF channel
to the next higher RF channel. The manually
available RF channels and corresponding set letters
are: 04G, 05A, 06E, 07D, 09B, 10F, 11C, 12G, 13A,
A1-F18AC-742-100
14E, 15D, 17B, 18F, 19C, 20G, 21A, 22E, 23D, 25B,
26F, 27C, 28G, 29A, 30E, and 31D.
116. If the RF channel or set selected is not equal
to the radar operating channel, the RF channel or
set selected is not displayed. If neither AUTO/MAN
nor RF channel is pressed after five seconds, the
switch labels revert to CHAN and DCLTR.
117. AUTO channel operation is automatically
selected if any of the below occurs:
a. TA mode selected
b. transitioning to A/A or to A/G
c. at MC power up with weight on wheels
d. MC 2 fails
e. radar processing requires frequency agility.
118. Silent (SIL) Select. SIL is boxed when
selected. When selected, it:
a. freezes the video display of the last antenna
scan.
b. inhibits radar transmission.
c. has the radar provide passive processing of
received signals.
d. displays ACTIVE switch label.
e. boxes FRZ.
119. When the boxed SIL switch is pressed, the
radar resumes normal operation and the switches
revert to their initial identity. Silent is not available
in PVU or TA. If the radar mode is changed with
silent selected, the video is blanked.
120. Reset (RSET) Select. Pressing the RSET
switch initializes video gain, pencil or fan beam, and
antenna elevation angle for the selected range and
existing aircraft altitude. RSET is available in
MAP, SEA, GMT, EXP1, EXP2, and EXP3,
provided that no offset aimpoint (OAP) or target
designation has taken place.
121. Freeze (FRZ) Select. If FRZ is selected and
SIL is not boxed, the display is frozen and FRZ is
boxed. If reselected, FRZ is unboxed and the
display is updated normally. Selecting FRZ (with
SIL not selected) does not stop radar transmissions.
011 03
Page 14
122. When silent is selected, selection of the boxed
FRZ option commands the radar to blank the video
in the tactical display area and the box is removed
around FRZ. Video is not displayed until an active
scan is done either by selection of the ACTIVE
option or until silent is deselected. The FRZ option
is available in all modes except TA, PVU, and AGR.
123. Range Increment and Decrement Select. The
range increment and decrement switches have
arrows pointing up and down next to them,
respectively. Pressing the range increment switch
selects the next higher range scale. Pressing the
range decrement switch selects the next lower range
scale.
124. Range scales available are 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, and
160 nmi. If the 5 nmi range scale is selected,
pressing the range decrement switch has no effect.
If 160 nmi range scale is selected, pressing the range
increment switch has no effect. The range scale is
wrapped around when either limit is reached. If at
160 nmi scale and the increment switch is pressed,
range scale is changed to 5 nmi. If at 5 nmi scale
and the decrement switch pushbutton is pressed,
range scale is changed to 160 nmi.
125. Range increment and decrement options are
available in MAP, SEA, GMT, and TA modes.
Range increment and decrement are not available if
an OAP or a target is designated because the MC
increments/decrements the range scale
automatically if the OAP or target designation
exceeds 93 percent/45 percent of the range scale.
126. The selected range scale is displayed above
the range increment scale. Range scales available in
each of the A/G radar modes are:
a. TA - 5 and 10 nmi
b. MAP - all available
c. GMT - 5, 10, 20, and 40 nmi
d. SEA - all available
e. GMT-MAP - 5, 10, 20, and 40 nmi
f. SEA-MAP - all available.
127. Active Select. ACTIVE is displayed when SIL
has been selected. Pressing ACTIVE updates the
display for one radar antenna scan.
128. Pencil/Fan (PEN/FAN) Beam Select. Manual
selection of the fan or pencil beam is done by
A1-F18AC-742-100
consecutive pressing of the PEN/FAN pushbutton
switch in MAP, SEA, GMT, and EXP1 modes.
Beam selection is indicated by boxing the PEN or
FAN portion of the PEN/FAN option. The
PEN/FAN option is displayed in MAP, SEA, GMT,
EXP1, EXP2, and EXP3 modes. Automatic
selection of the fan or pencil beam is done by the
Computer-Power Supply AN/APG-65 if manual
selection is not attempted or if the RSET
pushbutton switch is pressed. Any A/G radar mode
change resets the beam override command to
AUTO, and the MC determines beam shape until
manual selection is made. In MAP, SEA, and GMT
modes, FAN is automatically selected if the
elevation angle of the antenna is greater than 5.5°
down. In EXP1 mode, FAN is automatically
selected if the angular amount of the ground
coverage is greater than 5.5°. In EXP2 and EXP3
modes, PEN is boxed and FAN cannot be selected.
129. Expand 1/Expand 2/Expand 3 (EXP1, EXP2,
EXP3) Select. EXP1, 2, and 3 DBS options are
displayed when the radar is operating in the MAP
mode. Selection of EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 while in
the MAP mode with no OAP or target designated
removes the acquisition cursor from the display and
the EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 indicator is
superimposed on the MAP display. These display
modes are called MAP W/SECTOR, MAP
W/PATCH, and MAP W/SAR, respectively. The
TDC is used to position the indicator on the
display. When the TDC is pressed and released, the
area inside the indicator is expanded and displayed
and the applicable EXP mode pushbutton switch
that was pressed is boxed.
130. Selection of EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 while in
the MAP mode with an OAP or target designated
commands the applicable EXP mode to be entered
and the applicable EXP mode pushbutton switch
that was pressed is boxed. The OAP or target
designation area is expanded on the display.
131. When operating in EXP1 mode (EXP1 boxed)
and either EXP2 or EXP3 mode switch is pressed
with no OAP or target designated, the applicable
expand indicator is superimposed on the EXP1
display. The TDC is used to position the indicator
on the display. When the TDC is pressed and
released, the area inside the indicator is expanded
and displayed and the applicable EXP mode
pushbutton switch that was pressed is boxed. The
same mechanization occurs when operating in
EXP2 and EXP3 is selected.
011 03
Page 15
132. When operating in EXP1 mode (EXP1 boxed)
and either EXP2 or EXP3 mode switch is pressed
with an OAP or target designated, then the
applicable EXP mode is entered and the applicable
EXP mode pushbutton switch is boxed. The OAP
or target designation area is expanded on the
display. The same mechanization occurs when
operating in EXP2 and EXP3 is selected.
133. When operating in EXP3 mode (EXP3 boxed)
and either EXP1 or EXP2 mode switch is pressed,
the applicable mode is entered and the EXP switch
that was pressed is boxed. The same mechanization
occurs when operating in EXP2 and EXP1 is
selected.
134. Interleave (INTL) Select. When GMT or SEA
is the operating mode, the EXP1 switch is relabeled
INTL and EXP2 and EXP3 switch labels are
blanked. During GMT mode, selection of INTL
superimposes synthetic moving targets on the MAP
display (GMT-MAP). During SEA mode, selection
of INTL superimposes synthetic SEA targets on the
MAP display (SEA-MAP).
135. Data Select. This option selects and deselects
the A/G data sublevel display. This display provides
the capability to select map gain increase/decrease
and declutter (DCLTR).
136. Map Gain Increase/Decrease Select. Displayed
in A/G aircraft master mode when radar system is
in acquisition and not track and radar operating
mode is MAP, EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3. Also GMT
or SEA if interleave (INTL) is selected. Pressing
map gain increase or decrease pushbutton switch
controls the gain of the radar map display.
137. Declutter (DCLTR) Select. Pressing the
DCLTR switch boxes DCLTR and removes the
artificial horizon line and velocity vector from the
display.
138. A/G HOTAS Controls. Refer to figure 2,
Mode Selection Block Diagram, WP012 00.
139. The HOTAS controls during A/G aircraft
master mode that control radar mode selection are:
a. throttle designator control (TDC)
b. radar elevation control
c. sensor control switch.
A1-F18AC-742-100
d. undesignate/nose wheel steer switch and on
F/A-18D undesignate switch.
140. Throttle Designator Control (TDC). If
assigned to the radar display, the TDC is used for
HOTAS display controls. When the TDC positions
the acquisition cursor in the nontactical display
area and the cursor brackets the display option and
the TDC is pressed and released, the option is
commanded. The HOTAS display options available
are:
a. mode select.
b. map gain increase/decrease select.
c. air select.
d. surf select.
e. azimuth scan select.
f. silent select.
g. reset select.
h. range increment/range decrement select.
i. active select.
j. pencil/fan beam select.
k. EXP1/EXP2/EXP3 select.
l. interleave select.
141. For a description of each selection listed
above, refer to each item under A/G pushbutton
switch controls, this WP.
142. The MENU and CHAN options cannot be
selected by HOTAS controls using the TDC.
143. In MAP, SEA, and GMT, manual radar
designation occurs if the acquisition cursor is in the
tactical display area and the TDC is pressed and
released. When the TDC is pressed, the acquisition
cursor is blanked and the in-video cursor is
displayed. When the TDC is released, a stabilized
cue is displayed where the in-video cursor
intersected.
144. After manual radar designation has taken
place, the range increment/range decrement arrows
and reset options are removed from the display and
011 03
Page 16
the radar antenna elevation control cannot be
adjusted either by pushbutton or HOTAS controls.
145. Range Increment/Range Decrement Select.
Another way to change the range scale with HOTAS
controls is described in this paragraph. If the
acquisition cursor is moved up out of the tactical
area and back into the tactical area within 0.8
second, the range scale is incremented one scale. If
the acquisition cursor is moved down out of the
tactical area and back into the tactical area within
0.8 second, the range scale is decremented one scale.
The scale wraps-around when either limit is
reached. If at the 160 nmi range scale and cursor is
moved up then back into the tactical area, the range
scale is changed to 5 nmi. If at the 5 nmi range
scale and cursor is moved down then back into the
tactical area, the range scale is changed to 160 nmi.
This option is available only when range
increment/range decrement arrows are displayed.
146. Azimuth Scan Select. Another way to change
the azimuth scan select with HOTAS controls is
described in this paragraph. if the acquisition cursor
is moved right out of the tactical area and back into
the tactical area within 0.8 second, the azimuth scan
is incremented one scale. If the acquisition cursor is
moved left out of the tactical area and back into the
tactical area within 0.8 second, the azimuth scan is
decremented one scale. The scale wraps-around
when either limit is reached. If at the 140° azimuth
scan scale and cursor is moved right then back into
the tactical area, the azimuth scan scale is changed
to 20°. If at the 20° azimuth scan scale and cursor
is moved left then back into the tactical area, the
azimuth scan scale is changed to 140°.
147. Radar Elevation Control. In MAP, GMT, or
SEA, this spring loaded potentiometer controls the
antenna in elevation. If manual radar designation
has taken place, it is not operable.
148. Sensor Control Switch. In A/G aircraft master
mode, this switch is used to assign the TDC to a
sensor/display.
149. If the radar is being displayed on the RDDI
and the sensor control switch is pressed to the right,
the TDC is assigned to the radar and a TDC
assignment indicator is displayed. If the sensor
control switch is pressed again to the right, the
radar is commanded to acquisition, and when
released, the radar is commanded to track.
A1-F18AC-742-100
150. If a designation has previously taken place, the
radar goes to track on the designation. If track is
commanded and no previous designation has taken
place, track is commanded at the position of the
in-video cursor. The in-video cursor can be slewed
using the TDC with the sensor control switch still
held to the right.
151. If the sensor control switch is pressed to the
right with the radar in track (FTT or GMTT),
breaklock is commanded (aimpoint is not
undesignated) and the radar returns to the search
mode (MAP, SEA, or GMT) it was in before
entering track.
152. When the radar is on the LDDI, pressing the
sensor control switch to the left does the same
actions described when the radar was on the RDDI.
153. Pressing the sensor control switch forward
assigns the TDC to the HUD and the radar is
commanded to the AGR mode if the radar is not
tracking. If the sensor control switch is pressed
toward the radar display, the radar returns to the
mode previously selected before AGR was
commanded.
154. Undesignate/Nose Wheel Steer Switch. When
pressed, the radar is commanded to return to search
and the aimpoint designation is undesignated.
155. NAV AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE. In NAV
aircraft master mode, all the radar modes are
available. However, some options in some modes are
not available.
156. NAV aircraft master mode is selected if
neither A/G nor A/A aircraft master modes on the
master arm control panel assembly is selected.
157. NAV Pushbutton Switch Controls. The
differences between A/A and A/G radar display
pushbuttons while operating in NAV aircraft master
mode are described below.
158. Air (AIR) Select. AIR is displayed when A/G
radar modes are selected. Pressing AIR commands
the RWS mode and display. AIR is not displayed if
the radar is in A/G track.
159. With AIR selected, all A/A radar modes are
available. The only option not available is the SET
option. Also, the launch envelope is not computed
for the selected weapon in STT.
011 03
Page 17
160. Surf (SURF) Select. SURF is displayed in all
A/A radar modes except track. Pressing SURF
commands the MAP mode and display.
161. With SURF selected, all A/G radar modes can
be selected as if in A/G aircraft master mode except
for the selection of AGR. AGR can only be selected
when a discrete target is provided by another
aircraft tactical sensor.
162. NAV HOTAS Controls. The differences
between A/A and A/G radar HOTAS controls while
operating in NAV aircraft master mode are
described below.
163. With NAV aircraft master mode selected, the
sensor control switch retains the same functions as
in A/G aircraft master mode with some differences.
Since the sensor control switch assigns TDC priority
to different indicators, ACM options of BST,
WACQ, and VACQ are not available with A/A radar
modes selected.
164. If the TDC is assigned to the RDDI and the
RDDI is displaying an A/A radar search display (VS
or RWS), pressing the sensor control switch to the
right commands AACQ (as in A/A aircraft master
mode) to the radar.
165. After track has been entered (STT), pressing
the sensor control switch to the right commands
bump acquisition.
166. OPERATING STATUS. Refer to Mode
Selection Block Diagram (WP012 00). The
operating status of the radar set is displayed on the
digital display indicator. The legend displays are
not ready (RDY with a line through it), TEST,
STBY, OPR, or EMERG.
167. Not Ready Legend. The not ready legend
indicates that the radar set has not established
communication with the MC. Not ready is displayed
for 30 seconds when the RADAR switch on the
SNSR pod control box panel assembly (SNSR
panel) is set from OFF to any other position. Not
ready is displayed during radar set operation if the
input/output terminal fails. When the input/output
terminal fails, the only radar displays available are
the artificial horizon line and the velocity vector.
168. TEST Legend. The TEST legend indicates
that the radar set has established communication
with the MC and that the radar mode is in an
A1-F18AC-742-100
operational readiness test (ORT) or initiated BIT
(IBIT).
169. STBY, OPR, or EMERG Legends. STBY,
OPR, or EMERG indicate the position of the
RADAR switch on the SNSR panel after the
Operational Readiness Test (ORT).
170. MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS. Other radar
controls not located on the radar displays or on
HOTAS controls are described.
171. HSI Display Pushbutton Switch Controls.
Selection of some options on the HSI display affect
radar operation and radar displays.
172. Velocity (VEL) Update Select. Pressing VEL
on the HSI update option display commands the
radar to PVU if in NAV or A/G aircraft master
mode with the radar not in track.
173. Land (LAND) or Sea (SEA) Select. When
VEL is pressed on the HSI update option display,
HSI velocity update display is commanded and the
LAND and SEA options are displayed. Pressing the
LAND or SEA switch commands the radar antenna
to higher or lower look angles, respectively.
174. Accept (ACPT) or Reject (REJ) Select. After
the velocity update, PVU is deselected when ACPT
or REJ is pressed on the HSI update option display
or by pressing the sensor control switch in the
direction of the radar display. Either action returns
the radar to the previous search mode selected
before entering PVU.
175. Continuous (CONT) PVU Select. When the
INS mode switch on the SNSR pod control box
panel assembly is set to IFA (inflight align) in NAV
aircraft master mode, the HSI display becomes the
HSI IFA display with CONT PVU, LAND, and
SEA options. CONT PVU and SEA options are
initialized as selected (boxed) and the radar is
commanded to PVU.
176. During IFA with CONT PVU boxed, pressing
the CONT PVU switch deselects continuous PVU
and commands PVU for 10 seconds of each minute
alternating with the last selected radar mode.
177. During IFA with CONT PVU boxed and if
AGR is commanded (as if the TDC is assigned to
the HUD), continuous PVU is deselected, 20
seconds of AGR is commanded, then PVU is
commanded for 10 seconds of each minute
alternating with AGR.
011 03
Page 18
178. In IFA, the LAND and SEA options operate
the same as during velocity updates.
179. PVU is deselected and the radar returns to the
last selected mode when the INS mode switch is set
to any position from IFA.
180. A/A WP Select. This option is displayed on
the HSI data display. Preselected waypoints are
viewed using the A/A waypoint
increment/decrement pushbuttons. When selected,
A/A WP is boxed and the currently selected
waypoint number is displayed to the right of the
boxed A/A WP option and between the A/A
waypoint increment/decrement arrows. The
waypoint selected at the time of A/A WP
pushbuttton selection is maintained. The A/A
waypoint can not be changed without deselecting
A/A WP and then selecting another A/A waypoint
using the A/A waypoint increment/decrement
pushbuttons. The selected waypoint is displayed on
the radar attack and situation awareness displays in
RWS, TWS, or STT modes. If the A/A waypoint is
not within the tactical display area, it is not
displayed.
181. Map Gain Control Panel Assembly. The
MAP GAIN switch on the panel supplies three
digital discrete bits which control the gain of the
radar map display.
182. The gain setting is applicable in MAP, EXP1,
EXP2, and EXP3 modes. It is also applicable in
GMT and SEA modes if interleave (INTL) is
selected.
183. VIDEO DISPLAYS.
184. Video displays in this WP include operation
of:
a. radar positioned symbols.
b. MC positioned symbols.
c. digital display logic.
d. composite video logic.
185. RADAR POSITIONED SYMBOLS. Refer to
Radar Symbols and Video Displays detail A
(WP012 00). Radar positioned symbols are unique
symbols produced and positioned by the radar set.
Radar symbols are used in both A/A and A/G
modes. In A/G modes, the symbols are time shared
with composite video (detail B).
A1-F18AC-742-100
186. Radar positioned symbols are:
a. antenna elevation caret.
b. target symbols.
c. B-sweep.
d. acquisition cursor.
e. iron cross.
187. Antenna Elevation Caret. The antenna
elevation caret symbol indicates antenna elevation
in the vertical plane. The symbol is pitch and roll
stabilized in reference to own aircraft horizontal. In
search modes the symbol responds to radar
elevation control on the right throttle grip.
188. Target Symbols. Target symbols are
displayed as solid rectangles. The horizontal
position of the target symbol indicates angular
position in respect to own aircraft heading. The
vertical position indicates range or velocity
depending on radar mode of operation.
189. B-sweep. The B-sweep is a vertical sweep
scanned horizontally on the display. Indicates
instantaneous AZ position of the antenna.
190. Acquisition Cursor. The acquisition cursor is
two parallel lines displayed in A/A search and STT
modes and some A/G search modes. The acquisition
cursor is not displayed in flood mode or any
acquisition modes. The acquisition cursor is
positioned on the display in response to TDC
commands. When not TDC positioned, the
acquisition cursor is stowed in the upper left corner
of the display.
191. During search modes, when the acquisition
cursor is in the tactical display area, numbers are
displayed above and below the acquisition cursor to
represent altitude coverage of the radar beam in
thousands of feet. When the acquisition cursor is on
a radar raw hit that is not a MSI trackfile, its range
rate is displayed to the left and its altitude is
displayed to the right of the acquisition cursor.
192. Iron Cross. Refer to Mode Selection Block
Diagram (WP012 00) and Maintenance BIT Mode
(WP041 00). The iron cross is displayed in the
lower left corner of the radar display. The iron cross
is displayed when the radar transmitter RF power is
degraded or none at all. In short range track modes
011 03
Page 19
the RF power monitor is not used to set the iron
cross, only true hardware failures are used.
193. When the radar set is turned on from a
coldstart, a large X is displayed in the iron cross
location after test number 4 of the operational
readiness test. This remains until the transmitter
times out, and the transmitter gate pulse is received
by the transmitter.
194. When the iron cross is displayed, and the iron
cross is flashing, a transmitter failure has occurred.
If the iron cross is steady, a normal operation as the
radar set status is STBY on SNSR panel, or
EMCON has been commanded. Any of the below
conditions can cause the iron cross to be displayed.
a. Transmitter timed out, and RDR switch on
SNSR panel set to STBY.
b. Weight on wheels/inflight disagree (MMP
code 048 set).
c. EMCON on the Electronic Equipment
Control panel set to on.
d. Degraded RF power detected by RF power
monitor during any track or search mode.
e. Short range track and a transmitter failure
detected (MMP code 041 set).
f. When true air speed is less than 80 knots for
more than 30 seconds, the transmitter is inhibited.
g. Weight on wheels.
195. MC POSITIONED SYMBOLS. MC positioned
symbols are MC commanded and positioned even
though they may use radar parameters for
orientation. Radar Symbols and Video Displays,
detail B (WP012 00) has several examples of MC
positioned symbols: stabilized cue, A/G designation
cursors (in-video cursor), EXP2 indicator, and
azimuth grid lines.
196. The A/A and A/G radar mode displays have
many common MC positioned symbols. These
symbols are described for each display in its
applicable WP.
197. DIGITAL DISPLAY LOGIC. Refer to Digital
Display Logic Diagram (WP012 00). Digital display
symbols are made up of 16-bit binary coded words
produced in the Computer-Power Supply
A1-F18AC-742-100
CP-1325/APG-65. Each digital transfer has one
control word and two or more data words. Two
digital words are required for each symbol
displayed. The 2 digital display logic functions are
timing and control and digital display data.
198. Timing and Control. Timing and control for
digital transfer is made up of blanking pulses, data
windows, and a 1 MHz clock. Correct MC
commands and logic of these control signals are
required for digital transfer.
199. The 60 Hz vertical blanking pulse must be true
(high) for data transfer to occur. When low, the
digital symbols are blanked from the multipurpose
display group. The 60 Hz rate and 16.67 msec time
between pulses allow the digital symbols to be
synchronized with the composite video.
200. The data window goes true (high) with the
vertical blanking pulse. A command from the MC to
supply digital symbols must occur at this time. All
data for one frame of a digital symbol display is
transferred within the data window.
201. The 1 MHz clock is the method to input
digital data into the multipurpose display group
indicators. For one clock cycle the logic is true, then
false for equal periods. The display data must be
true 200 nsec before the clock goes false.
202. Digital Display Data. Each digital transfer in
the radar search mode has one control word and up
to 268 odd and even data words. The radar track
mode has one control word and up to 33 odd and
even data words. A typical data transfer is listed
below:
a. control word
b. odd and even acquisition symbol words
c. odd and even antenna elevation symbol
words
d. odd and even B-sweep (antenna azimuth
position) words
e. up to 256 (128 odd, 128 even) target symbols
in search, and 28 (14 odd, 14 even) in track.
203. Control word fields are described and coded as
listed below:
a. operation (op) code. A fixed binary 10010,
bits 0 thru 4.
011 03
Page 20
b. symbol size. Bits 5 and 6 representing
symbol size.
Example:
Bit 5 6 = symbol size
0 0 = minimum
0 1 = size 2
1 0 = size 3
1 1 = maximum
c. word count. Bits 7 thru 15 binary coded
indicating number data words to follow.
204. Refer to Digital Display Logic Diagram, detail
B (WP012 00). Typical odd and even data word
fields are described below:
a. Odd words are made up of intensity, unique
symbol designator, and X-position data:
(1) Intensity bits 0, 1, and 2 represent not
displayed (000) and dim (001) thru bright (111).
(2) Bits 3, 4, and 5 are not used.
(3) Bit 6 must be logic “1” for radar
positioned symbols.
(4) Bits 7 thru 15 are the X-position (detail
A) of the symbol.
b. Even words are made up of symbol type and
Y-position data:
(1) Bits 0 thru 6 when logic “1” designates
which symbol is displayed: bit 0 indicates B-sweep,
bit 1 indicates acquisition cursor, bit 3 indicates
antenna elevation, bit 4 indicates target. Bits 2, 5,
and 6 are spares.
(2) Bits 7 thru 15 are the Y-position (detail
A) of the symbol.
205. COMPOSITE VIDEO LOGIC. Refer to
Composite Video Logic Diagram (WP012 00).
Composite video is a 675 line, high resolution, tv
display with 512 active lines. Characteristics are
listed below:
a. the 512 active lines have 256 odd and 256
even lines per frame.
b. thirty frames per second.
c. vertical sync pulse at 60 Hz.
A1-F18AC-742-100 011 03
Page 21/(22 blank)

d. odd and even field vertical blanking. a. range grid lines.

e. active horizontal time of 256 elements with

b. azimuth grid lines.
black and white video thresholds.

f. synchronized with digital display data. c. terrain avoidance arc.

g. in video symbology. d. DBS patch, sector, and sar outlines.

206. The composite video is transferred to the

multipurpose display group indicators in a 4-inch
by 4-inch grid. The indicator converts the grid to
the arc rasters required by the A/G displays. The
composite video display is synchronized with the
digital data input to the indicators to provide out of
raster acquisition cursor and antenna elevation
symbols. The B-sweep symbol is not used in A/G,
and target symbols are synthetic.
207. In-video symbology is provided by the
composite video. These symbols are positioned in
512 vertical elements and 256 in horizontal. In-video
symbols are:
e. tracked target symbol.
f. stabilized cue.
g. in-video cursor.
208. The in-video symbols are produced at a
maximum brightness. These symbols are provided
by the Radar Target Data Processor
CP-1326/APG-65 memory. The symbols are MC
commanded and positioned by the radar and the
MC.
A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - MODE SELECTION AND VIDEO DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Mode Selection and Video Displays ................................................. WP011 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Composite Video Logic Diagram, Figure 5.............................................................................................. 13

Digital Display Logic Diagram, Figure 4 ................................................................................................. 11
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Mode Selection Block Diagram, Figure 2................................................................................................ 5
Mode Sequence Diagram, Figure 1........................................................................................................... 2
Radar Symbols and Video Displays, Figure 3 ........................................................................................ 10
Selected Menu Displays, Figure 6 ............................................................................................................ 14

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. b. mode selection diagram

c. radar symbols and video displays

2. The following mode selection diagrams and video
displays support the principles of operation d. digital display logic diagram
(WP011 00):
e. composite video logic diagram
a. mode sequence diagram
f. selected menu displays.
A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Mode Sequence Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Mode Sequence Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 4

LEGEND
1
Ñ WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. Mode Sequence Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 5

Figure 2. Mode Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 6

Figure 2. Figure 2. Mode Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 2) Figure 2.

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 7

Figure 2. Figure 2. Mode Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 3) Figure 2.

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 8

Figure 2. Mode Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 9

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
2 HEAD-UP DISPLAYS, WP020 00.
3 OPTIONS SHOWN ARE A COMPOSITE OF THE OPTIONS AVAILABLE AND MAY NOT
BE APPLICABLE IN SOME MODES.
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
5
Ñ F/A-18A AND F/A-18B.
6
Ñ F/A-18C AND F/A-18D.
7
Ñ 161353 THRU 163782.
8
Ñ 163985 AND UP.
9
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 2. Mode Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 10

Figure 3. Radar Symbols and Video Displays

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 11

Figure 4. Digital Display Logic Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 12

Figure 4. Digital Display Logic Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 13

Figure 5. Composite Video Logic Diagram

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 14

Figure 6. Selected Menu Displays (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 15

Figure 6. Selected Menu Displays (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 012 00
Page 16

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 6. Selected Menu Displays (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - TARGET ACQUISITION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

A/G Mode Acquisition, Figure 1............................................................................................................... 10

Automatic Acquisition, Figure 3 ............................................................................................................... 12
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Target Acquisition ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Automatic Acquisition........................................................................................................................ 4
ACM Condition - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND
UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) ......................................................................................................... 4
A/G Ranging (AGR) Acquisition .................................................................................................. 9
AIM-7 Launch Initiate in TWS.................................................................................................... 9
Boresight (BST) Acquisition ......................................................................................................... 5
Gun Acquisition (GACQ) ............................................................................................................... 8
Long Range Automatic Acquisition (AACQ) - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) ....................................................... 6
Long Range Automatic Acquisition (AACQ) - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) ....................................................... 7
Vertical Acquisition (VACQ)......................................................................................................... 5
Wide Acquisition (WACQ) ............................................................................................................ 6
Manual Acquisition............................................................................................................................. 2
A/A Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 2
A/G Mode......................................................................................................................................... 3
Navigation Mode............................................................................................................................. 4
RBGM Manual Acquisition, Figure 2 ...................................................................................................... 11

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. 2. If other operations of the radar system or radar

set are required refer to the work packages listed
below:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. Sequence of operation
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00)
(2) A/A search mode displays, operation
(WP014 00)
(3) A/G displays, operation (WP016 00)
(4) Target acquisition operation (This WP)
(5) A/A track mode displays operation
(WP018 00)
(6) Head-up displays operation (WP024 00)
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
c. functional operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
WP022 00)
013 00
Page 2
(13) Maintenance BIT mode operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. TARGET ACQUISITION.
4. There are two radar system acquisition modes,
manual and automatic. Manual acquisition is a
head-down operation using the multipurpose
display group to manually acquire and track targets.
Automatic acquisition is provided to search for and
acquire targets automatically in either head up or
head down aircraft operation.
5. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
6. MANUAL ACQUISITION. Manual acquisition is
available in air to air (A/A), air to ground (A/G),
and navigation (NAV) aircraft master modes.
Manual acquisition is started using the throttle
designator control (TDC) or the cage/uncage switch
on the stick grip. When the acquisition cursor is
over the detected target pressing and releasing the
TDC initiates manual acquisition. In A/A mode, the
acquisition cursor is used. In A/G mode, the
acquisition and in-video cursor are used. When a
launch and steer (L and S) target is acquired with a
sparrow missile selected, momentarily depressing
the cage/uncage switch commands the radar into
STT on the L and S target.
7. A/A Mode. In A/A, manual acquisition is used
to acquisition and track targets at relatively long
ranges. Manual acquisition is available in track
while scan (TWS), range while search (RWS), and
velocity search (VS) modes. Manual acquisition
occurs when the TDC is pressed and released with
the acquisition cursor on a radar raw hit in RWS or
VS or the L & S target in TWS. During the
acquisition phase the radar set:
8. During the acquisition phase, the mission
computer system (MC) sends a manual acquisition
command to the radar set. The radar set then:
a. disables manual control of Antenna
AS-3254/APG-65 elevation.
b. starts a search of the stored target file for
the newest target under the acquisition cursor.
c. drives the antenna to the azimuth position
indicated by the acquisition cursor (true acquisition
A1-F18AC-742-100
is not enabled until the antenna reaches the
commanded position).
9. When the antenna arrives at the correct azimuth
position and the radar determines a stored target is
within the acquisition volume, the radar set:
a. centers the antenna acquisition pattern
around the elevation of the detected target.
b. operates in the pulse-repetition frequency
(prf) used when the target was first detected.
c. enters acquisition 2 (ACQ2) processing for
0.5 seconds if operating in TWS or RWS.
d. enters acquisition 1 (ACQ1) processing if
operating in VS or if ACQ2 processing is being done
with no confirming target hits after 0.5 seconds.
e. enters initial track if target is found during
ACQ2 processing.
10. If manual target acquisition is commanded and
no target is found in the acquisition volume, the
radar set enters directly into ACQ1 processing.
When the radar is in ACQ1, it scans within the
acquisition cursor volume. If a target hit is detected,
a transition to ACQ2 takes place.
11. ACQ2 is a position pointing mode in which the
antenna is space stabilized. ACQ2 processing tries
to confirm the target hit within a small velocity and
range area. If a confirming target hit is found,
initial track is entered. If no target hit occurs, the
radar reverts to ACQ1 processing.
12. If the target appears in the acquisition window
within 2 seconds after initial track is entered,
lockon occurs and the radar switches to the single
target track (STT) mode. If the target does not
appear in 2 seconds after initial track is entered or
5 seconds after ACQ1 processing has begun, the
actions below occur:
a. The radar returns to the prf of the
commanded search mode.
b. The antenna acquisition pattern is centered
at the elevation and azimuth where acquisition
started.
c. Full manual control of the antenna is
restored.
13. The radar set remains in acquisition until STT
is complete or the MC commands return to search.
013 00
Page 3
14. A/G Mode. In A/G, two types of manual radar
acquisition are available, navigation stabilized
cursor designation and radar track designation.
Radar track designation is available in MAP, sea
surface search (SEA), and ground moving target
(GMT). Navigation stabilized cursor is available in
MAP, SEA, GMT and doppler beam sharpened
(DBS) expand 1 (EXP1), expand 2 (EXP2), and
expand 3 (EXP3). Acquisition in the A/G ranging
(AGR) mode is MC commanded automatic
acquisition.
15. See figure 1. When a target is detected on the
radar display and target designation is required, the
TDC must be assigned to the radar. Using the TDC,
the acquisition cursor is positioned to the target
video (detail A). The TDC is then pressed and the
MC commands the in-video cursor to be displayed
and blanks the acquisition cursor. Still holding the
TDC, the in-video cursor is positioned with the
TDC to intersect the target. The TDC is then
released.
16. When the TDC is released, the in-video cursor
is replaced with the stabilized cue superimposed on
the target video. The MC maintains the position of
the aimpoint using navigation data and provides
range and bearing to the radar to update the
stabilized cue position. Time-to-go to weapon
release is displayed.
17. During navigation stabilized aimpoint tracking,
the stabilized cue may drift off the aimpoint as a
result of increasing navigation error. When this
occurs, the TDC is used to position the acquisition
cursor into the tactical video area, then pressed and
held. The in-video cursor is now initialized at the
stabilized cue position. After repositioning the
in-video cursor on the target, the TDC is released to
complete the redesignation.
18. See figure 2, detail A. In the DBS modes EXP1,
EXP2, and EXP3, the acquisition cursor is blanked
and the in-video DBS sector (EXP1), DBS patch
(EXP2), and DBS synthetic aperture radar (SAR)
(EXP3) indicators are displayed. These in-video
symbols are used to acquire a sector, patch, or SAR
of the MAP mode for high resolution expansion.
19. See figure 2, detail B. When the DBS sector,
patch, or SAR are positioned, the TDC is pressed
and released. The MAP display is replaced with the
EXP1, EXP2, or EXP3 display with the acquisition
cursor displayed. Navigation stabilized cursor
A1-F18AC-742-100
designation can now be done as previously
described.
20. See figure 1. If radar designation of a target is
required, the TDC is used to position the
acquisition cursor on the target video. When the
TDC is pressed, the MC commands the in-video
cursor to be displayed and blanks the acquisition
cursor. Still holding the TDC pressed, the in-video
cursor is positioned with the TDC to intersect the
target. When the TDC is released, the stabilized cue
is displayed.
21. Pressing the sensor control switch towards the
radar display commands the radar to track the
designated aimpoint. The radar tracks the
designated aimpoint and produces a synthetic target
symbol for display at the aimpoint.
22. If the sensor control switch is pressed in the
direction of the radar display and no radar
designation aimpoint or external designation
aimpoint exists, acquisition is commanded and the
acquisition cursor is replaced with the in-video
cursor. While the sensor control switch is held, the
TDC can be used to slew the in-video cursor. When
the sensor control switch is released, track is
commanded and a synthetic target symbol is
displayed at the track aimpoint.
23. The MC blanks the radar display options
(mode, FRZ and so on) when the acquisition phase
is entered. The word TRACK is displayed in the
lower center of the radar display when acquisition is
complete.
24. If the radar breaks lock, the target position is
extrapolated. The TRACK calligraphic display is
blanked and MEM is displayed. During memory
track, the MC commands the radar to reacquisition.
If reacquisition fails, the MC commands the radar
to return to search.
25. Navigation Mode. When the radar is operating
in the NAV aircraft master mode, AIR and SURF
options can be selected. In the AIR option, all A/A
radar modes are available. Manual acquisition
commands STT but AIM-9 and AIM-7 launch
envelopes are not computed. In the SURF option,
all A/G modes are available except AGR. AGR is
available if a discrete target is provided by another
aircraft sensor.
26. AUTOMATIC ACQUISITION. Automatic
acquisition is an automatic mode in which the MC
013 00
Page 4
commands the radar to search for, acquire, and
track discrete targets. The automatic acquisition
modes are:
a. boresight (BST) acquisition.
b. vertical acquisition (VACQ).
c. wide acquisition (WACQ).
d. long range automatic acquisition (AACQ).
e. gun acquisition (GACQ).
f. AIM-7 launch initiate in TWS.
g. A/G ranging (AGR) acquisition.
27. ACM Condition - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Selection of BST causes the
sensor control switch to be configured to the ACM
condition. Selecting gun with the weapon select
switch also configures the sensor control switch to
the ACM condition. Either causes a boxed ACM
pushbutton option to be displayed. In this condition
the sensor control switch is configured to command
ACM modes to the radar. Pressing the boxed ACM
pushbutton when gun is not the selected weapon
configures the sensor control switch for top level
functions and command the radar to return to
search if it is in acquisition (BST, VACQ, WACQ,
FACQ, or manual). At ACM condition entry, TDC
priority is assigned to the radar attack display and
it appears on the right DDI if it was not previously
displayed. Silent radar operation is deselected at
ACM condition entry. MSI processing is stopped
and only radar targets are used. An acquisition
cursor is provided only in RWS or STT while
operating in the ACM condition. The ACM
condition can not be exited when gun is the selected
weapon.
28. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the
left and right hand controller TDC and sensor
select switches are inhibited during the ACM
condition.
29. When gun is not the selected weapon, exiting
the ACM condition is accomplished by doing any of
the below:
a. pressing the boxed ACM pushbutton switch.
b. pressing the nosewheel steer/ undesignate
switch.
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. pressing the TDC in VACQ or BST.
d. pressing the RTS or TWS pushbutton
switches.
e. changing the radar mode.
f. changing the aircraft master mode.
30. Boresight (BST) Acquisition. See figure 3. The
BST mode is an Aircraft Combat Maneuvering
(ACM) mode in which the antenna is aligned on the
aircraft waterline. BST is selected when the sensor
control switch on the aircraft controller grip
assembly is pressed forward with A/A aircraft
master mode selected. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), selection of BST configures
the sensor control switch to the ACM condition.
BST is indicated on the HUD by a 3.3 degree
reticle centered on the aircraft waterline.
31. When BST is selected, the radar is commanded
to the below:
a. antenna azimuth to zero degrees
b. antenna elevation to zero degrees
c. range scale set to 10 nmi
d. prf is set to medium.
32. The radar automatically searches, acquires, and
tracks the first target detected within 10 nmi. The
radar remains in BST until target track is entered,
another ACM mode is selected, A/A aircraft master
mode is exited, or BST rejected. BST is rejected by
either pressing and releasing the TDC or activating
the undesignate/nose wheel steer switch. Either
switch returns the radar mode to the last selected
search mode.
33. When the radar is tracking a target, reselecting
BST commands bump acquisition: the track target
is rejected; an exclusion zone is formed around it;
and the radar tries to acquire a different target. If
no other target is detected and acquired after two
seconds, the exclusion zone is removed and the
initial target is able to be acquired.
34. BST is weapon independent has higher priority
than radar modes. Selection of BST overrides
weapon initialized parameters (for example, range
scale and prf) and retains the weapon selected. If
013 00
Page 5
the radar is operating in TWS or STT, the target
track files are deleted and the radar enters BST
acquisition.
35. Vertical Acquisition (VACQ). VACQ is an
ACM mode in which targets located above the nose
of the F/A-18 are automatically acquired. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), VACQ is
selected when the sensor control switch is pressed
to the aft position with A/A aircraft master mode
selected. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), VACQ is selected when the
sensor control switch is in the ACM condition and
is moved to the aft position with A/A aircraft
master mode selected. VACQ is indicated on the
HUD by two vertical lines put 5.2 degrees apart and
centered in azimuth.
36. When VACQ is selected, the radar is
commanded to the below:
a. 2-bar azimuth scan
b. -13 to +47 degrees elevation scan
c. range scale set to 5 nmi
d. prf set to medium.
37. The radar automatically searches, acquires, and
tracks the first target detected within the scan
volume. The radar remains in VACQ until target
track is entered, another ACM mode is selected,
A/A aircraft master mode exited, or VACQ rejected.
VACQ is rejected by either pressing and releasing
the TDC or activating the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch. Either switch returns the radar mode
to the last selected search mode.
38. When the radar is tracking a target, reselecting
VACQ commands bump acquisition: the track
target is rejected; an exclusion zone is formed
around it; and the radar tries to acquire a different
target. If no other target is detected and acquired
after two seconds, the exclusion zone is removed
and the initial target is able to be acquired.
39. VACQ is weapon independent has higher
priority than radar modes. Selection of VACQ
overrides weapon initialized parameters (for
example, range scale and prf) and retains the
weapon selected. If the radar is operating in TWS
or STT, the target track files are deleted and the
radar enters VACQ.
A1-F18AC-742-100
40. Wide Acquisition (WACQ). WACQ mode is an
ACM mode in which targets located on the left or
right side of the nose of the F/A-18 are
automatically acquired. WACQ operates in either
the caged or uncaged mode.
41. Caged WACQ - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), Caged WACQ is selected
when the sensor control switch is pressed to the left
position with A/A aircraft master mode selected.
42. Caged WACQ - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Caged WACQ is selected
when the sensor control switch is in the ACM
condition and moved to the left position with A/A
aircraft master mode selected. When caged WACQ
is selected, the radar is commanded to the below:
a. mode set to Range-While-Search (RWS)
b. 60 degree azimuth scan
c. 6-bar elevation scan with 2.5 degree bar
spacing
d. 10 nmi range scale
e. medium prf.
43. The scan pattern is centered in azimuth and 1.5
degrees below the waterline in elevation. Each
antenna scan is parallel to the horizon with the scan
center body stabilized. The antenna begins scanning
in the upper left and scans horizontally. The scan
pattern covers 13.8 degrees of the HUD field of
view.
44. Uncaged WACQ. If the TDC is pressed while
operating in the caged WACQ mode, uncaged
WACQ is commanded.
45. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when uncaged WACQ is
commanded, the 60 degree azimuth scan changes to
30 degrees and the scan pattern can be slewed by
the TDC.
46. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when uncaged WACQ is
commanded, the azimuth scan remains 60 degrees
and the scan pattern can be slewed by the TDC.
013 00
Page 6
47. The radar positions the scan center as body
referenced to match the inputs of the TDC. Each
antenna scan is parallel to the horizon with the scan
center inertially stabilized in pitch and roll.
48. In caged and uncaged WACQ, the radar
automatically searches, acquires and tracks the first
target detected within the scan volume. The radar
remains in WACQ until target track is entered,
another ACM mode is selected, A/A aircraft master
mode exited, or WACQ rejected. WACQ is rejected
by activating the undesignate/nose wheel steer
switch. This commands the radar to return to the
last selected search mode.
49. With WACQ selected, a WACQ indicator is
displayed on the radar display and a WACQ
indicator, grid, and rectangle are displayed on the
HUD. The WACQ grid represents the radar
antenna limits in horizontal (±70° azimuth) and
vertical (±70° elevation) directions. In caged
WACQ, the WACQ rectangle represents the WACQ
field of view and is frozen at 0 degrees azimuth but
rotates to remain parallel with the horizon. In
uncaged WACQ the WACQ rectangle represents the
WACQ field of view and can be slewed within the
grid by the TDC to put the WACQ scan pattern
overlaying a target.
50. If the radar is tracking a target or operating in
uncaged WACQ, caged WACQ is reselected if the
sensor control switch is pressed to the left. Bump
acquisition is not available in WACQ. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP, bump acquisition processing is
available in uncaged WACQ.
51. WACQ is weapon independent and has higher
priority than radar modes. Selection of WACQ
(caged or uncaged) overrides weapon initialized
parameters (for example, range scale and prf) and
retains the weapon selected. If the radar is
operating in TWS or STT, the target trackfiles are
deleted and the radar enters WACQ.
52. Long Range Automatic Acquisition (AACQ) -
WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). AACQ mode
allows a heads-up means to automatically acquire
targets at ranges past the ACM modes without
changing search parameters. AACQ is selected when
the sensor control switch is pressed to the right
position with the radar operating in RWS, VS,
TWS, or STT with TDC priority assigned to the
radar and NAV or A/A aircraft master mode
A1-F18AC-742-100
selected. Selection of AACQ operates slightly
different with each radar mode.
53. If the radar is operating in RWS or VS and
AACQ is selected, the radar retains the search
parameters selected (for example, range scale and
prf) and Fast Acquisition (FACQ) is initiated.
When FACQ is initiated, the radar searches its
memory to determine if a target is located under
the acquisition cursor. If a target exists under the
cursor, acquisition is initiated on the target and a
transition to STT occurs.
54. If no target exists under the acquisition cursor
and the radar operating mode is RWS, AACQ is
continued and the nearest target in range is
acquired and tracked.
55. If no target exists under the acquisition cursor
and the radar operating mode is VS, AACQ is
continued and the target with the highest closing
velocity is acquired and tracked.
56. If the radar is operating in STT, (originated
from VS or RWS) selecting AACQ commands the
radar to RWS and bump acquisition: the track
target is rejected; an exclusion zone is formed
around it; and the radar acquires a different target.
If no other target is detected and acquired after 10
seconds, the exclusion zone is removed and the
initial target is able to be acquired.
57. If AACQ is selected while in spotlight mode
(refer to Velocity Search, WP014 00) or spotlight
mode is selected while in AACQ mode, with no
target under the acquisition cursor, the radar tries
to STT the first target it finds within the spotlight
mode scan volume. If STT is not achieved then
AACQ and spotlight modes remain active. The
radar remains in AACQ mode when spotlight mode
is deselected. If AACQ mode is selected while in
spotlight mode with a target under the acquisition
cursor, the radar tries to STT the target. If STT is
not achieved then spotlight mode remains active
and AACQ mode is exited.
58. If the radar is operating in TWS, selecting
AACQ initiates FACQ. When FACQ is initiated, the
radar searches its memory to determine if a filed or
unfiled target is located under the acquisition
cursor. If the Launch and Steering (L & S) target is
under the acquisition cursor, the target is acquired
and a transition to STT occurs. If a filed target
other than the L & S target is under the acquisition
cursor, the filed target becomes the second
013 00
Page 7
designated (DT2) target and the radar remains in
TWS. If the second designated (DT2) target is
under the acquisition cursor, the L & S target and
DT2 target switch positions. If an unfiled target is
under the acquisition cursor, that target is put in
the track file.
59. If no target exists under the acquisition cursor
during TWS, AACQ is continued and a transition to
STT occurs on the L & S target. If no L & S target
exists, the radar acquires and tracks the first target
detected within the scan volume.
60. If the radar is operating in STT (originated
from TWS), selecting AACQ commands the radar to
TWS and bump acquisition: the L & S target is
rejected; an exclusion zone is formed around it; and
the radar tries to acquire a different target. If no
other target is detected and acquired after one
antenna frame, the exclusion zone is removed and
the L & S target is able to be acquired.
61. AACQ is mode dependent and does not have
higher priority than radar modes. AACQ cannot be
selected if gun is the selected weapon or if operating
in NAV aircraft master mode with the radar display
on the LDDI.
62. When AACQ is selected, an AACQ indicator is
displayed on the HUD and the radar display.
During AACQ, search parameters are able to be
changed until the radar enters target acquisition.
Jamming targets and targets less than 5 nmi in
range can only be acquired if the acquisition cursor
is on the target during the FACQ part of AACQ.
63. The radar remains in AACQ until track is
entered, gun is selected, A/G aircraft master mode
is selected, or AACQ rejected. In RWS and VS,
AACQ is rejected by either pressing and releasing
the TDC, or activating the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch. In TWS, AACQ is only rejected by
pressing and releasing the TDC. When AACQ is
rejected, the radar remains in the operating mode it
is in with no search parameter changes.
64. Long Range Automatic Acquisition (AACQ) -
WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). AACQ mode
allows a heads-up means to automatically acquire
targets at ranges past the ACM modes without
changing search parameters. With A/A master mode
selected and the radar operating in an A/A mode,
AACQ is selected when the sensor control switch is
in the ACM condition and is moved to the right.
A1-F18AC-742-100
AACQ is also selected by moving the sensor control
switch toward the radar attack display (left, right,
aft) with the TDC priority already assigned to it
when either of the below conditions exist:
a. no MSI trackfile is under the acquisition
cursor
b. the radar is in STT on the MSI trackfile
under the acquisition cursor (bump acquisition).
65. Fast acquisition (FACQ) is initiated when all
the conditions below exist:
a. the sensor switch is moved towards the radar
attack display
b. TDC priority is already assigned to the radar
attack display
c. acquisition cursor is on a MSI trackfile that
is not in radar STT.
When FACQ is initiated, the MC designates the
MSI trackfile as the MSI L & S target and
commands the radar to STT on it. If the radar is
already in STT on another target, it breaks track on
that target and tries to STT the MSI L & S target.
The MSI L & S target designation remains even if
the STT try is not satisfactory.
66. If AACQ is commanded with the radar in an
ACM mode (GACQ, WACQ, VACQ, or BST), the
command is ignored by the radar.
67. If AACQ is commanded while the radar is in
STT, the radar commands bump acquisition in MSI
trackfile priority and AACQ radar hit sequence
order. An exclusion window is formed around the
former STT target for 20 seconds. The radar
continues to cycle through the target sequence order
for as long as the exclusion window exists if STT is
never obtained. Up to three 20 second exclusion
windows may be commanded at any one time.
68. If AACQ is commanded while radar is in TWS,
the radar tries to acquire the first applicable target
encountered in the below acquisition sequence
order:
a. radar raw hit under acquisition cursor
b. MSI trackfile priority sequence
c. AACQ radar hit sequence.
013 00
Page 8
If radar acquisition try is not satisfactory then
radar returns to search. AACQ is deselected if any
MSI trackfiles exist. If no MSI trackfiles exist,
AACQ remains selected.
69. If AACQ is commanded while the radar is in
VS, the radar tries to acquire the first applicable
target encountered in the below acquisition
sequence order:
a. radar raw hit under acquisition cursor
b. AACQ radar hit sequence.
If radar acquisition try is not satisfactory then
radar return to search with AACQ selected.
70. If AACQ is commanded while radar is in RWS,
the radar tries to acquire the first applicable target
encountered in the below acquisition sequence
order:
a. radar raw hit under acquisition cursor
b. radar and MSI trackfile under the
acquisition cursor
c. MSI trackfile priority sequence
d. AACQ radar hit sequence.
If radar acquisition try is not satisfactory then
radar return to search. AACQ is deselected if any
MSI trackfiles exist. If no MSI trackfiles exist,
AACQ remains selected.
71. AACQ is mode dependent and does have higher
priority than radar modes. AACQ cannot be
selected if gun is the selected weapon or if operating
in NAV aircraft master mode with the radar display
on the LDDI.
72. When AACQ is selected, an AACQ indicator is
displayed on the HUD and the radar display.
During AACQ, search parameters are able to be
changed until the radar enters target acquisition.
Jamming targets and targets less than 5 nmi in
range can only be acquired if the acquisition cursor
is on the target during the FACQ part of AACQ.
73. Gun Acquisition (GACQ). GACQ is
commanded when gun is selected as the A/A
weapon with the A/A weapon select switch on the
aircraft controller grip assembly provided the radar
is not in STT. WITH DIGITAL DATA
A1-F18AC-742-100
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), selection of GACQ
configures the sensor control switch to the ACM
condition. When GACQ is selected, the radar
automatically acquires and tracks the first target
detected within the GACQ scan volume.
74. When gun is selected, the below initialized
parameters are commanded to the radar if the radar
is not in STT:
a. mode set to GACQ (search/acquisition mode)
b. 20 degree elevation scan
c. 5 azimuth bar with 4.2 degree azimuth
spacing
d. 5 nmi range
e. medium prf
f. auto channel (frequency agility) operation.
75. The scan is centered at 0 degree azimuth and −4
degrees in elevation and the scan pattern is
positioned from +4.4 to −12.4 degrees in elevation
and +8.4 to −8.4 degrees in azimuth. The GACQ
scan pattern is referenced to aircraft body axis in
pitch and roll.
76. The radar remains in GACQ until target track
is entered, another ACM mode is selected, another
A/A weapon is selected, or A/A aircraft master
013 00
Page 9
mode is exited. While operating in GACQ, AACQ
cannot be selected but manual channel operation is
available.
77. If operating in STT, reselecting gun does not
break lock or command bump acquisition. If
operating in STT with gun as the selected weapon,
pressing and releasing the TDC or activating the
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch breaks target
lock-on and returns the radar to GACQ.
78. During GACQ, a 20 degree reticle is displayed
on the HUD centered on the HUD optical center.
Selection of any ACM mode (VACQ, WACQ, or
BST) overrides the GACQ mode and keeps the gun
as the selected weapon.
79. Aim-7 Launch Initiate In TWS. The TWS
mode is an automatic acquisition mode because it
provides track data for discrete targets without pilot
action. However, true automatic acquisition in TWS
mode is provided when AIM-7 launch initiate is
commanded. This commands the radar to acquire
the L & S (launch and steering) target which
commands the radar to STT. For more information
on TWS operation, see Track While Scan
Operation, WP043 00.
80. A/G Ranging (AGR) Acquisition. When the
MC commands a slave to automatic acquisition and
the radar or an external sensor is providing a
designated target, AGR is commanded and the
radar automatically tracks the position of the
designated target.
A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 10

Figure 1. A/G Mode Acquisition

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 11

Figure 2. RBGM Manual Acquisition

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 12

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 13

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 14

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 15

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 16

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 17

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 18

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 19

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 013 00
Page 20

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 3. Automatic Acquisition (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 014 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - AIR TO AIR SEARCH MODE DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Diagrams - Air to Air Search Mode Displays ....................................................... WP015 00
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-150/(C)
Data Link (D/L) and Non-Cooperative Target Recognition (NCTR)
Displays ................................................................................................................... WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Air to Air Search Mode Displays.............................................................................................................. 2

Automatic Acquisition Modes ........................................................................................................... 9
Mission Computer System Commanded Tune or Retune............................................................. 10
Range While Search ............................................................................................................................ 3
Scan Raid.............................................................................................................................................. 7
Track While Scan................................................................................................................................ 5
Velocity Search .................................................................................................................................... 2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation

(WP016 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
(4) Target acquisition, operation
set is required refer to the work packages listed
(WP013 00)
below:
(5) A/A track mode displays, operation
a. Sequence of operation: (WP018 00)

(6) Head-up displays, operation

(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) (WP020 00).

b. Radar set, operation (WP009 00).

(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (This WP) c. Functional operation:
A1-F18AC-742-100
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Doppler, operation (WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. AIR TO AIR SEARCH MODE DISPLAYS.
4. Refer to WP015 00 for radar system air to air
search mode displays.
5. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
6. Air to air search modes are the radar system
target detection modes. A/A search modes are listed
below:
a. velocity search (VS)
b. range while search (RWS)
c. track while scan (TWS)
014 00
Page 2
d. automatic acquisition modes.
7. VELOCITY SEARCH. When selected, the VS
mode is initialized to high pulse-repetition
frequency (prf) and 2400 knot velocity scale.
Alternate prf selections are not available in VS.
WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), no MSI trackfiles are
displayed in VS mode.
8. High prf provides maximum transmitter energy
with enough interval to receive reflected velocity
targets. The VS mode only displays closing high
velocity targets. These are nose aspect targets
closing on own aircraft. Targets that have velocities
equal to or less than own aircraft (tail and beam
aspect) are filtered out. These same filters are used
to reject returns from ground clutter and cloud
returns.
9. In VS, 2400 and 800 knot velocity scales are
available. With 2400 knot velocity scale selected,
targets that have a 0 to 2400 knot velocity are
displayed. With 800 knot velocity scale selected,
targets that have a 0 to 800 knot velocity are
displayed. With each velocity scale selected, the
faster targets are displayed at the top of the display
and the slower targets are displayed at the bottom.
10. Refer to Velocity Search (VS) Display
(WP015 00). VS display is velocity versus azimuth
(az) with antenna elevation (el) angle. Vertical
deflection of targets is an indication of their
velocity and in no way relates to target range.
Horizontal deflection of targets is an indication of
target bearing in respect to own aircraft heading.
The el angle can be manually positioned using the
radar elevation control.
11. Target aging (history) display, if selected, is not
as obvious on VS display as on range displays. The
target symbol does not move vertically unless the
target velocity changes. Changes in target heading
are displayed as usual.
12. The upper and lower altitude limits of the radar
beam are displayed above and below the acquisition
cursor. These limits are computed for beam limits
at 80 nmi. The displayed numbers change when
antenna elevation, aircraft altitude el angle, or
cursor position changes. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when the acquisition cursor
A1-F18AC-742-100
is placed on a radar raw hit, its range rate is
displayed to the left of the acquisition cursor.
13. Manual and automatic target acquisition is
available in VS. If a target is acquired, the radar set
is commanded to STT. Available options and
parameters in VS are listed in Velocity Search (VS)
Display (WP015 00).
14. Spotlight. Spotlight is entered only from RWS,
RWS submodes, VS, or AACQ by pressing and
holding the TDC for more than one second and
then releasing the TDC. The acquisition cursor
must be within the tactical display area. When
spotlight is entered, all the below conditions occur:
a. SPOT cue is displayed at the bottom center
of the radar display.
b. azimuth scan changes to 22°centered on the
acquisition cursor.
c. previously selected azimuth scan remains
displayed.
d. acquisition cursor is limited to the tactical
area of the radar display.
15. Spotlight - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Spotlight is entered from
any A/A radar mode except STT or STT RAID by
pressing and holding the TDC for more than one
second and then releasing the TDC. The acquisition
cursor must be within the tactical display area and
not on a radar raw hit or MSI trackfile. When
spotlight is entered, all the below conditions occur:
a. SPOT cue is displayed at the bottom center
of the radar display.
b. azimuth scan changes to 22°centered on the
acquisition cursor.
c. previously selected azimuth scan remains
displayed.
d. acquisition cursor is limited to the tactical
area of the radar display.
e. acquisition cursor modified to display a dim
X centered within standard acquisition cursor
symbol. X is not displayed when cursor is on a MSI
trackfile to reduce clutter.
16. Spotlight provides a high target data rate scan
about the acquisition cursor to speed sorting and
014 00
Page 3
acquisition of closely spaced targets. With the TDC
pressed, the spotlight scan center can be slewed
±60°. If the scan is slewed where the edge of the
scan width reaches the antenna gimbal limits, the
scan is repositioned to maintain the full scan width.
Spotlight is exited by any of the below:
a. pressing and releasing the nosewheel
steer/undesignate switch.
b. pressing and releasing the TDC.
c. assigning the TDC to another display.
When spotlight is exited the previously selected
search mode is entered along with all its associated
parameters.
17. RANGE WHILE SEARCH. RWS is the radar all
aspect search mode. RWS is initialized in
interleaved (INTL) prf. Other parameters
initialized, depending on the selected A/A weapons
(with SET option not activated) are:
a. Gun - The radar system and MC activate
gun function, start gun firing preparations, and
displays GUN. Gun selection commands GACQ to
the radar system, a range of 5nmi, radar antenna
azimuth scan of 20°, with a five bar elevation scan.
WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), gun selection also configures
the sensor control switch to the ACM condition.
b. Sidewinder - Sidewinder selection commands
40 nmi range, 80° azimuth scan, 4-bar el scan, and
8-second target aging.
c. Sparrow - The radar system and MC activate
AIM-7 function, start launch preparation and
display the priority missile. Sparrow selection
commands a radar antenna four bar elevation, 140°
azimuth scan with 40 mile range selection,
interleaved prf, and 8-second target aging.
d. AMRAAM - The radar system and MC
activate AIM-120 function, starts launch
preparation, and displays priority missile.
AMRAAM selection commands a radar antenna
four bar elevation, 140° azimuth scan, 40 mile range
selection, and interleaved prf.
18. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the SET option is available
when all the below conditions exist:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. RWS is the operating radar mode
b. A/A aircraft master mode selected
c. A/A missile selected.
19. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the SET option is available
when all the below conditions exist:
a. RWS is the operating radar mode without a
RWS submode selected
b. A/A aircraft master mode selected
c. A/A missile selected.
20. The parameters listed below can be changed
from the computer selected settings for RWS mode
by selecting an A/A missile, changing parameters to
desired values, then pressing the SET pushbutton.
New parameters may be selected for:
a. target aging.
b. elevation bars.
c. azimuth scan.
d. prf.
e. range scale.
21. The SET legend is boxed for 2 seconds
indicating new parameters have been stored.
Parameters remain as set until new parameters are
set, or until weight on wheels and aircraft power is
shut down. Manual selection of alternate
parameters can be selected only for AIM-9
(Sidewinder) and AIM-7 (Sparrow) missile.
22. INTL prf alternates high prf to medium prf
with each antenna scan. This provides long range all
aspect detection with minimum target eclipsing and
side lobe clutter. Medium prf is used when the 5
nmi range scale is selected. Also in 5 nmi range, the
antenna scan pattern has wide bar spacing and
frame nodding.
23. Instantaneous prf - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When operating in
interleaved prf, and instantaneous prf indication is
displayed directly above the INTL pushbutton
selection. This shows the currently active prf.
014 00
Page 4
24. Display. Refer to Range While Search (RWS)
Display (WP015 00). RWS display is range versus
az with antenna el angle. Vertical deflection of
targets is an indication of target range. Horizontal
deflection of targets is an indication of target
bearing in respect to own aircraft heading. The el
angle can be manually positioned using the radar
elevation control. El is indicated by the antenna
elevation caret.
25. Placing the acquisition cursor on a radar raw hit
not associated with a radar trackfile causes its
altitude to be displayed to the right of the
acquisition cursor. The upper and lower altitude
limits of the radar beam are displayed above and
below the acquisition cursor. Beam limits are
computed using:
a. vertical displacement (range) of the
acquisition cursor.
b. radar antenna el angle.
c. own aircraft altitude.
26. Target aging is shown with an aging selection of
8 seconds. The history of target no. 1 shows
decreasing range; target no. 2 shows increasing
range. Pressing the ERASE pushbutton switch
erases existing target aging history.
27. Manual target acquisition is available in RWS.
If a target is acquired, the radar set is commanded
to STT. Available options and parameters in RWS
are listed in Range While Search (RWS) Display
(WP015 00).
28. Latent TWS (LTWS) - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). LTWS option is displayed
when aircraft master mode is not air to ground and
radar operating mode is RWS. LTWS option is
initially boxed, indicating LTWS option is selected.
The radar maintains up to 10 trackfiles in RWS
with LTWS selected. Selection of RWS from TWS
causes existing TWS trackfiles to become latent
TWS trackfiles. Selection of TWS from RWS causes
existing latent TWS trackfiles to become TWS
trackfiles. When LTWS option is selected TWS
type trackfile symbology is displayed if a trackfile is
associated with the hit under the acquisition cursor.
If no trackfile is associated with the selected hit, its
altitude is displayed on the right side of the
acquisition cursor and its closing velocity and range
caret is displayed on the right radar edge. Pressing
A1-F18AC-742-100
the boxed LTWS option pushbutton deselects
LTWS and unboxes the LTWS option.
29. Latent TWS (LTWS) - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The LTWS option is on the
A/A data sublevel display. Selection of the LTWS
option (LTWS boxed) causes HAFU symbology
associated with radar only MSI trackfiles not to be
displayed. This allows for better viewing of the
radar raw hits on the RWS display. The only
indication of a radar only MSI trackfile is its radar
raw hit. The HAFU symbology for a radar raw hit
which is also a radar trackfile is displayed if the
acquisition cursor is placed on it. A radar trackfile
is any of the eight filed targets (produced by TWS
processing) that the radar provides to the mission
computer for display. Launch zones are also
displayed for the trackfile under the acquisition
cursor if it is one of the eight highest priority MSI
trackfiles and two sets of launch zones are not
already displayed.
30. Multi-Source Integration (MSI) - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The MSI option is
on the A/A data sublevel display. Selection of the
MSI option (MSI boxed) causes the HAFU and low
priority trackfile (LPT) symbology for all MSI
trackfiles with non-radar contributors to be
displayed. HAFU symbology for MSI radar only
trackfiles is not displayed except for the MSI
L & S trackfile, trackfiles under the acquisition
cursor with LTWS selected, or trackfiles under
AMRAAM missile attack. With MSI selected the
only indication of a radar only MSI trackfile is its
radar raw hit. With the MSI option not selected, all
MSI trackfile HAFU symbology is not displayed
except for the MSI L & S trackfile, trackfiles
under the acquisition cursor with LTWS selected,
or trackfiles under AMRAAM missile attack.
31. RWS Submodes - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). There are three RWS
submodes: vector scan range while search (VSRWS),
vector scan mode 1 (VEC1), and vector scan mode 2
(VEC2). Pressing the MODE pushbutton enables
VSRWS and a boxed VSRWS replaces MODE as
the pushbutton label. Pressing the boxed VSRWS
pushbutton enables VEC1 and a boxed VEC1
replaces the boxed VSRWS as the pushbutton label.
Pressing the boxed VEC1 pushbutton enables VEC2
and a boxed VEC2 replaces the boxed VEC1 as the
pushbutton label. Pressing the boxed VEC2
014 00
Page 5
pushbutton enables RWS and MODE replaces the
boxed VEC2 as the pushbutton label.
32. The RWS submodes are used to search a small
sector when increased sensitivity and a small scan
volume are required. These modes use a VS
waveform during the search phase followed by a
RWS range resolving phase. If STT is tried from an
RWS submode the RWS submode becomes the
return to search (RTS) mode on satisfactory entry
into STT. The PRF is commanded to HPRF and
PRF selection is inhibited during all RWS
submodes.
33. RWS submodes are exited if any of the below
conditions exist:
a. transition from A/A or NAV to A/G aircraft
master mode
b. in NAV or A/G aircraft master mode and
SURF selected
c. VS or TWS selected
d. GACQ selected (WP013 00)
e. low duty factor (LDF) selected.
34. Acquisition (ACQ) Point Cue - WITH DIGITAL
DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). An ACQ point cue is
displayed by the mission computer to indicate the
position of the highest priority MSI trackfile when
its HAFU cannot be displayed. The HAFU of the
highest priority MSI trackfile may not be displayed
with the LTWS or MSI options selected unless it is
the L & S trackfile. If AACQ is commanded, the
ACQ point cue indicates the acquisition point. The
ACQ point cue also indicates where the L & S
trackfile steps to when the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch is pressed. When the acquisition cursor
is placed on the ACQ point cue, the MSI trackfile
HAFU is displayed.
35. Spotlight. Refer to Velocity Search this WP.
36. TRACK WHILE SCAN. TWS mode provides
multiple target detection and track. TWS can be
entered from STT and A/A search modes. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000) pulse
repetition frequency is initialized by the mission
computer to interleaved (INTL) when TWS is
selected.
A1-F18AC-742-100
37. Display. Refer to Track While Scan (TWS)
Display (WP015 00).
38. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when entering TWS from
STT, the digital data computer (MC) centers the
scan pattern around the tracked target. The
acquisition cursor and antenna elevation caret also
center on the tracked target. The target is processed
as a manually acquired launch range and steering
(L and S) target, and is not deleted from target
files. If TWS is entered by an inadvertent break
lock, radar acquisition is centered where track was
lost.
39. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when entering TWS from
STT, the radar is commanded to return to search.
The STT target data is used to display a MSI
trackfile at TWS mode entry. If TWS is entered by
an inadvertent break lock, radar acquisition is
centered where track was lost.
40. If TWS is entered from A/A search modes, the
radar initializes a MC commanded scan pattern
with raster centered around the previous scan
center. The antenna elevation caret and acquisition
cursor remain at their previous position.
41. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar set identifies the
targets to be displayed. The priority 1 target is
automatically assigned as the launch and steering
(L and S) target. Another filed target can be
assigned as the second designated (DT2) target by
designating it with the throttle designator control
(TDC). The L and S target is identified with a star
and launch parameters. The DT2 target is
identified with a diamond and launch parameters.
Priority 2 through 8 targets are identified with the
numbers 2 through 8. All tracked targets have a
target aspect angle pointer. When a decision is
made as to which targets are maintained as tracked
targets, the radar priority is:
a. L and S target (Target with computer
launch parameters)
b. DT2 target (Target with computer launch
parameters)
c. priority no. 1 target (Target with shortest
time to go)
014 00
Page 6
d. priority no. 2 target
e. tracked target rank.
42. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in TWS, the radar maintains
track files on 10 targets. The mission computer
(MC) displays the 8 highest priority filed targets.
The two remaining tracked targets are used as
bump targets should their priority exceed any of the
eight tracked targets in the MC. Priority is
determined by time to go (range/range rate). The
radar system has the ability to display 64 more
search targets (unfiled) by way of the display MUX
between the CPS and multipurpose display group.
The added ability to display 64 search targets and 8
highest priority filed targets gives the radar and
mission computer system the ability to display up
to 72 targets.
43. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in
TWS, the radar maintains track files on 10 targets.
The digital data computer MSI logic associates up
to 16 targets from different sensors. It ranks and
prioritizes them and displays a hostile, ambiguous,
friendly, or unknown (HAFU) symbol for the eight
highest ranking targets. Target identification is
indicated by the HAFU symbol and target rank is
indicated by the number inside the HAFU symbol.
The remaining MSI trackfiles are low priority
trackfiles and are indicated by a + symbol. When
the acquisition cursor is placed on a low priority
target the + symbol is replaced by a HAFU symbol.
If a low priority target is designated as the MSI
L & S or DT2 target the + symbol is replaced by a
HAFU and applicable ranking symbol. Target
priority is assigned as shown below:
a. MSI L & S target (designated by a star
within its HAFU symbol).
b. targets that have missiles launched against
them.
c. DT2 target (designated by a diamond within
its HAFU symbol).
d. targets with sensors fully dedicated to their
track (radar STT or FLIR auto track) if not
previously prioritized.
e. other designated MSI targets.
A1-F18AC-742-100
44. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in TWS the radar maintains
track files on 10 targets. The digital data computer
MSI logic associates up to 25 targets from different
sensors including up to four ALR-67 trackfiles and
one L and S trackfile. The digital data computer
ranks, assigns priority, and displays a hostile,
ambiguous, friendly, or unknown (HAFU) symbol
for the eight highest ranking targets. Target
identification is indicated by the HAFU symbol and
target rank is indicated by the number inside the
HAFU symbol. The remaining MSI trackfiles are
low priority trackfiles and are indicated by a +
symbol. When the acquisition cursor is placed on a
low priority target the + symbol is replaced by a
HAFU symbol. If a low priority target is designated
as the MSI L & S or DT2 target, the + symbol is
replaced by a HAFU and applicable ranking
symbol. Target priority is assigned as below:
a. MSI L & S target (designated by a star
within its HAFU symbol).
b. targets that have missiles launched against
them.
c. DT2 target (designated by a diamond within
its HAFU symbol).
d. targets with sensors fully dedicated to their
track (radar STT or FLIR auto track) if not
previously assigned priority.
e. other designated MSI targets.
45. The radar system has the ability to display 64
added search targets (radar raw hits) by way of the
display mux between the CPS and multipurpose
display group. These are displayed as solid
rectangles. The added ability to display 64 search
targets and eight highest priority targets and eight
low priority targets gives the radar and digital data
computer the ability to display up to 80 targets.
46. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the priority no. 1 target is
automatically assigned as the MSI L & S target.
Another filed target can be assigned as the second
designated (DT2) target by designating it with the
TDC. The L & S target is identified with a star
and launch parameters. The DT2 target is
identified with a diamond and launch parameters.
Priority 2 through 8 targets are identified with the
014 00
Page 7
numbers 2 through 8. If the target has radar
contribution, its rank symbol or number is circled.
If the MSI L & S trackfile does not have radar
contribution a NO RDR cue is displayed in the
lower left part of the radar attack display. All eight
high priority targets have a target aspect angle
pointer.
47. If the MC has designated the priority no. 1 and
priority no. 2 targets, they are not deleted from files
based on target rank.
48. The priority no. 1 target is be the L and S
target unless assigned manually. The radar
automatically acquires the L and S target if an
AIM-7 launch initiate exists. The L and S target
designation is not changed until TWS is
reinitialized, or AIM-7 illumination off is received.
49. A DT2 target can be assigned manually by
positioning the acquisition cursor on a filed target
and designating. A second designation of the DT2
target or actuation of the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch causes the L and S target and the DT2
target to switch positions. Actuation of the
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch with no DT2
target shifts the L and S designation down to the
next highest priority target. Further actuations of
the undesignate/nose wheel steer switch sequences
the L and S designation down through the track
files. If no other track files exist, the current
L and S target remains designated. Manual
designation of an unfiled target causes the unfiled
target to be added to the track files. The number 1
priority target is displayed as a 1 with a target
aspect angle symbol as long as the L and S is
manually designated. If the L and S target is
acquired, the radar single target tracks that target.
50. SCAN RAID. The SCAN RAID mode can be
selected in TWS when a L and S target exists by
pressing the RAID switch on the left throttle grip.
AUTO scan centering is automatically selected and
cannot be adjusted. If a heading bias was inserted
before entering SCAN RAID, it is removed. During
SCAN RAID, the range increment/decrement
option, EXP option, HITS option, AUTO/MAN
scan centering option, elevation bar option, azimuth
scan option, grid marks and launch zone markers
are removed from the display. SCAN RAID is
exited by reselecting the RAID switch, selecting the
RSET option, or when the L & S target is within 5
nmi, undesignated, or becomes an AOT target.
SCAN RAID is also exited when an AMRAAM or
A1-F18AC-742-100
sparrow missile is launched, but can be
recommended with the missile in flight.
51. The SCAN RAID mode provides the capability
to concentrate the TWS scan volume in a small
area. This allows targeting data to be updated at a
faster rate. In SCAN RAID the radar enters a
special range versus azimuth format. During
SCAN RAID the L & S target is centered in an
area 10 nmi range by 22° azimuth.
52. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar enters a
continuous two bar by 22° high data rate scan.
53. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar enters a
continuous three bar by 22° high data rate scan.
The B-sweep is frozen at the azimuth position
where the L & S target was located based on a
140° azimuth scale. A SCAN RAID cue appears at
the bottom center of the display.
54. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), a crossed out SCAN RAID
cue is displayed for 5 seconds when SCAN RAID is
commanded against a trackfile with no radar
contribution.
55. In SCAN RAID, trackfiles continue to be
displayed along with search type ‘‘raw hit’’ targets.
Trackfiles which fall outside the SCAN RAID
display area appear along the edge of the display
edge. Search type ‘‘raw hit’’ targets are displayed at
a lower intensity and cannot be designated. When a
new L & S target is designated either manually or
by bump acquisition, the display is adjusted to be
centered about the new L and S target.
56. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the EXP option is displayed
when radar is in TWS with an L and S target (not
AOT target). EXP is not displayed in SCAN RAID
and is deselected if any of the below conditions
exist:
a. an AMRAAM is launched (may be reselected
with AMRAAM inflight)
b. L and S target range is less than five miles
c. no L and S target
014 00
Page 8
d. RSET is selected.
57. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), an expanded TWS display is
provided by selecting the EXP option. With a
range resolved L & S trackfile, selecting the EXP
option centers the L and S trackfile in an area
10nmi range by 20° azimuth. The range readout
along the right display edge indicates the range of
the expanded display, but the azimuth readout
continues to indicate the previously selected scan.
This is because the radar continues to scan the
selected TWS parameters. The B-sweep is frozen at
the azimuth position where the L and S target is
located. This display is only a blow-up of the
selected area. Track files that appeared before
entering EXP that fall outside the EXP display
area are displayed along the perimeter of the
display at their relative location to the L and S
target. When an L and S target is bumped from
track file to track file, the EXP display adjusts
about the new L & S target.
58. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the EXP option is displayed
in STT, RAID, or TWS when all the below
conditions exist:
a. a range resolved or angle only track (AOT)
L and S target exists
b. L and S target range is greater than 5 nmi
or
L and S target is an AOT target
c. L and S target is within the tactical display
area.
59. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), selecting the EXP option
causes the radar attack display to be expanded
about the L and S target. The radar freezes the
B-sweep at the azimuth of the L and S target
based on a 140° azimuth scale. The radar scales all
raw hit data relative to the L and S target. The
display is expanded in azimuth only for an AOT
L and S target or in both azimuth and range for a
range resolved L and S target. Automatic range
scale adjustment is enabled at expand mode entry.
For an AOT L and S target, manual range scale
adjustment remains available. Expand mode will be
exited when any of the below conditions exist:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. EXP pushbutton pressed
b. sparrow missile is launched
c. L and S target range is less than 5 nmi
d. L and S target exits the tactical area
e. L and S target no longer exists
f. RSET pushbutton pressed.
60. The expand display for a range resolved
L and S target represents 20° in azimuth by 10
nmi of range centered about the L and S target. All
launch zones are removed from the expand display.
However, launch zones are still computed and
applicable. SHOOT and IN RNG cues are displayed
at the bottom center of the expand display when
they are applicable. Track files that fall outside the
expanded display area are displayed along the
perimeter at their relative location from the
L and S target. As the L and S target is bumped
from track file to track file the expand display
adjusts about the new L and S target.
61. The expand display for an AOT L and S target
represents 20° in azimuth with a selected range
scale. The L and S target is displayed at the center
of the AOT zone. Range resolved targets are
positioned in azimuth relative to the L and S
target and in range with respect to the selected
range scale. Launch zones continue to be displayed.
62. The reset (RSET) pushbutton switch, when
pressed, commands all manually acquired L and S
and filed targets to be deleted from files. All
L and S and filed targets revert to automatic
priority designating.
63. Targets detected outside the selected range
scale are not put in track files. If the range scale is
changed and a filed target is outside the range scale,
the target are not deleted.
64. If target detection is lost or outside the antenna
gimbal limits, an extrapolate (memory) flag is set.
The radar will continue to extrapolate tracked
targets for 6 seconds if detection was lost within the
antenna gimbal limits. If detection is lost because of
a tracked target moving outside antenna gimbal
limits, the radar tracks extrapolate for 2 seconds.
When STT is entered from TWS the radar
extrapolates TWS tracked targets.
65. Target Aging - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
014 00
Page 9
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Target aging is fixed at 2
seconds for TWS tracked targets. Target aging of 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds is available for TWS search
targets. When exiting TWS target aging, the 2
second aging is retained for TWS search targets if
no manual selection was made. If a manual selection
is made during TWS target aging, this selection is
kept after exiting target aging. If TWS mode was
entered from VS or RWS, target aging is the same
as selected for those modes unless a different
selection is made.
66. Target Aging - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Target aging is fixed at 2
seconds for TWS tracked targets. Target aging of 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds is available for TWS search
targets. If a manual selection for TWS search
targets is made during TWS target aging, this
selection is kept after exiting target aging. If no
manual selection is made during target aging, the
digital data computer returns to the pre-target
aging setting. If TWS mode was entered from VS or
RWS, target aging is the same as selected for those
modes unless a different selection is made.
67. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), reject (REJ) is available
only in the A/A aircraft master mode. REJ is
displayed when data link is in the vector mode.
When selected, REJ is boxed and all data link
symbology is removed from the radar display.
68. If a definition of the TWS launch and steering
track symbols is required, refer to Track Display
Symbols (WP018 00). For more information on
TWS operation see the referenced WP below:
a. Air to Air Track Mode Displays, WP018 00.
b. Data Processing Function, WP032 00.
c. Target Acquisition, WP013 00.
d. Track While Scan Operation WP043 00.
69. Data Link (D/L) and Non-Cooperating Target
Response. For description of these targets refer to
A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00.
70. AUTOMATIC ACQUISITION MODES. Refer to
target acquisition operation (WP013 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
71. MISSION COMPUTER SYSTEM COMMANDED
TUNE OR RETUNE. Refer to Stores Display
(WP015 00). During A/A or NAV aircraft master
modes with an AIM-7 selected as the A/A weapon,
the stores display has SP TEST displayed in the
lower right edge. SP TEST is an available option
allowing a manual AIM-7 missile tune or retune to
be commanded to the radar system.
72. When SP TEST is selected from the stores
display, the mission computer system (MC) tests
the tune available status from the radar system. If
tune is available at SP TEST selection, the MC
transmits a tune request to the radar system. The
radar system commands the BIT logic to enable the
MC commanded tune or retune functions, and
transmits in a missile compatible pulse doppler
014 00
Page 10
illumination mode. The radar system transmits for
seven seconds then disables the MC commanded
tune or retune functions.
73. MC commanded tune or retune can not be
commanded unless the tune available bit is set.
Tune is available if the conditions below exist:
a. radar system is not in test
b. radar system is not in flood
c. radar system is not in track
d. EMCON is not commanded
e. radar transmitter has full RF power.
A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - AIR TO AIR SEARCH MODE DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Air to Air Search Mode Displays ...................................................... WP014 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

A/A Data Sublevel Display, Figure 5 ....................................................................................................... 13

Azimuth/Elevation (Az/El) Display, Figure 6......................................................................................... 15
Expanded Azimuth/Elevation (Az/El) Display, Figure 7...................................................................... 17
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Range While Search (RWS) Display, Figure 2....................................................................................... 5
Stores Display, Figure 4 ............................................................................................................................. 11
Track While Scan (TWS) Display, Figure 3........................................................................................... 8
Velocity Search (VS) Display, Figure 1 ................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. c. track while scan (TWS)

2. The following radar system A/A search mode d. stores display

displays and weapons system stores display support
the Principles of Operation (WP014 00): e. data sublevel display

a. velocity search (VS) f. azimuth/elevation (AZ/EL)

b. range while search (RWS) g. expanded azimuth/elevation.

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Velocity Search (VS) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 3

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

4
Ñ MODE SELECT VS, TWS, RWS YES YES
3
Ñ MODE SELECT TWS, RWS YES YES
VS NO YES
PRF SELECT COMMAND HI NO NO
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 40°, 60°, 80°, 140° YES YES
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND CHANNEL
SET (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, AND *)
SELECTION
1 SILENT RADAR SILENT YES 4
Ñ YES
3
Ñ NO
4
Ñ TARGET AGING FIRST END OF BAR, 2, 4, 8, 16, AND 32 YES YES
SECONDS
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.
2 Ñ2 ECCM SELECTS A/G MAP MODE IF IN A/G OR YES YES
SURFACE NAV AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE
3
Ñ RESET DESELECTS DT2 TARGET OR RAID, YES YES
DESIGNATES STT TARGET AS L and S
TARGET, RESELECTS AUTOMATIC
RANGE SCALE ADJUSTMENT
4
Ñ SPEED GATE NORM, WIDE YES NO
3
Ñ RDR/JMR SELECTS RADAR OR JAMMER FILTER YES NO
PRIORITY
VELOCITY 2400 KNOTS AND 800 KNOTS YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
DECLUTTER DCLTR 1 REMOVES THE A/C VELOCITY YES NO
Ñ 4 1/2 VECTOR AND ARTIFICIAL HORIZON
LINE
DCLTR 2 ALSO REMOVES RELATIVE
ALTITUDE CHARACTERS, RANGE
RATE CARET, AND RANGE RATE
NUMERIC
ERASE ERASES EXISTING TARGET AGING YES YES
HISTORY
3
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/A DATA SUBLEVEL YES NO
DISPLAY

Figure 1. Velocity Search (VS) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 4

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

ELEVATION BAR 1, 2, 4, AND 6 YES YES

SCAN SELECTION
ANTENNA POSITIONED BY RADAR ELEVATION NO YES
ELEVATION CARET CONTROL. INDICATES RADAR
ANTENNA POSITION IN ELEVATION
TRAIN DISABLES FREQUENCY DIVERSITY YES NO

LEGEND
1 RADAR SILENT IS NOT AVAILABLE DURING AIM-7 MISSILE TUNING.

2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. Velocity Search (VS) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 5

Figure 2. Range While Search (RWS) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 6

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

4
Ñ MODE SELECT VS, TWS, RWS YES YES
3
Ñ MODE SELECT TWS, RWS YES YES
VS NO YES
PRF SELECT INTL, HI, MED, AND PDI YES YES
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 40°, 60°, 80°, 140° YES YES
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND CHANNEL
SET (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, AND *)
SELECTION
1 SILENT RADAR SILENT YES 4
Ñ YES
3
Ñ NO
SET ALLOWS SELECTION AND STORING OF YES YES
WEAPON PARAMETERS (TARGET
AGING, ELEVATION BARS, AZIMUTH
SCAN, PRF, AND RANGE SCALE)
4
Ñ TARGET AGING FIRST END OF BAR, 2, 4, 8, 16, AND 32 YES YES
SECONDS
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION
2 Ñ4 ECCM SELECTS A/G MAP MODE IF IN A/G OR YES YES
SURFACE NAV AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE
3
Ñ RESET DESELECTS DT2 TARGET OR RAID, YES YES
DESIGNATES STT TARGET AS L and S
TARGET, RESELECTS AUTOMATIC
RANGE SCALE ADJUSTMENT
4
Ñ SPEED GATE NORM, WIDE YES NO
RDR/JMR SELECTS RADAR OR JAMMER FILTER YES NO
PRIORITY
RANGE INCREMENT/ 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, AND 160 NMI YES 4
Ñ YES
DECREMENT
DECLUTTER 1/2 DCLTR 1 REMOVES THE A/C VELOCITY YES NO
VECTOR AND ARTIFICIAL HORIZON
LINE
DCLTR 2 ALSO REMOVES RELATIVE
ALTITUDE CHARACTERS, RANGE
RATE CARET, AND RANGE RATE
NUMERIC
ERASE ERASES EXISTING TARGET AGING YES YES
HISTORY

Figure 2. Range While Search (RWS) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 7

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

3
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/A DATA SUBLEVEL YES NO
DISPLAY
ELEVATION BAR 1, 2, 4, AND 6 YES YES
SCAN SELECTION
ANTENNA POSITIONED BY RADAR ELEVATION NO YES
ELEVATION CARET CONTROL. INDICATES RADAR
ANTENNA POSITION IN ELEVATION
4
Ñ LATENT TWS ASSOCIATED TWS TRACKFILE YES NO
SYMBOLOGY IS DISPLAYED FOR THE
HIT UNDER THE ACQUISITION
CURSOR
3
Ñ MODE SELECTS VSRWS, VEC1, OR VEC2 RWS YES NO
SUBMODES
Ñ 3 ACQ POINT INDICATES POSITION OF HIGHEST NO NO
CUE PRIORITY MSI TRACKFILE WHEN ITS
HAFU CANNOT BE DISPLAYED
TRAIN DISABLES FREQUENCY DIVERSITY YES NO

LEGEND
1 RADAR SILENT IS NOT AVAILABLE DURING AIM-7 MISSILE TUNING.

2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 2. Range While Search (RWS) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 8

Figure 3. Track While Scan (TWS) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 9

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

6
Ñ MODE SELECT VS, TWS, RWS YES YES
7
Ñ MODE SELECT TWS, RWS YES YES
VS NO YES
PRF SELECT INTL, HI, MED, AND PDI YES YES
ELEVATION BAR 2 (80°, 60°, 40°, 20°), 4 (40°, 20°), YES YES
SCAN SELECTION AND 6 (20°)
(AZIMUTH SCAN)
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND CHANNEL
SET (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, AND *)
SELECTION
7
Ñ SILENT RADAR SILENT YES NO
6
Ñ TARGET AGING ALLOWS TARGET AGING OF UNFILED YES YES
TARGETS. FIRST END OF BAR, 2, 4, 8,
16, AND 32 SECONDS
7
Ñ ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION
1 Ñ
6 ECCM
SURFACE SELECTS A/G MAP MODE IF IN A/G OR YES YES
NAV AIRCRAFT MASTER MODE
RESET RESETS ALL MANUALLY FILED YES YES
TARGETS. NORMAL TRACKFILE
PRIORITIES ARE RESUMED.
DESELECTS DT2 TARGET,
TWS EXPAND, OR RAID. DESIGNATES
THE STT TARGET AS THE L and S
TARGET.
Ñ 7 RESELECTS AUTOMATIC
RANGE SCALE ADJUSTMENT.
Ñ 7 REMOVES BIAS FROM TWS
AUTO SCAN CENTER.
Ñ 6 DESELECTS HITS OPTION
AUTOMATIC/ AUTOMATICALLY CENTERS ON THE YES YES
MANUAL/ CENTROID OF TARGETS WITH TRACK
BIAS SCAN FILES. BIAS REPLACES AUTO WHEN
CENTERING TARGET AZIMUTH SCAN CENTER IS
MODIFIED USING THE TDC. SCAN
CENTER IS MANUALLY MOVED WITH
TDC AND ANTENNA ELEVATION
CONTROL

Figure 3. Track While Scan (TWS) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 10

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

6
Ñ SPEED GATE NORM, WIDE YES NO
7
Ñ RDR/JMR SELECTS RADAR OR JAMMER FILTER YES NO
PRIORITY
4 NCTR
RANGE INCREMENT/ 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, AND 160 NMI YES YES
DECREMENT
6
Ñ DECLUTTER 1/2 DCLTR 1 REMOVES THE A/C VELOCITY YES NO
VECTOR AND ARTIFICIAL HORIZON
LINE
DCLTR 2 ALSO REMOVES RELATIVE
ALTITUDE CHARACTERS, RANGE
RATE CARET, AND RANGE RATE
NUMERIC
HITS RAW TARGET HIT POSITIONS ARE YES YES
DISPLAYED
7
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/A DATA SUBLEVEL YES NO
DISPLAY
6
Ñ REJECT REMOVES DATA LINK SYMBOLOGY YES NO
FROM DISPLAY
ANTENNA POSITIONED BY RADAR ELEVATION NO YES
ELEVATION CARET CONTROL
TWS EXPAND COMMANDS TWS EXPANDED DISPLAY YES YES
TRAIN DISABLES FREQUENCY DIVERSITY YES NO

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
2 FILED TARGETS ARE NUMBERED 1 THRU 8 FOR PRIORITY.
3 REFER TO DATA LINK DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP005 00.
4 REFER TO NON-COOPERATIVE TARGET RECOGNITION (NCTR) DISPLAYS,
A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00.
5 PRIORITY 1 TARGET DESIGNATED AS THE L and S TARGET UNLESS
MANUALLY CHANGED.
6
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
7
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 3. Track While Scan (TWS) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 11

Figure 4. Stores Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 12

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 4. Stores Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 13

Figure 5. A/A Data Sublevel Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 14

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

1 ECCM

LOW DUTY FACTOR LDF YES NO

SPEED GATE NORM, WIDE YES NO

TARGET AGING ALLOWS TARGET AGING OF UNFILED YES NO
TARGETS. FIRST END OF BAR, 2, 4, 8, 16, AND 32
SECONDS
DECLUTTER 1/2 DCLTR 1 REMOVES AIRCRAFT VELOCITY YES NO
VECTOR AND ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE
DCLTR 2 ALSO REMOVES RELATIVE ALTITUDE,
CLOSING VELOCITY FROM L and S TARGET,
LAUNCH ZONES FROM DT2 TARGET, TRACKED
TARGET HEADING
DATA DESELECTS A/A DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
LATENT TWS ASSOCIATED MSI TRACKFILE SYMBOLOGY IS YES NO
DISPLAYED FOR THE HIT UNDER THE
ACQUISITION CURSOR
MULTI-SOURCE MSI TRACKFILE SYMBOLOGY IS DISPLAYED YES NO
INTEGRATION FOR TRACKFILES WITH OTHER THAN RADAR
CONTRIBUTION
COLOR COLOR YES NO
TRAIN DISABLES FREQUENCY DIVERSITY YES NO
GHOST ALLOWS DISPLAY OF EXTRAPOLATED YES NO
L AND S TARGET FOR 30 SECONDS

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

Figure 5. A/A Data Sublevel Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 15

Figure 6. Azimuth/Elevation (Az/El) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 16

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

SELECTED SENSOR RDR, FLIR YES YES

INDICATION AND
OPERATING MODE
FIELD OF VIEW SELECT ALLOWS RADAR AND FLIR FIELD OF YES YES
VIEW (FOV) CUES TO BE DISPLAYED.
SELECTED SENSOR FOV CUE IS
DISPLAYED AT A HIGHER INTENSITY.
ELEVATION SCALE 10° (±5°), 30° (±15°), 60° (±30°), 140° (±70°) YES YES
SELECT
RESET DESELECTS EXPANDED AZ/EL YES YES
DISPLAY AND REPRIORITIZES MSI
TARGETS.
EXPAND EXPANDS AZ/EL DISPLAY ABOUT THE YES YES
MSI L and S TARGET

Figure 6. Azimuth/Elevation (Az/El) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 015 00
Page 17/(18 blank)

Figure 7. Expanded Azimuth/Elevation (Az/El) Display

A1-F18AC-742-100 016 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - AIR TO GROUND DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Diagrams - Air to Ground Displays ....................................................................... WP017 00
Mode Selection and Video Displays....................................................................... WP011 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Air to Ground Displays .............................................................................................................................. 2

Air to Ground Ranging....................................................................................................................... 2
Doppler Beam Sharpened.................................................................................................................. 5
Fixed Target Track (FTT) and Ground Moving Target Track (GMTT) .................................. 10
Ground Moving Target Indication ................................................................................................... 8
Precision Velocity Update ................................................................................................................. 9
Real Beam Ground Map .................................................................................................................... 3
Real Beam Ground Map - Ground Moving Target Indication .................................................... 9
Real Beam Ground Map - Sea Surface Search............................................................................... 5
Sea Surface Search.............................................................................................................................. 4
Silent (SIL) .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Terrain Avoidance............................................................................................................................... 9
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,

operation (WP014 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
set are required, refer to the work packages listed
(This WP)
below:
(4) Target acquisition, operation
a. Sequence of operation: (WP013 00)

(1) Mode selection and video displays, (5) A/A track mode displays, operation
operation (WP011 00) (WP018 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(6) Head-up displays, operation
(WP020 00).
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
c. Functional operation:
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Doppler, operation (WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Electronic Counter-Countermeasures
(ECCM), operation (WP042 00)
(15) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. AIR TO GROUND DISPLAYS.
4. Refer to WP017 00 for radar system air to
ground displays.
5. The air to ground modes are radar system
ground map, navigation, target detection, and
tracking. A/G mode displays are listed below:
016 00
Page 2
a. air to ground ranging (AGR)
b. sea surface search (SEA)
c. real beam ground map - sea surface search
(SEA-MAP)
d. real beam ground map (MAP)
e. doppler beam sharpened (EXP1, EXP2,
EXP3)
f. ground moving target indication (GMT)
g. real beam ground map - Ground moving
target indication (GMT-MAP)
h. precision velocity update (PVU)
i. terrain avoidance (TA)
j. fixed target track (FTT) and ground moving
target track (GMTT).
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. Air to ground displays are displayed on a 4 inch
by 4 inch section of the Digital Display Indicator
(indicator). The remaining screen is used for display
of the selected mode and mode options. If required,
refer to A/G Pushbutton Switch Controls
WP011 00 for selected mode and mode options.
8. MAP, SEA, GMT, SEA-MAP, GMT-MAP and
TA are displayed in a depressed center, range
versus azimuth plan-position indicator (PPI)
format. Doppler beam sharpened modes of EXP1,
EXP2 and EXP3 are displayed as expanded
sections of the PPI format.
9. AIR TO GROUND RANGING. AGR mode is
selected automatically when needed for A/G weapon
delivery modes or when a designation requiring
AGR data is made.
10. After selection of the AGR mode, the mission
computer system (MC) slaves the antenna to the
MC determined line-of-sight (los). AGR determines
range and doppler velocity error along the los
commanded by the MC and sends the result to the
MC. If a target is detected near the commanded los,
AGR provides the processing required to start fixed
target track (FTT).
11. AGR is done in two phases:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. acquisition phase
b. ground track phase.
12. In the acquisition phase, data from the radar
target data processor (RTDP) is processed by the
computer-power supply (CPS) to determine
acquisition range along the commanded los.
13. Ground track phase continuously tracks and
updates the range to ground using monopulse or
split-gate methods. Range to ground updates are
computed using the difference in track range and
the difference in velocity and los velocity from the
MC.
14. AGR continuously computes range and range
rate until either a new mode is commanded or a
target is acquired and transition to FTT is started.
AGR acquisition ranges are from 1000 feet to 10
nautical miles (nmi).
15. AGR processing controls the operation of
antenna positioning and range acquisition.
16. Antenna positioning is commanded by the CPS,
after the MC has commanded a los. The antenna is
then pointed along the commanded los. Elevation
and azimuth angle commands are limited by the
conditions listed below:
a. If the commanded elevation look down angle
is greater than 60°, the CPS sets it to 60°.
b. If the commanded elevation look up angle is
greater than 60°, the CPS sets the elevation and
azimuth to 0°.
c. If the commanded azimuth angle is greater
than 70°, the CPS sets the elevation and azimuth to
0°.
d. If the difference between the commanded
and true angle error is greater than 5°, range
acquisition is entered.
17. Range acquisition is done on the initial AGR
mode entry. Range data is analyzed to determine a
valid range acquisition. When a range acquisition is
determined, and it does not exceed 10 nmi, the
AGR ground tracking phase is entered. If it is
greater than 10 nmi, the AGR mode is reset.
18. AGR Display. Refer to A/G Ranging (AGR)
Display (WP017 00). No dynamic radar display
016 00
Page 3
exists during the AGR mode. The display is made
up of the available parameter/options listed below:
a. RF channel select (CHAN), the RF channel
display indicates the selection made using CHAN.
b. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), declutter (DCLTR) shown
selected.
c. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), A/G data sublevel display
select (DATA). Refer to A/G Data Sublevel Display
(WP017 00).
d. silent select (SIL).
19. The offset aim point (OAP)/target slant range is
displayed inside the radar display edge. OAP/target
slant range is provided to the MC for weapon
delivery computation. Velocity error is displayed
directly below OAP/target slant range. Velocity
error is provided as advisory information for aircraft
velocity update.
20. REAL BEAM GROUND MAP. MAP is selected
by:
a. pressing the mode select pushbutton switch.
Refer to Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display
(WP017 00).
b. hands on throttle and stick (HOTAS)
selections. Refer to HOTAS controls (WP011 00).
21. MAP is primarily used for sensor aided weapon
delivery when discrete radar ground targets or an
OAP is designated. After selection, the MC
commands the radar to MAP by way of the avionic
mux to the CPS.
22. Initially, the radar system automatically sets
video gain, beam shape, and best antenna elevation
angle. Best antenna elevation angle is provided by
the radar for the best beam coverage of the surface
being scanned. Initial best antenna elevation angle
is computed using aircraft altitude and the existing
radar range scale.
23. The MAP mode detects and displays the terrain
in a maximum scan of 120° in front of the aircraft.
The radar display and antenna are drift stabilized
so that the center of the display is representative of
A1-F18AC-742-100
ground track. The MAP mode uses a low pulse
repetition frequency (prf) to improve discrete
ground target returns.
24. Real Beam Navigation Ground Map - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Real beam
navigation ground map (NAVMP) mode is a
submode of MAP mode. NAVMP mode provides a
8 to 1 doppler beam sharpened map display with a
±5° notch of the MAP display centered on the
aircraft nose. NAVMP is available in MAP,
SEA-MAP, and GMT-MAP. The NAVMP option is
boxed when NAVMP is selected. NAVMP
processing is not done if the selected range is
greater than 40 nmi. For selected ranges greater
than 40 nmi, NAVMP is available for selection, but
MAP processing is done.
25. Map Display. Refer to real beam ground map
(MAP) display (WP017 00). The MAP display
shows the selected range displayed in the upper
right display area. Maximum range is the upper
most range grid line inside the display. The top 1/8
inch of the upper range grid line is made up of a
gray scale which is used as a reference to adjust the
brightness and contrast levels. The gray scale has
eight levels of brightness which show no return to
full return. The remaining range grid lines divide
the selected range scale into four equal segments.
Zero range is the bottom center of the MAP display.
Aircraft magnetic heading is displayed at the top
center of the display.
26. In doppler beam sharpened (DBS) mode,
limited azimuth scan is available by selecting one of
the azimuth scan select options other than 120°.
The azimuth scan can be positioned off the aircraft
ground track using the throttle designator control
(TDC). The radar system provides drift
compensation to position the azimuth scan and
displays the area the antenna is scanning, centered
on the indicator. The antenna azimuth scan off the
ground track is displayed in degrees as ground track
angle and can differ from aircraft heading by a
maximum of 10°.
27. EXP1, EXP2 and EXP3 are options of the
MAP mode for sharpening the display resolution of
a specific area of the radar scan. EXP1, EXP2 and
EXP3 doppler beam sharpened are not options in
the SEA or GMT mode.
28. The mission computer provides the antenna
elevation scale for display on the indicator. The
016 00
Page 4
antenna elevation scale is referenced to the local
horizontal with scale center at 0° and graduated in
20° increments to a maximum of ±60°. The antenna
elevation scale is where the best antenna elevation
position is displayed. The antenna elevation angle is
indexed by the antenna elevation caret.
29. The LST cue is displayed in all A/G modes
when the laser detector tracker (LDT) is tracking.
The indication flashes until an LDT designation is
done.
30. Time-to-go is provided to the radar display in
the A/G mode when it is displayed on the HUD.
Time-to-go is displayed in all A/G modes.
31. Available parameters/options are shown on the
Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display
(WP017 00).
32. SEA SURFACE SEARCH. SEA mode is selected
by:
a. pressing the mode select pushbutton switch.
Refer to Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display
(WP017 00).
b. HOTAS selections. Refer to HOTAS controls
(A/G mode) (WP011 00).
33. SEA mode is primarily used to detect discrete
targets over large bodies of water. Mode selection
and MC mode commands are identical to MAP
mode.
34. The SEA mode operating parameters, for
example, azimuth scan, beam shape, and elevation,
are identical to the MAP mode. WITH DIGITAL
DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND
UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the range selection is
limited to a maximum of 80 nmi.
35. The SEA mode operates in a low prf, phase
shifted, pulse to pulse frequency agility waveform.
The SEA mode provides processing for high
sensitivity in detecting surface targets with a
minimum amount of sea clutter return. The display
and antenna are drift stabilized so that display
center is representative of ground track.
36. Sea Display. Refer to Sea Surface Search
(SEA) Display (WP017 00). Discrete target
detections are synthetically displayed in the SEA
mode. Video gain control is not functional or
displayed, because of the synthetic display. The
A1-F18AC-742-100
SEA mode display format is identical to the MAP
mode.
37. Available parameters/options are shown on the
Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display (WP017 00).
38. Interleaved (INTL) Option. Refer to Sea
Surface Search (SEA) Display (WP017 00). The
INTL option is available in SEA mode to allow the
display of sea video and background map video.
39. REAL BEAM GROUND MAP - SEA SURFACE
SEARCH. SEA-MAP is the SEA mode with the
INTL option selected. SEA-MAP is entered by:
a. pressing the INTL pushbutton switch. Refer
to Real Beam Ground Map-Sea Surface Search
(SEA - MAP) Display (WP017 00).
b. HOTAS selections. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
40. When INTL is selected the radar system is
commanded to process and display SEA mode
video. The SEA video is processed one time during
each two scans of the antenna. On alternate scans,
MAP mode video is processed and displayed. The
effect is SEA video with Map video superimposed.
This allows the display of coastal ground returns
during a SEA operating mode.
41. SEA-MAP Display. Refer to Real Beam Ground
Map-Sea Surface Search (SEA-MAP) Display
(WP017 00). SEA-MAP displays are identical in
format to SEA mode, with the addition of MAP
video. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), parameter/option limitations
are identical to the SEA mode except 160 nmi range
is available. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), parameter/option limitations
are identical to the SEA mode.
42. DOPPLER BEAM SHARPENED. There are
three levels of doppler beam sharpened resolution
modes:
a. expand 1 (EXP1) or doppler beam sharpened
sector (DBSS).
b. expand 2 (EXP2) or doppler beam sharpened
patch (DBSP).
c. expand 3 (EXP3) or doppler beam sharpened
synthetic aperture radar (DBSSAR).
016 00
Page 5
43. For the remainder of this work package, doppler
beam sharpened modes are described as EXP1,
EXP2 and EXP3.
44. EXP1, EXP2 and EXP3 are high resolution
mapping modes. High resolution is acquired by
frequency separation of ground clutter return.
RTDP processing of ground frequency returns
provides high azimuth resolution. Doppler beam
sharpened map formation times are inversely
proportional to doppler frequency shifts. Mapped
areas on either side of the aircraft ground track are
formed because of the lower shift in doppler
frequency. Doppler beam sharpened maps directly
across the aircraft ground track become increasingly
difficult to map because of the large shift in doppler
frequency.
45. Range resolution is improved in EXP1, EXP2
and EXP3 modes by the use of short pulse widths.
The pulse widths are adjusted so that range and
azimuth resolution approximately match. This is
done to make an undistorted image of the expanded
mapped area.
46. Expand 1. Refer to Real Beam Ground Map
(MAP) Display (WP017 00). EXP1 is a MAP mode
option and is one of the air to ground modes.
47. EXP1 mode option is entered from the MAP
mode when an OAP or target is not designated.
Selection of EXP1 is made by either:
a. pressing EXP1 mode pushbutton switch.
b. HOTAS selections. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
48. The EXP1 field of view indicator edges are
displayed by the radar superimposed on the MAP
video. As this occurs, the acquisition cursor is
removed from the display. The field of view
indicator can be positioned over the complete map
video area using the TDC. During designation, the
video is frozen and not updated until the TDC is
released.
49. EXP1 field of view indicator covers an area 45°
in azimuth. The maximum range of the field of view
indicator outer edge is 40 nmi. The range to the
field of view indicators center is from 3.4 to 28.28
nmi, depending on the position of the EXP1 field of
view indicator within the MAP display. Because of
antenna gimbal limits, the EXP1 field of view
produces maps in part or no maps when displaced
A1-F18AC-742-100
more than 45° in azimuth from the MAP mode
display of scan center. Radar system processing
limits the field of view indicator to near equal
dimensions of range and azimuth.
50. When an area is selected for expanded
inspection, selection of the EXP1 mode can be
commanded by pressing and releasing the TDC
action switch. MAP video is replaced with EXP1
mode expanded display of the selected area
requiring a detailed inspection. Refer to Doppler
Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display
(WP017 00).
51. Expand 1 Mode. Expand 1 mode is entered by
the EXP1 mode option or by selection of an OAP or
target.
52. EXP1 mode selection can be done directly from
the MAP mode by selection of an OAP or target.
After a target or OAP is designated, EXP1 mode is
entered by EXP1 pushbutton switch or HOTAS
selection. The radar system commands the EXP1
mode and display. Refer to Doppler Beam
Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display
(WP017 00).
53. Refer to Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1,
EXP2, EXP3) Display (WP017 00). Mode is
displayed in the upper left of the EXP1 display and
is indicated by EXP1 being boxed. MAP mode,
EXP2 and EXP3 are the only available modes and
mode options.
54. Fast scan (FAST) is available only in the three
doppler beam sharpened modes. FAST reduces the
doppler beam sharpened display update time but
resolution and video processing time are reduced.
FAST display update is approximately three times
faster than slow scan.
55. The radar system initially makes the first frame
of map video as it scans the selected area, over a
period of several seconds. The display is updated
each time a complete video frame is processed.
Because of doppler characteristics, the greater the
antenna off track angle, the less time required for
video processing.
56. Angle off track indicates the relative bearing of
the EXP1 display. If the angle off track lies to the
left of the aircraft ground track, the angle off track
numerics are followed by an L. If the angle off track
lies to the right of the aircraft ground track, the
angle off track numerics are followed by an R.
016 00
Page 6
57. Minimum and maximum range displays are not
available and do not increment or decrement if the
antenna is not stabilized over an area inside the
EXP1 display. Without an OAP or target
designation, the EXP1 display is not ground
stabilized. This way the display has the same range
and azimuth angle to the scan center. The scan
center moves with the aircraft so different parts of
the ground is mapped during each consecutive scan.
If the antenna is stabilized, the display is of the
same ground map, with ranges decreasing as the
aircraft comes closer or increasing as the aircraft
passes.
58. Expand 2. Refer to Doppler Beam Sharpened
(EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (WP017 00). EXP2
is an option for the MAP and EXP1 modes. It is an
air to ground mode.
59. The EXP2 mode is entered from MAP mode or
EXP1 mode by either:
a. pressing EXP2 pushbutton switch.
b. HOTAS selection. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
60. On selection, the EXP2 field of view indicator is
displayed superimposed on either MAP or EXP1
video. As this occurs, the acquisition cursor is
removed from the display. The EXP2 field of view
can be positioned over the complete MAP or EXP1
area using the TDC. During designation, the video
is frozen and not updated until the TDC is released.
61. The EXP2 field of view indicator covers an area
12.6° in azimuth. Maximum range to the field of
view indicator’s edge is 40 nmi. The range to the
field of view indicators center is from 2.5 to 36 nmi,
depending on the EXP2 field of view position on
the display. The EXP2 field of view indicator can
be displaced up to 60° from the aircraft ground
track without exceeding the antenna gimbal limits.
The radar systems processing limits the field of
view indicator to near equal dimensions of range
and azimuth.
62. When the area to be expanded is selected, using
the EXP2 field of view indicator, the EXP2 mode
can be commanded. EXP2 mode is commanded
using the EXP2 mode option by pressing and
releasing the TDC action switch.
63. Expand 2 Mode. The mode is entered normally
by way of either:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. map mode
b. EXP1 mode
c. selection of an OAP or target and then
selecting EXP2.
64. After designating an OAP or target, EXP2
mode is entered by pressing the EXP2 pushbutton
switch or by HOTAS selection. Refer to Doppler
Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display
(WP017 00). The radar system then commands the
EXP2 mode and display.
65. Refer to Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1,
EXP2, EXP3) Display (WP017 00). Selected mode
is displayed in the upper left of the EXP2 display
and is indicated by EXP2 being boxed. MAP,
EXP1 and EXP3 are the only modes available from
the radar display in the EXP2 mode.
66. Selection of MAP commands the MAP mode
and removes the box around EXP2.
67. Selection of EXP1 commands EXP1. Refer to
Expand 1 mode, this WP.
68. Selection of EXP3 commands EXP3 field of
view indicator superimposed on EXP2 video.
69. The EXP2 display is a rotatable B-scan. The
display is squared by the B-scan format. EXP2 is a
ground stabilized display. The same point on the
ground is the center of each consecutive map.
70. Doppler beam sharpened mode antenna control,
limits all maps processed. Antenna gimbal limits
cause map blanking if the field of view indicator
center is positioned or drifts too far off ground
track.
71. The CPS commands the antenna to scan toward
the ground track in EXP1, EXP2 or EXP3 modes
to reduce distortion. When the antenna scan is
straight forward, across the aircraft ground track,
distortion occurs because of processing time and the
large amount of doppler frequency shift. The radar
system is programmed to blank map center when
this occurs.
72. With the antenna scanning straight forward, the
radar system processes the map in two sections.
When the antenna scans from the left toward
aircraft ground track, the radar system processes all
video until the antenna arrives at scan center. From
016 00
Page 7
scan center, no video will be processed until the
antenna arrives at the right gimbal limit and
returns from the right toward aircraft ground track.
Again the radar system processes the doppler beam
sharpened map video until the antenna arrives at
scan center. Map processing stops until the antenna
arrives at the left gimbal limit and returns toward
aircraft ground track.
73. Expand 3. Refer to Doppler Beam Sharpened
(EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (WP017 00). EXP3
is an option for the MAP, EXP1 and EXP2 modes.
EXP3 is the highest resolution air-to-ground map
mode.
74. The EXP3 mode is entered from MAP, EXP1
or EXP2 mode by either:
a. pressing EXP3 pushbutton switch.
b. HOTAS selection. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
75. On selection, the EXP3 field of view indicator is
displayed superimposed on either MAP, EXP1 or
EXP2 video. As this occurs, the acquisition cursor is
removed from the display. The EXP3 field of view
can be positioned any place over the MAP, EXP1
or EXP2 area up to a maximum range of 30 nmi
using the TDC. During designation, the video is
frozen and not updated until the TDC is released.
76. The EXP3 field of view indicator azimuth scan
is variable. Azimuth scan depends on range.
Maximum range to the field of view indicator’s edge
is 30 nmi. The range to the field of view indicator’s
center is from 2 to 28 nmi, depending on the EXP3
field of view position on the display. The EXP3
field of view indicator can be displaced up to 60°
from the aircraft ground track without exceeding
the antenna gimbal limits. The radar systems
processing limits the field of view indicator to near
equal dimensions of range and azimuth.
77. When the area to be expanded is selected, using
the EXP3 field of view indicator, the EXP3 mode
can be commanded. EXP3 mode is commanded
using the EXP3 mode option by pressing and
releasing the TDC action switch.
78. Expand 3 Mode. The mode is entered normally
by way of either:
a. MAP mode
b. EXP1 mode
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. EXP2 mode.
d. selection of an OAP or target and then
selecting EXP3.
79. After designating an OAP or target, EXP3
mode is entered by pressing the EXP3 pushbutton
or by HOTAS selection. Refer to Doppler Beam
Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display
(WP017 00). The radar system then commands the
EXP3 mode and display.
80. Refer to Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1,
EXP2, EXP3) Display (WP017 00). Selected mode
is displayed at the top of the EXP3 display and is
indicated by EXP3 being boxed. MAP, EXP1 and
EXP2 are the only modes available from the radar
display in the EXP3 mode.
81. Selection of MAP commands the MAP mode
and removes the box around EXP3.
82. Selection of EXP1 commands EXP1. Refer to
Expand 1 mode, this WP.
83. Selection of EXP2 commands EXP2. Refer to
Expand 2 mode, this WP.
84. The EXP3 display is a rotatable B-scan. The
display is squared by the B-scan format. EXP3 is a
ground stabilized display. The same point on the
ground is the center of each consecutive map.
85. Doppler beam sharpened mode antenna control,
limits all maps processed. Antenna gimbal limits
cause map blanking if the field of view indicator
center is positioned or drifts too far off ground
track.
86. The CPS commands the antenna to scan toward
the ground track in EXP1, EXP2 or EXP3 modes
to reduce distortion. When the antenna scan is
straight forward, across the aircraft ground track,
distortion occurs because of processing time and the
small amount of doppler frequency shift. The radar
system is programmed to blank map center when
this occurs.
87. With the antenna scanning straight forward, the
radar system processes the map in two sections.
When the antenna scans from the left toward the
aircraft ground track, the radar system processes all
video until the antenna arrives at scan center. From
scan center, no video will be processed until the
antenna arrives at the right gimbal limit and
016 00
Page 8
returns from the right toward the aircraft ground
track. Again the radar system processes the doppler
beam sharpened map video until the antenna
arrives at scan center. Map processing stops until
the antenna arrives at the left gimbal limit and
returns toward aircraft ground track.
88. GROUND MOVING TARGET INDICATION.
GMT has the ability to detect ground moving
targets. The antenna scan pattern is pitch, roll, and
drift compensated. Selection of the GMT mode is
made by either:
a. pressing the mode select pushbutton switch.
Refer to Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT)
Display (WP017 00).
b. HOTAS selection. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
89. GMT is used to detect ground moving targets.
The only targets displayed are moving targets.
Background returns from fixed ground objects are
not displayed. All targets displayed are synthetically
produced by the radar system. Video gain control is
not functional in this mode.
90. GMT targets are processed in the RTDP and
displayed at maximum intensity. Background video
is blanked as a function of processing in the RTDP.
91. GMT differs from the MAP mode in range scale
selections and azimuth scan selections as listed
below:
a. range scale selection is limited to 40 nmi
b. azimuth scan selection of 120° is not
available.
92. GMT Display. Refer to Ground Moving Target
Indication (GMT) Display (WP017 00). GMT
display is identical in format to the MAP and SEA
displays. The differences in available
parameter/options are:
a. EXP1 and EXP2 doppler beam sharpened
modes are not available.
b. range is limited to 40 nmi.
c. azimuth scan selection of 120° is not
available.
d. ground map video, other than moving
targets, is not displayed.
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. video gain settings are not displayed or
adjustable.
93. Interleaved (INTL) Option. Refer to Ground
Moving Target Indication (GMT) Display
(WP017 00). The INTL option is available in GMT
mode to allow the display of background map video
and moving target video.
94. REAL BEAM GROUND MAP - GROUND
MOVING TARGET INDICATION. GMT-MAP is the
GMT mode with the INTL option selected.
GMT-MAP mode is entered by:
a. pressing the INTL pushbutton switch. Refer
to Real Beam Ground Map - Ground Moving
Target Indication (GMT-MAP) Display
(WP017 00).
b. HOTAS selections. Refer to HOTAS controls
(WP011 00).
95. When INTL is selected, the radar system is
commanded to process and display MAP mode
video. The MAP video is processed one time during
each two scans of the antenna. On alternate scans,
GMT mode video is processed and displayed. The
effect is MAP video with GMT video superimposed.
This allows orientation of the moving target to the
terrain surrounding it.
96. GMT-MAP Display. Refer to Real Beam
Ground Map - Ground Moving Target Indication
(GMT-MAP) Display (WP017 00). GMT-MAP
mode displays are identical in format to GMT
mode, with the addition of the MAP mode
background video. Parameter/option limitations are
nearly identical, with the exception of video gain.
With the addition of MAP mode, video gain
settings are available and displayed.
97. Available parameter/options are shown on the
Real Beam Ground Map - Ground Moving Target
Indication (GMT-MAP) Display (WP017 00).
98. PRECISION VELOCITY UPDATE. In the PVU
mode the radar system computes velocity error
components to be used for inflight alignment (IFA)
of the inertial navigation set (INS) or to update MC
aircraft velocities during velocity update.
99. The PVU mode updates the MC with best
available velocity errors. PVU is selected and
deselected from the HSI display on the indicator.
016 00
Page 9
100. After the MC commands PVU mode, the CPS
commands the antenna to three distinct look angles
to separate aircraft velocity vector components. All
antenna look angles are space stabilized and are
listed below:
a. −10° elevation and 45° to the left
b. −45° elevation and 0° azimuth
c. −10° elevation and 45° to the right.
101. Over sea or altitudes above 20,000 ft., or when
the terrain returns are at a minimum; the −10°
elevation look angle at ±45° azimuth is reduced to
−35° elevation to increase doppler returns.
102. After the antenna look angle commands are
completed, the CPS commands the RTDP to do
PVU signal processing. At each antenna look angle
the range to the ground is acquired and tracked in
range and velocity. The processed data is then
supplied to the CPS. At each of the three antenna
look angles, the range and doppler frequency of the
radar ground return is determined.
103. During IFA, coarse doppler acquisition of each
tracked ground point is done to resolve velocity
errors in data inputs from the MC.
104. PVU Display. Refer to Precision Velocity
Update (PVU) Display (WP017 00). There is no
radar display during the PVU mode. The PVU
mode indication is displayed in the top left edge
with rf channel information. All other available
parameter/options are shown on the Precision
Velocity Update (PVU) Display (WP017 00).
105. TERRAIN AVOIDANCE. TA mode is available
in the navigation aircraft master mode when the
radar operating mode is surface (SURF), or air to
ground (A/G).
106. The MC commands the radar system to the
TA mode through commands to the CPS. The CPS
then commands the radar systems operating
parameters to do mode operation, for example,
antenna positioning, waveforms, and the RTDP
signal processing.
107. TA Display. Refer to Terrain Avoidance (TA)
Display (WP017 00). In the TA mode, the radar
searches the area directly in front of the aircraft
and displays detected terrain on the radar display.
Displays are shown in two clearance planes, one at
A1-F18AC-742-100
and above the aircraft altitude and one within 500
feet below aircraft altitude. Terrain that is above
the aircraft altitude is displayed on the digital
display indicator at its brightest intensity. Terrain
below the aircraft altitude but within 500 feet is
displayed at an intermediate intensity. Terrain
more than 500 feet below the aircraft is not
displayed. The two clearance planes are used to
determine the terrain protrusions in front of the
aircraft.
108. The radar antenna and the displays are
stabilized to keep correct orientation during
maneuvers. When the aircraft dives, the display
terrain is tilted down to parallel the aircraft flight
path. This enables the radar to detect and display
terrain protrusions before the aircraft dives into the
area of the protrusions.
109. At the bottom right section of the display is a
brightness reference (wedge). The brightness wedge
serves as a reference for the two clearance plane
intensity levels. The brightness wedge is used as a
reference for recognizing rain or chaff returns from
displayed terrain.
110. Azimuth scan selections are not available in
the TA mode. The radar system limits the antenna
to a 70° scan directly forward of the aircraft.
111. Range scales available are 5 and 10 nmi ranges
with a 1.6 nmi reference range grid line located just
below the brightness wedge. The 1.6 nmi reference
range grid line indicates the lower limit of radar
beam coverage. The area within 0 nmi to 1.6 nmi
cannot be processed or displayed by the radar
system.
112. TA mode fail display is commanded when the
radar detects any system failures that affect the TA
mode. TA failure is shown with a large X (TA fail
indicator) at display center and the legend TA
FAIL directly below the X. The X is removed when
HOTAS mode options are displayed.
113. Available parameter/options are shown on the
Terrain Avoidance (TA) Display (WP017 00).
114. SILENT (SIL). When SIL is selected, radar
functions and displays are provided as described
below:
016 00
Page 10
a. The radar set freezes the video display of the
last antenna scan.
b. The radar transmission is inhibited.
c. The radar provides passive processing of
received signals.
d. The ACTIVE option is displayed.
e. The FRZ (freeze) is boxed.
115. When silent is selected, pressing the ACTIVE
switch commands the radar to transmit for one
antenna scan and update the video display. When
the ACTIVE option is selected by HOTAS, the
acquisition cursor remains in its existing position
and does not return to the stowed position. This
enables ACTIVE to be reselected without moving
the acquisition cursor to the ACTIVE position.
When the SIL switch is pressed again, the radar
resumes normal operation and switches revert to
their initial identity.
116. FIXED TARGET TRACK (FTT) AND GROUND
MOVING TARGET TRACK (GMTT). If track is
entered from MAP, EXP1, EXP2, EXP3, or SEA,
the tracking is FTT. If track is entered from GMT,
the tracking is GMTT.
117. Track is entered by pressing the sensor control
switch in the direction of the radar display and
releasing. When the sensor control switch is
released, track is commanded on the designated
target. If no designated target exists, track is
commanded at the position of the designating
cursor. Refer to A/G manual acquisition, WP013 00.
118. FTT and GMTT Display. Refer to Fixed
Target Track (FTT) and Ground Moving Target
Track (GMTT) Display (WP017 00). The tracked
target is synthetically displayed with target speed
(in knots) and target course (magnetic) on the left
and right side of the target, respectively. If the
target is moving, a course pointer is displayed in the
direction of travel. If the target is not moving, the
course and course pointer are not displayed and the
target speed will be set to zero. The tracked target
is displayed by the radar. The course, course
pointer and target speed are displayed by the MC.
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - AIR TO GROUND DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Air to Ground Displays....................................................................... WP016 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

A/G Data Sublevel Display - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), Figure 11 ................................................................................ 32
A/G Ranging (AGR) Display, Figure 1 .................................................................................................... 3
Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display, Figure 4.................................................. 12
Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT) Display, Figure 5 .............................................................. 18
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Precision Velocity Update (PVU) Display, Figure 7 ............................................................................. 24
Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display, Figure 2 ............................................................................... 4
Real Beam Ground Map - Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT-MAP) Display, Figure 6 .... 21
Real Beam Ground Map - Sea Surface Search (SEA-MAP) Display, Figure 9 ................................ 28
Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display, Figure 3 .......................................................................................... 9
Terrain Avoidance (TA) Display, Figure 8 ............................................................................................. 26
Fixed Target Track (FTT) and Ground Moving Target Track (GMTT) Display, Figure 10......... 31

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. e. ground moving target indication (GMT)

2. The following radar system air to ground

f. real beam ground map - ground moving
displays support the Principles of Operation
target indication (GMT-MAP)
(WP016 00):

a. air to ground ranging (AGR) g. precision velocity update (PVU)

b. real beam ground map (MAP)

h. terrain avoidance (TA)
c. sea surface search (SEA)

d. doppler beam sharpened (EXP1, EXP2,

EXP3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 2

i. real beam ground map - sea surface search

(SEA - MAP)

j. fixed target track (FTT) and ground moving

target track (GMTT)

k. air to ground data sublevel.

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 3

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

2
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND AIR- YES NO
CRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
3
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, AND *
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES NO
1 Ñ 2 ECCM INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION YES NO
SILENT

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. A/G Ranging (AGR) Display

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 4

Figure 2. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 5

Figure 2. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 6

Figure 2. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 7

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

1 EXPAND 1 4 EXP 1 YES YES
1 EXPAND 2 4 EXP 2 YES YES
2 EXPAND 3 4 EXP 3 YES YES
FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, YES YES
AND SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY
IS FROZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND
SELECTION IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS
ERASED.
PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION YES YES
SELECT
SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES
A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE
DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
5 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES
A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, AND *
3 AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 45°, 90°, 120° YES YES
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.
RANGE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
6 ECCM
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES

Figure 2. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 8

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

VIDEO GAIN BEST VIDEO GAIN SETTING DISPLAYED

SETTING WHEN MODE SELECTED. GAIN SETTING
CAN BE CHANGED USING MAP GAIN
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY. GAIN
SETTING CAN ALSO BE CHANGED USING
MAP GAIN INCREMENT AND
DECREMENT PUSHBUTTONS ON THE
Ñ 8 RBGM (MAP) DISPLAY Ñ 7 A/G
DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY.
Ñ 7 RADAR/ TOGGLE FILTER PRIORITY BETWEEN YES NO
JAMMER FILTER RADAR AND JAMMER
PRIORITY
7
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
7
Ñ NAVMP SELECTS REAL BEAM NAVIGATION MAP YES YES
MODE

LEGEND
1 EXP 1 AND EXP 2 FIELD OF VIEW INDICATORS ARE LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM
RANGE OF 40 NMI.
2 EXP 3 FIELD OF VIEW INDICATOR IS LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM RANGE OF 30 NMI.
3 AZIMUTH SCAN SELECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IN EXPANDED MODES.
AZIMUTH SCANS ARE FIXED AT:
A. EXP 1 45° AZIMUTH SCAN.
B. EXP 2 12.6° AZIMUTH SCAN.
C. EXP 3 AZIMUTH SCAN DEPENDS ON RANGE.
4 ACQUISITION CURSOR IS BLANKED ON SELECTION OF EXP 1, EXP 2, OR EXP 3
MODE.
5 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.
6 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
7
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
8
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 2. Real Beam Ground Map (MAP) Display (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 9

Figure 3. Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 10

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, AND YES YES
SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY IS FRO-
ZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND SELECTION
IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS ERASED.
PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION YES YES
SELECT
SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES
A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. COM- YES YES
MANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE ITERATION.
3
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND AIR- YES NO
CRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
1 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES
A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, AND *
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 45°, 90°, 120° YES YES
RANGE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, Ñ
4 160 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
INTERLEAVED INTERLEAVES A SEA OVERLAY ON A MAP YES YES
DISPLAY BACKGROUND
2 Ñ
3 ECCM
4
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES
Ñ 4 RADAR/ TOGGLE FILTER PRIORITY BETWEEN RADAR YES NO
JAMMER FILTER AND JAMMER
PRIORITY

Figure 3. Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 11

LEGEND
1 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.
2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 3. Sea Surface Search (SEA) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 12

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 13

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 14

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 15

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 16

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP YES YES

1 EXPAND 1 3 EXP 1 YES YES
1 EXPAND 2 3 EXP 2 YES YES
1 EXPAND 3 3 EXP 3 YES YES
FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, YES YES
AND SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY
IS FROZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND
SELECTION IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS
ERASED.
PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION IN YES YES
SELECT EXP 1.
PEN IS BOXED AND FAN IS NOT NO NO
AVAILABLE IN EXP 2 AND EXP 3.
SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES
A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.
4 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES
A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, AND *
FAST ALTERNATE ACTION: YES YES
A. FAST NOT SELECTED, SLOW SCAN
B. FAST SELECTED, FAST SCAN
2 AZIMUTH EXP1 AND EXP2 FIELD OF VIEW NO NO
SCAN INDICATORS ARE SUPERIMPOSED ON
MAP VIDEO WITH FIXED SCAN OF 45°
(EXP1) AND 12.6° (EXP2). EXP 3 FIELD OF
VIEW INDICATOR IS VARIABLE AND
DEPENDS ON RANGE
RANGE EXP1 AND EXP2 FIELD OF VIEW NO NO
INCREMENT/ LIMITED TO 40 NMI MAXIMUM RANGE.
DECREMENT EXP3 FIELD OF VIEW LIMITED TO 30 NMI
MAXIMUM RANGE.

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 17

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

VIDEO GAIN BEST VIDEO GAIN SETTING DISPLAYED YES YES

SETTING WHEN MODE SELECTED. GAIN SETTING
CAN BE CHANGED USING MAP GAIN
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY. GAIN
SETTING CAN ALSO BE CHANGED USING
MAP GAIN INCREMENT AND
DECREMENT PUSHBUTTONS ON THE
Ñ 7 RBGM (MAP) DISPLAY Ñ 6 A/G
DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY.
Ñ 6 RADAR/ TOGGLE FILTER PRIORITY BETWEEN YES NO
JAMMER FILTER RADAR AND JAMMER
PRIORITY
6
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
6
Ñ NAVMP SELECTS REAL BEAM NAVIGATION MAP YES YES
MODE
5 Ñ
7 ECCM
7
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES

LEGEND
1 EXPAND MODE FIELD OF VIEW INDICATOR IS DISPLAYED AT PUSHBUTTON
SELECTION WHEN NO TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED. EXPAND MODE IS
ENTERED AT PUSHBUTTON SELECTION WHEN A TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.

2 AZIMUTH SCAN SELECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE IN EXPANDED MODES.

3 ACQUISITION CURSOR IS BLANKED WHEN AN EXPAND MODE IS SELECTED AND

AN OAP OR TARGET IS NOT DESIGNATED.

4 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.

5 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

6
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
7
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 4. Doppler Beam Sharpened (EXP1, EXP2, EXP3) Display (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 18

Figure 5. Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 19

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

INTERLEAVED INTERLEAVES A GMT OVERLAY ON THE MAP YES YES
DISPLAY BACKGROUND
FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, AND YES YES
SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY IS
FROZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND
SELECTION IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS
ERASED.
PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION YES YES
SELECT
SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES
A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.
1 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES
A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECTION
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, AND *
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 45°, 90° YES YES
RANGE 5, 10, 20, 40 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
VIDEO GAIN SET AUTOMATICALLY BY RADAR AND IS NOT - -
SETTING DISPLAYED OR ADJUSTABLE.
3
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES
2 Ñ
3 ECCM
4
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
Ñ 4 RADAR/ TOGGLE FILTER PRIORITY BETWEEN RADAR YES NO
JAMMER FILTER AND JAMMER
PRIORITY

Figure 5. Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 20

LEGEND
1 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.
2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 5. Ground Moving Target Indication (GMT) Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 21

Figure 6. Real Beam Ground Map-Ground Moving Target Indication

(GMT-MAP) Display (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 22

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

INTERLEAVED INTERLEAVES A GMT OVERLAY ON THE YES YES

MAP DISPLAY BACKGROUND.

FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, YES YES

AND SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY
IS FROZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND
SELECTION IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS
ERASED.

PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION. YES YES

SELECT

SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES

A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE

ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES

COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.

1 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES

A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION

RF CHANNEL YES NO

MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECT

AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C,

D, E, F, G, AND *
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 45°, 90° YES YES
RANGE 5, 10, 20, 40 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
2 Ñ
3 ECCM
4
Ñ NAVMP SELECTS REAL BEAM NAVIGATION MAP YES YES
MODE

Figure 6. Real Beam Ground Map-Ground Moving Target Indication

(GMT-MAP) Display (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 23

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

VIDEO GAIN BEST VIDEO GAIN SETTING DISPLAYED YES YES

SETTING WHEN MODE SELECTED. GAIN SETTING
CAN BE CHANGED USING MAP GAIN
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY. GAIN
SETTING CAN ALSO BE CHANGED USING
MAP GAIN INCREMENT AND
DECREMENT PUSHBUTTONS ON THE
Ñ 3 RBGM (MAP) DISPLAY Ñ 4 A/G
DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY.
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES
3
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
4
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO

LEGEND
1 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.
2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 6. Real Beam Ground Map-Ground Moving Target Indication

(GMT-MAP) Display (Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 24

Figure 7. Precision Velocity Update (PVU) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 25

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT PVU IS SELECTED FROM THE HI DIS- NO NO

PLAY ON THE MULTIPURPOSE DISPLAY
GROUP

3
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO

RF CHANNEL YES NO

MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECT

AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C,

D, E, F, G, AND *

2
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR

1 Ñ
2 ECCM

AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES NO

Ñ 3 RADAR/ TOGGLE FILTER PRIORITY BETWEEN YES NO

JAMMER FILTER RADAR AND FILTER
PRIORITY

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 7. Precision Velocity Update (PVU) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 26

Figure 8. Terrain Avoidance (TA) Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 27

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

RF CHANNEL FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C, D, E, YES NO
AUTO F, G, AND * (MANUAL RF CHANNELS NOT
AVAILABLE)
AZIMUTH SCAN THE AZIMUTH SCAN WIDTH IS A FIXED 70° NO NO
CENTERED ON THE GROUND TRACK.
RANGE 5 AND 10 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
4
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
3
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND AIR- YES NO
CRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR
2 Ñ
3 ECCM
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES NO

LEGEND
1 RADAR DETECTION OF ANY FAILURE THAT AFFECTS THE TA MODE CAUSES:
A. TA VIDEO TO BLANK.
B. TA FAIL INDICATOR (LARGE X) TO BE DISPLAYED AT DISPLAY CENTER.
C. TA FAIL TO BE DISPLAYED BELOW TA FAIL INDICATOR

2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 8. Terrain Avoidance (TA) Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 28

Figure 9. Real Beam Ground Map-Sea Surface Search (SEA-MAP) Display (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 29

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

MODE SELECT MAP, GMT, SEA, TA YES YES

INTERLEAVED SUPERIMPOSES SYNTHETIC SEA YES YES
TARGETS ON THE MAP DISPLAY
BACKGROUND.
FREEZE WHEN FRZ IS DISPLAYED, NOT BOXED, YES YES
AND SELECTION IS MADE, THE DISPLAY
IS FROZEN. WHEN FRZ IS BOXED AND
SELECTION IS MADE THE DISPLAY IS
ERASED.
PEN/FAN BEAM TOGGLE PEN/FAN BEAM SELECTION. YES YES
SELECT
SILENT INHIBITS RADAR TRANSMISSION: YES YES
A. BOXES FRZ
B. FREEZES VIDEO DISPLAY
C. DISPLAYS ACTIVE
ACTIVE DISPLAYED WITH SILENT SELECTED. YES YES
COMMANDS RADAR ACTIVE FOR ONE
ITERATION.
1 RESET RADAR AUTOMATICALLY SETS: YES YES
A. VIDEO GAIN
B. ANTENNA ELEVATION ANGLE
C. BEAM SELECTION
RF CHANNEL YES NO
MANUAL SINGLE RF CHANNEL SELECT
AUTO FREQUENCY AGILITY AND SETS A, B, C,
D, E, F, G, AND *
AZIMUTH SCAN 20°, 45°, 90°, 120° YES YES
RANGE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160 NMI YES YES
INCREMENT/
DECREMENT
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES
4
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO
4
Ñ NAVMP SELECTS REAL BEAM NAVIGATION MAP YES YES
MODE
AIR SELECTS RWS MODE YES YES
2 Ñ
3 ECCM
3
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO
AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR

Figure 9. Real Beam Ground Map-Sea Surface Search (SEA-MAP) Display (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 30

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

VIDEO GAIN BEST VIDEO GAIN SETTING DISPLAYED YES YES

SETTING WHEN MODE SELECTED. GAIN SETTING
CAN BE CHANGED USING MAP GAIN
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY. GAIN
SETTING CAN ALSO BE CHANGED USING
MAP GAIN INCREMENT AND
DECREMENT PUSHBUTTONS ON THE
Ñ 3 RBGM (MAP) DISPLAY Ñ 4 A/G
DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY.

LEGEND
1 RESET OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN TARGET OR OAP IS DESIGNATED.
2 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 9. Real Beam Ground Map-Sea Surface Search (SEA-MAP) Display (Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 31

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

2
Ñ DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND AIR- YES NO
CRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR

3
Ñ DATA SELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO

LEGEND
1 IF TRACK TARGET NOT MOVING, TARGET SPEED IS SET TO ZERO AND TARGET
COURSE AND TARGET COURSE POINTER ARE REMOVED FROM DISPLAY.
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 10. Fixed Target Track (FTT) and Ground Moving Target Track (GMTT) Display
A1-F18AC-742-100 017 00
Page 32

PUSH-
PARAMETER/OPTION SELECTIONS BUTTON HOTAS
SWITCH

DATA DESELECTS A/G DATA SUBLEVEL DISPLAY YES NO

DECLUTTER BLANKS ARTIFICIAL HORIZON LINE AND YES NO

AIRCRAFT VELOCITY VECTOR

1 ECCM

MAP GAIN ADJUSTS VIDEO GAIN SETTING YES NO

INCREASE/
DECREASE

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

Figure 11. A/G Data Sublevel Display - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
A1-F18AC-742-100 018 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - AIR TO AIR TRACK MODE DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Diagrams - Air to Air Track Mode Displays ........................................................ WP019 00
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-150/(C)
Data Link (D/L) and Non-Cooperative Target Recognition (NCTR)
Displays ................................................................................................................... WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Air to Air Track Mode Displays ............................................................................................................... 2

Multiple Target Track (RAID) ......................................................................................................... 7
One-look RAID - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000) ................................................................................................................... 8
Single Target Track............................................................................................................................ 6
Track Display Symbols ...................................................................................................................... 2
Track While Scan................................................................................................................................ 9
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Track Display, Table 1................................................................................................................... 10

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation

(WP016 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required, refer to the work packages listed (4) Target acquisition, operation
below: (WP013 00)

a. Sequence of operation: (5) A/A track mode displays, operation

(This WP)
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) (6) Head-up displays, operation
(WP020 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00) b. Radar set, operation (WP009 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. Functional operation:
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Doppler, operation (WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. AIR TO AIR TRACK MODE DISPLAYS.
4. Refer to WP019 00 for radar system air to air
track mode displays.
5. The operation of air to air (A/A) track mode
displays in this WP includes:
a. track display symbols
b. single target track (STT)
c. multiple target track (RAID)
018 00
Page 2
d. track while scan (TWS).
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. Refer to WP043 00 for TWS function operation.
8. TRACK DISPLAY SYMBOLS. Refer to Table 1,
Radar Track Display. The radar system provides
track display symbols for A/A attack. Each A/A
weapon selection modifies the track display, making
the display compatible with weapon characteristics.
Table 1 lists the symbols and alphanumerics
required during full track condition for each A/A
weapon. The symbols are common to STT, RAID,
and TWS.
9. Target Differential Altitude. Target differential
altitude is displayed next to the antenna elevation
(el) caret when the radar is tracking a target. Target
altitudes above own aircraft altitude are positive,
below negative. Differential altitude is displayed in
thousands and tenths of thousands of feet.
Removed from the display if DCLTR 2 selected.
10. Breakaway-X. Presence of the breakaway-X
indicates range to target is less than computed
minimum range. It indicates aircraft should break
off the engagement or change attack position. The
breakaway-X is flashed 2.5 times/sec when
sidewinder AIM-9 is selected. If AIM-7 missile is
selected, the breakaway-X is steady, and remains
displayed during missile time-of-flight.
11. Steering Dot. The steering dot is used with
the allowable steering error circle (ASE) to provide
intercept command steering. The steering dot is
computed using radar range, range rate, and target
line-of-sight. If AIM-9 is selected and the missile is
tracking a different target than the radar, the
steering dot is not displayed.
12. Antenna Elevation Caret. The antenna
elevation caret indicates antenna EL angle and is
pitch and roll stabilized to aircraft horizontal.
13. Pulse-Repetition Frequency (PRF) Select.
PRF indicates the operating prf mode of the radar
set. In A/A track, prf is determined by radar
operating mode, target range, and clutter
conditions. Manual selections of prf are not
available.
14. Allowable Steering Error Circle. The ASE
circle provides steering reference for AIM-7, AIM-9,
and AIM-120 attack. When AIM-7 and AIM-120 are
A1-F18AC-742-100
selected, the ASE circle diameter is computed using
intercept geometry and target/interceptor variables.
In AIM-9, the ASE diameter is fixed.
15. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the ASE circle for AIM-7
and AIM-120 applies nonlinear scaling as the
steering dot moves across the ASE circle. This is
because the area that the displayed ASE circle
represents is not perfectly circular.
16. Target Mach. Target mach is displayed to the
nearest tenth on the left of the tracked target in
STT, and launch range and steering (L and S)
target in TWS.
17. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), target mach is displayed to
the nearest tenth on the left of the second
designated (DT2) target in TWS. Target mach is
displayed to the right of target heading in RAID
mode.
18. Shoot/Lost/Time-Of-Flight/Time-To-Go/Time-
To-Active. The shoot cue is displayed when the
launch parameters for the selected weapon are
satisfied. The shoot cue is steady for AIM-7 and
AIM-120 when target is inside R-max, and flashed
2.5 times/sec for AIM-9. The shoot cue is flashed
for AIM-7 and AIM-120 when target is inside R-ne.
Before the AIM-7 is launched, the missile
time-of-flight (TOF) is displayed. When an AIM-7
is launched, the missile time-to-go (TTG)
remaining, in seconds, is displayed.
19. Before and after AIM-120 is launched,
time-to-active (TTA) is displayed until the
AIM-120 seeker becomes active. After seeker
becomes active, TTG is displayed during full track.
If full track is lost, TOF is displayed for remainder
of computed missile flight time.
20. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG./IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), if full track is lost, TOF is
displayed until full track is reacquired. Then TTG
is displayed again.
21. In the gun mode, the shoot cue is displayed
when the target is in range, the radar is angle
tracking, gun rounds are remaining, and master arm
is selected. Lost is displayed when time to go has
decreased to zero and the radar is in track.
018 00
Page 3
22. In Range Cue. The in range (IN RNG) cue is
displayed in RAID, SCAN RAID, or EXP mode
when the target is in range and the SHOOT cue
criteria is not met.
23. Memory Cue - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The track memory (MEM)
cue is displayed when the radar set is in track
memory. The time in seconds (1 to 99) the radar
has been in track memory is displayed to the right
of the MEM cue.
24. Straight Line (SL) Time To Go. If target range
is not known then SL time to go is displayed. SL
time to go is the difference between the missile
maximum time of flight and the launched missiles
elapsed time of flight.
25. Max Seeker Range (Rseek) Cue - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The Rseek cue
shows that the target is in range, but current
situations prevent target intercept. The below are
used to determine Rseek:
a. radar tracking PRF
b. jamming
c. radar signal to noise ratio
d. target range rate
e. target position
f. ownship altitude.
26. Delayed Acquisition Seeker Range (DASR) Cue
- WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The delayed
acquisition seeker range (DASR) cue is displayed
when the radar is in STT on the L & S target and
the target range in longer than DASR. DASR is
calculated using the same inputs as Rseek, but
assumes the missile will fly out to rocket motor
burnout range before the target is within seeker
range.
27. RAID Cue. In STT, RAID mode is selected
using the HARM target sequence/FLIR fov/RAID
switch on the left throttle grip assembly. A RAID
cue is displayed at the bottom center of the display
when RAID mode is engaged in STT. A crossed out
RAID cue is displayed if the radar cannot engage
A1-F18AC-742-100
the RAID mode. If conditions exist that the RAID
mode cannot be entered for ten seconds, the crossed
out RAID cue is removed and the RAID request is
disabled.
28. RDR AOT Cue - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). In STT, when the MSI
L and S trackfile is not receiving valid range
information from the radar, a radar angle only track
(RDR AOT) cue is displayed at the bottom center
of the display. When the radar is providing valid
range information on the L and S trackfile, this
cue is not displayed.
29. Memory/Jam Cue - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When the radar is in track
memory on a trackfile an indication of this is sent
to the digital data computer. If the radar is in STT
on a trackfile that is in track memory, then an
indication of the amount of time the radar has been
in track memory is also provided to the digital data
computer. A MSI memory condition exists when all
sensors contributing to a MSI trackfile are
indicating a memory condition on that MSI
trackfile. A RMEM cue is displayed at the bottom
center of the tactical display area when the radar is
contributing to the MSI L and S trackfile and it is
in a MSI memory condition. Track memory elapsed
time is displayed next to the RMEM cue if the
radar is in STT on the MSI L and S trackfile. A
MEM cue is displayed at the bottom of the tactical
display area if the radar is not contributing to the
MSI L and S trackfile. The MSI L and S trackfile
memory cuing on the radar attack display has
precedence before the RAID and SPOT cues if the
radar is in RAID or spotlight. The full HAFU
symbol or low priority target symbol is flashed
when any trackfile on the radar attack display is in
a MSI memory condition. If the radar is
contributing to a trackfile in a MSI memory
condition the radar contribution circle inside the
HAFU symbol also flashes. When a MSI memory
condition does not exist and the radar is in track
memory on a trackfile that has a HAFU symbol
displayed on the radar attack display, its radar
contribution circle is flashed.
30. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), when the radar detects
jamming it provides an indication of this to the
digital data computer. If the jamming applies to the
radar STT trackfile or the MSI L and S trackfile, a
018 00
Page 4
XJAM cue is displayed above the memory cue
display area. An indication of jam extrapolated
track elapsed time is also provided next to the
XJAM cue when the jamming applies to the radar
STT trackfile and the radar STT trackfile is not
already in track memory. When the jamming is not
associated with the radar STT trackfile or the MSI
L and S trackfile, a JAM cue is displayed above
the memory cue display area. The LDF (low duty
factor) cue has precedence before jamming cues on
the radar attack display.
31. Launch Range Markers - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The launch range markers
are computed to indicate the launch envelope for
the selected weapon. Computations include target
velocity, attitude, aspect angle, and ownship
velocities and attitude. Three launch range markers
are displayed when AIM-7, AIM-9, or AIM-120 is
selected. They represent maximum launch range (R-
max), maneuvering target launch range also called
the no escape range (R-ne), and minimum launch
range (R-min). An added launch range marker (R
aero) is dynamically displayed between R max and
the 12 o’clock position to indicate the point where
the selected missile still has aerodynamic capability.
32. Launch Range Markers - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The launch range markers
are computed to indicate the launch envelope for
the selected weapon. The digital data computer
computes launch range markers for the top eight
priority MSI trackfiles. Up to two sets of launch
range markers are displayed at one time. Launch
range markers are not displayed in expand or
RAID. Launch range markers are always displayed
for the MSI L and S and DT2 trackfiles. Launch
range markers are also displayed for a top eight
priority MSI trackfile under the acquisition cursor
if two sets of launch range markers are not already
displayed. Computations include target velocity,
attitude, aspect angle, and aircraft velocities and
attitude.
33. Three launch range markers are displayed when
AIM-9 is selected. They represent maximum launch
range (R-max), maneuvering target launch range
also called the no escape range R-ne), and minimum
launch range (R-min). An added launch range
marker for the AIM-7H, (LOFT) is dynamically
displayed between R-max and the 12 o’clock
position to indicate the point where the selected
missile still has aerodynamic capability.
A1-F18AC-742-100
34. When AIM-7 or AIM-120 is selected, three
launch range markers are displayed. These launch
range markers represent maximum launch range
(R-max) displayed at the six o’clock position,
maneuvering target launch range also called the no
escape range (R-ne), and minimum launch range
(R-min). An added launch range marker (LOFT) is
displayed for AIM-7H missiles. This is dynamically
displayed between the R-max and the 12 o’clock
position to indicate the point where the missile still
has time of flight because of lofting.
35. Target Acceleration Vector. The acceleration
of maneuvering targets is displayed in the direction
of acceleration, perpendicular to the target heading
vector, when target acceleration exceeds 3 G’s. The
length of the acceleration vector is a function of
target acceleration. The acceleration vector is
displayed on the tracked target in STT, and on the
L and S target in TWS. Target acceleration vector
is displayed on the second designated (DT2) target
in TWS.
36. Target Aspect Angle Pointer. The aspect
angle pointer is a fixed length and indicates the
target heading relative to own aircraft. The aspect
angle pointer is displayed on the tracked target in
STT, and all filed targets in TWS.
37. Target Altitude. The target altitude is
displayed next to the right side of the tracked
target in STT, and the L and S target in TWS.
The target altitude is displayed next to the right
side of the DT2 target in TWS. The target altitude
is displayed to the nearest thousand feet above
mean sea level.
38. Target Range Caret. A target range caret is
displayed when the radar is tracking a target and
has valid range data. The caret moves vertically
along the right range scale edge at the range of the
tracked target. The target range caret is removed
from the display if DCLTR 2 selected.
39. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), to reduce clutter the target
range caret is removed from the display if the
L and S target HAFU symbol is close to the right
edge of the tactical display.
40. Target Range Rate. Target range rate is a
function of target range divided by change in target
range. The range rate is displayed next to the left
018 00
Page 5
side of the target range caret when valid range rate
is available. The number is positive for closing
targets and negative for opening targets. The target
range rate removed from the display if DCLTR 2
selected. In STT, range selection is automatic. The
range switches to the next higher range when target
range exceeds 93 percent of the existing range. The
range switches to the next lower range when target
range decreases to less than 45 percent of the
existing range. Manual range selections are available
in TWS.
41. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), to reduce clutter the target
range rate is removed from the display if the
L and S target HAFU symbol is close to the right
edge of the tactical display.
42. Selected Range - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Range selection is automatic
in STT or TWS if a range control (L and S, DT2,
or STT) target exists with valid range and is located
in the tactical display area. The range switches to
the next higher range when the furthest range
control target’s range exceeds 90 percent of the
selected range. In STT, the range switches to the
next lower range when the furthest range control
target’s range decreases to less than 40 percent of
the selected range. There is no automatic decrement
function in TWS. Manual range selections are also
available using the range increment and decrement
pushbutton switches. When the range is changed
manually, it remains manually adjustable until the
RSET pushbutton switch is pressed.
43. Weapon Type And Amount. The selected
weapon and amount of missiles available for launch
are:
a. AIM-7 displays either 7F or 7M cue.
b. AIM-9 displays 9M or 9L.
c. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the following are displayed:
(1) AIM-120A displays AA.
(2) AIM-120B displays AB.
(3) AIM-120C displays AC.
A1-F18AC-742-100
44. TWS Mode Option. In STT and RAID, the
mode option is provided so the radar can be
commanded directly to TWS. The radar forms the
track files around the STT target.
45. A/A Waypoint and North Pointer. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP OR 92A. In STT, TWS, and RWS, the
waypoint and north pointer are displayed if the air
to air waypoint (A/A WYPT or A/AWP)
pushbutton switch on the HSI display is selected.
The waypoint and north pointer is only be
displayed if the waypoint is within the radar’s field
of view. The waypoint is displayed as a circle if
undesignated and as a diamond if the waypoint is
designated (target).
45A. A/A Waypoint and North Pointer - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). In STT, TWS, and
RWS, the waypoint and north pointer are displayed
if the air to air waypoint (A/AWP) pushbutton
switch on the HSI display is selected. The waypoint
and north pointer is only displayed if the waypoint
is within the radar’s field of view. The waypoint is
displayed as a circle. Associated with the waypoint
symbol, a pointer is also displayed which will
indicate the direction of magnetic north. The
pointer will indicate true north if the heading
reference (HDG TRUE) pushbutton switch on the
HSI display is selected.
46. Target Bearing/Range. In STT and TWS, the
tracked target’s bearing and range relative to the
waypoint are displayed if the air to air waypoint
(A/A WYPT or A/AWP) pushbutton switch on the
HSI display is selected and range track and angle
track are valid.
47. Target Heading. In STT and TWS, the target
heading indicates the magnetic heading of the
tracked target. The target heading is removed if
DCLTR 2 is selected.
48. SINGLE TARGET TRACK. Refer to STT Radar
Displays (WP019 00). STT is entered at the
completion of manual or automatic target
acquisition. STT is indicated by the attack display
on the multipurpose display group. The radar
continually monitors the range and angle of the
tracked target. This data is used to compute missile
or gun attack. The attack display provides intercept
course and launch/firing envelope based on
computed data. ACM mode and STT launch
018 00
Page 6
envelope are not available in navigation aircraft
master mode.
49. Steering And Launch Zone Display. The
steering and launch zone displays are the ASE
circle, steering dot, and the launch range markers.
(R-max, LOFT, R-ne, and R- min in SP mode). The
steering and launch zone displays are computed in
the mission computer system using radar set and
other avionic systems data. These attack displays
exist during AIM-7 and AIM-9 attack only.
49A. Sparrow Seeker Range (Rseek) Cue - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The Rseek cue, or
sparrow seeker cue, is displayed as a small circle on
the radar display when the radar is in STT with
sparrow selected, the LOFT push button is boxed
on the stores format and in all ranges. When LOFT
is unboxed, the Rseek cue is displayed when seeker
range is less than target range and the target is
between R-max and R-min launch ranges.
49B. The Rseek cue shows that the target is in
range, but current situations prevent target
intercept. The below are used to determine Rseek:
a. radar tracking PRF
b. jamming
c. radar signal to noise ratio
d. target range rate
e. target position
f. ownship altitude.
50. Track Steering. The required steering task is
to fly the aircraft with the steering dot inside the
ASE circle to arrive at an in-range condition.
51. In the AIM-7 mode, in-range occurs when target
range is inside R-max (steady SHOOT cue
displayed). R-max is an in range condition for
targets that do not make evasive maneuvers. An IN
RNG cue is displayed when target range is within R
aero and radar operating mode is RAID, SCAN
RAID, or EXP and SHOOT cue criteria have not
been met. When the target range is inside R-ne
(flashing SHOOT cue) an in range condition exists
for all targets whether maneuvering or not. In the
AIM-9 mode, R-max is computed for the longest
range at which missile launch results in target
impact.
A1-F18AC-742-100
52. PRF Waveforms. The radar set selects the best
prf for the existing conditions. The STT mode is
initialized in medium prf if no AIM-7 missiles are in
flight. When AIM-7 missiles are launched, the radar
set switches to pulse doppler illumination (PDI)
missile illumination. Low prf is selected when a
target is screened by main lobe clutter (MLC)
unless conditions exist as listed below:
a. AIM-7 missile illumination, PDI, is not
required.
b. Target range is less than MLC range.
c. Good signal to noise ratio exists.
Target returns are not screened out by MLC in low
prf. If the radar does not enter low prf, the radar
extrapolates target position while in MLC.
53. Missile Illumination Logic. When commanded,
the radar switches to the AIM-7 compatible prf
with burst ranging. When burst ranging occurs, the
radar provides a multibar, narrow azimuth scan
pattern around the tracked target for a short time,
then return to track is commanded. When the MC
issues a burst ranging inhibit signal, the radar
switches to the fully compatible AIM-7 PDI mode.
54. When an AIM-7 launch initiate is received from
the stores management system, the radar set
immediately switches to fully compatible AIM-7
PDI. The radar continues in the PDI compatible
waveform until it receives the missile off command,
an air combat maneuvering mode is selected, or
return to search is commanded.
55. PDI Cue. If the radar switches to PDI mode,
PDI is displayed where the PRF legend is
displayed.
56. The PDI legend is displayed and boxed when
the PRF pushbutton is pressed, PDI legend was not
displayed, a AIM-7 missile is the selected weapon,
and no AIM-120 missile is in flight. The boxed PDI
indicates pilot selection of PDI. PDI is unboxed if
the AIM-7 missile is deselected or radar track is
lost. PDI is deselected by reselecting the PRF
pushbutton unless a AIM-7 missile is in flight with
less than 10 seconds to impact.
57. Flood Mode Option - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When the radar is in STT
with an AIM-7 missile in flight, a flood option is
018 00
Page 7
displayed. When pressed, flood mode is entered and
the attack format changes to the standard flood
display. If the radar is not near the target as
indicated by the TD box during an extrapolated
track period, this button is pressed if target range is
close. Flood mode is normally entered only as a last
method to salvage an AIM-7 shot.
58. Target Extrapolation. The target position is
extrapolated when tracked target returns are lost.
This can occur when the target moves outside the
radar antenna gimbal limits or moves into heavy
clutter areas.
59. The target position is extrapolated for 2 seconds
when the target moves outside the antenna gimbal
limits. Reacquisition is tried when the target is
predicted to be back in limits. If acquisition fails,
the radar returns to search at last known target
elevation.
60. When a target is lost inside the antenna gimbal
limits and no AIM-7 missiles are inflight, the radar
commands a multibar, narrow scan around the
position of the extrapolated target. If reacquisition
fails, the radar returns to search. If a AIM-7 missile
is inflight, the radar forces extrapolate until flood
illumination is commanded, or the radar set is
commanded to return to search.
61. Mode Selection. TWS is available in all STT
modes except gun mode. When the radar is in TWS
mode and A/A gun is selected, the radar exits TWS
mode and is commanded to the gun parameters. In
other STT modes, when the TWS pushbutton is
pressed, the radar switches to the TWS mode. The
STT target is designated the L and S target, and
the track files are built around it.
62. RAID is a submode of STT. The radar set
continues STT processing, time shared with RAID.
63. The radar set normally returns to range while
search when tracked target is rejected or lost. If the
radar was in velocity search, and acquisition fails,
the radar returns to velocity search.
64. MULTIPLE TARGET TRACK (RAID). Refer to
RAID Display Assessment (WP019 00). RAID is
selected by pressing the HARM target
sequence/FLIR fov/RAID switch on the left throttle
grip. The RAID mode is used to resolve whether a
long range target is a single target, or a raid of two
or more targets in close formation. RAID is selected
when the radar set is operating in STT.
A1-F18AC-742-100
65. If the radar RAID available bit is set when
RAID is selected, the radar starts RAID processing.
A RAID cue is displayed at the bottom center of
the display when RAID mode is engaged in STT. If
the radar RAID available bit is not set, the RAID
cue is displayed with an X through it. If the RAID
cue is displayed with a X through it for more than
10 seconds, it is removed and the STT RAID
request is disabled. High probability of STT break
lock (memory track or gimbal limits,) or AIM-7
missile inflight are the conditions that keep the
RAID available bit from being set.
66. RAID Processing - WITH COMPUTER-POWER
SUPPLY CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The RAID mode
incorporates a brief scanning function interleaved
with a tracking function while the radar is in STT
through this whole period. The scanning part of
RAID mode consists of two frames of 2-bar/20°
TWS type processing run each 5.6 seconds. The
scan center is fixed at the STT target. The scanning
part of RAID takes 2.1 seconds and the track part
takes 3.5 seconds. More radar trackfiles can be
produced during the scan part of RAID with the
same requirements as TWS. At the completion of
the scan part of RAID, track processing is
re-entered. For STT targets at ranges greater than
20 nmi the prf during the scan part of RAID is
interleaved medium and high prf. For STT targets
at ranges less than or equal to 20 nmi the prf
during the scan part of RAID is medium prf.
Azimuth and elevation monopulse signal processing
is used to accurately determine the altitude and
azimuth of the STT target. Narrow band doppler
filter techniques are used to increase STT target
azimuth resolution.
67. RAID Deselection. RAID mode is exited by way
of:
a. pressing the HARM Target Sequence/FLIR
FOV/RAID switch.
b. command return to search using the
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch or the throttle
designator control.
68. When return to search is used to exit RAID, the
radar is commanded to the parameters from which
STT was entered. If STT was entered and return to
search is commanded, the radar returns to RWS
mode. The range scale remains the same as before
break lock.
018 00
Page 8
69. RAID Display - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to RAID Display
Assessment (WP019 00). The RAID display is
range versus range (5 nmi by 5 nmi) around the
STT target. The space illuminated for range
resolution is indicated by the minimum and
maximum range scales displayed. Altitude of
multiple targets is displayed next to the resolved
targets in thousands of feet. Range and azimuth
resolution is indicated by multiple target separation
on the display. STT steering (ASE circle and
steering dot) for the tracked target is displayed
during RAID mode.
70. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The target being tracked in
STT is fixed at center display. The target range
caret is fixed at center on the right edge of the
display. When the STT target range changes, the
range scale display coincides.
71. RAID Display - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The STT RAID display is a
range versus azimuth display. The scanning part of
STT RAID provides 20° of azimuth coverage with
the STT target as the scan center. This is used in
detecting closely spaced targets near the STT
target. Manual range scale adjustment is available
for selection with the range increment/decrement
pushbutton switches.
72. Mode Selection. RAID mode selections are the
same as STT Mode Selections this WP.
73. ONE-LOOK RAID - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When the ONE-LOOK
RAID option is selected on the A/A data sublevel
display, the radar does one-look RAID processing
around the STT target. This processing is not
observable except that an added target symbol may
be displayed near the STT target. The added target
is displayed as a radar raw hit with an altitude
displayed to the right of the hit until a confirmation
hit occurs. Hits associated with the STT target are
not displayed. The raw hit is aged at the selected
target aging. Following the confirmation hit a
trackfile is created and the related raw hit is no
longer displayed. When an expanded display is
selected the altitude readouts are suppressed and
the target aging is forced to 4 seconds or until the
next look, also one-look hits associated with the
A1-F18AC-742-100
STT target are displayed. One-look hits can not be
designated. When the STT target is past 25 nmi
one-look RAID can breakout targets that are within
5 nmi of the STT target and within 100 ft/sec of
the STT target’s range rate. When the STT target
is within 25 nmi, one-look RAID can breakout
targets that are within 1 nmi of the STT target and
within 250 ft/sec of the STT target’s range rate.
The azimuth coverage is limited to the antenna
beam width of approximately ±1.5°. When in
one-look RAID, the radar schedules a look each 1.5
seconds. The 1LOOK RAID option is initialized as
deselected. In RAID, a one-look RAID look is
scheduled during the track part of RAID,
independent of the selection of the 1LOOK RAID
option.
74. TRACK WHILE SCAN. TWS is primarily a
search mode. Each TWS target is momentarily
tracked to determine its heading vector. This allows
the radar to assign target priority. TWS display
provides steering and launch displays for the launch
and steering target. If TWS display and target filing
are required, refer to WP014 00. TWS track display
symbols are described in TRACK DISPLAY
SYMBOLS, this WP. If more information on TWS
operation is required, refer to:
a. Air to air search mode displays, WP014 00.
b. Data processing function, WP032 00.
c. Target acquisition, WP013 00.
d. Track while scan function, WP043 00.
75. Data Link (D/L) and Non-Cooperative Target
Recognition (NCTR). For description of these
displays, refer to A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00
and WP005 00.
76. Full Track. Full track is the act of monitoring
tracked targets range, range rate and angle off the
aircraft heading, with all computed velocities valid.
Full track is the desired track mode. The radar
system tells the mission computer (MC) of track
status, by setting range track, range rate track and
angle track true. The mission computer has a track
condition table that monitors track status and
indicates full track when:
a. Range track equals one.
b. Range rate track equals one.
c. Angle track equals one.
018 00
Page 9
d. Radar is indicating its computed velocities
are valid.
Refer to table 1 for radar track display elements.
77. As the MC receives the targeting parameters
(range track, range rate track, angle track, and
velocities) from the radar system, the MC forms the
track display. Normally, the radar system first
computes angle track on the track target and the
B-sweep is centered on the target. Range track
occurs next and the target symbol, range caret,
target altitude, and differential altitude are
displayed. Range rate track is acquired next and the
target range rate is displayed. Velocity component
computations are computed last and when valid, the
target’s aspect angle pointer, acceleration vector,
heading, mach, and launch range markers are
displayed.
78. Range track is the act of monitoring the
distance between the tracked target and the aircraft
tracking the target. For a description of radar
system ranging, refer to WP022 00. Tracked target
range is supplied to the MC for display and weapon
computation. The MC uses range to directly scale
the multipurpose display groups display of the track
mode. The display scaling keeps the tracked target
at, or near display center.
79. Range rate track is the act of monitoring the
change in tracked target range each second. Range
rate is scaled in feet per second. The
computer-power supply does the computations
required to produce an accurate value of range rate,
and sets the range rate track bit true during the
track mode.
80. Angle track is the act of monitoring tracked
target position in azimuth and elevation. The
angular position of the radar antenna azimuth and
elevation gimbals provide the input data for these
computations to the computer-power supply.
81. The computer-power supply determines the
tracked target azimuth based on the signed value of
the radar antenna gimbals input data. A negative
gimbal value indicates the tracked target is left of
the aircraft heading, and a positive value indicates
the tracked target is to the right of aircraft heading.
Azimuth data is supplied to the multipurpose
display group in the form of a B-sweep. The
B-sweep is a visual indication of the tracked target
azimuth.
A1-F18AC-742-100 018 00
Page 10

82. Tracked target elevation is determined in the
same way as tracked target azimuth. The
computer-power supply determines the tracked
target elevation, above or below the aircraft
centerline, based on the signed value of the radar
antenna elevation gimbal. A negative gimbal value
indicates the tracked target is below the aircraft
centerline, and a positive gimbal value indicates the
tracked target is above the aircraft centerline.
83. The values of tracked target azimuth and
elevation are used to determine the tracked targets
display coordinates of X and Y. The X and Y
display coordinates define the location on the
display of the tracked target symbol. The
computer-power supply sets the angle track bit to a
true state when all angle data is valid.
84. Angle Track. An angle track condition occurs
when one or more track functions are no longer
valid. If range track and range rate track fails, or
either fails individually, the existing track display is
changed to display an angle track condition. During
angle track, the radar system only determines the
targets angular position. Table 1 lists the symbols
and alphanumerics available during angle track.
85. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the top 6 percent of the
radar attack display tactical area is the angle only
track (AOT) zone. Angle tracks are displayed in the
AOT zone.

Table 1. Radar Track Display

Track Condition
Displayed
Full Track Angle Track
Symbols/
Alphanumerics
AIM- AIM-
AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN
120 120

Sidewinder Seeker X X
Circle (HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

Relative Range Bar X X

(HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

Weapon Launch Range

Marks:

a. R-min X X

b. R-max X X

c. R-ne X X

d. R loftÖ1 X

Sparrow Max Seeker X

Range Cue (DDI
ONLY) Ö 1

Sparrow Seeker Range X

Cue (DDI ONLY)
A1-F18AC-742-100 018 00
Page 11

Table 1. Radar Track Display (Continued)

Track Condition
Displayed
Full Track Angle Track
Symbols/
Alphanumerics
AIM- AIM-
AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN
120 120

ASE Circle X X

NIRD Circle (HUD X X

DISPLAY ONLY)

Steering Dot X X X

Target Designator X X X X X X
(HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

Target Range Rate X X X

Target Range/Flood
Cue (HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

a. Target Range X X

b. Flood Cue X

Missile Time-Of-Flight X
/Time-To-Go

Missile X
Time-To-ActiveÖ1

SHOOT Cue X X X

IN RNG Cue X X X

Breakaway-X X X X

Gun Reticle (HUD X

DISPLAY ONLY)

Sidewinder R min X
(HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

Range Rate Caret (DDI X X X

ONLY)

Target Differential X X X
Altitude (DDI ONLY)
A1-F18AC-742-100 018 00
Page 12

Table 1. Radar Track Display (Continued)

Track Condition
Displayed
Full Track Angle Track
Symbols/
Alphanumerics
AIM- AIM-
AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN
120 120

Gun R max (HUD X X X

DISPLAY ONLY)

Sparrow Field of View X

Circle (HUD DISPLAY
ONLY)

B-Sweep (DDI ONLY) X X X X X X

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - AIR TO AIR TRACK MODE DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Air to Air Track Mode Display ............................................................. WP018 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
RAID Display Assessment, Figure 2 ........................................................................................................ 5
STT Radar Displays, Figure 1 .................................................................................................................. 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This work package supports Air to Air Track

Mode Displays Operation (WP018 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
Page 2

Figure 1. STT Radar Displays (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
Page 3

Figure 1. STT Radar Displays (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
Page 4

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
2 REFER TO NCTR AND DATA LINK DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. STT Radar Displays (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
Page 5

Figure 2. RAID Display Assessment (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 019 00
Page 6

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.
2 REFER TO NCTR AND DATA LINK DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00.
3
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
4
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 2. RAID Display Assessment (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 020 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - HEAD-UP DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Radar System Diagrams - Head-Up Displays ...................................................... WP021 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Head-Up Displays ....................................................................................................................................... 2

Air to Air Radar Search Display....................................................................................................... 2
Air to Air Radar Track Display ........................................................................................................ 4
Air to Ground Radar Track Displays............................................................................................... 10
Mode Independent HUD Symbology............................................................................................... 10
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Mode Independent HUD Symbology, Table 3 ....................................................................................... 10
Radar Search Display, Table 1 ................................................................................................................. 3
Radar Track Display, Table 2................................................................................................................... 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (4) Target acquisition, operation

(WP013 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required refer to the work packages listed (5) A/A track mode displays, operation
below: (WP018 00)

(6) Head-up displays, operation (this WP).

a. Sequence of operation:
b. Radar set operation.
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) c. Functional operation:

(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays, (1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP014 00) operation (WP024 00)

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP016 00) (WP026 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Doppler, operation (WP022 00)
(13) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. HEAD-UP DISPLAYS.
4. Refer to WP021 00 for radar system head-up
displays.
5. The description of radar system head-up displays
is given in radar operating mode and selected air to
air weapon versus head-up display (HUD)
symbology and alphanumerics.
6. Descriptions of displayed symbols and
alphanumerics for this WP are divided as listed
below:
a. air to air radar search display
b. air to air radar track display
c. mode independent HUD symbology
d. air to ground radar track display.
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
020 00
Page 2
8. AIR TO AIR RADAR SEARCH DISPLAY. The
radar system is in a search phase of operation when:
a. transmitting, receiving, and analyzing radio
frequency (rf) waves for evidence of target
existence.
b. displaying the target range and azimuth on
the Digital Display Indicator (DDI).
c. not entering initial track on a displayed
target because of a manually entered or automatic
command.
9. Radar search and automatic acquisition modes
requiring symbols and alphanumeric during normal
operation are listed below:
a. range while search (RWS)
b. velocity search (VS)
c. track while scan (TWS)
d. boresight (BST)
e. vertical acquisition (VACQ)
f. gun acquisition (GACQ)
g. wide acquisition (WACQ).
10. Refer to table 1 for displayed symbols for each
radar system search mode versus selected weapon.
11. Sparrow/AMRAAM Field Of View (FOV) Circle.
Refer to Air To Air Radar Search Displays
(WP021 00). The sparrow/AMRAAM FOV circle is
displayed on the HUD as a solid circle. The circle is
the approximate FOV of the selected
sparrow/AMRAAM missile. It is displayed during
air to air search or automatic acquisition modes.
12. The sparrow/ AMRAAM FOV circle is
displayed during radar search modes of RWS, VS,
and TWS (if no targets are filed). With the
automatic acquisition modes of BST, WACQ, and
VACQ selected, the sparrow/AMRAAM FOV circle
is displayed and positioned the same as in the radar
search modes.
A1-F18AC-742-100
Table 1. Radar Search Display
Search Modes
HUD Displayed RWS, VS, TWS
Symbols
AIM-7/
GUN
AIM-120
Sparrow/AMRAAM FOV X X
Circle
Sidewinder Seeker Circle
Radar (BST) FOV
Radar (VACQ) FOV
STADIAMETRIC reticle X X
Radar (WACQ) Display
13. Radar (BST) Field Of View. Refer to Air To
Air Radar Search Displays (WP021 00). Radar
(BST) FOV is displayed when the radar system is
operating in boresight acquisition mode. Radar
(BST) FOV is indicated by a dashed circle. The
dashed circle is representative of the radar coverage
with the antenna positioned at the aircraft
boresight. The radar (BST) FOV is displayed only
while the radar system is in search. Refer to ACM
Auto Acquisition Mode Coverage (WP021 00) for
radar (BST) FOV.
14. The radar (BST) FOV is displayed with all air
to air weapons symbology when BST is selected.
Refer to table 1.
15. Radar (GACQ) Field Of View. Pressing the
A/A weapon select switch to the aft commands the
radar to gun acquisition (GACQ). The HUD field of
view circle is displayed when the radar is operating
in GACQ. The HUD field of view circle is a 20°
diameter dashed circle, representative of radar scan
coverage, centered at the HUD optical center.
16. Radar (VACQ) Field Of View. Refer to Air To
Air Radar Search Displays (WP021 00). Radar
(VACQ) FOV is displayed when the radar system is
operating in the vertical acquisition mode. VACQ is
indicated by two vertical dashed lines
representative of radar coverage. VACQ is displayed
with all air to air weapons when VACQ is selected
and the radar system is in search. Refer to table 1
020 00
Page 3
Automatic Acquisition Modes
BST, VACQ, WACQ
AIM-7/
AIM-9 GUN AIM-9
AIM-120
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
for specific weapon symbols available to this mode.
Refer to ACM Auto Acquisition Mode Coverage
(WP021 00) for radar (VACQ) FOV.
17. Stadiametric Reticle - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air to Air Radar
Search Displays (WP021 00). The stadiametric
reticle is displayed when gun is the selected weapon,
radar is not tracking a target, and the mission
computer (MC) has commanded either disturbed or
back-up gun mode. It is either a 12.5 or 25
milliradian diameter reference circle. The circle size
depends on the position of the cage/uncage switch
on the throttle.
18. Stadiametric Reticle - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air to Air Radar
Search Displays (WP021 00). The stadiametric
reticle is displayed when gun is the selected weapon,
radar is not tracking a target, and the mission
computer (MC) has commanded either radar not
tracking or back-up gun mode. It is either a 12.5 or
25 milliradian diameter reference circle. The circle
size depends on the position of the cage/uncage
switch on the throttle.
19. The stadiametric reticle is provided in 1,000
feet and 2,000 feet ranges. Refer to table 1 for the
modes provided with the stadiametric reticle.
A1-F18AC-742-100 020 00
Page 4

20. Radar (WACQ) Field of View. Refer to Air To c. target angular position, range, and/or velocity
Air Radar Search Displays (WP021 00). data is provided to the DDI for display functions.
Target data is also provided to other systems for
21. When selected, the WACQ acronym is displayed attack and/or tracking computations.
in the time of flight remaining window. Also
displayed are the WACQ rectangle and WACQ grid.
26. The radar track display has a description of
The WACQ rectangle represents the FOV in which
symbols and alphanumerics during full track and
the radar system is operating. The WACQ grid
angle track. The radar system is in full track
represents ±70° elevation and ±70° azimuth. WITH
condition when all the below conditions exist:
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the WACQ
grid is only displayed in uncaged WACQ. a. angle tracking

22. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER

b. range tracking
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in caged WACQ, the WACQ
rectangle size is equivalent to 60° azimuth by 15° c. providing valid target velocity data.
elevation and is referenced to the aircraft
centerline. In uncaged WACQ, the rectangle is
27. The track condition of angle track exists when
reduced to 30° in azimuth and can be slewed any
the radar system is providing target angle tracking
place within the WACQ grid using the throttle
data for display and computation.
designator control (TDC). The uncaged WACQ
rectangle is horizon stabilized and body referenced.
28. Refer to table 2 for displayed track symbols and
23. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER alphanumerics for each radar system track mode
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP versus selected weapon.
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in caged or uncaged WACQ,
the WACQ rectangle size is equivalent to 60°
29. Normalized In-Range Display (NIRD) Circle.
azimuth by 15° elevation. In caged WACQ the
Refer to Air to Air Radar Track Displays
WACQ rectangle is referenced to the aircraft
(WP021 00). The NIRD circle is displayed when a
centerline. In uncaged WACQ, the rectangle can be
AIM-7, AIM-9, or AIM-120 missile is selected and
slewed any place within the WACQ grid using the
the radar is in STT or TWS with an established
throttle designator control (TDC). The WACQ grid
track file. The NIRD circle is centered at the
is horizon stabilized and body referenced. The
aircraft waterline. The allowable steering error
uncaged WACQ rectangle scan center is inertially
(ASE) circle is represented by the NIRD circle.
stabilized for maneuvers that do not change aircraft
heading. The scan center is body referenced for
30. Relative Range Bar. Refer to Air To Air Radar
maneuvers that change aircraft heading.
Track Displays (WP021 00). The relative range bar
is displayed superimposed on the NIRD circle. The
24. The remainder of the display elements are
relative range bar starting position is 12 o’clock on
configured to show the selected air to air weapon.
the NIRD circle, which indicates zero target range.
Refer to table 1 for specific weapon symbols
The relative range bar extends clockwise to indicate
available to this mode.
increasing target range and counterclockwise to
indicate decreasing target range.
25. AIR TO AIR RADAR TRACK DISPLAY. When
the radar system is in the track phase of operation:
31. When used with weapons launch range marks,
a. the radar has acquired a target and entered the relative range bar is representative of the target
initial track on that target. range in relation to each weapons maximum and
minimum range. Refer to table 2 for the track
b. the received RF is analyzed for data on conditions and air to air weapons for which the
target movement. Correction signals are produced to relative range bar is provided.
keep the antenna pointing at the tracked target.
A1-F18AC-742-100 020 00
Page 5

Table 2. Radar Track Display

Track Condition
HUD Displayed
Full Track Angle Track
Symbols/
Alphanumerics
AIM- AIM-
AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN
120 120

Sidewinder Seeker X X
Circle
Relative Range Bar X X X X
Weapon Launch Range
Marks:
a. R-min X X X X
b. R-max X X X
c. R-ne X X X
d. LOFTÖ1 X X
e. Sparrow Max X
Seeker Range Cue
ASE Circle X X X X X X
NIRD Circle X X X
Steering Dot X X X X X X
Target Angle Readout X X X
Target Aspect Cue X X
Target Designator X X X X X X X X
Target Locator Line X X X X
Target Range Rate X X X X
Target Range/Flood
Cue
a. Target Range X X X
b. Flood Cue X
Missile Time of Flight X X
Remaining/Time-To-
Go/Time-To-Active/
LOST
SHOOT Cue X X X X
IN RNG Cue X X X X
Breakaway-X X X X X
A1-F18AC-742-100
Table 2. Radar Track Display (Continued)
HUD Displayed
Full Track
Symbols/
Alphanumerics
AIM-7 AIM-9
Gun Reticle
Gun Boresight Cross
Gun R-max X X
Sparrow/AMRAAM X X
Field of View Circle
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
32. Weapon Launch Range Marks. Refer to Air
To Air Radar Track Displays (WP021 00). The
weapon launch range marks are displayed on the
outside of and attached to the NIRD circle. The
weapon launch range marks are representative of
the maximum and minimum ranges of the selected
air to air missiles.
33. AIM-7 and AIM-120 missile oriented track
displays have three weapon launch range markers.
R-max is displayed at 6 o’clock position on the
NIRD circle. It indicates target range, in relation to
the missiles maximum range, when the relative
range bar is in coincidence with it. R-min is
displayed at the 2:30 o’clock position on the NIRD
circle. It indicates target range, in relation to missile
minimum range, when the range bar tab is in
coincidence with it. R-ne is displayed on the NIRD
circle between R-max and R-min. R-ne is allowed to
float between R-max and R-min. R-ne floating
occurs when the tracked target is maneuvering at
least 3g or more. An added launch range marker
(LOFT) is dynamically displayed between R-max
and the 12 o’clock position to indicate the point
where the selected missile still has aerodynamic
capability. Refer to table 2 for track conditions
these symbols are provided for.
34. With an AIM-9 missile selected R-max, R-ne,
LOFT, and R-min can all be displayed. The
indications of target range as shown by the relative
range bar is identical to the AIM-7 missile.
020 00
Page 6
Track Condition
Angle Track
AIM- AIM-
GUN AIM-7 AIM-9 GUN
120 120
X
X
X X
X
LEGEND
35. Launch Range Markers - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Three launch range markers
are displayed when AIM-9 is selected. They
represent maximum launch range (R-max or
R-max), maneuvering target launch range also
called the no escape range R-ne), and minimum
launch range (R-min). An added launch range
marker (LOFT) is dynamically displayed between
R-max and the 12 o’clock position to indicate the
point where the selected missile still has
aerodynamic capability.
36. When AIM-7 or AIM-120 is selected, three
launch range markers are displayed. These launch
range markers represent maximum launch range
(R-max) displayed at the six o’clock position,
maneuvering target launch range also called the no
escape range (R-ne), and minimum launch range
(R-min). An added launch range marker (LOFT) is
displayed for AIM-7H missiles. LOFT is
dynamically displayed between the R-max and the
12 o’clock position to indicate the point where the
missile still has time of flight because of lofting.
37. ASE Circle. Refer to Normalized In-Range
Display (NIRD) Circle (this WP). The allowable
steering error (ASE) is represented on the HUD by
the NIRD circle. It provides the steering reference
for air to air missiles. For AIM-9 missiles, the ASE
diameter remains fixed. Any changes to the AIM-9
ASE during an intercept are handled by changing
the rate at which the steering dot on the HUD
moves. Missile ASE requirements are satisfied when
A1-F18AC-742-100
the steering dot is inside the ASE (NIRD) circle.
Because of AIM-9 wing mounts, the AIM-9 seeker
heads are slaved to aircraft boresight. This
compensates for steering errors caused by aircraft
wing flexing.
38. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the ASE circle for AIM-7
and AIM-120 applies nonlinear scaling as the
steering dot moves across the ASE circle. This is
because the area that the displayed ASE circle
represents is not perfectly circular.
39. The ASE circle is flashed when the tracked
target is within 15° of the antenna azimuth gimbal
limit or 5° of the antenna elevation gimbal limit.
40. Steering Dot. Refer to Air To Air Radar Track
Displays (WP021 00). The steering dot is displayed
if the radar is in full track or has a TWS target.
The steering dot when used with the ASE circle
provides command steering. The aircraft must be
flown to put the steering dot inside the ASE circle
to satisfy command steering.
41. The steering dot is flashed when the tracked
target is within 15° of the antenna azimuth gimbal
limit or 5° of the antenna elevation gimbal limit.
42. If an AIM-9 missile is selected and tracking a
target other than the radar target, the steering dot
is not displayed. The steering dot is also not
displayed in the gun modes. Refer to table 2 for
track conditions and weapon selections the steering
dot is available in.
43. Target Angle Readout - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). When the system is in
the A/A mode, with the gun not selected and the
TD symbol is displayed and HUD-limited, a digital
readout (0 - 180) is displayed, representing the
angle formed by the line of sight to the target and
the aircraft boresight. The two least significant
digits of the target angle readout (TAR) are
centered with the target locator line (TLL)
beginning. The display is below the starting point
when the TLL points up and above the starting
point when the TLL points down. When gun is
selected, no TAR is displayed.
44. Target Aspect Cue - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A AND UP
020 00
Page 7
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). The target aspect cue
(TAC) is displayed only if the system is in an A/A
missile mode with valid launch and steer (L and S)
target aspect vector information. The TAC is
displayed as an arrow projecting outward from the
perimeter of the normalized in range display
(NIRD) circle. The TAC rotates with changes in the
L and S target aspect angle around the NIRD circle.
Target aspect data is not smoothed or filtered as it
moves the TAC around the circle. A zero degree
aspect angle places the TAC at the six o’clock
position. Positive aspect angles are displayed on the
right side of the NIRD circle and negative angles on
the left (value -180 to 180 degrees).
45. Target Designator. Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). The target designator
is displayed in all air to air weapon modes. The
target designator position is computed using radar
tracked target line-of-sight (los). Refer to table 2 for
the track condition this symbol is provided for.
46. The target designator can be positioned on the
total HUD FOV. When the target los is out of the
HUD FOV, the target designator remains at the
HUD FOV limits and flashes at 2.5 times per
second.
47. When the radar is operating in track
extrapolate, the target designator is segmented in
the center of each side. Also, when a AIM-7 missile
is in flight, the time in seconds that the radar has
been in track extrapolate is displayed above the
target designator.
48. Target Locator Line - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). The TTL assists the
pilot in quickly finding a HUD-limited target
designated (TD) box or TD diamond. The TLL is
displayed when a HUD-limited target designation
diamond is displayed. In the A/A mode the TD box
is displayed. The TLL consists of an arrow
projecting outward from a boresight point toward
the HUD-limited TD box. The TLL arrow length
extends from the boresight point to just inside the
inward projecting part of the relative range bar. The
start of the TLL arrow is at the gun boresight when
gun is selected. When the system is in NAV, A/G,
and A/A mode with missiles selected, the aircraft
boresight is used as the start of the arrow.
A1-F18AC-742-100
49. Target Range Rate. Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). In the missile modes
the target range rate is displayed on the lower right
of the NIRD circle. It indicates the radar tracked
target closing velocity in positive numbers and
opening velocity in negative numbers. Target range
rate is computed by the radar system in knots.
50. In the gun modes, the target range rate is
located near the 5 o’clock position of the reticle. It
moves with the reticle in order to remain in the
same relative position.
51. Target Range/Flood Cue. Refer to Air To Air
Radar Track Displays (WP021 00). Target range or
the FLOOD cue is displayed directly below target
range rate.
52. Target range is the absolute target range in
nautical miles (nmi) and tenths of miles. If target
range is past 99.9 nmi then the readout is limited to
99.9 nmi until the range decreases. Refer to table 2
for the track conditions and selected air to air
weapons this alphanumeric is provided for.
53. The FLOOD cue is displayed instead of target
range when a AIM-7 missile is in flight and one of
the conditions listed below exists:
a. radar system in search at missile firing.
b. radar system breaks lock on at the moment
missile firing sequence starts.
54. Refer to table 2 for track conditions the
FLOOD cue alphanumeric is provided for.
55. Missile Time-Of-Flight/
Time-To-Go/Time-To-Active. Refer to Air To Air
Radar Track Displays (WP021 00). Missile
time-of-flight /time-to-go is displayed for use with
the AIM-7 and AIM-120 missiles. Its display is an
indication of time remaining before missile impact
with the tracked target. Missile time-to-active is
displayed for use with AIM-120 missile. Its display
is an indication of time remaining before the
AIM-120 seeker becomes active, either prelaunch or
postlaunch. Refer to table 2 for track conditions
these alphanumerics are provided for.
56. Lost/Shoot Cue. Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). LOST is displayed
when time-to-go is decreased to zero. SHOOT is
displayed when specific command steering weapon
and radar conditions exist. Refer to table 2 for track
conditions this alphanumeric is provided for.
020 00
Page 8
57. Sparrow Missile (AIM-7) Selected. AIM-7
missile selection allows the display of SHOOT cue
if:
a. the radar is in single target track.
b. target range is between R-ne and R-min
(flashing SHOOT cue).
c. target range is between LOFT and R-ne
(steady SHOOT cue).
d. master arm switch set to ARM.
e. AIM-7 missile is available and tuned.
f. the radar is in AIM-7 compatible prf (high)
and not in track memory.
g. the tracked target is in missile seeker range.
h. steering dot is inside the ASE circle.
i. target not in beam clutter.
j. no jamming is encountered.
58. Sidewinder Missile (AIM-9) Selected. AIM-9
missile selection allows the display of SHOOT cue
if:
a. target range is between LOFT and R-ne
(steady SHOOT cue).
b. target range is between R-ne and R-min
(flashing SHOOT cue).
c. master arm switch set to ARM.
d. steering dot is inside the ASE circle.
e. missile seeker is locked to the radar tracked
target.
f. AIM-9 is available and selected.
g. AIM-9 tone has satisfactory signal-to-noise
ratio and the missile has passed the angle
coincidence test.
59. AMRAAM (AIM-120) Selected. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). AIM-120
missile selection allows the display SHOOT cue if:
a. the L and S target is a MSI trackfile.
A1-F18AC-742-100
b. target range is between R-ne and R-min
(flashing SHOOT cue).
c. target range is between R-max and R-ne
(steady SHOOT cue).
d. master arm switch set to ARM.
e. AIM-120 is available and selected.
f. visual mode not commanded.
g. steering dot is inside the ASE circle.
h. MEM or RMEM is not displayed.
60. Gun Selected. When gun is the air to air
weapon, the SHOOT cue is displayed and steady if:
a. master arm is selected.
b. radar system is providing valid range
tracking data.
c. there are gun rounds remaining.
d. radar system is angle tracking and not in
track memory.
61. In Range Cue. The in range (IN RNG) cue is
displayed in RAID, SCAN RAID, or EXP mode
when the target is in range and the SHOOT cue
criteria is not met.
62. Breakaway-X. Refer to Air To Air Radar Track
Displays (WP021 00). Breakaway-X is displayed in
all air to air weapon modes when the range to target
is less than the minimum computed range for the
selected weapon. It is an indication that the attack
should be stopped or the parameters for attack
should be changed.
63. Gun Reticle. Refer to Air To Air Radar Track
Displays (WP021 00). The gun reticle is displayed
when gun is the selected air to air weapon and the
radar system is in full track. Tick marks and a
range bar are displayed if target range is valid. Each
tick mark represents 1000 feet. The range bar
rotates clockwise with increasing range and provides
a linear range indication from 0 to 23,000 feet.
Refer to table 2 for track conditions for which this
symbol is provided.
63A. Gun Boresight Cross. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A AND UP
020 00
Page 9
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). The gun boresight
cross is displayed with its center at the HUD gun
boresight position. The cross consists of a vertical
and a horizontal line. The two lines intersect each
other at their centers. The cross is displayed in all
full up A/A gun modes.
64. Sidewinder R min. Refer to Air To Air Radar
Track Displays (WP021 00). Sidewinder R min is
displayed on the gun reticle during gun selections.
This is an indication of sidewinder missile minimum
launch range. This display is provided as an
indicator of range if a sidewinder would be a more
effective weapon during an attack situation.
65. Gun R max. Refer to Air To Air Radar Track
Displays (WP021 00). Gun R max is displayed on
the gun reticle to indicate maximum effective gun
range. Target range in relation to gun R max is
indicated by the gun reticle range bar being in
coincidence with the Gun R max symbol. A gun R-
max symbol is provided on the NIRD also. It
provides maximum effective gun range if the gun
would be a more effective weapon during an attack
situation. Refer to table 2 for track conditions this
symbol is provided for.
66. Sparrow/AMRAAM Field Of View Circle.
Refer to Air To Air Radar Search Displays
(WP021 00). The sparrow/AMRAAM FOV circle is
provided for display when the radar is angle
tracking or in search. It provides allowable steering
error indications when used with the steering dot
and target designator. Refer to table 2 for the track
conditions and air to air weapons for which the
sparrow/AMRAAM FOV circle is provided. The
sparrow/AMRAAM FOV circle is available to when
the radar system is angle tracking.
67. Sidewinder Seeker Circle. Refer to Air to Air
Radar Search Displays (WP021 00). The AIM-9
seeker circle is a 1.5° diameter circle on the HUD
that indicates the direction that the AIM-9 seeker
head is pointing. This circle is displayed during any
one of the following conditions:
a. the AIM-9 is slaved to the radar los
b. the radar and AIM-9 are tracking the same
target
c. the AIM-9 is tracking a different target than
the radar.
A1-F18AC-742-100 020 00
Page 10

68. MODE INDEPENDENT HUD SYMBOLOGY. provided for information only and are not displayed
Refer to table 3. The table provides a description of or positioned as a function of radar signals. Refer to
symbols and alphanumerics displayed during radar Air to Air Radar Search Displays (WP021 00).
system search and track. The listed symbols are

Table 3. Mode Independent HUD Symbology

Display Symbol/ Alphanumerics Description

Aircraft Heading Indicates true heading/magnetic heading on a 30° scale. Moving scale
indicates trend information during turns.

Aircraft Airspeed Indicates air data computer system derived airspeed.

Aircraft Angle of Attack Local aircraft angle of attack from the air data computer system is
converted to true angle of attack by the MC.

Aircraft Mach Number Indicates aircraft speed in relation to the speed of sound. Derived by
air data computer system.

Normal Acceleration Indicates aircraft acceleration. Derived by electronic flight control

system.

Weapon Type and Quantity Indicates the type of weapon selected and amount of weapons aboard
aircraft. Displayed if sparrow or sidewinder missiles are aboard.

MASTER ARM Cue X through the selected weapon indicates an unarmed weapon
condition.

GUN and Rounds Remaining Indicates GUN is the selected weapon. Displayed with a count of the
number of rounds remaining below it. If no rounds remain, XXX is
displayed below GUN.

Aircraft Altitude Indicates aircraft altitude.

Flight Path/Pitch Ladder Indicates aircraft flight path by the position of the velocity vector on
the flight path. Pitch is represented by lines indicating the horizon.
Each line is equal to 5°. Positive pitch is the horizon and above and
negative pitch is below the horizon.

Velocity Vector Provides aircraft position in reference to the flight path.

69. AIR TO GROUND RADAR TRACK DISPLAYS.
The two displays used in air to ground (A/G) track
are continuously computed impact point (CCIP)
gun mode, and CCIP rockets mode. Refer to Air To
Ground Radar Track Displays (WP021 00).
70. CCIP Gun Mode. Refer to Air To Ground
Radar Track Displays (WP021 00). When the CCIP
mode is selected for gun in the A/G master mode,
the CCIP mode gun symbology is displayed. If the
radar is in the air to ground ranging (AGR) mode,
the MC slaves the radar antenna to the reticle los
and does CCIP computations using radar range
data. The best available slant range along the reticle
los is indicated by the range bar.
71. The MC uses best available velocity data to
compute the maximum gun firing range.
72. The MC uses the slant range along the reticle
los (reticle range) in computations when the reticle
range is less than the firing range. The reticle then
displays the true computed impact point. When the
A1-F18AC-742-100
reticle range is greater than the maximum firing
range, the MC uses the maximum firing range in
the computations. The reticle is then displayed at
the impact point for the maximum firing range.
73. When the radar ranging data is not valid, the
MC computes slant range along the CCIP reticle los
using alternate altitude data sources.
74. A fixed firing range of 5000 feet can be selected
by pressing and holding the cage switch on the right
throttle grip.
75. The aircraft is maneuvered to position the
reticle on the target. The trigger on the aircraft
controller grip assembly is pressed to the second
detent to fire the gun when the range to the target
is less than the maximum firing range.
76. The pull-up/breakaway-X cueing is based on
arriving at a terrain clearance of 50 feet plus 1.5
times the vertical descent velocity in feet per
second. The pilot must immediately do a 4g pull-up.
77. A moving target can be designated by
commanding radar tracking in the CCIP gun mode.
The MC computes the lead angle required for the
target, and positions the HUD reticle at the
required lead angle.
78. When the gun firing ready indication is received
from the stores management system (SMS) and the
target is in the maximum firing range, the MC
displays the SHOOT cue on the HUD.
79. CCIP Rockets Mode. Refer to Air To Ground
Radar Track Displays (WP021 00). When the CCIP
mode is selected for rockets in the A/G master
mode, the CCIP mode rocket symbology is
020 00
Page 11/(12 blank)
displayed on the HUD. Unlike the CCIP gun mode,
the CCIP rockets mode symbology contains the
heading scale.
80. The CCIP rockets mode symbology is similar to
that provided for the CCIP gun mode. Radar AGR
mode antenna slaving, display of the reticle range
bar, and the computations for positioning the CCIP
reticle are identical to those described for the CCIP
gun mode.
81. The CCIP rocket mode symbology includes the
maximum firing (launch) range marker on the
reticle and an indication of the number of rockets of
the selected type which are available for launch.
82. The reticle cage operation and the shoot cue
mechanization are provided as described for the
gun. However, the reticle is positioned for a fixed
launch range of 8000 feet for all rocket types.
83. The pull-up/breakaway-X mechanization is
identical to that described for the gun.
84. The aircraft is maneuvered to position the
reticle on the target. The A/G weapon release
button on the aircraft controller grip assembly is
pressed to launch rockets when range to the target
is less than the maximum firing range.
85. When the last available rocket has been
launched, “XXX” is displayed on the HUD to
indicate that no rockets of the selected type remain.
86. If hot gun is selected the MC automatically
selects gun-only when the last rocket has been
launched and the weapons release button is
released.
A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - HEAD-UP DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Head-Up Display ................................................................................. WP020 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

ACM Auto Acquisition Mode Coverage, Figure 3.................................................................................. 11

Air to Air Radar Search Displays, Figure 1 ............................................................................................ 2
Air to Air Radar Track Displays, Figure 2.............................................................................................. 8
Air to Ground Radar Track Displays, Figure 4...................................................................................... 12
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. b. air to air radar track

2. The following radar system head-up displays c. ACM auto acquisition mode coverage
support head-up displays operation (WP020 00):

a. air to air radar search d. air to ground radar track.

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 7

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. Air To Air Radar Search Displays (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 8

Figure 2. Air To Air Radar Track Displays (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 9

Figure 2. Air To Air Radar Track Displays (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 10

LEGEND
1 IF RADAR IS OPERATING IN TRACK EXTRAPOLATE, THE TARGET DESIGNATOR
BOX IS DASHED.
2
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 2. Air To Air Radar Track Displays (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 11

Figure 3. ACM Auto Acquisition Mode Coverage

A1-F18AC-742-100 021 00
Page 12

Figure 4. Air To Ground Radar Track Displays

A1-F18AC-742-100 022 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - RADAR SET DOPPLER

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Radar Set Diagrams - Doppler Displays ............................................................... WP023 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Doppler Operation ................................................................................................................... 2
Coherent Frequency Operation......................................................................................................... 4
Frequency Agility Mode..................................................................................................................... 4
Guard Channel Operation.................................................................................................................. 4
Multiple PRF Waveforms.................................................................................................................. 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (5) A/A track mode displays, operation

(WP018 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
(6) Head-up displays, operation
set is required, refer to the work packages listed
(WP020 00).
below:
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
a. Sequence of operation:
c. Functional operation:
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) (1) Radar set electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Air to air (A/A) search displays,
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
operation (WP014 00)
(WP026 00)
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (3) RF power function, operation
(WP016 00) (WP028 00)

(4) Target acquisition, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP013 00) (WP030 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation (This
WP)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. RADAR SET DOPPLER OPERATION.
4. Refer to WP023 00 for radar set doppler
displays.
5. The radar set uses multiple transmit/receive
waveforms in the doppler spectrum adaptable to
both air to air (A/A) and air to ground (A/G)
environments. The functions that provide doppler
target detection are listed below:
a. multiple pulse-repetition frequency (prf)
waveforms
b. coherent frequency operation
c. guard channel operation
d. frequency agility mode.
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. MULTIPLE PRF WAVEFORMS. The radar set
uses various prfs depending on radar operating
mode, target considerations, and operating
environment. Target data includes range, bearing,
022 00
Page 2
elevation, and velocity. Bearing and elevation are
easily determined by measuring the antenna
position at detection. Range and velocity processing
depends on the prf used for detection. Multiple prf
waveforms include:
a. low prf
b. high prf
c. medium prf
d. interleaved HPRF and MPRF
e. pulse expansion.
8. Low PRF (LPRF). LPRF provides long radar
receiver-exciter (R/E) listening time. Range
measurements are made by measuring the time
between pulse transmission and target return.
Velocity is determined by measuring the rate of
position change between target returns. LPRF
cannot be manually selected.
9. Decreased detection is a disadvantage in LPRF.
For this reason it is primarily used in the shorter
range A/G modes. In A/A, LPRF is used when short
range tracked targets enter heavy clutter areas.
Pulse expansion is used to improve LPRF detection.
Refer to PULSE EXPANSION, this WP.
10. High PRF (HPRF). HPRF increases target
detection at long range. The short receiver listening
time prevents direct target range measurements.
HPRF range measurements use frequency
modulation ranging (fmr) and velocity detection
methods. Problems to solve in HPRF include target
versus clutter return and target eclipsing.
11. HPRF is always used in the velocity search
(VS) or when sparrow missiles are launched. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), HPRF is
always used in range while search (RWS) submodes.
In other radar modes, HPRF can be selected
automatically, manually, or interleaved with
medium prf.
12. HPRF target ranging is done by modulating the
transmitter pulse with a linear fm ramp. This is
done in RWS HPRF mode. VS does not provide
target ranging.
13. Refer to Doppler Frequency Spectrum
(WP023 00). HPRF radar transmission uses
A1-F18AC-742-100
coherent frequency pulses. This allows velocity
measurements of target returns. The frequency of
the target return is compared with the transmitter
reference frequency to determine the doppler effects
described below:
a. Closing velocities (nose aspect) compress the
target returns indicated by an increase in frequency.
b. Opening velocities (tail aspect) lengthen the
target returns indicated by a decrease in frequency.
c. Beam aspect targets (velocity equal to own
aircraft) have no frequency change on return.
14. The change in frequency is proportional to
velocity. The radar set uses elliptical signal doppler
filters to determine opening and closing velocities.
15. Target Versus Clutter Return. Refer to Doppler
Frequency Spectrum (WP023 00). The large
amount of main beam and side lobe clutter (ground
and weather returns) in HPRF, causes receiver
loading. Airborne targets with closing velocities
equal to or less than own aircraft are screened by
the clutter returns. In heavy clutter areas, doppler
filters are used in HPRF to filter out clutter
returns, limiting target detection to nose aspect.
16. Target Eclipsing. See waveforms below.
Target eclipsing occurs when target returns arrive
at the antenna at the precise moment the
transmitter is turned on. The target return will not
be detected (total eclipse) because the receiver is
disabled during transmit. If target returns arrive
just before or after the transmitter is turned on,
target fade (some eclipse) occurs.
17. See waveforms below. Target returns are
received at a specific time for any given range. This
being so, periodic prf changes will delete some
022 00
Page 3
target eclipsing. Four prfs (two in search, four in
track) are used in the HPRF mode to make sure a
target is not always eclipsed. The prf switching is
automatic.
18. Medium PRF (MPRF). MPRF is used for beam
and tail aspect target detection. MPRF detection is
not as good as HPRF, but clutter problems are
reduced. Doppler filters are still used to determine
target velocity but the filters are range gated into
bins. Targets are only compared to the clutter that
is detected in its range bin.
19. Refer to MPRF Ranging (WP023 00). MPRF
target range is determined by measuring the time
between transmission and target return. In MPRF,
long range targets will be received during interpulse
periods on following transmissions. This results in
false range detection. True range is resolved by
changing the prf interval in a logical sequence.
Changing the prf interval causes long range target
returns to jump in range relative to the previous
transmitted pulse.
20. Refer to MPRF Ranging (WP023 00). In the
examples shown, the prf interval is increased for
each transmission causing the target to be detected
sooner on following transmissions. If the prf interval
is large, the target may be detected before the next
transmitted pulse. However, only small interval
changes are required to correlate the target return
to its applicable transmitted pulse. Pulse expansion
is used to improve MPRF detection. Refer to
PULSE EXPANSION, this WP.
21. The prf interval sequence is established using a
preset number of time slots (delays). These time
slots represent range and are called range bins. The
A1-F18AC-742-100
range bin method resolves the true range of MPRF
target returns as shown.
22. MPRF interval switching also prevents total
target eclipsing as in HPRF.
23. Interleaved HPRF and MPRF. Refer to HPRF
and MPRF Interleaving (WP023 00). Interleaved
prf available in the RWS mode provides all aspect
target detection. Interleaving the prf is done by
alternating HPRF and MPRF at the end of each
antenna azimuth scan. HPRF provides long range
closing velocity detection, and MPRF provides
beam and tail aspect target detection. MPRF
provides good target to clutter resolution.
24. Pulse Expansion. In LPRF and MPRF, a
continuous train of pulses equal to 13-range bins
can be transmitted. This improves long range
detection (high power) and inhibits short range
targets lost during transmission time.
25. Target returns as wide as the transmitted pulse
would normally degrade range resolution. This is
resolved by phase coding the transmitted pulse. The
phase coding on the target return energy is
vectorially summed to provide a target range equal
to 1/13 of the transmitted pulse. This process is
called pulse compression.
26. The transmission of wide pulses is interrupted
at intervals and only one narrow pulse is
022 00
Page 4
transmitted. This provides detection of targets lost
during pulse expansion operation.
27. COHERENT FREQUENCY OPERATION.
Coherent frequency operation provides true look
down radar by separating ground clutter returns.
Coherent frequency transmitted pulses are gated
from the continuous output of a stable local
oscillator, then amplified and transmitted. The
received echo keeps this coherency. Using the
doppler principle, the frequency of the ground
return is determined and filtered out.
28. GUARD CHANNEL OPERATION. In MPRF
operation, a low gain, wide beam guard antenna is
used with the main antenna. Radar returns from
these antenna are range gate compared. If the
target return from the main antenna has a larger
amplitude than the guard antenna return, it is
passed as a main beam return. If the guard antenna
return is larger, it is considered a side lobe return
and rejected. Use of the guard channel and reduced
power in MPRF provides low false alarm rates.
29. FREQUENCY AGILITY MODE. Frequency
agility provides transmission of multiple
frequencies. The frequency agility mode may be
coherent or noncoherent as commanded. This mode
improves discrete ground target returns and
prevents target shift on close range A/A targets.
Target shift on the radar display is a rapid
displacement of the target from its mean position.
A1-F18AC-742-100 023 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

DIAGRAMS - RADAR SET DOPPLER DISPLAYS

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar Systems................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Radar Set Doppler .............................................................................. WP022 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Doppler Frequency Spectrum, Figure 1 .................................................................................................. 2

HPRF and MPRF Interleaving, Figure 3................................................................................................ 5
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
MPRF Ranging, Figure 2........................................................................................................................... 4

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. b. MPRF ranging

2. The below radar set doppler displays support the c. HPRF and MPRF interleaving.
radar set doppler operation (WP022 00):

a. doppler frequency spectrum

A1-F18AC-742-100 023 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Doppler Frequency Spectrum (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 023 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Doppler Frequency Spectrum (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 023 00
Page 4

Figure 2. MPRF Ranging

A1-F18AC-742-100 023 00
Page 5/(6 blank)

Figure 3. HPRF And MPRF Interleaving

A1-F18AC-742-100 024 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - RADAR ELECTRICAL POWER FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Block Diagram - Power Control.............................................................................. WP025 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Logic and Protection, Table 1................................................................................................................... 5
Radar Electrical Power Function ............................................................................................................. 2
Electrical Power Control .................................................................................................................... 2
Fault Sensing ....................................................................................................................................... 4
Overheat Display, Figure 1 ................................................................................................................ 6
Power Supplies .................................................................................................................................... 4

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (5) A/A track mode displays, operation

(WP018 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set is required, refer to the work packages listed (6) Head-up displays, operation
below: (WP020 00)

a. Sequence of operation b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)

(1) Mode selection and video displays, c. Functional operation

operation (WP011 00)
(1) Radar electrical power function,
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (This WP)
operation (WP014 00)

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP016 00) (WP026 00)

(4) Target acquisition, operation (3) RF power function, operation

(WP013 00) (WP028 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. RADAR ELECTRICAL POWER
FUNCTION.
4. Refer to WP025 00 for Power Control Block
Diagram.
5. This WP contains the operation of the electrical
power functions as listed below:
a. electrical power control
b. power supplies
c. fault sensing.
6. The Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65
(CPS) contains the radar system low voltage power
supply (lvps). The CPS also controls and monitors
the power supply in the Radar Target Data
Processor CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP). It provides the
required control for internal data processing and
operating power to:
a. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65
024 00
Page 2
b. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65
c. Radar Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65
(R/E)
d. Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65.
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
8. ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL. The electrical
power control function contains the operation of the
functions listed below:
a. DC electrical power
b. AC electrical power
c. power on sequence
d. power off sequence.
9. DC Electrical Power. The aircraft electrical
system sends 28vdc to the radar system through the
no. 8 circuit breaker/relay panel assembly. The
28vdc produces power supply commands, bias
voltages, and control commands. Radar set
components requiring 28vdc aircraft power are:
a. CPS.
b. RTDP.
c. antenna.
d. transmitter.
10. The CPS and RTDP have similar low voltage
power supply circuits. The main difference is the
CPS controls the application of power to the
RTDP.
11. CPS. The CPS uses 28vdc from 60CBC023
when the CPS 28vdc contactor is energized. The
28vdc contactor is energized by a 28vdc radar on
select signal from the SNSR pod control box panel
assembly (SNSR panel). The aircraft power 28vdc is
sent through the 28vdc contactor to:
a. a linear regulator.
b. a 5vdc regulator.
c. the transmitter and antenna as a radar on
signal.
d. the RTDP as a radar processor on signal.
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. the 30/ contactor relay and inrush limit relay.
12. The 28vdc is used to produce waveforms and
bias voltages required for internal use in the CPS.
13. RTDP. The RTDP uses 28vdc from 60CBC023
when the RTDP 28vdc contactor is energized. The
28vdc contactor is energized by the radar processor
on signal from the CPS. The aircraft power 28vdc is
sent through the 28vdc contactor to:
a. a linear regulator.
b. the 30/ contactor relay and inrush limit relay.
14. The 28vdc is used to produce bias voltages and
waveforms required for RTDP power supply
operation.
15. Antenna. The antenna uses two aircraft power
28vdc inputs from no. 8 circuit breaker/relay panel
assembly 60CBC025 and 60CBC006. The 28vdc is
available for use through a power relay. The relay is
not energized until the radar on signal is received
from the CPS. Radar on, a 28vdc input, energizes
the relay sending the aircraft power 28vdc to the
azimuth and elevation motor amplifiers. At the
same time, the radar on signal enables the motor
overload protection circuits.
16. Transmitter. Radar on is sent to the transmitter
to power the waveguide switch and the fault
indicator.
17. AC Electrical Power. The aircraft electrical
power system sends 115vac to the radar system
through the no. 8 circuit breaker/relay panel
assembly. The CPS, RTDP, and transmitter receive
30/, 115vac, 400Hz for use during normal system
operation.
18. CPS. The CPS and RTDP have similar lvps
circuits. The CPS outputs various voltages to other
radar set components while the RTDP does not.
19. The CPS uses 30/, 115vac, 400Hz from
60CBC020, 21, and 22 when the CPS 30/ contactor
relay is energized. The 30/ contactor relay is
energized when both conditions listed below exist:
a. Aircraft power is applied to the relay through
the energized contacts of the 28vdc contactor.
b. Radar on signal from the SNSR panel
enables a 30/ contactor enable signal.
024 00
Page 3
20. The 30/ input is rectified and filtered producing
270vdc line voltage that is applied to a switching
regulator. The switching regulator clamps the
voltage to 165vdc and maintains this level through a
feedback network in the converter transformer.
21. The 165vdc is applied to a dc-dc converter that
uses a converter transformer to step down the
165vdc for use inside the CPS data processing
modules and for output to the transmitter, R/E,
and antenna.
22. The time totalizer circuits of each radar set
component uses 115vac, 400Hz, 0/A.
23. RTDP. The RTDP functions in a similar way as
the CPS to rectify the 30/, 115vac, 400Hz input. All
voltages produced are used internally by the RTDP
to operate fault sensing and signal processing
circuits.
24. The RTDP 30/ contactor energizes when the
radar processor on signal exists in the RTDP, and
28vdc exists from 60CBC023.
25. Transmitter. The transmitter uses 30/, 115vac,
400Hz from 60CBC003, 60CBC004, and 60CBC005
when the primary power relay energizes. The
primary power relay is energized by a 28vdc operate
or emergency select signal from the SNSR panel.
The energized primary power relay supplies 30/
power to the transmitter power supply circuits.
26. Power On Sequence. Radar on select signal is
sent to the control logic module in the CPS to
energize the 28vdc contactor. Energizing the 28vdc
contactor routes 28vdc aircraft power to enable
fault sensing circuits and produce bias voltages. All
fault sensing is enabled by the 28vdc aircraft power
inputs except for undervoltage sensing.
27. After approximately 20 milliseconds from power
on, the control logic module outputs a 30/ contactor
enable that causes the 30/ contactor to energize,
routing 115vac, 400Hz inputs to the CPS rectifier
circuits. Input capacitors are charged through a
limiting resistor to remove excessive inrush current.
The switching regulator starts a slow turn on
immediately after rectification. The dc-dc converter
outputs are within tolerance 100 milliseconds after
the radar on select is input to the control logic
module.
28. The lvps outputs are routed to the:
a. power converter located in the transmitter.
A1-F18AC-742-100
b. power and control located in the R/E.
c. servo electronics unit located in the antenna.
29. These lvps outputs are used for normal system
operation.
30. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-130
THRU 3525681-145, when the lvps is turned on and
no faults are detected, a power up signal is sent to
enable the radar ready logic. If the disc motor is not
at operating speed within 60 seconds, a radar
shutdown signal is routed to the on/off power
control logic to shutdown the lvps. If the disc is
operating properly, the radar equipment ready lines
are set true and the operational readiness test
(ORT) BIT is enabled.
31. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-150
AND LATER CONFIGURATIONS, when the lvps
is turned on and no faults are detected, a power up
signal is sent to enable the radar ready logic. If the
EEPROM memory cannot be loaded into the
operate mode memory, a radar shutdown signal is
routed to the on/off power control logic to
shutdown the lvps. If the EEPROM memory can be
loaded into the operate mode memory, the radar
equipment ready lines are set true and the
operational readiness test (ORT) BIT is enabled.
32. Power Off Sequence. When the radar on
select signal is removed, the power valid signal
indicates power is not valid. The 30/ contactor
deenergizes removing the aircraft power 30/, 115vac,
400Hz input and causing the internal voltages to
decay.
33. When the 30/ contactor deenergizes, the 28vdc
contactor deenergizes removing 28vdc aircraft power
to the CPS circuits and all power to the radar
system.
34. POWER SUPPLIES. In the CPS and RTDP,
linear regulators are identical in operation. Linear
regulation is provided for voltages required for
processing. A linear regulator is also used to supply
18vdc to the power supply for bias voltages and to a
dc-dc bias converter to supply converter waveforms
and switching regulator synchronization.
35. Some linear regulator outputs have overvoltage
sensing circuits to protect the power supply circuits
from damage. The 28vdc aircraft power linear
024 00
Page 4
regulator has an undervoltage sensing circuits to
prevent power supply damage if aircraft power loss
occurs.
36. Each linear regulator is protected from short
circuits by using fold back current limiting to
control power dissipation if the outputs are shorted.
The current limit point of each linear regulator is
125 percent of the rated load.
37. The R/E receives 30, 20, 10, and -20vdc from
the lvps. Linear regulators in the R/E power and
control module reduce the input voltages as listed:
a. 30vdc to 25vdc
b. 20vdc to 15vdc
c. 10vdc to 5vdc
d. -20vdc to -15vdc.
38. The voltages are reduced and regulated with
little ripple. Current limiting is used with voltage
fold back to protect the lvps and the linear
regulator. Also the 5vdc linear regulator uses a
crowbar circuit to protect logic circuits from
overvoltage failure conditions in the regulator.
39. The R/E analog-to-digital converter (adc) has
an independent set of linear regulators to prevent
signal interference between modules. The five
required outputs of the adc are regulated by hybrid
linear regulators. Each output has an overvoltage
sensing circuit that fires a silicon controlled rectifier
(scr) crowbar if an overvoltage condition exists.
40. A linear regulator is located in the servo
electronics assembly on the antenna. The outputs of
5vdc, 15vdc and -15vdc are regulated in an identical
way as the R/E.
41. The transmitter linear regulator receives 30vdc
from the lvps. It provides a 20vdc output to the
high voltage power supply. The linear regulator uses
current fold back to limit current to protect itself
from short circuited outputs. During warmup,
current fold back is modified to a constant current
limiting for 11 seconds after power is applied.
42. FAULT SENSING. See table 1. Fault sensing
circuitry detects conditions dangerous to the CPS or
load operation and takes action to prevent any
damage. Load protection in the lvps is provided by
crowbar circuits and 5.1vdc over and the load by
turning it off if set levels are exceeded.
A1-F18AC-742-100 024 00
Page 5

43. Overcurrent, 18vdc overvoltage, and 12vdc Power on initiated built-in test is bypassed and the
undervoltage sensing is provided to protect lvps RTDP is reloaded from a history file.
circuitry from load and circuitry deviations. The
lvps is turned off if any of these conditions are
46. Thermal switches are mounted at critical areas
detected.
in the radar set. These switches detect overheat
conditions dangerous to system operation. If a
44. Alternating current sensing is done by
thermal switch activates, fault sensing circuits starts
monitoring aircraft power 30/, 115vac, 400Hz for
a 30-second delay and an OVRHT (overheat) cue is
interruptions and low voltage. If either condition
displayed. See figure 1. If the overheat condition
exists for 100 microseconds, the power valid signal
remains for 30 seconds, the CPS is shut down and
is set to a not valid state. After this occurs, the CPS
power is removed.
tries auto recycle of the lvps. If power is not
restored in 3 tries, the lvps is shut down.
47. Emergency override provides for system
45. Power can be restored after auto shutdown by operation if specific conditions exist. Emergency
setting the RDR switch on the SNSR panel to OFF, override is allowable only on detection of thermal
then back to STBY or OPR within 7 seconds. failure or +5.1vdc undervoltage conditions.

Table 1. Logic and Protection

Set
Emergency
Fault Action Fault
Override
Indicator

Computer Crowbar Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes No

Fired

+5.1 V Undervoltage Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes Yes

+5.1 V Overvoltage Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes No

Overcurrent Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes No

AC Undervoltage Change Power Valid No No

Signal

Thermal Failure Turn Off Auto Recycle No Yes

+18 V Overvoltage Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes No

+12 V Undervoltage Turn Off Auto Recycle Yes No

A1-F18AC-742-100 024 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Overheat Display

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BLOCK DIAGRAM - POWER CONTROL

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Radar Electrical Power Function...................................................... WP024 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Power Control Block Diagram, Figure 1.................................................................................................. 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This block diagram supports radar electrical

power function operation (WP024 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 9

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 11

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 10)

A1-F18AC-742-100 025 00
Page 12

Figure 1. Power Control Block Diagram (Sheet 11)

A1-F18AC-742-100 026 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - TRANSMITTER DRIVE

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Block Diagram - Transmitter Drive....................................................................... WP027 00
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
RF Channel Assignments - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), Table 1.................................................. 3
RF Channel Assignments - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000), Table 2.................................................. 4
Transmitter Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Computer-Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 2
Radar Receiver-Exciter ...................................................................................................................... 5
Radar Target Data Processor ............................................................................................................ 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (4) Target acquisition, operation

(WP013 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required, refer to the work packages listed (5) A/A track mode displays, operation
below: (WP018 00)

(6) Head-up displays, operation

a. Sequence of operation:
(WP020 00).
(1) Mode selection and video displays, b. Radar set, operation (WP009 00).
operation (WP011 00)
c. Functional operation:
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00) (1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
(WP016 00) (2) Transmitter drive, operation (This WP)
A1-F18AC-742-100 026 00
Page 2

(3) RF power function, operation computer system (MC) and sensor control switch
(WP028 00) for air combat maneuvering (ACM) commands.
Channel commands and frequency modulation
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation ranging are used together to compute transmitter
(WP030 00) drive signals.

(5) Signal processing function, operation

(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
8. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-
SCM-000), channel commands are applied to the
CPS by the MC. The CPS commands the R/E to
the channel required depending on the mode
selected. There are a total of 32 R/E channels with
channels 1, 2, 3, 16, 24, and 32 not able to be
commanded by the MC. This gives the R/E a range
of 26 available channels in which the MC can
command to the R/E by way of the CPS. See table
1.

(10) Mode dependent signal processing,

operation (WP036 00)

(11) Mode dependent data processing,

operation (WP038 00)

(12) Radar set doppler, operation

(WP022 00)

(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation

(WP041 00)

(14) Track while scan function, operation

(WP043 00).

3. TRANSMITTER DRIVE.
4. Refer to WP027 00 for Transmitter Drive Block
Diagram.

5. Transmitter drive production includes the

operation of functional modules within the radar set
components listed below:

a. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65

(CPS)

b. Radar Target Data Processor

CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP)

c. Radar Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65

(R/E).

6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.

7. COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY. The CPS receives

mode and submode commands from the mission
A1-F18AC-742-100 026 00
Page 3

Table 1. RF Channel Assignments - WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY

CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000)
+ + Auto Channel Control Selected
Manual Channel
AR/E RF
Control Selected
Channel A/A Channel Set A/G Channel Set
Number
A/A A/G A B C D E F G ✩ A B C D E F G ✩

4 X X
5 X X
6 X X
7 X X
8 X X
9 X X
10 X X X X X X
11 X X X X X X
12 X X X X X X
13 X X X X X X
14 X X X X X X
15 X X X X X X
17 X X X X X X
18 X X X X X X
19 X X X X X X
20 X X X X X X
21 X X X X X X
22 X X X X X X
23 X X
25 X X X
26 X X X X X X
27 X X X X X X
28 X X X X X X
29 X X X X X X
30 X X X X X X
31 X X X X X X

+ RF Channels 1, 2, 3, 16, 24, and 32 cannot be commanded.

+ + Limited frequency agility operates with these rf channels for each channel set.

9. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-
SCM-000), channel commands are applied to the
CPS by the MC. The CPS commands the R/E to
the channel required depending on the mode
selected. There are a total of 32 R/E channels with
channels 1, 2, 3, 8, 16, 24, and 32 not able to be
commanded by the MC. This gives the R/E a range
of 25 available channels in which the MC can
command to the R/E by way of the CPS. See table
2.
10. Radio frequency (RF) manual is a MC signal to
the CPS. The true (1) state is a command to the
CPS allowing manually entered channel commands.
The false (0) state is a MC command indicating
automatic (frequency agility) channel control. RF
manual in its false state does not allow channel
changing unless frequency agility is required by the
operating mode.
A1-F18AC-742-100 026 00
Page 4

Table 2. RF Channel Assignments - WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY

CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000)
+ + Auto Channel Control Selected
Manual Channel
AR/E RF
Control Selected
Channel A/A Channel Set A/G Channel Set
Number
A/A A/G A B C D E F G ✩ A B C D E F G ✩

4 X X
5 X X
6 X X X X
7 X X X X
9 X X X X
10 X X X X X X
11 X X X X X X
12 X X X X X X
13 X X X X X X
14 X X
15 X X X X
17 X X
18 X X
19 X X
20 X X X X X
21 X X X X X
22 X X X X X
23 X X X X X X
25 X X X X X X
26 X X X X X X
27 X X X X X X
28 X X X X X
29 X X X X X
30 X X X X X
31 X X

+ RF Channels 1, 2, 3, 8, 16, 24, and 32 cannot be commanded.

+ + Limited frequency agility operates with these rf channels for each channel set.

11. Transmitter drive processing produces a
channel selection output to the R/E, commanding it
to the specified operating channel. The operating
channel is the channel commanded by the MC
unless frequency agility is specified by the radar
operating mode. Frequency agility is available in
two variations:
a. coherent frequency agility
b. noncoherent frequency agility.
12. Coherent frequency agility is commanded and
used as determined by the CPS processing in all air
to ground modes except terrain avoidance (TA) and
sea surface search (SEA). When coherent frequency
agility is being commanded, the CPS starts with the
existing operating channel and commands each
channel in numerical sequence up to the highest
R/E channel available to the mode selected. At the
highest R/E channel the process is reversed, with
each channel selected in descending sequence until
the lowest R/E channel is available for the mode
selected.
13. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), during special short range
track, coherent frequency agility is confined to six
R/E channels. The channels used for special short
range track are 4, 23, 6, 25, 8, and 31. The channel
precondition signal is output during coherent
A1-F18AC-742-100
frequency agility each 5 milliseconds before a
channel change. Channel precondition excites the
next crystal 5 milliseconds in advance of its
selection. This allows crystal frequency to stabilize
before use.
14. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), during special short range
track, coherent frequency agility is confined to six
R/E channels. The channels used for special short
range track are 19, 4, 31, 18, 5, and 14. The channel
precondition signal is output during coherent
frequency agility each 5 milliseconds before a
channel change. Channel precondition excites the
next crystal 5 milliseconds in advance of its
selection. This allows crystal frequency to stabilize
before use.
15. Noncoherent frequency agility is commanded by
the CPS and done by the R/E. The R/E is
commanded to do noncoherent frequency agility for
TA mode. The R/E is also commanded to do
noncoherent frequency agility for SEA mode when
the digital data computer is not commanding
manual channel operation.
16. The CPS does not do channel switching as it
does for coherent frequency agility. The CPS
supplies the noncoherent frequency agility
command to the R/E with a frequency program.
The frequency program determines the noncoherent
frequency agility step size. Frequency program step
size is either four MHz or two MHz. The four MHz
step is used in special short range track while two
MHz steps are used for all other modes. Frequency
stepping starts at the CPS commanded rf channel.
Stepping rates and number are determined in the
R/E.
17. Frequency Modulation Ranging. Frequency
modulation ranging is commanded during high
pulse repetition frequency (HPRF), track while scan
(TWS), and range while search (RWS) modes.
Frequency modulation ranging (fmr) is commanded
by the CPS and sent to the R/E for accurate
ranging.
18. Pulse Compression Bandwidth is a product of
the radar operating modes. Air to ground operating
modes are commanded with a wide bandwidth. Air
to air operating modes are commanded with a
narrow bandwidth. Pulse compression bandwidth is
sent to the R/E to aid in transmitter drive
production.
026 00
Page 5
19. The CPS timing and control module provides
the required control signals to the RTDP and
analog to digital converter (adc) section of the R/E
to do signal conditioning, waveform production and
system synchronization.
20. Timing and control circuits located in the
RTDP provide timing and synchronization to the
radar system. The CPS updates the RTDP timing
and control with mode parameters and timing
required for mode operation, by specifying the
signal or signals to be controlled.
21. RADAR TARGET DATA PROCESSOR. The
RTDP receives the CPS timing and control signals
and determines the synchronization and processing
required for system operation. Frequency agility
clocks are sent to the R/E to cause noncoherent
frequency agility stepping. This signal is timed to
allow the R/E oscillators to stabilize. Frequency
agility clock enable is applied to the RTDP to cause
suppression of each other frequency agility clock
pulse. Frequency agility clock enable is the signal
control that allows the R/E oscillators to stabilize
before the next frequency agility pulse.
22. Other RTDP signals related to transmitter drive
are:
a. transmitter drive gate, which commands the
R/E to gate RF to the transmitter
b. pulse compression command, which
commands the R/E to reverse transmitter drive
phase
c. receiver blanking pulse, which commands the
receiver section of the R/E to blank during
transmission of RF
d. low/medium (L/M) prf blanking, is applied
to the interference blanker.
23. RADAR RECEIVER-EXCITER. The R/E
provides the rf drive signal to the transmitter and
the first local oscillator. The operating modes of the
exciter section are the coherent mode, with either
fixed frequency or frequency agility and
noncoherent frequency agility. The exciter part of
the R/E is made up of:
a. reference oscillator (ro)
b. local oscillator (lo)
c. transmitter driver (TD).
A1-F18AC-742-100
24. Reference Oscillator. The ro is the exciter
primary frequency source. The ro uses a
voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (vcxo). The fmr
generator applies ramp voltage to the vcxo
modulation port for linear vcxo frequency sweep.
This appears on the TD for the radar fmr. The vcxo
frequency is amplified and applied to a harmonic
phase comparator.
25. The ro has a voltage controlled oscillator (vco)
that is triggered into operation by the harmonic
phase comparators control voltage. Its output is
amplified and sent to the harmonic phase
comparator. The CPS channel select command is
decoded in the exciter and the ro is commanded to
lock on one of four vcxo harmonics. The harmonic
phase comparator monitors vco frequency and
sweeps the vco through its operating frequency
band. When the vco and vxco frequencies are
identical the harmonic phase comparator outputs
harmonics, phase loop locked, to the CPS. The
sweep of the vco is disabled and a part of the rf is
sent to the lo as a reference oscillator frequency.
26. Local Oscillator. The lo operates in two
modes:
a. coherent mode, where the output is phase
locked to the reference oscillator
b. the noncoherent mode, where phase lock is
disabled.
27. The reference oscillator frequency is input to a
lo phase comparator. Channel selected crystal
oscillator output frequency is amplified and output
to the same phase comparator as the ro frequency.
The crystal oscillator is swept through its frequency
band until its frequency is the same as the ro
frequency, and offset phase loop lock on occurs. The
phase comparator outputs a beat frequency phase
locked to a frequency four times the crystal
frequency. An offset phase loop locked indication is
then output to the CPS. A section of the rf is
output to the TD module upconverter.
28. The crystal oscillators are arranged in two
banks of four oscillators each. During coherent
frequency agility one oscillator in each bank is
enabled. Selection of each oscillator is controlled by
an electronic switch. While one oscillator is
connected to the phase comparator phase lock loop,
the next oscillator to be selected is preconditioned.
026 00
Page 6
This allows faster frequency switching. The
limitation to frequency switching time is phase loop
lock on time.
29. Noncoherent mode is the second lo operating
mode. In this mode the frequency is controlled by
the CPS input frequency program. The frequency
program is applied to a digital to analog converter
and clocked into the lo. Frequency steps of two
MHz and four MHz are provided for maximum
frequency deviation.
30. Before operation of the noncoherent frequency
agility mode, the starting frequency is caged to a
selected coherent channel under CPS control. This
is done at intervals so the CPS can track frequency.
Phase loop lock circuits are disabled while the lo is
doing noncoherent frequency agility.
31. Transmitter Driver. The TD receives
upconverter drive rf from the lo to process the
transmitter drive frequency. The intermediate
frequency electronics supplies a TD offset frequency
to the transmitter drive gate module. The RTDP
supplied transmitter drive gate pulse gates the
offset frequency at the radar system prf to a phase
modulator.
32. Pulse compression bandwidth command and
pulse compression command are applied to the
phase compression gate driver to produce phase
modulator drive signals. Gated offset frequency and
phase modulator drive are applied to a phase
modulator. In the phase modulator the gated offset
frequency is phase shifted and applied to the
upconverter.
33. The upconverter mixes phase shifted, gated,
offset frequency and the upconverter drive rf. This
produces a double sideband suppressed carrier
output. The upconverter passes the lower sideband
while rejecting the other frequencies. The output of
the upconverter is used as transmitter drive.
34. Transmitter drive is amplified and enters an rf
coupler where a part is applied to the power
monitor. The power monitor makes sure of correct
signal level and constantly monitors transmitter
drive for possible malfunctions. The rf coupler
outputs transmitter drive to the radar transmitter
for gridded traveling wave tube drive.
A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BLOCK DIAGRAM - TRANSMITTER DRIVE

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Transmitter Drive Generation........................................................... WP026 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Transmitter Drive Block Diagram, Figure 1........................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This block diagram supports the transmitter

drive operation (WP026 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 9

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 027 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Transmitter Drive Block Diagram (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 028 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - RF POWER FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Block Diagrams - RF Power Development ........................................................... WP029 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
RF Power Function..................................................................................................................................... 2
Antenna Selection Function .............................................................................................................. 5
Missile Illumination Function........................................................................................................... 5
Transmitter Function ......................................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set is required, refer to the work packages listed b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
below:
c. Functional operation
a. Sequence of operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
(1) Mode selection and video displays, operation (WP024 00)
operation (WP011 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
(WP026 00)
operation (WP014 00)

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (3) RF power function, operation
(WP016 00) (This WP)

(4) Target acquisition, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP013 00) (WP030 00)

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP018 00) (WP031 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. RF POWER FUNCTION.
4. Refer to WP029 00 for RF Power Development
Block Diagram.
5. RF power development includes the functions
listed below:
a. transmitter function
b. antenna selection function
c. missile illumination function.
6. Radio frequency (rf) power development and
routing is primarily done by the radar transmitter.
Control words and reference signals used for rf
development are provided by the radar components
listed below:
a. Radar Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65
(R/E)
b. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65
c. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65
(CPS).
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
028 00
Page 2
8. TRANSMITTER FUNCTION. The transmitter
function includes:
a. control electronics
b. switching regulator
c. power converter
d. high voltage supply
e. microwave processor electronics
f. microwave processor
g. gridded traveling wave tube (GTWT).
9. Control Electronics. Selecting OPR or EMERG
on the sensor pod control box panel assembly
applies an operate or emergency signal to a 3
contactor in the transmitter switching regulator.
The 3 contactor closes, allowing 115vac, 400Hz, 3
phase power to be rectified and regulated.
10. Applying power to the radar set triggers the
transmitter time out 3-minute timer. The control
electronics module monitors all fault sensing devices
seeking power malfunctions while the timer is
running. If no malfunction occurs, the control
electronics tells the CPS a safe turn on has occurred
by sending transmitter time out over the radar mux.
11. The CPS receives the transmitter time out
indication and makes sure all other functions used
in normal radar system operation are valid. If all
conditions indicate the radar set is functioning
correctly, operate command is sent to the
transmitter. Operate command allows the
transmitter to start normal operation.
12. The control electronics module uses the
transmitter time out indication and operate
command to qualify the signals listed below:
a. high voltage on command
b. grid modulator enable.
13. Switching Regulator. The high voltage on
command is applied to the switching regulator,
enabling power transfer from the switching
regulator to power converter circuits. Grid
modulator enable is applied to the high voltage
supply for use in grid modulator functions.
14. Power Converter. Refer to RF Power
Development Block Diagram (WP029 00). Low
A1-F18AC-742-100
voltage power supply (lvps) supplies 30vdc to the
power converter for bias and drive converter
operation. The 30vdc provides power for fault
sensing circuits within the power converter and
power for filament voltage regulator circuits. The
lvps supplies 30vdc for grid bias regulation. The
grid bias regulator provides grid voltage to aid in
grid bias drive production.
15. The bias and drive converter in the power
converter produces a 60Hz converter
synchronization drive signal and applies it to a
dc/ac converter. The dc/ac converter receives
regulated dc power from the switching regulator.
The dc power is converted to an ac square wave.
Converter drive synchronization signals control the
frequency of dc to ac conversions and make sure the
60Hz is maintained. The output of the dc/ac
converter is a high voltage transformer drive signal.
16. The grid bias converter uses grid voltages and
bias and drive converter synchronization to produce
a grid bias drive signal. Grid bias drive is sent to
the high voltage supply.
17. High Voltage Supply. Refer to RF Power
Development Block Diagram (WP029 00). The high
voltage supply module provides the operating bias
cathode and collector voltages for the GTWT
operation. The high voltage transformer drive is
applied to a high voltage transformer in the high
voltage supply to provide operating potentials to
other high voltage supply components.
18. The high voltage transformer provides cathode
and collector voltages directly to the GTWT to
establish cathode to collector potentials. Grid bias
and filament drive are provided for a filament/grid
supply. The filament/grid supply provides GTWT
filament voltage for cathode heating and grid bias
to establish grid potential. A 100v square wave is
produced, by the filament/grid supply, to
synchronize the ion pump multiplier and ion pump
power supply.
19. The R/E provides transmitter inputs as listed
below:
a. transmitter reference
b. transmitter gate pulse.
20. Transmitter reference is applied to the grid
modulator module. Transmitter reference provides
synchronization for jitter control during grid
028 00
Page 3
modulator operation. Transmitter gate pulse is used
by the grid modulator in controlling GTWT
operation. The transmitter gate pulse triggers the
grid modulator at the commanded pulse repetition
frequency.
21. Microwave Processor Electronics. Refer to
RF Power Development Block Diagram
(WP029 00). The microwave processor electronics
has the control circuitry to control GTWT rf inputs,
waveguide switching, and contains the rf power
monitor. The microwave processor electronics
components are listed below:
a. automatic saturation control loop
b. waveguide switching
c. rf power monitor.
22. CPS transmitter drive (TD) attenuation signals
used in the microwave processor electronics are:
a. TD leveler initiate.
b. TD leveler cage.
c. TD leveler nominal attenuation.
23. Automatic saturation control (ASC) loop
compensates for GTWT errors during operation.
TD leveler initiate is applied to the ASC and is
used to produce a control voltage output. The
control voltage output drives a linear attenuator in
the microwave processor. The linear attenuator is
used to vary the transmitter drive rf signal input to
the GTWT.
24. TD leveler initiate commands the ASC to allow
maximum transmitter drive input to the GTWT for
peak power output. After receiving TD leveler
initiate, the ASC enters a rapid mode of operation
to maximize GTWT peak power.
25. TD leveler cage disables the ASC and keeps the
GTWT operating at the existing level. This signal is
set after TD leveler initiate. In modes requiring
frequency agility, agility starts after this signal is
set.
26. TD leveler nominal attenuation is used by the
ASC to drive the linear attenuator to a set position
during short range track.
27. The waveguide switch routes the GTWT output
to the radar antenna, flood antenna, or dummy
A1-F18AC-742-100
load. The waveguide switch provides an interlock
signal, during switching, to inhibit GTWT grid
pulses. The GTWT grid pulses are applied after
waveguide switching is complete.
28. The four commands which control the
waveguide switch are listed below:
a. flood command
b. dummy load command
c. weight on wheels (WOW)
d. built-in test (BIT) dummy load command.
29. Flood and dummy load commands switch the
waveguide to the designated positions, and no
specific command causes switching to the main
antenna. The WOW signal causes waveguide
switching to select dummy load. WOW overrides
flood or main antenna switching. The removal of
the WOW command allows waveguide switching to
occur normally. BIT dummy load overrides the
WOW command and allows rf transmission to the
dummy load. When the above signals do not exist,
the waveguide switch is set to the main antenna
position.
30. Rf power monitor provides fault isolation
signals if excessive power exists at the receiver.
31. Microwave Processor. Refer to RF Power
Development Block Diagram (WP029 00). The
microwave processor couples transmitter drive rf to
the GTWT from the R/E and couples amplified
GTWT rf to the main antenna for radiation. The
microwave processor is made up of:
a. a linearized attenuator.
b. a dual directional coupler.
c. a waveguide switch.
d. a multipactor.
e. a duplexer.
f. a dummy load.
32. This module receives control voltage signals
from the microwave processor electronics and is
positioned to adjust transmitter drive rf. The
attenuated transmitter drive is applied to the
028 00
Page 4
GTWT as the rf input power. The linear attenuator
adjustment maintains the transmitter at the correct
level for GTWT amplification during transmitter
operation. Transmit rf signal is sampled at the
GTWT and returned to the microwave processor.
Transmit rf is applied to the directional coupler for
coupling to test circuits in the microwave processor
electronics, AIM-7 sample, and the duplexer.
33. The microwave processor electronics receives an
incident rf pulse and applies it to the ASC for
GTWT protection. The microwave processor
electronics couples a specified level of transmit rf
energy to the outputs provided for missile tests.
The multipactor is used to provide isolation of the
receiver from transmitted rf.
34. The multipactor requires an ion pump power
supply to maintain the multipactor attenuation of
transmitted rf. The multipactor reduces any
transmitted rf leaked to a predetermined safe level
for receiver protection.
35. The waveguide switch is forced to positions for
routing the transmitted rf. When positioned at
dummy load or flood antenna, an indication of
position is sent to the CPS.
36. Gridded Traveling Wave Tube. Refer to RF
Power Development Block Diagram (WP029 00).
The gridded traveling wave tube (GTWT) operating
power is provided by the high voltage supply.
Operating cathode, grid, and plate potentials are set
when the transmitter drive signal is applied to the
GTWT.
37. The grid modulator controls GTWT
amplification by switching the grid potential above
and below cathode potential. The grid modulator
operates over a wide range of pulse widths and
pulse repetition frequencies required for operation.
The grid modulator contains circuits that float at
the cathode potential. The primary function of
these circuits is to clamp grid voltage to the correct
level and shape the transmitter gate pulse to make
sure of a correct rf output from the GTWT.
38. The transmitter reference is used by the grid
modulator to define the leading and trailing edge of
the transmitter gate pulse. Transmitter gate pulses
are then applied to a transistor switch controlling a
pulse transformer. The pulse transformer controls
grid potential in the GTWT.
A1-F18AC-742-100
39. The application of the grid modulator enable
command triggers the grid modulator into
operation. The transmitter reference defines leading
and trailing edges of the transmitter gate pulse. The
transmitter gate pulse turns the pulse transformer
on, driving the GTWT grid potential above its
reference voltage. The trailing edge of the
transmitter gate pulse turns the pulse transformer
off, causing the GTWT to fall below its reference
potential. Switching the GTWT grid on and off at
the system prf allows the transmitter drive output
rf to be amplified and routed through the
waveguide switch. An ion pump is provided with the
GTWT to remove ionized gases produced by the
GTWT.
40. The GTWT output enters the microwave
processor and is routed to the main antenna, flood
antenna or dummy load. A sample rf is also used as
AIM-7 samples.
41. ANTENNA SELECTION FUNCTION. Refer to
Antenna Selection Block Diagram (WP029 00). The
function of waveguide switching is routing transmit
rf to the main antenna, flood antenna, or dummy
load. Transistor switching logic in the microwave
processor electronics provides the switching
commands for selection of each waveguide switch
position. It is the waveguide switch position, in
response to waveguide switching commands, that
determines transmit rf routing to the main antenna,
flood antenna, or dummy load.
42. The four commands which control waveguide
switching are:
a. a dummy load command.
b. a flood antenna command.
c. a BIT dummy load override.
d. a WOW command.
43. There is no signal directly commanding the
main antenna. When none of the above listed
commands exist, the main antenna is selected.
44. Microwave processor electronics has transistor
switch logic, controlling antenna selections in
response to input signals from the CPS and
hardware produced WOW commands.
45. The flood antenna and dummy load commands
are CPS produced signals. Both signals cause the
028 00
Page 5
waveguide switch to be commanded to the required
position.
46. The WOW command is an input to the radar
system through the No. 2 relay panel assembly. The
WOW command positions the waveguide switch to
route transmitted rf to the dummy load. The WOW
command exists when the aircraft is not in flight.
Selection of dummy load using WOW prevents rf
from being radiated from the antenna.
47. The BIT dummy load override command
overrides the WOW command to the waveguide
switch. BIT dummy load override allows the
waveguide switch to return to main antenna
waveguide position, while inhibiting gridded
traveling wave tube grid triggers. BIT dummy load
is an input during radar initiated BIT.
48. Transistor logic produces a waveguide switch
interlock signal during waveguide switch movement.
The waveguide switch interlock inhibits grid trigger
signals to the GTWT. Transistor logic produces
signals indicating waveguide switch position to
confirm correct waveguide switch position.
49. MISSILE ILLUMINATION FUNCTION. The
AIM-7 (sparrow) requires pulse doppler
illumination (PDI) waveform for missile guidance. If
the master armament switch is in the armament
position and sparrow is the selected weapon, the
radar attempts to track the target in PDI any time
the target range is at or less than 1.2 times R-max.
While in PDI, the radar occasionally does burst
ranging. After the missile is launched, the radar will
not do burst ranging but stays in PDI until 30
seconds after the missile is computed to have
intercepted the target. If the radar is in track but
not in PDI at the time of launch, it switches to PDI
as soon as the trigger is squeezed to the second
detent (launch initiate) on the aircraft controller
grip assembly.
50. Flood Illumination. Refer to antenna selection
block diagram (WP029 00). Flood antenna
command is for sparrow launch when the radar
system is not tracking. Flood antenna command
causes the microwave processor electronics to
produce the flood antenna select signal. Flood
antenna select signal is an input to microwave
processor and is applied to the waveguide switch,
commanding the waveguide switch to the flood
antenna position.
A1-F18AC-742-100 028 00
Page 6

51. The rf illumination is radiated from the flood antenna selection, the main antenna is commanded
antenna to provide target illumination. During this to the center down stowed position.
A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

BLOCK DIAGRAMS - RF POWER DEVELOPMENT

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar Systems................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - RF Power Function ............................................................................. WP028 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Antenna Selection Block Diagram, Figure 2........................................................................................... 11

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
RF Power Development Block Diagram, Figure 1 ................................................................................. 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. The following block diagrams support the rf

power function operation (WP028 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 2

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 3

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 4

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 5

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 6

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 7

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 8

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 9

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 10

Figure 1. RF Power Development Block Diagram (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 11

Figure 2. Antenna Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 029 00
Page 12

Figure 2. Antenna Selection Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 030 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - RADAR SET RECEIVING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Simplified Schematic - Radar Set Receiving Function....................................... WP040 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Receiving Function .................................................................................................................. 2
Analog to Digital Converter............................................................................................................... 4
Receiver ................................................................................................................................................ 2
Receiving Function Block Diagram, Figure 1 ......................................................................................... 8

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required, refer to the work packages listed b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
below:
c. Functional operation
a. Sequence of operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
(1) Mode selection and video displays, operation (WP024 00)
operation (WP011 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
(WP026 00)
operation (WP014 00)

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (3) RF power function, operation
(WP016 00) (WP028 00)

(4) Target acquisition, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP013 00) (This WP)

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP018 00) (WP031 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. RADAR SET RECEIVING FUNCTION.
4. This WP contains the principles of operation of
the receiver and analog-to-digital converter (adc)
sections of the Radar Receiver-Exciter (R/E)
R-2089/APG-65. Receiver operation is divided as
listed below:
a. limiter/attenuator/noise source
b. radio frequency (RF) electronics
c. intermediate frequency (IF) electronics
d. power and control
e. filter box.
5. The analog-to-digital operation is divided as
listed below:
a. digital automatic gain control (DAGC)
b. variable frequency oscillator (vfo)
c. in-phase and quadrature (I/Q) detector
d. analog-to-digital (a/d)
e. digital
030 00
Page 2
f. linear regulator.
6. Figure 1 is the radar set receiving function block
diagram. A more detailed radar set receiving
function simplified schematic is in WP040 00.
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
8. RECEIVER. The planar array antenna is divided
into four identical quadrants that output to the
receiver. The receiver has two parallel signal
processing channels listed below:
a. main/sum channel
b. guard/difference channel.
9. The main/sum channel receives target returns
from the four planar array antenna quadrants
through the waveguide switch in the radar
transmitter. This channel sums the returns of the
four planar array quadrants. This summmed return
is used to produce target range.
10. The guard/difference channel receives target
returns from the antenna guard horn during search
modes and from the four planar array quadrants
during track modes. During search modes the guard
horn returns are used to suppress false targets
caused by the planar array antenna’s returns
sidelobes. During track, the returns of the top two
quadrants of the planar array antenna are summed
and compared to the sum of the returns of the
bottom two quadrants to determine target elevation.
The returns of the top right and bottom left
quadrants are summed and compared to the sum of
the returns of the top left and bottom right
quadrants to determine target azimuth.
11. Circuit operation of both channels is similar, so
only main/sum channel operation is described.
12. Limiter/Attenuator/Noise Source. A
combined waveguide limiter/ attenuator/noise
source is located inside the R/E at each of the two
receiver input ports. The limiter part of this device
protects the receiver from high level RF transmitted
from the antenna or from external sources. The
limiter is completely passive. A waveguide probe
couples part of the input signal and sends it to a
diode rectifier. For high level signals, the diodes
appear as shorts to limit the received signals.
13. When used as an attenuator, the
limiter/attenuator/noise source responds to a digital
A1-F18AC-742-100
command by applying a control bias voltage to the
limiter diodes. The diodes are biased part way on,
causing the device to operate as an attenuator. This
enables the receiver to process high level target
returns.
14. This device provides a diode noise source which,
when commanded, sends an excess noise ratio signal
to the receiver. The signal is used for receiver
sensitivity tests during built-in test (BIT).
15. Radio Frequency Electronics. The RF
electronics contains the microwave and the first IF
part of the main/sum and guard/difference receiver
channels. A low noise field effect transistor (FET)
preamplifier provides gain and establishes the
receiver sensitivity. The amplifier subassembly
contains two balanced amplifier stages followed by a
bandpass filter and a bidirectional signal coupler. A
temperature compensated bias voltage regulator is
used to stabilize the amplifier’s gain performance.
16. Flexible waveguide transfers the signal from the
limiter to the main/sum FET amplifier. On the
guard/difference channel, where input losses are less
critical, semi-rigid coaxial cable is used.
17. High level signals that appear in the FET
amplifier passband and have the potential for
jamming the receiver are detected by an RF power
monitor. Part of the main/sum FET amplifier
output signal is coupled to a detector diode. The
diode output drives a video amplifier followed by a
threshold detector with digital output.
18. A strobe input allows the monitor to ignore the
high level energy reflected from the antenna during
transmission. The monitor status is transmitted
from the unit by way of the radar multiplex bus.
The coupler, at the output of the guard/difference
FET amplifier, is used for the injection of a test
signal for frequency modulation ranging (fmr) slope
calibration.
19. An integrated mixer/first IF amplifier comes
after the FET amplifier. A balance mixer does the
first frequency conversion for the first IF. A low
noise amplifier provides the gain for the IF. A
switched diode step attenuator comes after the
single stage amplifier. A discrete element bandpass
filter at the mixer/IF amplifier output attenuates
the first IF amplifier noise output.
20. The RF electronics also contains a 3-bit digital
local oscillator (lo) phase shifter which is used for
030 00
Page 3
phase balancing the receiver channels. The lo signal,
entering the phase shifter, is divided equally
between its two output ports. These ports are
connected to the main/sum and the
guard/difference mixer lo ports.
21. When the phase shifter is stepped, the phase
difference between the two lo signals is shifted in
increments. Any phase change in the lo results in an
equal change in the mixer IF output. The phase
difference between the two receiver channels are
electronically adjustable.
22. Intermediate Frequency Electronics. The IF
electronics receives the IF from the RF electronics
and mixes it with inputs from the second lo. The
result is a second IF of lower frequency than the
input IF.
23. The second IF is applied to a tuned IF
amplifier which provides the final stage of receiver
amplification and sets the receiver bandwidth. The
second IF amplifier outputs are routed into a diode
switching circuit. The diode switching circuit
provides outputs that are independent of each other
or combined with each other, depending on the
commanded track mode. The commanded track
modes are listed below:
a. full monopulse track-separate channel
outputs
b. combined monopulse track-channels are
switched together, providing sum and difference of
the combined channel outputs.
24. An IF power monitor circuit at the main/sum
second IF output detects large signals in the IF
passband. Part of the IF output is sent to an
amplifier, detected, and amplified again as video.
The IF monitor digital output is transmitted on the
radar multiplex bus.
25. The IF electronics also has an offset reference
crystal oscillator. Part of the oscillator output is
applied to a power divider. Part of the power is
used in a frequency divider. One frequency divider
output is used as the transmitter driver offset
reference. The other frequency divider output is
used in the adc as the second IF reference signal.
26. The other half of the offset reference crystal
oscillator output is applied to a diode switch. The
diode switch is pulsed at the radar system pulse
repetition frequency (prf). During the receiver
A1-F18AC-742-100
listening time, the diode switch allows the oscillator
output to pass into a times-two frequency
multiplier. The resulting signal is divided and used
as the second lo signal.
27. During radar system transmissions, the diode
switch blocks the offset reference crystal oscillator
signal, cutting off the second lo. The receiver IF
electronics output is routed to the adc for more
processing.
28. Power and Control. The receiver receives the
prime power from the regulated dc voltages
produced in the low voltage power supply (lvps)
part of the Computer Power Supply (CPS)
CP-1325/APG-65. The four hybrid, integrated
circuit, linear voltage regulators, located in the
power and control module, reduce and provide
added regulation for these voltages.
29. Each regulator provides current limiting and
voltage foldback to protect the lvps, the regulator,
and the connected circuits. Also, the lowest voltage
regulator has a crowbar circuit on the output to
protect the power and control unit logic circuits.
30. The power and control module has the two R/E
control logic, hybrid integrated circuits. The various
mode command signals are received from the CPS
by way of the radar multiplex bus. The command
words are held in a temporary register until an
execute command is received from the CPS.
31. The control logic provides special signal
conditioning or logic functions required by the
various modules for unit operation. An example of a
special logic function is binary to one-of-eight
decoding of the lo crystal oscillator.
32. The fmr ramp generator has a current
integrator with a voltage ramp output. The
integrator is disabled by electronic switches. The
circuit components of the fmr generator are
contained in a hybrid integrated circuit.
33. This oscillator is made up of a crystal oscillator
in a hybrid integrated circuit. Before calibration,
the crystal oscillator is turned on, but its output is
isolated. During calibration, the oscillator output is
applied to a step recovery diode which produces a
spectrum of oscillator frequencies. The microwave
filter passes the requested frequencies and
attenuates the ones not requested.
030 00
Page 4
34. Filter Box. The receiver and exciter parts of
the R/E share a common filter box. This box has
the receiver and exciter operational connectors, the
elapsed time and failure indicators, and feedthrough
and discrete filters.
35. ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER. The adc
receives the main and guard IF signals from the
receiver. The adc does the following operations:
a. IF gain control
b. synchronous I/Q detection
c. bandwidth control
d. analog-to-digital conversion
36. The IF gain control amplifiers, under Radar
Target Data Processor (RTDP) CP-1326/AGP-65
control, set the signal level return for maximum
processing in each radar mode. The gain control
amplifiers provide peak automatic gain control (agc)
during air to air search and track modes.
37. The synchronous I/Q detectors are driven by an
I/Q reference from the vfo or receiver. The vfo is
tuned by the RTDP to simplify digital processing.
38. For bandwidth control, the video signals are
passed through narrow band filters where the
bandwidth depends on the selected mode. In air to
air modes, the bandwidths are selected to satisfy
the signal-to-noise requirements for the pulse width
used. In air to ground modes, the bandwidths are
selected to satisfy the resolution requirements.
39. During analog-to-digital conversion, the video
signals are sampled and converted to digital words.
The outputs are sent out sequentially.
40. Digital Automatic Gain Control. The DAGC
circuits provide the gain of both receiver second IF
channels. All gain control functions of the second IF
part of the receiver are controlled by the DAGC
circuitry. This provides a means by which all gain
functions are controlled by a single gain control IF.
41. An IF signal from the receiver output is sent to
the DAGC circuits where it is controlled in
amplitude, then sent to the I/Q detector. The
DAGC circuitry has seven cascaded switchable
attenuators separated by isolation amplifiers. These
amplifiers are followed by tuned bandpass filters
and buffer amplifiers.
A1-F18AC-742-100
42. The RTDP commands gain control by the use
of a 7-bit control word. The control word bits
determine how many of the switchable attenuators
are switched in or out of the amplifier network.
This action controls amplification by reducing or
adding to the signal attenuation. This is done at
each point of amplification, before its entry into the
amplifier.
43. The dynamic range accuracy, as well as gain
and phase balance over the control range, is a result
of the attenuator switch network. The attenuator is
made with precision thin film resistors. The
isolation amplifiers use a wideband feedback
configuration to reduce distortion and provide
stability over temperature variations and power
supply changes.
44. A wideband transistor configuration functions
as the switching element. This circuit has a
balanced switching system that reduces transients
during the switching phase. It is controlled in speed
to reduce the switching energy in the passband. The
form of this circuit gives a very fast switching time.
45. Variable Frequency Oscillator. The reference
frequency for the synchronous detector is produced
by a digital synthesizer in combination with a phase
lock loop vfo filter. The synthesizer allows very fine
resolution frequency adjustment along with precise
linearity of the frequency input. The vfo is used to
filter out false signals from the digital synthesizer.
46. The vfo output part is amplified as required by
the balance modulator in the I/Q detector. The vfo
uses the adc reference frequency from the second IF
to aid in high pulse-repetition frequency (HPRF)
range determination and to prevent target eclipse.
Target eclipse is caused by target data error from
HPRF returns.
47. For all other prf modes, the RTDP commands
the vfo to an internal frequency synthesizer to
produce a reference frequency. This frequency is
controlled directly by an 18-bit RTDP command
word. The high speed type of the synthesizer is
required to produce a clean reference in the phase
lock loop.
48. The output, with small frequency deviations,
reduces the filtering requirements so that a simple
bandpass filter can be used at the output of the
adc. Also, the unwanted phase detector outputs are
rejected by the phase locked loop, easing the
filtering requirements. The narrow bandwidth, high
030 00
Page 5
Q filter action of the phase locked loop is still
needed to filter out very close in false lines.
49. The digital frequency synthesizer is made up of
a wide adder and an accumulator register. The
register is clocked at a frequency from the reference
oscillator. The frequency is controlled by setting the
size of the increment word.
50. The output waveform from the digital
frequency synthesizer is converted to an analog
voltage waveform. The fundamental line of this
waveform is selected by a bandpass filter and
applied to the phase detector of the phase locked
loop.
51. I/Q Detector. The two gain controlled IF
signals (main and guard) and the vfo output are
mixed in the synchronous detector. The four output
video lines are applied to the video amplifier and
bandwidth shaping function to be amplified and
band limited to the required level. The bandwidth
control comes across the serial data interface from
the RTDP.
52. Another operation that occurs in the video
amplifier and bandwidth shaping block is dc offset
control inputs. These inputs are received from the
RTDP. They complete a dc offset nulling feedback
loop that uses the RTDP to detect the dc offset
errors in the the video channels. They also provide
the required dc offset control input required to null
the collected dc offset in each channel.
53. The outputs of the video filter amplifier and
bandwidth shaping clock are applied to four
feedback type sample and hold circuits. The four
outputs of the sample and hold are applied to an
analog multiplexer, which applies them to the input
of the a/d encoder box. The output word is applied
to the bulk memory part of the RTDP.
54. The IF inputs from the main and guard
channels are applied to power splitters. Then they
are sent to the I/Q balance modulators. The
synchronous detector reference frequency is
received from the vfo and applied to a 90 degree
hybrid which produces the I/Q reference signals for
the balance modulators. The balance modulators
operate as down converters.
55. Each of the video signals passes through
identical video chain circuitry. These signals first
pass through a passive filter which deletes the high
level feedthrough from the reference frequency, the
A1-F18AC-742-100
IF frequency, and the sum frequencies. The desired
difference frequency video spectrum is then
amplified. This high level video signal is applied to
a video filter. The filter outputs are applied to the
input of the sample and hold circuit which, in turn,
feeds the multiplex amplifier.
56. Analog-to-Digital. The video amplifier receives
the dc offset command from the RTDP. This signal
is added with the video signal and provides a dc
input. The dc input compensates for the complete
dc offset that occurs through the analog chain. The
video amplifier has a wide bandwidth and provides
low noise, low distortion, and high output signal
level ability. The video amplifier is hard limited.
57. The dc offset reduces the requirement for large
coupling capacitors in the video and analog part of
the circuitry. It also reduces the effects of baseline
shifting caused by the ac coupling of the previous
video chain forms. The dc offset reduces the
component matching requirements in the analog
circuits, video channels, and adc. The feedback type
reduces the effects of aging and environmental
conditions.
58. The a/d has two basic modes of operation which
are:
a. six-bit resolution
b. twelve-bit resolution.
59. In the 6-bit mode, the four channel multiplex
output is applied directly to the 6-bit encoder
hybrid. In this mode, the 6-bit encoder output bits
are formatted in the data conversion hybrid. The
6-bit words are loaded alternately into most
significant bits (MSB) and least significant bits
(LSB) of the 12-bit word output data. This output
is clocked into a register as a single, 12-bit wide
data word which is then sent to the RTDP.
60. In the 12-bit mode, the analog input is applied
first to the 6-bit encoder, where a coarse estimate is
made. It is then applied, through a multiplexer, to a
d/a converter in the d/a hybrid.
61. The coarse estimate is subtracted from the
analog input, amplified, and applied to a second
encoding operation. The output of the error
amplifier is encoded to a 4-bit resolution covering a
range, which contains two of the LSB of the 6-bit
estimate.
030 00
Page 6
62. The encoding provides an overlapping of the
6-bit encoder estimate. The overlapping allows
correction for the first level encoding errors. Also,
correction is provided for analog input settling
errors that could occur during the initial phases of
the encoding process. This correction is completed
by applying the MSB of this 4-bit quantizer to
over-range correction logic.
63. The output of the over-range encoding logic and
the three LSB of the second 4-bit quantizing
operation are sent back through the same multiplex
to a d/a converter. Then a second 9-bit subtraction
process occurs. The resulting error voltage is
amplified and applied in parallel to both 4-bit
quantizers.
64. The other quantizer encodes the final error
signal into 4-bits, which overlaps part of the nine
previous bits. This provides a correction function to
correct for fine settling or encoding errors. These
bits are combined in parallel through the multiplex
latch and finally through the output register. The
12-bit wide, 12-bit data is transmitted to the
RTDP.
65. The a/d is under control of the timing and
control logic which produces all the required clock
and mode signals for the adc.
66. Digital. The digital module acts as a buffer for
signals between the other adc modules, as well as
between other radar units. It produces the timing
and control signal for the a/d and acts as a buffer
for signals going to the transmitter.
67. The timing hybrid on the digital module
produces the clocks and controls needed in the adc.
It does up to 4, 6, or 12-bit conversions per sample
interval. Conversions start with a sample strobe
enable pulse from the RTDP.
68. The mode of timing signal is determined by the
mode signal which is input through the serial data
interface. The hybrid produces the sample and hold
pulse, analog mux commands, encoder latch clocks,
and control signals.
69. Four identical sample and hold pulses are made
to enable sampling of four channels at the same
time. The analog mux control signal then selects the
channel on which the conversion occurs. The
encoder latch clocks control the input and output
latch clocks for the quantizers in the respective
encoders.
A1-F18AC-742-100 030 00
Page 7

70. The timing hybrid also buffers the transmit 74. The destination of the serial data word is
gate from the RTDP and the clock to the indicated by the bits it contains. A parity bit in the
transmitter. Error correction, data stacking, and MSB is used to confirm the correct operation of the
output timing are controlled by the remaining interface. Double buffering of the vfo command in
signals. the register hybrid allows the data to be
transmitted at any time, and transferred with the
71. Parallel data interface is used for DAGC bus execute command.
commands because of its high rate of change. An
8-bit control word for digital gain control is received
75. Serial data is clocked in with a duty cycle clock
from the RTDP. The two MSB of the 8-bit word
when the serial data enable is high. The clock is
are sent to the R/E. A discrete integrated circuit is
only used when the words for the adc are received.
used to split the control signal to the R/E into main
All signals are received on standard electronic
and guard channels.
control logic (ECL) interfaces. The parity of each
received word is sent to the R/E for BIT purposes.
72. A control signal from the serial data interface
Added parity bits are made for each word and
overrides the main channel, when commanded. The
output as test points through the tactical connector.
remaining signals are sent to the DAGC and vfo to
control the gain.
76. Linear Regulator. The required output
voltages are regulated by power hybrids. Each
73. The serial data interface is made up of the
output voltage has an overvoltage sensing circuit
serial data clock, serial data enable, and serial data
that fires a silicon controlled rectifier crowbar
and bus execute signals. Three hybrids are used to
circuit if the overvoltage threshold is exceeded. The
receive the serial words. The adc operation is
linear regulator short circuit protection is included
updated through the serial data interface. This is
in the hybrid, except for the current sense resistor.
done as commanded by the system mode of
operation and the update rate ranges.
A1-F18AC-742-100 030 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Receiving Function Block Diagram (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 030 00
Page 9/(10 blank)

Figure 1. Receiving Function Block Diagram (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 031 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - SIGNAL PROCESSING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Operation - Mode Dependent Signal Processing ................................................. WP036 00
Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic............................................... WP037 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Signal Processing Function........................................................................................................................ 2
Air to Ground Ranging/Precision Velocity Update Mode ............................................................ 5
Analog to Digital Offset Calibration Mode ..................................................................................... 7
Burst Ranging Logic ........................................................................................................................... 4
Data Memory Test.............................................................................................................................. 7
Doppler Beam Sharpened Mode....................................................................................................... 5
Fixed Target Acquisition Mode ........................................................................................................ 6
Fixed Target Track Mode.................................................................................................................. 6
Frequency Modulation Ranging Calibration Mode ....................................................................... 7
Ground Moving Target Acquisition Mode ...................................................................................... 6
Ground Moving Target Indication Mode ........................................................................................ 5
Ground Moving Target Track Mode................................................................................................ 6
High Pulse-Repetition Frequency Range While Search Mode .................................................... 4
High Pulse-Repetition Frequency Track Mode ............................................................................. 5
High Pulse-Repetition Frequency Velocity Search Mode ............................................................ 4
Low/Medium Pulse-Repetition Frequency Air Combat Maneuvering Mode ............................ 4
Medium/Low Pulse-Repetition Frequency Track Mode............................................................... 4
Medium Pulse-Repetition Frequency Look-Up Search Mode ..................................................... 3
Medium Pulse-Repetition Frequency Search Mode ...................................................................... 3
Phase and Gain Calibration Mode ................................................................................................... 7
Raid Assessment Mode ...................................................................................................................... 5
Real Beam Ground Map Mode ......................................................................................................... 5
Real Beam Ground Map - Ground Moving Target Indication Interleaved Mode .................... 6
Receiver-Exciter Initiated Built-In Test Mode .............................................................................. 8
RTDP Initiated Built-In Test Mode................................................................................................ 8
RTDP Periodic Built-In Test Mode ................................................................................................ 9
Sea Surface Search Mode .................................................................................................................. 6
A1-F18AC-742-100 031 00
Page 2

Alphabetical Index (Continued)

Subject Page No.

Short Range Track Mode .................................................................................................................. 5

Signal Power Calibration Mode ........................................................................................................ 8
Silent Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 7
Swept Variable Frequency Oscillator Birdie Test Mode .............................................................. 8
Terrain Avoidance Mode ................................................................................................................... 6
Transmitter Initiated Built-In Test Mode...................................................................................... 9
Variable Frequency Oscillator Calibration Mode........................................................................... 7
Zero Range Delay Calibration Mode................................................................................................ 7

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (4) Radar set receiving function, operation

(WP030 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required refer to the work packages listed (5) Signal processing function, operation
below: (this WP).

a. Sequence of operation (6) Data processing function, operation

(WP032 00).
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00). (7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation operation (WP034 00).
(WP016 00).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
(4) Target acquisition, operation
(WP013 00). (10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00).
(5) A/A track mode displays, operation
(WP018 00). (11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00).
(6) Head-up displays, operation
(WP020 00). (12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00).
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
c. Functional operation.
(WP041 00).
(1) Radar electrical power function,
(14) Track while scan function, operation
operation (WP024 00).
(WP043 00).
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00). 3. SIGNAL PROCESSING FUNCTION.

(3) RF power function, operation 4. This WP contains descriptions of the Radar

(WP028 00). Target Data Processor (RTDP) CP-1326/APG-65
A1-F18AC-742-100
signal processing functional operations. The RTDP
provides signal processing as commanded by the
Computer-Power Supply (CPS) CP-1325/APG-65.
RTDP signal processing modes are:
a. medium pulse repetition frequency (MPRF)
search mode.
b. medium prf look up search (MPRFLU)
mode.
c. low/medium prf air combat maneuvering
(L/MPRF ACM) mode.
d. high prf range while search (HPRF RWS)
mode.
e. high prf velocity search (HPRF VS) mode.
f. burst ranging logic.
g. medium/low prf (M/LPRF) track mode.
h. high prf (HPRF) track mode.
i. raid assessment mode (RAID).
j. short range track (SRT) mode.
k. real beam ground map (RBGM).
l. doppler beam sharpened (DBS) mode.
m. ground moving target indication (GMTI)
mode.
n. terrain avoidance (TA) mode.
o. air to ground ranging (AGR)/precision
velocity update (PVU) mode.
p. sea surface search (SEA) mode.
q. real beam ground map-ground moving target
indication (RBGM-GMT) interleaved mode.
r. fixed target acquisition (FTA) mode.
s. fixed target track (FTT) mode.
t. ground moving target acquisition (GMTA)
mode.
u. ground moving target track (GMTT) mode.
v. silent mode.
031 00
Page 3
w. frequency modulation ranging (fmr)
calibration mode.
x. variable frequency oscillator (vfo) calibration
mode.
y. phase gain calibration mode.
z. analog to digital (a/d) offset calibration
mode.
aa. data memory test.
ab. zero range delay calibration mode.
ac. signal power calibration mode.
ad. swept variable frequency oscillator birdie
test mode.
ae. RTDP initiated built-in test (IBIT) mode.
af. receiver-exciter initiated built-in test (R/E
IBIT) mode.
ag. transmitter initiated built-in test mode.
ah. RTDP periodic built-in test (PBIT) mode.
5. Refer to operation - mode dependent signal
processing (WP036 00) for a description of each
mode function.
6. Refer to WP037 00 for signal processing function
simplified schematic.
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
8. MEDIUM PULSE-REPETITION FREQUENCY
SEARCH MODE. The MPRF search mode is
commanded by the CPS. MPRF search occurs on
selected bars of the range while search (RWS)
operation. MPRF is used to detect targets which are
not detected by the HPRF waveform in tail aspect.
MPRF search also occurs at intervals during HPRF
track to determine range to target (burst ranging).
Since MPRF waveform causes false range and
velocity data, the signal processing controls the
effects of clutter and resolves the target range data.
9. MEDIUM PULSE-REPETITION FREQUENCY
LOOK-UP SEARCH MODE. The MPRFLU mode is
commanded by the CPS. MPRFLU occurs on
selected bars of the RWS operation to detect
targets which are not detected by the HPRF
waveform in beam or tail aspects. MPRFLU also
occurs during HPRF track to determine range to
A1-F18AC-742-100
target. The MPRF waveform causes false range and
velocity data. This false data is resolved by signal
processing.
10. LOW/MEDIUM PULSE-REPETITION
FREQUENCY AIR COMBAT MANEUVERING MODE.
The L/MPRF ACM mode is commanded by the
CPS for several radar system modes. The modes
are:
a. head-up display acquisition (HACQ)
b. boresight (BST)
c. vertical acquisition (VACQ)
d. range-while-search short pulse (RWS-SP).
11. Two separate types of operation are
time-shared. The first type operates with a MPRF
waveform that causes false range and frequency
data. The processing of MPRF controls the effects
of clutter and resolves the target from false data. A
sequence of seven pulse repetition frequencies (prf)
is cycled with set values providing the required
range and velocity coverage.
12. The second type operates with a low pulse
repetition frequency (LPRF) detection process that
is resolved in range and independent of frequency.
The transmitted pulses are the first pulses of the
pulse groups for two of the MPRF. To avoid false
range detections, these LPRF pulses are
transmitted after blank periods of no transmission.
This waveform provides detection coverage for
beam targets which are not detectable to MPRF,
out to the range of main lobe clutter, or to the
maximum range of the mode.
13. HIGH PULSE-REPETITION FREQUENCY
RANGE WHILE SEARCH MODE. The HPRF RWS
mode is commanded by the CPS on alternate bars
of the RWS operation to detect targets in the nose
aspect, for velocity and range. The HPRF waveform
produces a signal that is identified in frequency. To
determine range in the processing, a frequency
ramping function with three phases is put on the
transmissions. The processing is used to reject
clutter, to detect target frequency in each phase,
and to resolve for range across the phases.
14. HIGH PULSE-REPETITION FREQUENCY
VELOCITY SEARCH MODE. The HPRF VS mode is
commanded to detect targets in the nose aspect, for
velocity only. The HPRF waveform produces a
031 00
Page 4
signal that is identified in frequency. The
processing is used to reject clutter and to detect
target velocities in the clutter free doppler area.
15. BURST RANGING LOGIC. Burst ranging is
requested at intervals by HPRF or MPRF track
mode. The antenna is not scanning and the mode
selected for burst ranging is either HPRF or MPRF
RWS. A HPRF burst range is used to obtain range
when acquisition has occurred out of VS or to
update target range during low signal to noise ratio
tracking conditions. A MPRF burst range is used to
improve target range tracking accuracy. Following
the completion of burst ranging the mode returns to
HPRF or MPRF track.
16. MEDIUM/LOW PULSE-REPETITION
FREQUENCY TRACK MODE. The MPRF track
mode is entered from the MPRF search/acquisition
mode or the ACM, HPRF (range gated and
non-range gated) track, SRT, or LPRF track
operations under control of the CPS. The MPRF
track mode operates with a waveform which causes
false data in range and frequency. The false data
increases the target tracking ability of the radar.
Burst ranging logic is used to improve range data.
17. A total of 192 prf commands is provided for
CPS selection to avoid main lobe clutter (MLC),
altitude return, range bin eclipsing, velocity
blindness, and reflection lobe interference. This is
done while meeting the simultaneous requirements
for tracking the target. The processing provides
target tracking in a clutter environment. Azimuth
and elevation angle error measurements are
time-shared. Doppler filters from selected range
bins are formed and data from selected range/filter
combinations are sent to the CPS.
18. The LPRF track mode is entered from the
ACM, HPRF (range gated and non-range gated)
track, or MPRF track modes under control of the
CPS. This mode operates with a waveform that is
resolvable in range and produces false frequency
data for better target tracking. The processing is
used to provide target tracking in a main lobe
clutter free environment.
19. Azimuth and elevation angle error
measurements are time shared. Doppler filters are
formed from selected range bins and data from the
selected range/filter combinations is sent to the
CPS.
A1-F18AC-742-100
20. HIGH PULSE-REPETITION FREQUENCY TRACK
MODE. The HPRF track mode is entered from the
MPRF track, LPRF track or SRT operations, or
from the HPRF RWS or HPRF VS operations,
under control of the CPS. The mode operates with
a waveform which is false in range data. Burst
ranging logic is used to improve range data. The
processing provides target tracking in both
clutter-free and clutter environments. Azimuth and
elevation angle error measurements are time shared.
Doppler filters are formed and data from selected
filters is sent to the CPS.
21. RAID ASSESSMENT MODE. The RAID mode is
commanded by the CPS when the system is
operating in air to air (A/A) track modes. The
function does a high resolution target detection over
a small volume of space about the tracked target.
This provides the total number of targets in the
raid as well as their relative position from the
tracked target centroid.
22. The RAID mode RTDP software has two
selectable CPS submodes of signal processing or
automatic gain control (agc) processing. Signal
processing (as compared to MPRF search) provides
improved detection and angular/velocity resolution
by using the rise of fast Fourier transform filters.
The fine velocity resolution operates with pulse
compressed MPRF ranging and an expanded
display which provides fine resolution in range.
23. The improved angular/velocity resolution is
used for display resolution by RTDP processing.
This provides azimuth and elevation data for
discriminant computation as a measure of a target’s
position relative to beam center.
24. SHORT RANGE TRACK MODE. The SRT mode
is entered from the MPRF/LPRF track operation
under control of the CPS. This mode operates in an
interleaved LPRF, MPRF waveform. MPRF
processing is similar to the MPRF track mode.
Noncoherent signal processing is done when LPRF
is used. Frequency agility is used to minimize the
effects of target return distortion. Refer to
WP036 00 for a description of each of the 10
separate functions contained in the SRT mode.
25. REAL BEAM GROUND MAP MODE. When
commanded by the CPS, the RBGM mode detects
and displays terrain and large discrete targets. The
waveform is a low prf. The processing is used to
rapidly map large areas with the angular resolution
031 00
Page 5
that is part of the antenna main beam width. Pulse
to pulse frequency agility is used to improve
discrete target returns. Post detection integration
(PDI) is used to improve the ratio of signal to noise.
26. DOPPLER BEAM SHARPENED MODE. The
DBS mode processing, when commanded by the
CPS, provides azimuth resolution improvement by
spectral analysis processing of the ground doppler
return. When commanded, it provides a 4 to 1 PDI
of the filtered data. The data is converted to eight
shades of gray and formatted for display processing.
27. The RTDP processing in this mode depends on
the CPS for control of the antenna motion,
positioning of the range gates, and selection of the
pulse repetition frequency and pulse width.
28. GROUND MOVING TARGET INDICATION
MODE. The GMTI mode provides detection and
display of ground moving targets. The pulse doppler
waveform used is resolvable in both range and
frequency. Targets are displayed as composite
video. This mode can be interleaved with the
RBGM mode, which causes map background to be
displayed.
29. AIR TO GROUND RANGING/PRECISION
VELOCITY UPDATE MODE. The AGR mode and
the PVU mode have been combined for common
use of signal processing circuitry. The PVU part of
this mode is commanded by the CPS, when
requested from the mission computer system. The
antenna is scanned in a three position pattern and
velocity measurements are made at each point of
the pattern. The mode operates with a waveform
that produces false frequency data and is resolvable
in range. The processing is completed in the
following steps:
a. range acquisition
b. frequency acquisition
c. range tracking
d. frequency error determination.
30. The range track measurement is done by either
of two methods - elevation monopulse (range)
resolution improvement or a split gate method. The
CPS commands either method depending on
whether MLC is, respectively, of large or small
range amount. Frequency error determination is
done by a doppler-bin centroid, azimuth monopulse
A1-F18AC-742-100
resolution improvement, or monopulse frequency
improvement. The method used depends on
whether MLC is a large or small frequency amount.
For all non-acquisition operations, an estimate of
background noise is provided.
31. The AGR part of this mode is commanded by
the CPS. The ground point is not required to be a
discrete target but is on the radar line-of-sight. The
mode operates with a waveform that produces false
frequency data and resolvable range. The range to
the ground along the antenna boresight is acquired,
then tracked, in range and velocity. The AGR part
of this mode does not use the pulse compression
function or the larger doppler extent MLC error
measurement function.
32. TERRAIN AVOIDANCE MODE. In the TA
mode, the RTDP provides processing of detected
terrain. Displays are processed in two clearance
planes, one at and above the aircraft altitude and
one within 500 feet below aircraft altitude. Terrain
that is above the aircraft altitude but within 500
feet is displayed on the digital display indicator at
its brightest intensity. Terrain below the aircraft
altitude but within 500 feet is displayed at an
intermediate intensity.
33. Terrain more than 500 feet below the aircraft is
not displayed. The two clearance planes are used to
determine the terrain protrusions in front of the
aircraft. The RTDP provides the processing to keep
correct orientation during maneuvers. When the
aircraft dives, the display terrain is tilted down to
parallel the aircraft flight path. This enables the
radar to detect and display terrain protrusions
before the aircraft dives into the area of the
protrusions.
34. SEA SURFACE SEARCH MODE. The SEA
mode, when commanded by the CPS, operates with
a noncoherent, resolvable range, pulse-to-pulse
frequency hopping waveform. The processing is
used to provide high sensitivity in detecting discrete
surface targets while minimizing the effects of
diffuse clutter. An estimate of noise for each
potential target signal is made from a group of
nearby range cells. This value is multiplied by the
constant false alarm rate (CFAR) threshold and
compared with the signal to provide a hit/miss
output. The CFAR threshold is transmitted from
the CPS. The guard channel is used in this mode
because of the frequency hopping.
031 00
Page 6
35. REAL BEAM GROUND MAP - GROUND
MOVING TARGET INDICATION INTERLEAVED
MODE. The system operation for the RBGM-GMT
mode is provided by interleaving the separate
RTDP modes of RBGM and GMTI. Display details
of those modes are then affected by the interleaved
operation. For details of the interleaving see the
individual mode description, this WP.
36. FIXED TARGET ACQUISITION MODE. The FTA
mode is commanded by the CPS from RBGM, or
SEA operation. The waveform is a low prf. Doppler
filters are formed and targets detected in frequency
and range. Coherent frequency agility is used to
improve discrete target returns. Range/doppler
filter hits are sent to the CPS for target acquisition.
Guard channel processing is done to prevent target
acquisition through the antenna side lobes.
37. FIXED TARGET TRACK MODE. The FTT mode
is commanded by the CPS from the RBGM, or SEA
operations by way of fixed target acquisition
operation. The mode operates in a low prf
waveform. The number of filters formed and the
transmitted pulse width is selected to match the
target amount in angle and range. The processing is
used to provide tracking of large targets in a clutter
environment. Frequency agility is used to reduce
the effects of false target echo. Azimuth and
elevation angle error measurements are time shared.
Doppler filters from selected range bins are formed
and data from selected range/filter combinations is
sent to the CPS.
38. GROUND MOVING TARGET ACQUISITION
MODE. The GMTA mode is commanded by the
CPS from the GMTI mode. The pulse doppler
waveform is resolvable in range. This mode is used
to acquire a ground moving target when range is
less than 34 nmi. Guard channel processing is used
to prevent target acquisition through the antenna
side lobes. Range/doppler hit/miss data is sent to
the CPS for target acquisition.
39. GROUND MOVING TARGET TRACK MODE.
The GMTT mode is commanded by the CPS from
the GMTA mode. This mode provides processing to
track a ground moving target when range is less
than 34 nmi. The mode operates in a low prf
waveform. Doppler filters are formed for ground
moving target velocity estimates. Azimuth and
elevation angle error measurements are time shared.
A1-F18AC-742-100
Data from selected range/doppler cells is sent to the
CPS.
40. SILENT MODE. The silent mode is not a
specific or special operation for the RTDP. In this
mode, the transmitter is turned off but the RTDP
functions in any operational mode, as commanded
by the CPS.
41. FREQUENCY MODULATION RANGING
CALIBRATION MODE. The fmr calibration mode
provides measurement data to the CPS where the
slopes of 16 consecutive segments of the fmr ramp
can be determined. Correction of the composite
slope value by command to the Radar
Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65 (R/E) is then
possible. Excessive change of individual segments
from specified values indicates circuit failure.
42. The CPS commands the mode by loading the
RTDP with the mode command and then with
timing and control (T&C) information. The agc
function uses the first sets of data received during
fmr phase C. This gives the best signal to noise
ratio by adjusting the agc.
43. The T & C produces the radar multiplexer
(R-mux) execute signal which starts fmr phase B.
The data received during the resultant fmr phase B
is converted, by the processor function, to 16 vector
rotation values. These rotation values and the agc
value are sent to the CPS. The time for each
rotation measurement is fixed by the timing and
control parameters.
44. VARIABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR
CALIBRATION MODE. The vfo calibration mode
provides data to the CPS: an agc value which
optimizes the signal to noise ratio with the BIT
antenna target as the signal source, and data from
which the bias error of the vfo frequency
commanded can be determined. The CPS will
command the mode by loading the mode command
and then the mode T & C information into the
RTDP.
45. All data from the receiver is stored in the bulk
memory. The first five sets of data are used to set
the agc. The agc value is output to the CPS.
46. PHASE AND GAIN CALIBRATION MODE. The
phase and gain calibration mode provides data to
the CPS from which corrections for unbalanced
gains and phases of the signal channels, used in
tracking operations, can be determined. The CPS
031 00
Page 7
commands the mode by loading the mode command
and then the agc and T & C parameters into the
RTDP. The agc storage function modifies and
stores agc values for the various required phase and
gain hardware configurations.
47. The timing and control causes each agc value to
be used in sequence. The processing function
receives raw data from the bulk memory, average,
scale and form the applicable magnitude squares,
dot products, and cross products. These are sent to
the CPS for the applicable phase and gain
calibration computations.
48. ANALOG TO DIGITAL OFFSET CALIBRATION
MODE. The a/d offset calibration mode has three
functions listed below:
a. determines the a/d offset compensation
commands which will null the a/d outputs with zero
inputs.
b. measures the a/d output response to the
initial compensation command.
c. tests the RTDP data memories and pointers
as a part of RTDP periodic BIT.
49. The CPS commands the mode by loading the
RTDP with the mode command and then with T &
C information. The agc is set to 108 dB for all a/d
measurements. For each of the four a/d channels,
the average outputs and the a/d compensation
values are stored for output to the CPS. The
average outputs are used to change the
compensation values to null the a/d outputs. The T
& C sends the new compensation values to the R/E.
A new set of data is averaged and the a/d
compensated five times before the final set of a/d
averages and coinciding compensation commands
are stored for output to the CPS.
50. DATA MEMORY TEST. The data memory test
tests each data memory bit to assume values of 0 or
1. The pointers will be tested for the ability to
address all memory locations and to bit reverse
addresses.
51. ZERO RANGE DELAY CALIBRATION MODE.
The zero range delay calibration mode determines
the delay in range bins between the program
assumed transmit time and the received data time.
The program is set up to process either 6-bit or
12-bit data, with eight range bins if short pulse or
16 range bins if pulse compression is being used.
A1-F18AC-742-100
52. The CPS commands the mode by loading the
RTDP with the applicable mode command, and
then with the coinciding T & C and agc
information. The RTDP processes the data to
provide the CPS with an indication of the signal
strength, the agc used, the T & C test word no. 2,
the power sum, and the weighted power sum of the
processed range bins. Test word no. 2 indicates
whether the last transmitter event calibrate was
satisfactory. The range delay is determined in the
CPS by dividing the weighted power sum by the
power sum.
53. SIGNAL POWER CALIBRATION MODE. The
signal power calibration mode processes four sets of
consecutive a/d data. There are 512 vectors from
track 1 and track 2 taken over a 1 millisecond
period to make up each data set. The outputs sent
to the CPS are listed below:
a. the power of the average track 1 input
b. the power of the average track 2 input
c. the average power of the track 1 inputs
d. the average power of the track 2 inputs.
54. The combined data processing outputs to the
CPS are listed below:
a. the a/d bits which in any set of data were
both 0 and 1
b. the agc value used.
The signal power calibration mode is commanded
by the CPS by loading the C-memory with the
mode command and then with the agc and T & C
parameters.
55. SWEPT VARIABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR
BIRDIE TEST MODE. The swept vfo birdie test
mode detects birdies as the vfo is swept across a
range of frequency steps. The swept vfo birdie test
is commanded by the CPS by loading the mode
code, then the agc and the T & C parameters,
including the initial vfo command. The program
forms doppler filters and thresholds their
amplitudes against noise group averages to detect
false signals, then changes the vfo command. This
process is repeated across a range of vfo
frequencies. The birdie detection indications are
sent to the CPS.
031 00
Page 8
56. RTDP INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST MODE. The
RTDP initiated built-in test (IBIT) mode is a
collection of individual tests, each designed to
operate and verify the integrity of a specific
component or function of the RTDP. The RTDP
IBIT is done by the CPS directly loading the
program, C and data memories, and commanding
execution. If the RTDP fails to transfer the results
of the individual tests to the CPS in the allotted
time, the CPS assumes a failure.
57. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-130
THRU 3525681-145, the a/d conversion of radar
video occurs in the R/E. The RTDP interfaces with
the R/E a/d converter. The RTDP programs are
stored on the CPS disc memory and the applicable
program is loaded in the bulk memory. The RTDP
then does that program without further interference
from the CPS. When a major mode change is made
the RTDP is stopped, the new program is sent to
the bulk memory from the disc, and the new mode
operation is initiated. The RTDP also does the
radar T&C function under control of the CPS.
58. WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY
CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER 3525681-150
AND LATER CONFIGURATIONS, the a/d
conversion of radar video occurs in the R/E. The
RTDP interfaces with the R/E a/d converter. The
RTDP programs are stored on the CPS EEPROM
and the applicable program is loaded into bulk
memory. The RTDP then does that program
without further interference from the CPS. When a
major mode change is made RTDP processing stops,
the new program is sent to the bulk memory from
the EEPROM, and the new mode operation starts.
The RTDP also does the radar T&C function under
control of the CPS.
59. RECEIVER-EXCITER INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST
MODE. The R/E IBIT mode is not a specific
program, but is a collection of individual tests, each
used to operate and verify the integrity of a specific
component or function of the R/E. The five BIT
calibrations and two special tests make up the
RTDP part of the test listed below:
a. a/d offset calibration
b. vfo calibration
c. phase and gain calibration
d. zero range calibration
A1-F18AC-742-100
e. fmr calibration
f. signal power test
g. swept vfo birdie test.
60. The tests of the R/E uses signals taken from
the transmitter drive. These signals are sent to the
antenna where they are split in each of the receiver
input channels. The test signals are processed
through the receiver and then evaluated by the
previously tested CPS and RTDP.
61. TRANSMITTER INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST
MODE. The transmitter IBIT mode is not a specific
program, but a collection of individual tests, each
031 00
Page 9/(10 blank)
used to operate and verify the integrity of a specific
component or function of the transmitter. Zero
range calibration and signal power test make up the
RTDP part of transmitter IBIT. Refer to zero range
calibration mode this WP.
62. RTDP PERIODIC BUILT-IN TEST MODE. The
RTDP PBIT mode is constantly in operation during
all tactical modes. It has no specific processing in
the RTDP except that provided in the a/d offset
calibration mode. Refer to a/d offset calibration
mode this WP. During the performance of an a/d
offset calibration, the RTDP provides signals
indicating that it is functioning correctly.
A1-F18AC-742-100 032 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - DATA PROCESSING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Operation - Mode Dependent Data Processing.................................................... WP038 00
Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic ................................................. WP039 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Data Processing Function .......................................................................................................................... 2

Air To Air Mode Processing.............................................................................................................. 4
Air To Ground Mode Processing ...................................................................................................... 6
Avionic Processing .............................................................................................................................. 3
Built In Test ........................................................................................................................................ 8
Calibration............................................................................................................................................ 9
Executive .............................................................................................................................................. 2
Mode Management ............................................................................................................................. 3
Radar Unit Control............................................................................................................................. 3
RAID Assessment Mode .................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Environment ............................................................................................................................ 4
Data Processing Functional Block Diagram, Figure 1........................................................................... 10
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,

operation (WP014 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
set are required refer to the work packages listed
(WP016 00)
below:
(4) Target acquisition, operation
a. Sequence of operation: (WP013 00)

(1) Mode selection and video displays, (5) A/A track mode displays, operation
operation (WP011 00) (WP018 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(6) Head-up displays, operation
(WP020 00)
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00)
c. Functional operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(This WP)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP036 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. DATA PROCESSING FUNCTION.
4. This WP contains descriptions of the Computer
Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65 (CPS) data
processing functional operations. The CPS provides
the data processing required to support radar
system operating modes. CPS data processing
sections are:
032 00
Page 2
a. executive
b. mode management
c. radar unit control
d. avionic processing
e. built-in test
f. calibration
g. air to ground mode processing
h. signal environment
i. air to air mode processing.
5. Refer to operation mode dependent data
processing (WP038 00) for a description of each
mode function.
6. Refer to WP039 00 for data processing function
simplified schematic.
7. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
8. EXECUTIVE. See figure 1. The executive
provides the radar with a priority interrupt driven
control ability for scheduling and producing various
i/o transactions and task processing. The executive
contains the following:
a. interrupt monitor
b. interrupt processor
c. task scheduler
d. real time clock.
9. Interrupt Monitor. The interrupt monitor
processes eight levels of priority interrupts. The
interrupt monitor function does multiple level
interrupt decoding to determine the interrupt
starting condition.
10. Interrupt Processor. When the interrupt
monitor function determines that starting
conditions are met the interrupt processors are
called. The interrupt processors do specialized
processing by starting specified i/o transactions and
activating tasks related to the interrupt starting
condition.
11. Task Scheduler. The task scheduler controls
the operation of tasks on a priority basis. This
A1-F18AC-742-100
includes both recently activated tasks and tasks
that were interrupted.
12. Real Time Clock (RTC). The real time clock
allows the radar to start specialized interrupt
processing based on time. When the required time
expires an RTC interrupt is produced. This allows
the user to activate tasks and start i/o transactions
synchronized to the RTC interrupt.
13. MODE MANAGEMENT. See figure 1. Mode
management includes:
a. mode selection
b. mode modification
c. timing and control.
14. Mode Selection The mode selection function
monitors:
a. MC mode commands
b. flight control stick ACM commands
c. internal parameters.
15. The mode selection function determines if a
mode change is required. Applicable mode request
flags are set which report the mode modification
function.
16. Mode Modification. The mode modification
function does the required operations to configure
the radar to the mode requested. Included in this
operation is the loading of the CPS operating mode
memory and signal processor bulk memory with the
correct programs from the CPS disc or EEPROM.
17. Timing and Control. The timing and control
function provides the required control parameters
to the signal processor. C-memory is used by the
signal processor timing and control and prepacker
sections and the receiver a/d converter section.
18. C-memory does the below:
a. signal conditioning waveform production
b. data sampling
c. system synchronization.
19. RADAR UNIT CONTROL. See figure 1. The
radar unit control includes:
032 00
Page 3
a. antenna control
b. receiver control
c. transmitter control.
20. Antenna Control. The antenna control function
provides the required control logic to position, scan
and drive the antenna for various air-to-air and
air-to-ground radar modes of operation. The
computation required for antenna control is done
each display sync period.
21. Receiver-Exciter Control. The receiver-exciter
control function does the below:
a. RF channel selection
b. frequency modulation ranging (FMR)
c. phase switching
d. quadrature hybrid switching
e. BIT antenna target selection
f. pulse compression bandwidth selection.
22. Transmitter Control. The transmitter control
function controls the application of the GTWT high
voltage and grid pulses. The transmitter control
function also controls the transmitter drive leveling
loop and the waveguide switch.
23. AVIONIC PROCESSING. See figure 1. Avionic
processing includes:
a. aircraft parameters function
b. mission computer servicing function
c. controls and detection function.
24. Aircraft Parameters Function. The aircraft
parameters function computes various parameters
which depend on inputs from the MC. This
includes:
a. velocity and altitude
b. antenna angular position commands
c. various coordinate transformations.
25. Mission Computer Servicing Function. The
MC servicing function provides the required logic to
A1-F18AC-742-100
allow the radar to operate using a constant set of
data parameters from the MC. The MC servicing
function provides the required formatting and
assembling of data in i/o buffer for transmission to
the MC. Data received from the MC is unloaded,
making it available to other software functions in a
common data base memory.
26. Controls and Detection Function. The
controls and detection function provides the
required logic to allow the radar to process discrete
input signals produced by switch closures.
27. SIGNAL ENVIRONMENT. See figure 1. Signal
environment is used during air to air and air to
ground search to reduce the possibility of detecting
invalid targets. The signal environment has the
following:
a. threshold control function
b. clutter processing function
c. digital AGC processing function
d. HPRF elliptic filter function.
28. Threshold Control Function. In the signal
processor the threshold control function controls
the signal detection thresholds. The threshold
control function maintains the false alarm rate at a
satisfactory level.
29. Clutter Processing Function. The clutter
processing function provides the ability to position
the doppler spectrum processed by the signal
processor. The clutter processing function also
provides the required clutter parameters to the
signal processor for its internal clutter signal
processing.
30. Digital AGC Processing Function. The digital
AGC processing function maintains the best input
signal for the a/d converter. This is done by
controlling the receiver gain. The DAGC parameters
are sent to the signal processor which in turn
derives the command to the receiver which
attenuates the receiver-exciter gain.
31. Elliptic Filter Function. HPRF elliptic filter
function attenuates the high PRF clutter area while
passing the clutter free area.
32. AIR TO AIR MODE PROCESSING. See figure 1.
The air-to-air search function processes target
032 00
Page 4
(resolved) hit data from the signal processor to
remove redundant target hits treated as unique
targets. Targets that are tested for redundant target
hits are referred to as undeclared targets. Targets
completing the test are referred to as declared
targets.
33. Track While Scan (TWS). See figure 1. TWS
provides the radar with a multiple target detection
and tracking ability. Trackfiles for up to ten targets
are maintained. Data on the eight highest ranking
trackfiles are output to the MC for display. The two
non displayed trackfiles are used as replacements
for the eight primary trackfiles. If their rank
becomes higher than one of the primary targets the
two replacements are moved up in priority to
replace previous primary track files. TWS functions
are:
a. TWS track storage
b. TWS track correlation
c. TWS tracking filters
d. auto scan selection
e. bar-to-bar redundancy elimination.
34. TWS Track Storage. The TWS track storage
function provides the ability to track and store
tracking data for up to ten targets while the radar is
operating in:
a. HPRF/MPRF interleave
b. HPRF
c. MPRF.
35. TWS Track Correlation. The TWS track
correlation relates targets from the bar-to-bar
redundancy elimination function with TWS tracks
maintained in the TWS track storage file.
36. TWS Tracking Filters. During each filter cycle
the TWS tracking filters function processes each
TWS track file one time. Predicted target
parameters for the n +1 frame are produced based
on the nth frame time data.
37. Auto Scan Selection. The auto scan selection
function selects antenna scan centering and scan
volume. The selection is made by the scan centering
mode command by the MC. In auto scan centering
A1-F18AC-742-100
mode, the auto scan selection function determines
the best scan volume and scan centering parameters
based on TWS target file data. In the manual scan
centering mode, the azimuth position of the scan
center remains at its last position and the raster
parameters are based on MC commanded
parameters.
38. Bar To Bar Redundancy Elimination. The
bar-to-bar redundancy elimination function is done
for all target returns produced by the
phase-to-phase redundancy elimination function.
Multiple returns occurring on two or more elevation
bars from a single real target are centered to remove
redundancy and to improve target azimuth and
elevation data.
39. Air To Air Acquisition. See figure 1. The air to
air acquisition function provides the means by
which targets in a designated parameter space are
acquired by the radar for transition to single target
track. The air to air acquisition function is
considered in two ways, by acquisition phase or
acquisition type.
40. By phase, air to air acquisition is divided into
acquisition 1 (ACQ1) and acquisition 2 (ACQ2).
41. By type, air to air acquisition is divided into
manual acquisition and slaved acquisition.
a. air combat maneuver (ACM) acquisition
b. reacquisition
c. burst ranging acquisition
d. track transfer acquisition
e. return to acquisition.
42. Single Target Track. See figure 1. STT
includes:
a. STT control function
b. discriminants function
c. signal-to-noise (SNR) function
d. range filter function
e. velocity filter function
f. gate control function
032 00
Page 5
g. angle filter function
h. PRF selection function.
43. STT principally implements kinematic
functions to track a specified target in the
commanded waveform. Filter data from the signal
processor are used to form, discriminant data and
SNRs. The discriminants are used to provide
estimates of error signals and are used by the
respective tracking kalman filters.
44. In the angle filters, case state vector estimates
are used to form antenna drive signals which are
output to the antenna servo.
45. RAID ASSESSMENT MODE. See figure 1. The
RAID mode can be selected when the radar system
is operating in STT mode. When selected, RAID is
interleaved with STT. The RAID mode provides
high resolution target detection and position data of
other targets in a small area of space around a
tracked target. This provides a display of the total
number of targets and the relative position of each
target to the tracked target.
46. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The RAID processing is
divided into seven intervals, called looks. During
these intervals, the antenna is positioned to one of
seven fixed points, centered around the tracked
target position. Hit data is processed on each of the
looks, correlated to prevent double processing of the
same target. Individual target data from the RTDP
is processed by the CPS to put the target position
relative to the antenna boresight.
47. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). After the radar has acquired
a target, the RAID switch can be used to select the
STT RAID mode. The STT RAID mode provides
antenna coverage in the immediate area around the
STT target to allow possible detection of multiple
closely spaced targets. The STT RAID mode uses a
brief scanning function interleaved with a tracking
function. The scanning part of the STT RAID mode
consists of two frames of 2-bar/20 degree TWS
processing with the scan center fixed about the STT
target. More radar trackfiles can be generated from
the scanning part of the STT RAID mode. When
the TWS part of the processing is complete the
radar re-enters track on the STT target.
A1-F18AC-742-100
48. Air To Air Display Processing. See figure 1.
The air to air display processing does:
a. search target hit processing
b. search target data display processing
c. acquisition symbol control
d. antenna-B sweep symbol control
e. antenna elevation control
f. elevation caret symbol control.
49. Search target hit processing removes redundant
target hits displayed as unique targets. Search
target display processing to selected display scale
and target heading compensation includes:
a. target aging
b. symbol intensity control
c. target range
d. velocity scaling.
50. Acquisition symbol control processing includes
integrating and shaping the cursor X and Y rate
commands from the MC. This provides smooth
acquisition symbol movement on the display.
51. The antenna elevation symbol control
processing includes integrating the El rate
command from the MC and shaping. This provides
accurate control of the antenna and elevation caret
symbol on the display.
52. Launch Sequencing Function. During tuning
and missile launch sequencing, the launch
sequencing function configures the radar to
transmit using missile compatible waveform.
53. Track Verification. During air to air single
target track mode the track verification is done.
During initial track, the track quality is monitored
to determine if conditions are satisfactory for
entering final track or if a return-to-acquisition is
required. During final track, the signal-to-noise
target ratio is monitored to determine whether the
track filters are extrapolated or not. Breaklock
conditions are also monitored.
54. AIR TO GROUND MODE PROCESSING. See
figure 1. Air to ground mode processing does the
following processing functions:
032 00
Page 6
a. air to ground display processing
b. air to ground ranging
c. precision velocity update
d. fixed target track
e. ground moving target track
f. air to ground acquisition
g. air to ground search modes.
55. Air To Ground Display Processing. See figure
1. The air to ground display processing does
calligraphic symbol processing and in-video symbol
processing.
56. Calligraphic symbol positions are calculated
and output to the multipurpose display group
directly for display. Calligraphic symbols include:
a. acquisition symbol
b. antenna elevation position symbol
c. radar computed antenna elevation symbol
d. track target symbol
e. the B-sweep symbol.
57. In-video symbol positions are computed and
output to the signal processor which are embedded
in the composite video signal to the MDI. In-video
signals include:
a. A/G cursor
b. A/G AZ grid
c. A/G range grid
d. stabilized cue
e. doppler beam sharpened (DBS) raster
boundary mark
f. DBS sector designator
g. DBS patch designator
h. DBS medium resolution synthetic aperture
radar designator
A1-F18AC-742-100
i. antenna beam footprint
j. TA range mark.
58. Air To Ground Ranging. See figure 1. AGR
functions include:
a. AGR executive function
b. discriminants function
c. range filter function
d. velocity filter function.
59. AGR determines the range and doppler
velocity error to the ground along the line-of-sight
(LOS) commanded by the MC and sends the results
to the MC. If a discrete target is found, the AGR
provides the processing required to detect a discrete
target in close proximity to the commanded LOS
and starts transition to FTT.
60. AGR is done in two phases, acquisition and
ground track.
61. In the acquisition phase, data from the signal
processor are processed to determine acquisition
range along the commanded LOS. In the ground
track phase, the range to ground along LOS is
continually updated based on track range residual
and velocity residual data and on INS data. The
power in the sum channel of the two range bins is
used to compute a split gate discriminant. When
MLC is narrow this derives a subrange bin
measurement of the range to mainlobe clutter
(MLC). If the MLC is not narrow, narrow
monopulse processing is used on sum and difference
channel data to determine at which range the
difference data has minimum power.
62. Precision Velocity Update. See figure 1.
Precision velocity update (PVU) includes:
a. PVU executive function
b. PVU antenna pointing function
c. PVU range acquisition function
d. PVU kalman filter function.
63. In the PVU, the radar automatically measures
aircraft velocity and sends the velocity error
components, north-south velocity error, east-west
032 00
Page 7
velocity error, and vertical velocity error to the MC.
The velocity measurement is done by doppler radar
correction of the inertial platforms velocity vector
estimate. The method measures mainlobe clutter
doppler frequency at three different pointing
directions. The difference between the predicted
doppler and current measured doppler is sent to the
velocity kalman filter. The resultant filter output is
an updated aircraft velocity vector estimate.
64. Fixed Target Track. See figure 1. FTT tracks a
ground target using monopulse algorithms.
Continuous tracking is done by pointing the radar
beam on the target and extracting tracking
information to predict future target position
continuously. The discriminant and signal to noise
ratio function processes data supplied by the signal
processor to produce the measurements of:
a. spatial position
b. range
c. target range rate.
65. These measurements are used in turn by
kalman filters to estimate the kinematic state
vectors. Based on these estimates the waveforms are
selected and velocity and range gates are set for
data collecting, forming a closed tracking loop.
66. Ground Moving Target Track. See figure 1.
GMTT is made up of:
a. executive control function
b. track control function
c. discriminant and signal to noise ratio (SNR)
function
d. range filter function
e. velocity filter function
f. angle filter function
g. waveform selection function
h. range gate control function
i. velocity gate control function
j. off-null track function
k. out of clutter target search function.
A1-F18AC-742-100
67. The inertial range and velocity information
which initializes the track filter function and the
gate control function are supplied by GMTA. This
information is also used by the waveform selection
function to determine the starting values of:
a. PRF
b. range bin width
c. doppler filter width.
68. Brickwall doppler filters are formed in the
signal processor. The discriminants as well as the
noise magnitudes denominators and numerators are
also supplied by the signal processor. This
information inputs the track control function for
each phase or filter cycle. The data processor also
supplies GMTT parameters to the signal processor
each phase.
69. Air To Ground Acquisition. See figure 1. The
air-to-ground acquisition function is divided into
two submodes, fixed target acquisition (FTA) and
ground moving target acquisition (GMTA).
70. These functions provide a means by which
ground targets are acquired by the radar for
transition to fixed target track (FTT) or ground
moving target track (GMTT).
71. Air To Ground Search Modes. See figure 1.
When an air to ground search mode is selected the
following processing is used:
a. the threshold control function
b. clutter processing
c. digital AGC (DAGC) processing function
d. air to ground search calibration function
e. high priority end of bar control function
f. in-video output function
g. antenna control function
h. aircraft velocity file update function
i. freeze/erase logic function
j. calligraphic and in-video display functions
for:
032 00
Page 8
(1) real beam ground map (RBGM)
(2) sea surface search (SEA)
(3) ground moving target indication
(GMTI)
(4) RBGM/SEA interleave
(5) RBGM/GMTI interleave
(6) terrain avoidance (TA) modes.
72. BUILT- IN TEST. See figure 1. Built-in test uses
the following functions:
a. initiated BIT
b. periodic BIT
c. operational readiness test
d. relay mode.
73. Initiated BIT. See figure 1. Initiated BIT
(IBIT) does failure detection and failure isolation to
the radar system without the assistance of ground
support equipment. BIT provides the operator with
the ability to assess the functional equipments
performance. BIT identifies failed or degraded
modes in order to determine operational readiness
or the ability to complete a mission.
74. Power-up initial turn-on is an initiated BIT
with a 30 second time delay before the tests are
done. When commanded by the MC, initiated BIT
is done during :
a. initial turn on
b. recovery from power transients
c. watchdog timer expiration.
75. The CPS is the first unit tested in IBIT. It is
used to test each radar unit:
a. receiver-exciter
b. transmitter
c. antenna.
76. The CPS low voltage power supply section is
made to remain on under all safe operating
A1-F18AC-742-100
condition failures. This is done to allow BIT to
operate and find the system failure. The CPS is
used to test other units, adds a minimum of test
hardware, and allows more qualitative testing. Test
data are evaluated to determine the defective radar
unit. The results are sent to the MC.
77. Periodic BIT. See figure 1. Periodic BIT
includes:
a. periodic BIT supervisor function
b. CPS periodic test function
c. receiver/exciter periodic test function
d. transmitter periodic test function
e. antenna periodic test function
f. signal processor periodic test function.
78. Periodic BIT evaluates the radar equipment
performance while it is operating in the tactical
mode by verifying the periodic test results for
normal values. Tests are done so that they do not
interfere with radars tactical operation.
79. The periodic BIT supervisor function provides
the required control and timing to supervise the
various periodic tests operation. During various
tests operation detected failures are filtered to
reduce false failure indication and recorded in the
period test matrix. During a flight, the accumulated
BIT matrix is a collection of all PBIT fails
recorded.
80. Operational Readiness Test. See figure 1.
Operation Readiness Test and Initiated BIT are the
same, except ORT is hardware initiated and IBIT is
operator initiated/terminated.
81. Relay Mode. See figure 1. The radar display
relay mode displays the contents of the BIT
matrices and the results of BIT fault isolation to
the operator. All relay mode display coordinates and
BIT matrix results are relayed to the MC for
display. During relay mode sensor modes are
commanded as long as the signal processor does not
interfere with or overwrite the display.
82. The BIT matrix data is made up of:
032 00
Page 9
a. the latest IBIT results whether completed or
terminated.
b. the latest operational readiness test results
completed in operate (transmitter on).
c. the most recent collection BIT results.
83. CALIBRATION. See figure 1. Calibration
includes:
a. FMR calibration function
b. VFO calibration function
c. phase/gain calibration function
d. a/d offset calibration function
e. RFI test
f. zero range delay calibration function.
84. The calibrations are done at applicable intervals
during the tactical program to compensate for
tolerance build-up and environmental effects on the
radar set. Checks are done on system performance
as a part of the calibration procedure. These checks
on conditions provide a high degree of assurance
that the equipment is functioning properly, for
example:
a. signal level
b. phase relationships
c. frequency.
85. The calibrations results fall within a narrow
window. This provides a further indication that the
circuits affected in the calibration are operating
properly.
86. The calibrations which use RF test signals are
subject to external interference and for that reason
always preceded by an RF interference (RFI) test.
After the RFI test, a gross measurement of the
calibration signal is made to confirm its presence. If
the required signal exists, the calibration proceeds
and the results are evaluated.
A1-F18AC-742-100 032 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Figure 1. Data Processing Functional Block Diagram Figure 1.

A1-F18AC-742-100 033 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - ANTENNA CONTROL FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Antenna Control Function......................................................................................................................... 2

Antenna Servo Electronics................................................................................................................. 5
Computer-Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 2
Antenna Stabilization and Servo Mode, Table 1 ................................................................................... 3
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
set is required refer to the work packages listed
below: c. Functional operation

a. Sequence of operation (1) Radar electrical power function,

operation (WP024 00).
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00). (2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00). (3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00).
(3) Air to ground (A/G) search displays, (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
operation (WP016 00). (WP030 00).
(4) Target acquisition, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP013 00). (WP031 00).

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (6) Data processing function, operation
(WP018 00). (WP032 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(This WP).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00).
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00).
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00).
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. ANTENNA CONTROL FUNCTION.
4. This WP contains the description of the
processing required for antenna control by the radar
system. The radar system components required to
control antenna functions are listed below:
a. Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65:
(1) avionic processing function
(2) radar unit control function
b. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65:
(1) servo electronics.
5. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
6. COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY. The avionic
processing function is part of the CPS data
processing. The avionic processing function has the
logic required to compute antenna stabilization
signals using inertially computed data. This
operation is done by the aircraft parameters section
of the avionic processing function.
7. The aircraft parameters section computes
parameters which depend on mission computer
system inputs. The parameters are listed below:
a. velocity
033 00
Page 2
b. attitude
c. antenna angular positioning commands.
8. The aircraft parameters section also does
coordinate transformations. Coordinate
transformation is the process of relating antenna
positional signals format to the space roll pitch
stabilized system. This verifies the correct response
by the antenna to inputs controlling antenna
movements.
9. Radar Unit Control. The radar unit control
function is a part of the CPS data processing. The
radar unit control contains the logic required to
compute antenna control parameters. This
operation is done by the antenna control section of
the radar unit control. The antenna control function
provides the required logic to position, scan, and
drive the antenna for air to air and air to ground
modes of radar system operation. The radar system
modes are classified by the type of antenna servo
mode and the type of movement stabilization. See
table 1. Antenna movement in space is classified as
listed below:
a. horizon stabilized scan
b. airframe reference scan
c. position mode pointing
d. special position mode
e. acquisition
f. tracking.
10. A horizon stabilized scan is a scan pattern
which is defined and produced in an angular
coordinate system which is stabilized with respect
to the horizon and referenced to the heading of the
aircraft. The scan raster is parallel to the horizon at
any aircraft attitude. Starting with a north, east and
down local vertical geographic coordinate system, a
single rotation about the vertical axis through the
aircraft true heading produces the coordinate
system in which the horizon stabilized scan is
defined.
11. This coordinate system is the space roll pitch
stabilized (SRPS) system. In this coordinate system,
the SRPS azimuth and SRPS elevation, define the
line-of-sight (los) of the antenna. The SRPS roll
angle is defined about the los. The commands to
A1-F18AC-742-100 033 00
Page 3

the antenna servo are computed and output in coordinate system. The antenna is commanded to
other coordinate systems as a function of the point to defined coordinates in the antenna base
antenna servo mode. coordinate system.

12. Airframe reference scan is defined and

14. Special position mode is used to produce the
produced in the antenna base coordinate system. In
type of scan pattern required for the doppler beam
this system, the scan coordinates directly define the
sharpened modes (DBS). In the DBS mode, the
antenna los about the same axes which define the
antenna scans across the area to be mapped at a
antenna gimbal angles. In effect, the scan raster
variable scan rate. Scanning is toward the velocity
appears to be parallel (or perpendicular) to the
vector while forming the map. At the end of the
airframe axes, since the misalignments between the
map scan, the antenna is positioned at the edge of
antenna base and airframe axes are small.
the map farthest from the velocity vector to start a
new scan. The antenna position and rate commands
13. In position-pointing mode, the antenna is
required to do DBS mapping are applied to antenna
operated in the position servo mode and the gimbal
control by the DBS function.
angle commands are in the airframe reference

Table 1. Antenna Stabilization and Servo Mode

Antenna

Radar Mode Servo Mode Movement in Space

Air to Air

RWS Rate Horizon Stabilized Scan

VS Rate Horizon Stabilized Scan

TWS Rate Horizon Stabilized Scan

ACQ I Rate Horizon Stabilized Scan

ACQ II Rate Inertial Pointing

STT Rate Tracking

GACQ Position Airframe Ref Scan

VACQ Position Airframe Ref Scan

WACQ Rate Horizon Stabilized Scan

Caged Position Horizon Stabilized Scan, Airframe Ref

Uncaged Position Horizon Stabilized Scan, Inertially Stabilized

Boresight Position Position-Pointing

Flood Position Position-Pointing

Raid Position and Rate Position-Pointing

A1-F18AC-742-100 033 00
Page 4

Table 1. Antenna Stabilization and Servo Mode (Continued)

Antenna

Radar Mode Servo Mode Movement in Space

Air to Ground

SEA Position Horizon Stabilized Scan

GMT Position Horizon Stabilized Scan

GMT/MAP Position Horizon Stabilized Scan

MAP Position Horizon Stabilized Scan

SEA/MAP Ö1 Position Horizon Stabilized Scan

TA Position Horizon-Special Scan

A/G Ranging Position Position-Pointing

PVU Position Position-Pointing

DBS Position Special Position Pointing

FTT/GMTT Rate Tracking

LEGEND:

1
Ñ WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

15. There are two phases related to acquisition:
a. acquisition 1 (ACQ1) (scan)
b. acquisition 2 (ACQ2) (point).
16. ACQ1 is started by a signal from mode
modification. The display processing function
supplies the coordinates of the target for use as scan
center coordinates. In track while scan (TWS),
during auto scan select, the scan center coordinates
are supplied by the TWS function. The parameters
for the search pattern are then computed.
17. The equations for computing the acquisition
search pattern and the logic for controlling it are
identical to those used in the horizon stabilized scan
modes with two exceptions. The azimuth scan width
is set at ±4° about the scan center and the
minimum elevation width is 2 bars. If the target
elevation is available, the acquisition raster is 2
bars, or the acquisition raster has the same number
of bars as the search mode from which it started.
18. After the scan parameters are computed, the
antenna is positioned to the scan center of the
acquisition raster and then scanning starts. ACQ1
scanning continues until mode modification either
signals a return to the previously existing search
mode or ACQ2 is commanded.
19. The estimated coordinates of the target derived
from the acquisition 1 scan, AZ2 and EL2, are used
to position the ACQ2 antenna in ACQ2. The
antenna servo operates as a rate servo which is
gyroscopically stabilized. As the antenna angular
position nears the vicinity of the commanded
position, the servo angular rate nears a low value,
then the transition to the tracking mode will be
smooth, if the track target coordinates are
approximately the same as the estimated target
coordinates.
A1-F18AC-742-100
20. This transition from ACQ2 to initial track is
commanded by a signal from mode modification. If
there is not enough target return to allow operation
in initial track, a signal from mode modification
returns the antenna to the same ACQ1 scan raster
which was before the ACQ2 to initial track
sequence.
21. In the track mode, the functions of antenna
control are to receive the los angular rate commands
from single target track and to put these command
rates on the antenna servo. Also, scan boundary
limit computations are made to prevent contact
between the gimbals and the limit stops.
22. ANTENNA SERVO ELECTRONICS. The servo
electronics is made up of digital and analog
circuitry which is located in the antenna base, and
with the CPS, positions, stabilizes, and
electronically drives the azimuth and elevation
gimbals. The operation of the azimuth and elevation
servos is the same. The description of operation
applies to either channel.
23. Each servo channel operates in either a position
mode or a rate mode. In the position mode, the loop
is closed by summing the output of the gimbal angle
precision potentiometer with the position command
signal to produce a position error signal.
24. In the rate mode, the position loop is disabled
and the rate integrating gyro circuits are switched
into the servo channel. A rate integrating gyro
provides accurate los rate information and space
stabilization. The output of the gyro is proportional
to the space position difference between the gyro
inertial reference and the gimbal. This output is
used to correct the position of the gimbal.
25. To do space stabilization, the servo keeps the
gimbal aligned in space with the inertial reference.
The los can be processed by driving the gyro
torquer. This precession rate, or los rate, is
accurately determined by monitoring the gyro
033 00
Page 5/(6 blank)
torque current. When the position loop is selected,
the gyros are caged by a direct feedback cage loop.
26. The difference between the mechanization of
the azimuth and elevation stabilization loops is that
the azimuth gyro is mounted on the elevation
gimbal. This mounting location establishes a gain
variation in the azimuth loop that varies as the
cosine of the elevation angle. To correct for this
variation, the azimuth stabilization loop gain is
increased by the CPS gain adjust commands.
27. Each gimbal also has a precision potentiometer
that provides accurate position information. The
output of each potentiometer is digitized by the
analog-digital-analog (A/D/A) converter and then
sent to the CPS.
28. Signals between the CPS and the antenna servo
electronics are transmitted and received by way of
the serial R-mux bus. Data into and out of the
subsystem interface unit (SSIU) is a 16-bit serial
word format. The SSIU receives three 16-bit words
at a time, all under control of read and write
commands from the CPS. The first SSIU input
contains 10 discrete bit mode control commands
which go directly to the servo electronics. The
second two SSIU inputs contain two 12-bit servo
loop rate and position commands. These go to the
A/D/A for digital-to-analog conversion, and then to
the analog servo electronics.
29. The SSIU output signals are from the analog
servo electronics through the A/D/A converter. Six
of these signals define servo positions, rates and
position errors used in CPS computations. The
remainder are built-in test (BIT) signals.
30. The A/D/A converter is located in one of the
antenna gimbal electronics units, where most of the
analog signals start or end. The only signal interface
between the converter and the CPS which does
antenna control processing converter operations is
the R-mux bus.
A1-F18AC-742-100 034 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - COOLING AND PRESSURIZATION FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Cooling and Pressurization Function ....................................................................................................... 2

Air Cooling ........................................................................................................................................... 2
Liquid Cooling ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Pressurization ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Forced Air Cooling Flow Diagram, Figure 1 ........................................................................................... 4
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Liquid Cooling Line Diagram, Figure 2................................................................................................... 5

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (5) A/A track mode displays, operation

(WP018 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
(6) Head-up displays, operation
set is required, refer to the work packages listed
(WP020 00).
below:
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
a. Sequence of operation
c. Functional operation.
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00). (1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
operation (WP014 00).
(WP026 00).
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (3) RF power function, operation
(WP016 00). (WP028 00).

(4) Target acquisition, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP013 00). (WP030 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00).
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00).
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (This WP).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00).
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00).
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00).
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3.COOLING AND PRESSURIZATION
FUNCTION.
4. The Electrical Equipment Rack
MT-4955/APG-65 and pantograph assembly provide
the aircraft to Radar Set AN/APG-65 interface for
the operations listed below:
a. air cooling
b. liquid cooling
c. waveguide pressurization.
5. The radar set components requiring cooling are:
a. Computer Power Supply (CPS)
CP-1325/APG-65
b. Radar Target Data Processor (RTDP)
CP-1326/APG-65
c. Radar Receiver-Exciter (R/E)
R-2089/APG-65
d. Antenna AS-3254/APG-65
034 00
Page 2
e. Radar Transmitter T-1377/APG-65.
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. AIR COOLING. Cooling air for the Radar Set
AN/APG-65 is conditioned air from the air cycle air
conditioning system (ACS). It is transported to the
radar set through the avionic flow valve where inlet
pressure and airflow is controlled by signals from
the ACS temperature/flow controller. Airflow rates
are matched to the cooling requirements of each
system by different sizing of the orifices and exit
areas.
8. Ground cooling is provided by a ground cooling
fan located in the nose wheelwell.
9. See figure 1. Cooling air enters the electrical
equipment rack through the rack air inlet at the
rear of the rack. The cooling air is routed to the top
shelf air plenum and the antenna servo electronics
duct. The air supplied to the top shelf is routed to
the radar set components listed below:
a. CPS
b. RTDP
c. R/E.
10. The cooling air enters through orifices located
in the lower surface of the topshelf. The exhaust air
from the radar components is vented into the radar
compartment from the middle shelf and is blown
across the surface of the transmitter.
11. Cooling air for the antenna servo electronics is
supplied by a duct below the middle shelf. The
cooling air enters through an orifice at the rack to
antenna interface. The antenna servo electronics
exhaust air is vented from the radome compartment
to the radar compartment through the antenna
mounting bolt clearance holes.
12. LIQUID COOLING. Liquid cooling is provided
for the radar transmitter through a closed loop
system to remove heat generated by the transmitter
high voltage radio frequency (rf) modules. Heated
coolant is routed to a heat exchanger that is cooled
by air inducted across the heat exchanger from the
ACS. A pressure relief valve, in the tranmitter
coolant inlet port, allows excess coolant caused by
thermal expansion to bleed off when the coolant
supply line is disconnected.
A1-F18AC-742-100
13. Minimum coolant temperature is regulated by a
temperature control valve located in the heat
exchanger. When cooling air is supplied from the
ACS, a coolant temperature sensor operates an air
control valve through the ACS temperature/flow
controller, to modulate air flow to the heat
exchanger.
14. See figure 2. The electrical equipment rack
provides the aircraft to transmitter liquid cooling
interface. Transmitter coolant supply and return
lines are 1/2 inch, medium pressure, hydraulic hose,
seven feet long. The two lines are routed over the
pantograph and provide transmitter liquid cooling
whether the electrical equipment rack is extended
or retracted.
034 00
Page 3
15. PRESSURIZATION. The waveguide
pressurization system provides regulated, filtered,
dry air to the radar waveguide. Waveguide
pressurization air is supplied from the windshield
anti-ice and rain removal system by a 1/4 inch, low
pressure, hydraulic hose. The hose is routed over
the pantograph to provide continuous waveguide
pressure in either extended or retracted position.
Both the aircraft and waveguide interface
connectors are a one-quarter turn bayonet type.
The waveguide interface connector is located on the
front face of the forward radar bulkhead and is
accessible for waveguide pressure tests.
A1-F18AC-742-100 034 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Forced Air Cooling Flow Diagram

A1-F18AC-742-100 034 00
Page 5/(6 blank)

Figure 2. Liquid Cooling Line Diagram

A1-F18AC-742-100 035 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - BUILT-IN TEST

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Built-In Test ................................................................................................................................................ 2

Initiated Built-In Test........................................................................................................................ 7
Operational Readiness Test............................................................................................................... 9
Periodic BIT ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Initiated BIT Progression, Figure 1 ............................................................................................. 11

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set is required, refer to the work packages listed b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
below:
c. Functional operation.
a. Sequence of operation
(1) Radar electrical power function,
(1) Mode selection and video displays, operation (WP024 00).
operation (WP011 00).
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
(WP026 00).
operation (WP014 00).

(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (3) RF power function, operation
(WP016 00). (WP028 00).

(4) Target acquisition, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP013 00). (WP030 00).

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP018 00). (WP031 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00).
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (This WP).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00).
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00).
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00).
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. BUILT-IN TEST.
4. The radar system built-in test (BIT) does failure
detection and failure isolation to a WRA without
the use of ground support equipment. BIT provides
the ability to determine the functional equipment
performance and to identify failed or degraded
modes. This is done in order to determine
operational readiness or the ability to complete a
mission.
5. BIT operates in a periodic mode (PBIT), an
initiated mode (BIT), or a combination of both
modes. PBIT operates automatically after
completion of the operational readiness test (ORT).
During PBIT, the BIT status is output to the
mission computer (MC) system. This WP contains a
description of PBIT, IBIT and ORT.
6. The radar maintenance BIT displays the
contents of the IBIT, PBIT, and ORT BIT
matrices, when selected from the multipurpose
display group. The failure displayed during
maintenance bit are reported to the MC by the
computer-power supply.
7. On F/A-18A AND F/A-18B, the MC assigns a
maintenance code to each failure and the
maintenance status display recording system stores
035 00
Page 2
the maintenance codes. On F/A-18C AND F/A-18D,
the MC assigns a maintenance code to each failure
and the flight incident recorder and monitoring
system stores the maintenance codes.
8. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
9. PERIODIC BIT. The PBIT evaluates the
operation of the radar equipment while operating in
the tactical modes. The PBIT tests do not interfere
with the operation of the radar. Three types of
PBIT tests are done. The three PBIT tests are
listed below:
a. event driven
b. scheduled
c. background.
10. Event driven tests report failures as they occur.
Scheduled tests are activated automatically at
software determined intervals. Background tests are
activated when the tactical program is momentarily
inactive.
11. PBIT test failures are recorded in the PBIT
matrix. To reduce the number of PBIT false alarms,
each test is equipped with a fault counter. The fault
counter for each failure must record a specific
number of failures of each test. Before a fail
condition is set in the PBIT matrix. The pass/fail
state of each test is reported each time the test is
run. If a pass state is recorded before a test reaches
its failure count, the fault counter is returned to no
failure report state.
12. PBIT test results are evaluated by a fault
isolation routine each time the PBIT matrix records
a failure. There is a two minute filter that requires
a continuous fail condition before a equipment
no-go is set. The results are then sent to the
mission computer.
13. Computer-Power Supply (CPS) PBIT. The CPS
PBIT tests are done in the background of the
current mode overlay; as air to air, air to ground, or
initiated BIT. The three exceptions to CPS PBIT
are listed below:
a. PBIT is not activated during track modes
b. PBIT is activated during IBIT
c. PBIT for the display mux and discrete
input/output tests are activated at the display.
A1-F18AC-742-100
14. CPS tests are scheduled in the order listed
below:
a. operating mode memory (OMM) and variable
memory checksum tests
b. scratchpad and notepad word test
c. discrete input/discrete output test
d. scratchpad/notepad block test
e. input/output controller (IOC) status monitor
test
f. micro-diagnostic test.
15. The OMM and variable memory tests are a
validity test of selected OMM and variable memory
files. The test is entered a number of times equal to
the entries in the selected file. When the test is
completed, the number of times the test was
entered is compared to the number of entries in the
file. If the sums agree the test is passed. If not, a
failure is indicated. Test results are sent to the
PBIT matrix. If the test passes, the next file is
tested. If the test fails, file selection never changes.
16. The scratchpad and notepad word test verifies
that each memory location can be written in or read
out of. Twelve locations are verified unless a failure
is located. Pass/fail results are reported to the PBIT
matrix.
17. The discrete input/discrete output tests two
discrete inputs for specific discrete output patterns.
This test is run one time only between display
synchs. The discrete input/discrete output test is
skipped if any overtemperature condition is
reported. Pass/fail results are reported to the PBIT
matrix.
18. The notepad is part of variable memory
containing frequently accessed parameters. The
scratchpad is part of the software providing variable
memory storage for the computer program. The
scratchpad/notepad block test verifies memory
addressing logic. For each entry to a logic routine a
different block of memory is tested. Pass/fail results
are reported to the PBIT matrix.
19. The IOC status monitor test monitors the
results of IOC firmware BIT. For each entry to the
test, results of the test are reported to the PBIT
matrix.
035 00
Page 3
20. The micro-diagnostic test verifies the operation
of the arithmetic and control function (A and C).
For each entry to the test one of the four firmware
tests listed below is run:
a. program counter and memory address
b. A and C constants
c. COMM and programmable read only memory
(PROM) checksum
d. A and C data paths.
Pass/fail results of the specific tests are followed by
the A and C micro-PROM parity test and reported
to the PBIT matrix.
21. Radar Target Data Processor PBIT. The Radar
Target Data Processor CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP)
periodic tests provide a way of detecting major
RTDP malfunctions, transients, or program
changes. The tests also make sure correct
RTDP/CPS interface operation exists. RTDP PBIT
is made up of two types of tests; scheduled tests
and event driven tests. Scheduled tests are RTDP
power valid, RTDP bulk memory parity error, and
RTDP mux reply. The event driven tests are RTDP
program memory parity error, RTDP process
synchg timing fails, RTDP display synch timing
fails, and CPS to RTDP transfer fail.
22. The RTDP power valid test monitors the state
of the RTDP power valid discrete. A false condition
(reset), indicates power is off. When the off
condition is first detected, terrain avoidance (TA)
fail is set in PBIT matrix, and a five second timer is
started. If the off condition remains for five
seconds, RTDP fail is reported to the PBIT matrix.
When PBIT matrix. When RTDP power is not
valid, the other scheduled tests are bypassed and
specific event driver tests do not report failures.
23. Bulk memory parity error is monitored. The
fault indication is set in the periodic test matrix if
the failure is indicated three or more consecutive
times.
24. The RTDP mux reply test compares the state
of the loop test bit received to the loop test bit
transmitted. The RTDP mux reply bit is actuated
at 131 millisecond intervals. Pass/fail results are
reported to the PBIT matrix.
25. The RTDP program memory parity error
discrete is monitored. The existence of this fault
A1-F18AC-742-100
requires that the program reload the RTDP. When
reloaded, the parity error fault indication is set to
the periodic test matrix. If three or more reloads
occur in a 5 second period, the parity error failure
indication is set into the periodic test matrix.
26. RTDP process synch timing fail test uses a
software timer to detect the absence of the process
synch. This failure is reported unless the RTDP
power valid bit is indicating an off condition. If the
RTDP can not produce the process synch, the
software simulates it until the RTDP can produce a
process synch.
27. The RTDP display synch timing fail test is the
same operation as the RTDP process synch timing
fail, paragraph 26.
28. The CPS to RTDP transfer fail indication is set
in the periodic test matrix when a data transfer
between the two is not completed.
29. The rest of the RTDP periodic testing is done
using the RTDP system calibrations and evaluating
the results.
30. Receiver-Exciter (R/E) PBIT. The Radar
Receiver-Exciter R-2089/APG-65 uses PBIT to
verify CPS and R/E interface operation and to
detect R/E failures. R/E PBIT tests are listed
below:
a. harmonic and offset phase loop lock test
b. mux test reply and mux test reply delayed
test
c. inphase and quadrature (I/Q) reference
detected test
d. transmitter drive power normal test
e. reference oscillator oven temperature test.
31. The harmonic and offset signals are tested if
there has not been a rf channel change within the
last five milliseconds. The harmonic phase loop lock
and the offset loop lock failures must occur three
times in 0.5 seconds before a fail is reported to the
PBIT matrix. Both tests are done at the system
process synch. If the radar system system is
operating in non-coherent frequency agility, the
offset phase loop lock signal is not tested.
32. The R/E tests are done at a one test per process
synch rate. Examples are listed below:
035 00
Page 4
a. first process synch - mux test and mux test
reply test
b. second process synch - I/Q reference detected
test
c. third process synch - transmitter drive power
normal test
d. fourth process synch - reference oscillator
oven temperature test
e. fifth process synch - the R/E PBIT cycle
starts again with the harmonic and phase loop lock
tests.
33. The mux test reply test verifies the operation of
the R-MUX bus between the CPS and R/E. The
test verifies that the test reply from the R/E is the
same as the mux loop test word sent to the R/E
from the CPS.
34. The mux test reply delayed is run on the same
process synch as the mux test reply. This test
repeats the state of the mux loop test after the R/E
is commanded to transmit over the R-MUX by the
RTDP. This test resolves test reply faults between
the R/E and the R-MUX execute command from
the RTDP. Pass/fail results are reported to the
PBIT matrix.
35. The I/Q reference detected test monitors the
I/Q reference detected signal to verify the presence
of either the VFO signal or 58.22 MHz reference
signal.
36. The transmitter drive power normal test is done
to verify that transmitter drive power level is
normal and exceeds a preset threshold in the R/E.
37. The reference oscillator oven temperature
normal bit is tested if three minutes has passed
since STBY or OPR was selected (transmitter timed
out).
38. The automatic gain control (agc) parity
response in the R/E is tested during the calibrations
when fixed agc levels are set. The calibrations also
verify the quality and level of the TD signal, the
receiver gain and level, and phase shifting ability.
39. Transmitter PBIT. The Radar Transmitter
T-1377/APG-65 built-in test is done in PBIT, IBIT
and ORT. The built-in test software program can
also cause transmitter recycling when some faults
A1-F18AC-742-100
are detected. The transmitter PBIT tests are done
in the order below:
a. The mux test verifies communication
between the transmitter and CPS. This is done by
testing the state of the mux test reply bit. The mux
test bit from the transmitter to the CPS should be
the same as the R-MUX loop test bit sent to the
transmitter from the CPS. If this test fails, all
remaining tests are bypassed. Results are sent to
the PBIT matrix.
b. If system calibrations are in progress, the
transmitter PBIT tests are bypassed.
c. Filament overvoltage is a status test and a
failure does not effect the transmitter operation.
d. The 58.22 MHz clock received bit is
monitored to make sure it is being received from
the R/E.
e. If the waveguide switch or antenna
pencil/mapping switch are being switched, the
remaining transmitter PBIT tests are bypassed.
f. Waveguide switch interlock test monitors the
interlock signal from the transmitter. If a fault
exists, transmitter operation stops. The waveguide
switch is then tested by switching from the flood
position, the dummy load position and the main
antenna position. The remaining tests are bypassed.
g. Antenna rf interlock is monitored to
determine if an antenna rf interlock exists. If so,
transmitter operation is stopped.
h. If standby mode has been selected, the
irrevocable fault flag and all fault bits that were set
previously during operate mode are reset. All
remaining tests will be bypassed.
i. If emergency mode has been selected, the
emergency activated bit is sent to the PBIT matrix
and all remaining tests will be bypassed.
j. If transmitter time out does not exist after
200 seconds of system time, the transmitter time
out fault is set in the PBIT matrix. The remaining
tests are bypassed if the transmitter time out fault
is set.
k. The flat leakage test is done after the
transmitter is in the operating mode. The flat
leakage signal indicates excessive rf at the output of
035 00
Page 5
the R/E. This does not change the receiver
operation. When the flat leakage signal is received,
the PBIT program sets the irrevocable transmitter
fault flag which in turn removes operate from the
transmitter. The only way to reset operate
command to the transmitter is to recycle the power
control switch to STBY and back to OPR. During
power recycling, the remaining tests are bypassed.
l. The transmitter high voltage arc bit is
monitored for faults. The fault may not occur more
than one time because of circuit damage from the
arc.
m. Transmitter fault tests. Transmitter faults
are divided into two types, type 1 faults and type 2
faults. Type 1 faults remove the triggers from the
grid modulator. Type 2 faults disable the high
voltage power supplies and the grid modulator.
When a transmitter fault is detected, an automatic
transmitter recycle is tried after 400 milliseconds. If
this recycle fails, a low voltage power supply recycle
is tried after another 400 milliseconds delay. If both
recycles fail to clear the transmitter fault, the PBIT
program waits 400 milliseconds and sets or resets
the signals listed below:
(1) operate - reset false
(2) transmitter fault - set true
(3) irrevocable transmitter fault - set true.
The faults listed above, with operator reset, cause
the transmitter fail, equipment no-go, and power
recycle request to be sent to the mission computer.
These indications are also reported to the PBIT
matrix.
n. The control electronics self-test ok bit is
tested if the transmitter fault bit is not set true. If
the control electronics self-test ok bit indicates a
fault, the transmitter recycle is tried. If the test
passes, the PBIT continues.
o. The transmitter gate received bit is tested to
make sure the transmitter gate is being received.
The radar system tactical program or the look
through command can disable the transmitter gate.
When the transmitter gate is disabled, the
transmitter PBIT tests remaining are bypassed.
p. The cathode undervoltage fault bit is set true
when cathode voltage is low for five seconds. The
remaining transmitter PBIT tests are bypassed if
this occurs.
A1-F18AC-742-100
q. If any of the signals below exist, the
transmitter tests are bypassed:
(1) antenna rf interlock - failed
(2) transmitter gate - not received
(3) transmitter gate pulse - less than 0.65
microseconds
(4) transmitter drive attenuation -
maximum.
r. The rf power degraded and rf power full bits,
monitor the transmitter rf power. A no rf power or
a degraded condition causes three saturation loops
to be initiated to restore full power. If this fails, the
conditions are reported to the PBIT matrix. During
air to ground modes, with coherent frequency
agility, channel 21 is commanded before the
saturation loops start. This prevents the transmitter
being overridden.
s. The weight on wheels (WOW)/inflight
disagree fault has a 15 second or more time delay
before a fault declaration to allow the signals to
stabilize when the aircraft is taking off or landing.
When a WOW/inflight disagree fault exists for
three tests in a row, operate is removed from the
transmitter. Operator remains off until the fault is
cleared. RF power is not monitored during this
fault.
t. The transmitter coolant flow low test is done
each 0.5 seconds after the radar system is on for 51
seconds. If a transmitter coolant flow low condition
is detected and emergency is not selected within 30
seconds, the CPS overtemperature discrete will
cause the low voltage power supply to shut down all
radar system power supplies which shuts down the
radar.
40. Antenna PBIT. An Antenna AS-3254/APG-65
failure is detected several consecutive times before
the failure is set in the periodic test matrix. This is
done to reduce the BIT false alarm. This test is
done at each display sync interval.
41. The test sequence starts with the R-mux
response. The CPS program compares the state of
the test reply bit received from the antenna to the
R-mux loop test bit sent to it during the previous
R-mux transmission. This test is toggled at intervals
so that both states are tested.
035 00
Page 6
42. This test is bypassed if the spoiled beam
configuration is not installed in the antenna. If
installed, the BIT pencil/map fail indication is
tested for a failure indication from the antenna.
When no failure is indicated, the pencil beam
executed bit is monitored to verify that the switch
drivers have responded correctly to the command
from the CPS.
43. The null horn switch circuit is tested. If the
BIT null horn operative signal is defective, the null
horn set or reset failure is set, depending on the
state of the null horn select command signal. The
test then monitors the BIT 5vdc signal.
44. The test monitors the state of the antenna
motor command. If it is set, the program verifies
that the motor enable relay is energized by
monitoring BIT 28vdc and the test continues.
45. If the BIT 28vdc is below the test threshold
(3.8VDC), either the motor enable relay has
energized or the aircraft 28vdc has momentarily
decreased. In either case the following sequence
occurs. A 28vdc drop out counter, started from zero,
is incremented. If the count does not exceed 60,
nothing else occurs until the antenna bit is entered
at the next display sync interval. If 60 consecutive
counts occur, the antenna motor enable counter
(another counter) is incremented, the antenna
recycle status bit is set, and the antenna motor
enable command is set to off.
46. The next time through, (if less than three
recycles have occurred within 60 seconds), the
program enables the antenna motor enable
command. If more than three recycles have occurred
within 60 seconds, the motors are not enabled and
an antenna motor enable failure is set into the BIT
matrix. If the BIT 28vdc exceeds the lower
threshold, the 28vdc drop out counter is zeroed and
the antenna recycle status bit is reset in the bit
matrix.
47. The azimuth and elevation A/D/A loops in the
antenna servo electronics are tested. The BIT az
and el rate/position commands are turned from the
antenna and compared to the az and el
rate/position commands previously sent to it. If the
two signals do not agree, a failure is set in the BIT
test matrix.
48. The BIT az/el stab loop monitor signal is
monitored if both the azimuth and elevation rate
modes have been selected. The BIT az motor and el
motor test signals are monitored and compared to
A1-F18AC-742-100
the BIT 28vdc level. If either fails, a failure is set in
the periodic test matrix to indicate a defective
motor amplifier or torque motor winding.
49. The next step is done when the antenna scan
pattern is changed. A verification is made that the
antenna-in-position (AIP) flag is set at the start of
the last selected scan.
50. When the antenna is in an air to air scan mode,
a test is done to verify that the antenna elevation
pointing angle agrees with the required elevation
position. If not, an el scan test failure is set in the
BIT test matrix.
51. The final test compares the measured frame
time of the azimuth scan pattern with the required
frame time. If the antenna fails to complete a frame
or if the frame time is excessive, a frame time
failure is set in the BIT test matrix.
52. Overtemperature PBIT. Overtemperature
indications are sent to the CPS from each WRA.
The PBIT monitors the indications and reports the
overtemperature fault to the PBIT matrix.
53. INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST. IBIT testing starts
with the self-tested CPS and tests other functions,
one at a time. When a function passes the test, it is
used to test the next function. IBIT is done when
the CPS receives the BIT start command from the
MC. The transmitter tests are done if OPR is
selected. Many of the PBIT tests are done during
the performance of the IBIT and ORT tests.
54. When BIT is completed, the stored failure data
is evaluated in terms of failed WRA’s and failed
modes. The failed WRA data, failed modes, and
several special indications are sent to the MC. If
BIT is restarted, the matrix is cleared and new data
is collected. The data from a bit run is held until
the next IBIT is started. All of the failure data
results in some maintenance indication.
55. When a WRA fails some of the tests, the failed
tests are classified as WRA critical or non-critical. A
critical failure is one which prevents other tests or
which prevents the WRA to be of use. If that
occurs, the remaining tests are bypassed. A
progression of the operation of the IBIT program is
shown in figure 1. This shows the sequence from the
application of power to the elevation and output of
the results.
035 00
Page 7
56. Computer-Power Supply IBIT. The CPS
contains the data processor and the low voltage
power supply (lvps). The CPS controls the complete
radar set and does the IBIT for it. The CPS
controls all communications with the MC.
57. The CPS is the first radar set component tested
during IBIT. It is used to test each consecutive
radar set component. If a CPS IBIT failure occurs,
no other tests are done.
58. The CPS IBIT detects and isolates failures in
the CPS. It also evaluates CPS performance and
indicates the readiness of the system before and
during flight. The CPS IBIT does not interfere with
the normal operation of the CPS related equipment.
Failure of BIT does not cause failure or degradation
of the CPS or related units.
59. The CPS IBIT is started by the MC. It does a
complete test of the CPS and may interrupt normal
operation. During the initiated tests, all outputs
from the CPS to the avionic and display units are
inhibited to prevent the transmission of data which
is not valid.
60. See figure 1. WITH COMPUTER-POWER
SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER
3525681-130 THRU 3525681-145, when radar power
is applied, the disc has one minute to get to normal
speed. If it does not, a 30 second shutdown
procedure starts. When this occurs, the radar
equipment ready discrete is set, but there is no
A-mux response. The CPS fault indication is set
and no degraded mode determination is possible.
This is true with a number of critical CPS failures.
If the disc gets to normal speed, the testing
continues.
61. See figure 1. WITH COMPUTER-POWER
SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PART NUMBER
3525681-150 AND LATER CONFIGURATIONS,
when radar power is applied, EEPROM memory is
loaded into operate mode memory. If it cannot be
loaded, a 30 second shutdown procedure starts.
When this occurs, the radar equipment ready
discrete is set, but there is no A-mux response. The
CPS fault indication is set and no degraded mode
determination is possible. This is true with a
number of critical CPS failures. If EEPROM is
loaded into operate mode memory, the testing
continues.
62. The CPS goes into the hardware/firmware
controlled self test after any of the below events:
A1-F18AC-742-100
a. power up (cold start).
b. recovery from a power transient or parity
error.
c. watchdog timer overflow.
d. software command to start IBIT.
63. When power to the CPS is first turned on (cold
start) or when IBIT is started, a hardware
controlled test called PROM scan is done. The
hardware tested by PROM scan is designated the
hardcore. If the test is passed, simple microroutines
can be completed with confidence.
64. Radar Target Data Processor IBIT. The RTDP
is a high speed, software programmed, digital
machine. It does radar signal processing with speed,
flexibility, and efficiency. The two main inputs are
digitized radar video from the R/E and command
data from the CPS. The two main outputs are
analog display information and digital target
information.
65. The RTDP is the second radar set component
tested during IBIT. The RTDP programs are
loaded from the CPS. The RDTP is tested by
loading it with test data and programs, and having
it process the test data. The CPS receives the
results and evaluates them for correct RTDP
operation. The R-mux between the CPS, RTDP,
and the radar set is tested to verify the RTDP’s
ability to receive data and control other radar set
components.
66. See figure 1. The RTDP power status is tested
and an allowance for RTDP recycles is made. If this
test fails, all remaining tests are bypassed. The 58
MHz clock in the RTDP is tested. If it is good, the
RTDP test is continued. If the 58 MHz is not there,
the remaining RTDP tests are bypassed.
67. The RTDP self-test is done next. After that,
the RTDP is tested for critical failures. If a failure
is indicated, all remaining tests are bypassed. When
no failure is indicated, the testing is continued.
68. Antenna IBIT. The servo electronics is made up
of antenna based digital and analog circuitry. The
servo electronics and the CPS position, stabilize,
and electronically drive the azimuth and elevation
antenna gimbals. The operation of the azimuth and
elevation servos is the same. Each servo channel
operates in either a position loop mode or a rate
mode.
035 00
Page 8
69. See figure 1. The antenna IBIT tests are done
at power up and when IBIT is initiated. The
antenna IBIT tests follow the CPS and RTDP
self-tests and occur about 2 minutes after radar
turn-on.
70. Antenna IBIT detects and isolates failures to a
WRA. Parts of the IBIT tests add to the IBIT tests
by operating in the background level during the
IBIT tests.
71. Antenna IBIT tests are completed in sequence.
If a failure is detected that would prevent other
evaluation of the antenna servo, the normal flow of
tests is stopped.
72. Receiver-Exciter IBIT. The R/E is the third
radar set component tested during IBIT. The R/E
provides the radio frequency drive to the
transmitter and does the receiver functions listed
below:
a. receives two radio frequency channels from
the antenna.
b. does intermediate frequency (if) and analog
signal processing.
c. does analog-to-digital (a/d) conversion.
73. The R/E IBIT uses signals produced from the
transmitter drive and applied to the antenna. In the
antenna, the transmitter drive is split in two
channels and applied to the receiver of the R/E.
The R/E processes the test signals and the results
are evaluated by the CPS and RTDP.
74. The R/E IBIT tests are grouped to test a
specific function. The sequence of the tests is
grouped to provide information for fault isolation in
the R/E. This gives an indication which function
(not module) failed.
75. See figure 1. When the 58 MHz reference signal
in the RTDP is missing, only the first part of the
R/E test is done. This tests the R/E R-mux and the
reference oscillator detect signal from the R/E. Also,
the transmitter R-mux and the transmitter 58 MHz
detect signal are tested. The test is stopped when
the data evaluation is completed.
76. The calibrations are done three times during
the R/E IBIT. All the conditions for the
calibrations, except the zero range calibration, are
predetermined. The zero range is done at the pulse
width and video bandwidth of the selected mode.
A1-F18AC-742-100
77. Transmitter IBIT. The transmitter provides the
required X-band power for all radar modes. It also
provides the duplexing functions. The transmitter is
equipped with circuits to protect it from internal
malfunctions and external failures that effect
operation. Also, it contains a receiver protection
circuit. Status indications are sent to the CPS for
BIT evaluation and for transmitter recycling.
78. The transmitter is tested by turning it on and
having it radiate in a dummy load during BIT. The
transmitter tests are not done if failures are
detected in the CPS, RTDP, or R/E which
adversely affects operation of the transmitter.
79. See figure 1. The first IBIT tests made on the
transmitter are the transmitter logic tests. The
transmitter is monitored next to make sure that the
operate mode is set and the transmitter has timed
out. If these tests are true, the testing continues.
80. OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST. The ORT
tests are similar to the IBIT tests. They are done at
the times listed below:
a. system turn-on (cold start) when the
transmitter time out is not set.
b. true power valid signal from the CPS.
c. watch dog overflow of real time clock.
81. If a failure is detected, the failures are cleared
at the end of the tests. Then, the tests are repeated
when system time equals two minutes. If no failures
are detected the first time through, the program
idles until the transmitter times out (TTO) at
approximately 200 seconds. If OPR is selected at
TTO, the transmitter test is done. If OPR is not
set, the program returns to a tactical mode.
82. Missile tuning is done by the tactical program
at the end of the transmitter test. If the transmitter
test is bypassed, missile tuning is done when OPR
is first selected after TTO.
83. Radar Display Relay Mode. The radar display
relay mode displays the contents of the BIT
matrices and the results of BIT fault isolation to
the operator. All relay mode display coordinates and
BIT matrix results are relayed to the mission
computer for display. Relay mode is only available
on the ground. See WP041 00, Maintenance BIT
Mode Operation, for more information.
035 00
Page 9
84. Missile Retune Test. Missile retune is an
avionic system test to simulate AIM-7 missile
support to be sure that the system can support an
AIM-7 launch. Missile retune can be performed
only when PBIT indicates that the correct
conditions exist.
85. Missile retune is started when the mission
computer sends the tune request command to the
radar. With the below conditions, a tune available
command is set:
a. radar not in track mode
b. high voltage command
c. transmitter gate pulse received
d. transmitter fault not set
e. radar not in IBIT or flood
f. rf power full
g. AMRAAM not tuning.
86. When the tune available command to the MC is
set, the radar does the following
a. sets the waveguide switch to the dummy load
position.
b. commands a mid-band AIM-7 compatible RF
channel.
c. positions the antenna to 0 degrees in azimuth
and elevation.
d. enables transmitter operation with a PDI
timeline.
e. executes a 2.5 second rf power test.
87. If no rf power has been detected after the 2.5
second rf power test, a missile tune abort fail is set
and the test is terminated. The radar is then
returned to the command mode. If rf has been
detected after the 2.5 second rf power test, the PDI
ON signal is sent to tell the MC that the radar is
supplying enough rf power to support an AIM-7
launch. The radar continues to output rf in the PDI
waveform for 7 seconds. After 7 seconds, the PDI
ON signal is reset and a test made to determine if a
missile launch interrupt command was received by
the radar while the PDI ON signal was set. If no
A1-F18AC-742-100
missile launch interrupt occurred a missile launch
initiate fail signal is sent to the MC. The radar is
then returned to the mode commanded by the MC.
88. If a mode change is made by the operator
during the test, the test is aborted without setting a
BIT fault.
89. AIM-120 Data Link Test. The AIM-120 data
link (D/L) test is used to simulate AIM-120 missile
support. The radar, stores management set (SMS),
and the mission computer (MC) are used in the test
to be sure that the system is able to provide
AIM-120 support. The D/L test will be performed
only when PBIT indicates that the correct
conditions exist.
90. A data link test is started when the MC sets the
D/L test command and the D/L test available signal
exists. The D/L test available signal exists when the
radar switch is in OPR or EMERG, transmitter is
timed out, and none of the below exist:
a. track mode
b. BIT in progress
c. EMCON command
d. flood
e. PDI on
f. missile tune
g. tranmitter fault.
91. The radar first does a D/L rf power test to
make sure that the radar can make enough rf power
to support the AIM-120 missile. The rf power test is
performed differently depending on the rf manual
command from the MC.
035 00
Page 10
92. If rf manual is commanded, the rf channel
commanded by the MC will be selected and the rf
power status from the transmitter will be monitored
for 2.5 seconds. If no rf power is produced by the
transmitter for more than 5 percent of the
monitoring period, the bit matrix receives a D/L
test abort fail signal and the test will be aborted.
93. If the MC does not command rf manual, each of
the eight AIM-120 compatible rf channels is
selected and the rf power status is monitored. If no
rf power is indicated by the transmitter for an rf
channel, the BIT matrix receives a no rf power
signal and a rf channel fail signal. If all AIM-120
compatible rf channels fail the BIT matrix receives
a D/L test abort signal and the missile launch
initiate fail signal is sent to the MC.
94. If D/L rf power is detected during the rf power
test, the missile interface test will be performed.
The MC receives the D/L in test signal and an rf
channel is selected for the remainder of the test. If
rf manual is commanded, the same channel used in
the rf power test will be used. If an auto channel set
is selected, the correct D/L channel for that set will
be used. The radar then monitors for the SMS
generated missile launch interrupt. After receiving
the missile launch interrupt, the radar will provide
simulated D/L support. D/L support will continue
until the MC removes the D/L test request or the
30 second test period expires. If the 30 second test
period expires, the D/L in test signal will be reset.
A BIT fault will not be set in the BIT matrix if the
test is aborted prematurely. The BIT matrix will
receive an AIM-120 launch initiate fail and the
radar will return to the mode commanded by the
MC if no missile launch interrupt occured while the
D/L in test signal was set.
A1-F18AC-742-100 035 00
Page 11

Figure 1. Radar Initiated BIT Progression (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 035 00
Page 12

LEGEND
1
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PN 3525681-130, 3525681-135,
3525681-140, OR 3525681-145 INSTALLED.

2
Ñ WITH COMPUTER-POWER SUPPLY CP-1325/APG-65 PN 3525681-150 OR 3525681-155 IN-
STALLED.

Figure 1. Radar Initiated BIT Progression (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 036 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MODE DEPENDENT SIGNAL PROCESSING

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator ................................................................................................. WP004 00
Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematics ............................................. WP037 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Mode Dependent Signal Processing ......................................................................................................... 2
Processing Functions .......................................................................................................................... 2
RTDP Operating Modes .................................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
set is required refer to the work packages listed
below: c. Functional operation

a. Sequence of operation (1) Radar set electrical power function,

operation (WP024 00).
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00). (2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00). (3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00).
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation (4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP016 00). (WP030 00).
(4) Target acquisition, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP013 00). (WP031 00).

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (6) Data processing function, operation
(WP018 00). (WP032 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (This WP).
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00).
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT mode, operation
(WP041 00).
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3.MODE DEPENDENT SIGNAL
PROCESSING.
4. This WP contains descriptions of the Radar
Target Data Processor CP-1326/APG-65 (RTDP)
signal processing functions. The functions are listed
by operating mode.
5. Refer to WP037 00 for signal processing function
simplified schematics.
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. RTDP OPERATING MODES. The major RTDP
operating modes are:
a. medium pulse repetition frequency (MPRF)
search.
b. medium prf look up (MPRFLU) search
mode.
c. low/medium prf air combat maneuvering
(L/MPRF ACM) mode.
d. high prf velocity search (HPRF VS) mode.
e. high prf range-while-search (HPRF RWS)
mode.
f. medium/low prf (M/LPRF) track mode.
g. high prf (HPRF) track mode.
036 00
Page 2
h. raid assessment mode (RAID).
i. short range track (SRT) mode.
j. real beam ground map (RBGM).
k. doppler beam sharpened (DBS) mode.
l. ground moving target indication (GMTI)
mode.
m. ground moving target track (GMTT) mode.
n. air to ground ranging/precision velocity
update (AGR/PVU) mode.
o. sea surface search (SEA) mode.
p. ground moving target acquisition (GMTA)
mode.
q. fixed target acquisition (FTA) mode.
r. fixed target track (FTT) mode.
8. If a detailed description of RTDP operating
modes is required, refer to operation - data
processing function WP032 00.
9. PROCESSING FUNCTIONS. See signal
processing function simplified schematics
WP037 00. The mode dependent processing
functions of the RTDP process digital receiver data
(in-phase and quadrature data) to produce target
discriminate data for tracking and display. This
data is output to the Computer-Power Supply
CP-1325/APG-65 (CPS) for data processing and
display formatting. RTDP signal processing is
controlled by CPS processing instructions from the
computer-power supply.
10. The signal processing function also provides
control for the Radar Receiver-Exciter
R-2089/APG-65 (R/E). This includes gain, timing
and control, analog to digital, and phase shifter
commands.
11. In-phase and quadrature (I/Q) data from the
main and guard channels in the receiver are input
to bulk memory. Bulk memory provides initial
buffering and processing the data into channels.
Using the schematics, channel outputs are sent to
the signal processing functions which have their
applicable RTDP modes shown. This allows any
function by mode to be traced through all
A1-F18AC-742-100
processing required before outputting as track and
display data.
12. Timing and Control Function (All Modes).
This function in the RTDP processing is done by
special logic circuits that operate in true time and
have tight tolerance requirements. Timing for
internal RTDP processing is provided by a
self-contained 7.15 MHz clock.
13. The timing and control (T & C) produces clock
and control signals to synchronize the operation of
the radar system. This includes the control of
processes internal to the RTDP and the control and
timing for other units of the radar system.
14. Bulk Memory Storage Function (FTT, M/LPRF
TRACK, HPRF TRACK, SRT AND GMTT Modes).
This function receives track 1 and track 2 antenna
pattern data from the analog-to-digital (a/d)
converter for temporary storage. This function also
stores intermediate processing results, program
instructions, coefficients, constants, and hard coded
numerics as required by the processing functions.
The bulk memory storage function provides
buffering of input data.
15. Bulk Memory Storage Function (SEA, MPRF
SEARCH, MPRFLU, FTA, HPRF RWS, HPRF VS,
L/MPRF ACM, AND RAID Modes). This function
receives main and guard channel data from the a/d
converter for temporary storage. This function also
stores the intermediate processing results, program
instructions, coefficients, constants, and hard coded
numerics as required by the processing functions.
The bulk memory storage function provides
buffering of input data.
16. Bulk Memory Storage Function (GMTI Mode).
This function receives input data for a single
channel from the a/d converter for temporary
storage. The bulk memory also stores intermediate
processing results, program instructions,
coefficients, constants, and hard coded numerics as
required by the processing functions. This function
provides buffering of input data.
17. Bulk Memory Storage Function (GMTA, DBS,
AND RBGM Modes). This function receives input
data from the a/d converter for temporary storage.
This function provides buffering between the a/d
converter and the RTDP. The bulk memory stores
intermediate processing results, program
instructions, coefficients, constants, and hard coded
numerics as required by the processing functions.
036 00
Page 3
18. Bulk Memory Storage Function (AGR/PVU
Mode). This function receives I/Q data for main
and guard (main channel only for doppler frequency
acquisition submode) or track 1 and track 2
channels from the a/d converter. The data is put in
temporary storage.
19. The bulk memory functions as a buffer between
the a/d converter and the RTDP. This function also
stores intermediate processing results, program
instructions, coefficients, constants, and hard coded
numerics as required by the processing functions.
20. Gain Control Function (FTA, GMTA, FTT,
MPRF SEARCH, GMTI, SEA, MPRFLU, L/MPRF
ACM, SRT, RAID, HPRF TRACK, HPRF HPRF,
M/LPRF TRACK, HPRF VS, AND GMTT Modes).
This function samples arriving new data and adjusts
the receiver gain to prevent strong signals from
saturating the a/d converter. It also maintains
detection sensitivity to weak target signals. The
gain control function controls gain settings of the
step attenuators in the receiver and the
intermediate frequency (if) analog amplifiers that
come before the phase coherent detectors.
21. Gain Control Function (AGR/PVU Mode).
This function controls gain settings of the 15dB
step attenuators in the receiver and the i f analog
amplifiers. Range acquisition processing uses a
multi-sample gain control with a range bin varying
sensitivity time control (STC) curve, driven by
maximum values across the sweep.
22. Processing for the other submodes uses peak
value gain control, driven by sample sizes in the
submode range bins. The monopulse tracking
submodes also include the CPS in the gain control
sequence so that the correct channel phasing
adjustments can be commanded.
23. Gain Control Function (DBS and RBGM
Modes). This function adjusts the receiver gain to
reduce saturation in the a/d converter. Sensitivity
to weak gain clutter signals is maintained. This
adjustment varies with range and uses sensitivity
time control (STC).
24. Main Amplitude Weighting, Data Turning, and
Fast Fourier Transform Function (L/MPRF ACM,
MPRF SEARCH, and MPRFLU Modes). This
function processes the new data samples by
providing amplitude weighting across the pulses.
This allows the output of the fast Fourier transform
to have a peak main lobe to peak side lobe of 75dB.
A1-F18AC-742-100
25. The ratio has the effect of reducing the residual
main lobe clutter interference in the target signal
region. It increases the peak lobe width to match
the thinning effect of data turning. This function
reduces the amount of clutter return mixed with a
target return and allows velocity resolution by doing
a frequency test of the input data.
26. Main Amplitude Weighting, Data Turning, and
Fast Fourier Transform Function (HPRF RWS and
HPRF VS Modes). This function does a frequency
sampling of the input data. This reduces the
amount of clutter return contrasting with a target.
The fast Fourier transform is used in this sampling
to satisfy time restrictions. Amplitude weighting is
done by multiplying each sample, for a given range,
by a conforming coefficient.
27. Guard Amplitude Weighting, Data Turning and
Fast Fourier Transform Function (MPRFLU, MPRF
SEARCH, and L/MPRF ACM Modes). This
function processes the new data samples by
providing amplitude weighting across the pulses.
28. The guard channel weighting increases the main
lobe characteristic of the guard doppler filters until
it overlaps three of the main channel doppler filters.
The guard amplitude weighting, data turning, and
fast Fourier transform function reduces the amount
of clutter return by doing a frequency test of the
input data.
29. Guard Amplitude Weighting, Data Turning,
and Fast Fourier Transform Function (HPRF RWS
and HPRF VS Modes). This function samples the
frequency of the input data. This reduces the
amount of clutter return contrasting with a target.
The fast Fourier transform is used in this sampling
to meet time limits. Amplitude weighting is done by
multiplying each sample, for a given range, by a
conforming coefficient.
30. Power Detection Function (L/MPRF ACM and
MPRF SEARCH Modes). This function samples the
main amplitude weighting, data turning, and fast
Fourier transform for clutter power centroiding.
31. Power Detection Function (GMTT, M/LPRF
TRACK, and SRT Modes). This function computes
an estimate of the main lobe clutter for use by the
clutter doppler error function.
32. Power Detection Function (GMTI and GMTA
Modes). This function detects the main channel
I/Q samples for range bins and doppler filters.
036 00
Page 4
33. Clutter Doppler Error Function (GMTA,
L/MPRF ACM, MPRF SEARCH and GMTI Modes).
This function makes an error estimate of main lobe
clutter position by computing amounts which
determines the clutter power centroid frequency.
The error estimate is formed by computing the
clutter power centroid around the expected position
of main lobe clutter.
34. Clutter Doppler Error Function (HPRF TRACK
Mode). This function forms the sum of the main
lobe clutter power and the clutter first moment.
This data is used by the CPS to update the main
lobe clutter frequency estimate. The frequency
estimate is used to position clutter when the notch
filter is used and may be used to follow clutter
when the passband filter is used.
35. Clutter Doppler Error Function (GMTT, SRT,
and M/LPRF TRACK Modes). This function
computes the sum of the main lobe clutter power
for output to the CPS. This function is bypassed if
the mode is LPRF track.
36. Magnitude Detection Function (DBS Mode).
This function converts the I/Q samples to
amplitude. This function is done so that the
multi-look overlay processing and the output scaling
processing can be completed.
37. Magnitude Detection Function (GMTA Mode).
This function computes the size for the main and
guard channels filter data.
38. Magnitude Detection Function (GMTI Mode).
This function computes the size for each
range/doppler cell in the main lobe clutter free
region.
39. Magnitude Detection Function (RAID Mode).
This function does size detection across the input
sum channel data when in a signal processing
operation. There is no size conversion for the
difference channel data.
40. Magnitude Detection Function (L/MPRF ACM
Mode). This function does size detection in MPRF
phases. This function samples the main and guard
channels in LPRF phases for short range track.
41. Main Channel Noise Estimate Function (MPRF
SEARCH, HPRF VS, HPRF RWS, MPRFLU, L/MPRF
ACM, and GMTA Modes). This function computes
a background noise estimate for each of the main
channel range/doppler cells. The noise estimates are
used to form detection thresholds.
A1-F18AC-742-100
42. Main Channel Noise Estimate Function (FTA
Mode). This function computes a background
noise estimate for the processed range/doppler
detection cells. The CPS commands tilt or no tilt
for the noise estimates.
43. Main Channel Noise Estimate Function (SEA
Mode). This function computes a background
noise estimate for the main channel. This estimate
is used in determining the detection thresholds.
44. Guard Channel Noise Estimate Function (FTA
Mode). This function computes a background
noise estimate for the processed range/doppler
detection cells. The CPS will command tilt or no
tilt for the noise estimates.
45. Guard Channel Noise Estimate Function
(HPRF VS, HPRF RWS, SEA, and GMTA Modes).
This function computes a noise estimate for the
guard channel.
46. Guard Channel Noise Estimate Function
(MPRFLU, MPRF SEARCH, and L/MPRF ACM
Modes). This function computes a background
noise estimate for each guard channel range/doppler
cell in the processed region agreeing with a main
channel range/doppler cell.
47. Main/Guard Ratio Logic Function (FTA and
GMTA Modes). This function uses thresholding to
compute the ratio of the main channel sizes to the
guard channel sizes. The result of this detection
process is to reject hits in the antenna side lobes.
48. Main/Guard Ratio Logic Function (SEA Mode).
This function compares the main channel size to
the product of the guard channel size and a
threshold multiplier. The comparison is done only
for those range bins which contain expected hits
from the main channel thresholding function. The
results of using the main/guard ratio function in the
detection process is to reject hits in the antenna
side lobes.
49. Main/Guard Ratio Logic Function (MPRFLU,
HPRF VS, MPRF SEARCH, L/MPRF ACM, and
HPRF RWS Modes). This function compares the
main channel hit size to the guard channel hit size.
This allows detection of main channel hits in the
antenna main beam.
50. Main Channel Thresholding Function
(L/MPRF ACM, MPRFLU, and MPRF SEARCH
Modes). This function does amplitude
thresholdings for signal/noise on main channel data.
036 00
Page 5
Passing the threshold test indicates the existence of
valid targets.
51. Main Channel Thresholding Function (HPRF
VS and HPRF RWS Modes). This function does hit
determination for main channel data. The hit
determination contains the amplitude ratio of two
times the main channel size data to its respective
noise estimate multiplied by a threshold multiplier.
52. Main Channel Thresholding Function (FTA
and GMTA Modes). This function does amplitude
thresholding on main channel data. Thresholding is
done by comparing two times the signal amplitude
of each range/doppler cell in the clutter free region
to the product of its related noise estimate and
one-half of the threshold multiplier.
53. Main Channel Thresholding Function (GMTI
and SEA Modes). This function does amplitude
thresholding on main channel data. There are three
separate threshold settings applied. One threshold
is used for target hit/miss detection. The other two
thresholds are used to form hit counts for use in the
false alarm control loop.
54. Guard Channel Thresholding Function (SEA
Mode). This function does amplitude thresholding
on guard channel data. Two thresholds are applied
for each range bin with a main hit. The results are
used to reduce side lobes in the hit/miss logic
function.
55. Guard Channel Thresholding Function (MPRF
SEARCH, MPRFLU, GMTA, HPRF RWS, HPRF VS,
FTA, and L/MPRF ACM Modes). This function
does two types of amplitude thresholdings on guard
channel data.
56. The first type of amplitude thresholding is done
by comparing two times the guard channel signal
amplitude to the product of its related noise
estimate and one-half the guard threshold
multiplier. The second type of thresholding is done
by comparing the guard channel signal amplitude to
a high fixed value for cells related to main channel
hits.
57. Hit/Miss Logic Function (FTA Mode). This
function tests main channel hits for conforming hits
in the guard channel. Main channel hits having no
conforming guard channel hits in the same
range/doppler cell are declared valid hits.
A1-F18AC-742-100
58. Hit/Miss Logic Function (HPRF RWS and
HPRF VS Modes). This function determines the
validity of main channel hits that exceed the main
channel threshold.
59. Hit/Miss Logic Function (SEA and GMTA
Modes). This function tests new main channel hits
for validity. Up to this point the new hits have
exceeded some amplitude threshold relative to their
noise estimate. This function removes hits that are
not returns from the antenna main lobe.
60. Hit/Miss Logic Function (MPRFLU, MPRF
SEARCH, and L/MPRF ACM Modes). This
function does two operations for MPRF phases. The
first operation deletes hits that result from the
detection of ground moving targets (except
MPRFLU mode). The second operation deletes hits
that are not from the antenna main lobe.
61. Range and Velocity Centroiding Function
(L/MPRF ACM, MPRFLU, and MPRF SEARCH
Modes). This function centers the output of the
hit/miss logic function in range to delete multiple
hits from a single target. A sequence of decisions is
made to keep the locations of peak response for a
strong target.
62. Range Resolving Function (HPRF RWS Mode).
This function uses a set of three frequencies to
correlate range for a single target.
63. Range Resolving Function (MPRF SEARCH,
MPRFLU, and L/MPRF ACM Modes). This
function uses a multiple prf detection plan to
determine true range to target from false range
measurements. The range resolving function
determines range foldover. When there is no
foldover the range to the target is a true range.
64. Velocity Resolving Function (MPRFLU, MPRF
SEARCH, and L/MPRF ACM Modes). This
function uses a set of false doppler frequency
measurements from three or four different pulse
repetition frequencies (prf)’s determine the true
frequency of a range resolved target.
65. Phase Correction Computation Function (DBS
Mode). This function computes a phase rotation
that is applied to the input data. The phase
rotation is computed from CPS data and is used to
produce complex weighting factors for use in the
presum filter.
66. Presum Filtering Function (DBS Mode). This
function reduces the volume of data which must be
036 00
Page 6
stored in bulk memory. This is done with no
reduction in the signal-to-noise ratio. The presum
filtering function also selects the part of the clutter
spectrum that will be processed further.
67. Power Detection and Clutter Doppler Error
Function (HPRF VS and HPRF RWS Modes). This
function does power measurements. This function
gives an estimate of the CPS main lobe clutter
frequency error.
68. Pulse Compression and Magnitude Detection
Function (MPRF SEARCH and MPRFLU Modes).
This function does pulse compression followed by
size detection of main and guard channel samples.
69. Signal Bandpass Control Function (HPRF RWS
and HPRF VS Modes). This function processes the
radar signal inputs to the RTDP main channel. The
first stage of digital processing rejects ground
clutter and passes the band of frequencies in the
doppler clear region. The total bandpass of the
filters is controlled by the coefficients from the
CPS.
70. Amplitude Weighting and Fast Fourier
Transform Function (RAID, M/LPRF TRACK, SRT,
and FTA Modes). This function does amplitude
weighting on the data samples during signal
processing periods. Amplitude weighting is done
before processing by the fast Fourier transform to
reduce the peak side lobe level of the filters. The
fast Fourier transform changes the time sequenced
samples to frequency samples.
71. Amplitude Weighting and Fast Fourier
Transform Function (DBS Mode). This function
weights the clutter data and forms doppler filters.
The amplitude weighted, presumed samples in each
of the range bins is transformed by the fast Fourier
transform to doppler frequency samples.
72. Amplitude Weighting and Fast Fourier
Transform Function (AGR/PVU Mode). This
function amplitude weights the input data to get
the required filter frequency characteristics in the
fast Fourier transform. The fast Fourier transform
divides the signal spectrum in 32 doppler filters.
73. Magnitude Detection and Post Detection
Integration Function (SEA and RBGM Modes).
This function inspects the size of the range bin
data. This function also noncoherently integrates
the new range bin outputs with frequency agility to
reduce amplitude variation of discrete targets.
A1-F18AC-742-100
74. Magnitude Detection and Post Detection
Integration Function (FTA Mode). This function
does size detection on the filter data. If the prf is
low this function does a 2 to 1 post detection
integration (PDI) of the size data from 2
consecutive blocks of eight pulse repetition intervals
(pri) each. There is no PDI done when the
operating prf is high.
75. Pulse Compression Function (RAID Mode).
This function does pulse compression to convert the
72 range bins of I/Q data to 60 compressed range
bins, when in a signal processing operation. A range
bin renumbering system occurs in this function.
76. Pulse Compression Function (DBS Mode).
This function is made up of doppler compensation
followed by ripple suppression. When pulse
compression is completed the range bin samples are
processed by the ripple suppression filter.
77. Pulse Compression Function (SEA Mode).
This function uses a 13:1 Barker code pulse
compression to get enough signal level. This is done
while operating within the transmitters peak power
restraints.
78. Pulse Compression Function (RBGM Mode).
This function does pulse compression to get enough
signal level and still operate in the transmitters
peak power limits. A ripple suppression method is
used to reduce the pulse compression side lobes.
Pulse compression and ripple suppression are not
used in the 5 nautical mile range. The input
samples are not changed by the pulse compression
function when the radar is in short pulse operation.
79. Pulse Compression Function (M/LPRF TRACK
Mode). This function compresses the phase coded
data along the range dimension. This function is
bypassed when the system is operating in short
pulse.
80. Pulse Compression Function (GMTT, GMTI,
FTT, FTA, and GMTA Modes). This function does
a 13:1 Barker code pulse compression. This is
required when the pulse compression/short pulse
command equals one. A range bin numbering
change is also done in this function.
81. Pulse Compression Function (AGR/PVU
Mode). This function has doppler compensation
followed by a standard 13:1 pulse compression with
ripple suppression. Under some conditions, pulse
compression is commanded off by the CPS and this
function is bypassed.
036 00
Page 7
82. Data Unpacking Function (AGR/PVU Mode).
This function transforms 6-bit data from the
packed format used for bulk memory storage to a
format usable as 12-bit words for processing. This
function is used for the tracking submodes but is
bypassed for the acquisition submodes.
83. Gain/Phase Calibration Function (SRT Mode).
This function operates during the noncoherent
LPRF cycles to delete the uncertainty in phase and
gain between the two track channels. This function
is bypassed during MPRF cycles. The transmitted
frequency is changed noncoherently each three pri.
84. Display Formatting and Buffer Update
Function (SEA and GMTA Modes). This function
formats valid main channel hits from the hit/miss
logic function for display. This removes hits from
previous phases before the existing hits are
displayed. A display indication of antenna position
is provided.
85. Display Formatting and Buffer Update
Function (GMTI Mode). This function formats
ground moving target hits from the velocity collapse
function for display. A display indication of antenna
position is provided when this mode is interleaved
with real beam ground map. This function also
removes hits from previous phases before the
existing hits are displayed.
86. Bin-To-Bin Digital Variable Frequency
Oscillator Function (FTT Mode). This function
shifts the frequency of the input data. The
frequency of the tracked target doppler is shifted to
dc on a range bin-to-range bin basis. The data is
phase rotated across the bins. This function
frequency shifts the input data to reduce the signal
loss from pulse compression processing.
87. Bin-To-Bin Digital Variable Frequency
Oscillator Function (GMTI, GMTT, and GMTA
Modes). This function shifts the frequency of the
input data. This is done so that the frequency of
main lobe clutter is shifted to DC. The input data is
phase rotated across the range bins.
88. Complex Filter Weight Function (DBS Mode).
This function receives phase rotation from the
phase correction computation function. The
complex filter weight function produces a set of
complex weights for use in the presum filter
processing.
A1-F18AC-742-100
89. Display Intensity Scaling and Storage
Function (RBGM Mode). This function measures
the sizes of the range bin samples to separate
intensity levels conforming to eight shades of grey
on the display.
90. Frequency Shift Function (AGR/PVU Mode).
This function shifts the frequency of the input main
lobe clutter data to the value required by the CPS.
In most cases, the required value is dc.
91. Digital Variable Frequency Oscillator Function
(FTT Mode). This function positions the tracked
target doppler in the middle of two doppler filters.
The target doppler frequency from both track
channels is shifted by the same amount.
92. Digital Variable Frequency Oscillator Function
(HPRF TRACK Mode). This function positions the
tracked doppler frequency on the main lobe clutter
frequency at some required point in the prf interval.
The doppler frequencies from both track channels
and both range samples or both even and odd
samples are shifted the same amount.
93. Amplitude Weighting, Data Turning, and Fast
Fourier Transform Function (GMTI, GMTA and
GMTT Modes). This function processes the input
data samples by providing amplitude weighting
across the pulses.
94. This is done to give the output of the fast
Fourier transform a peak main lobe to peak side
lobe ratio of approximately 45 to 50dB. The ratio
reduces residual main lobe clutter interference in
the target signal region. This function reduces the
amount of clutter return competing with a target
return.
95. Main Channel Magnitude Detection Function
(HPRF RWS Mode). This function converts I/Q
samples to amplitude. This allows the main channel
thresholding and the hit/miss logic to be done. The
sample size is computed in the processed target
region for better target signal detection.
96. Long Ensemble Average Function (RAID
Mode). This function computes a long ensemble
average from 256 sum channel sizes. The CPS
commands the filters to be used for this function.
97. Vector Combination, Signal Magnitude, Noise
Magnitude, and Partial Discriminants Function
(M/LPRF TRACK Mode). This function computes
the sum and difference signal vectors for the data
036 00
Page 8
output function. These vectors are processed by
CPS commands to develop partial discriminants
quantities. This function also computes signal and
noise sums and sends the results to the CPS.
98. Resequencing Function (GMTI and GMTA
Modes). This function resequences the filter
indexes of the main channel signal sizes. The filter
index zero designates the main lobe clutter filter at
boresight range.
99. Range Dependent Phase Increment Function
(DBS Mode). This function processes platform and
geometry data and sends it to the CPS. This range
dependent compensation is needed to allow for the
effects of isodoppler curvature and aircraft
acceleration.
100. Resampling Filter Function (HPRF TRACK
Mode). This function processes the input data
through a 32 sample impulse response filter. The
sample rate is reduced by a factor of 8 to 1 when
the CPS commands a notch filter. This function is
bypassed when the passband filter is commanded
by the CPS.
101. MPRF Vector Combination, Signal
Magnitude, Noise Magnitude, and Partial
Discriminants Function. (SRT Mode). This
function computes the sum and difference vectors
for the data output function. These vectors are
processed as commanded by the CPS to develop
various partial discriminant quantities.
102. Track 1, Track 2 TO Sum, Difference
Conversion Function (AGR/PVU Mode). This
function combines the track 1 and track 2 data to
form the complex antenna sum and difference
pattern vectors. The calibration adjustment vectors
from the CPS includes adjustments for gain
imbalances and differential phase shifts.
103. Large Ensemble Average Parameters
Function (GMTA Mode). This function determines
a set of parameters that define the region and
adjustment value for the noise estimation. These
parameters are functions of the STC profile and
coarse range command. They are sent to the main
channel noise estimate function.
104. Data Output Function (FTT Mode). This
function selects the sum and difference antenna
pattern I/Q data from two range bins and sends it
to the CPS.
A1-F18AC-742-100
105. Data Output Function (M/LPRF SEARCH and
SRT Modes). This function selects sum and
difference vectors as commanded by the CPS. The
selected data is sent to the CPS.
106. Prefiltering Function (HPRF TRACK Mode).
This prefiltering function processes and filters the
radar signal input. The filter is either a 3-pole
passband or a 6-pole notch filter. The type of filter
is selected by the CPS command.
107. Storage Function (DBS Mode). This function
packs the I/Q data in bits and stores it in the bulk
memory.
108. Large Ensemble Average Computation
Function (GMTI Mode). This function computes
an estimate of the root-mean-square value of
receiver noise in a doppler filter. It is formed from
only those range/doppler cells free of main lobe
clutter, processor noise, and side lobe clutter.
109. LPRF Vector Correction Signal Magnitude,
Noise Magnitude, and Partial Discriminants
Function (SRT Mode). This function applies the
gain/phase calibration corrections to the sum and
difference vectors for the data output function.
These vectors are processed, as commanded by the
CPS, to develop partial discriminant quantities.
This function will also select range elements, as
commanded by the CPS, to compute signal and
noise sums. The results are sent to the CPS.
110. Range Acquisition Function (AGR/PVU
Mode). This function makes an initial estimate of
the range to the ground as the centroid of main lobe
clutter. The ground range is transmitted to the CPS
for use in positioning the range bins for processing.
111. Noise Estimate Function (RAID Mode). This
function makes an estimate of the noise level for
each sum channel range/doppler cell. This is done
in the signal region processed by the pulse
compression and magnitude detection functions.
The true logic of computation and selection is made
complex to increase the detectability of weak
targets and reduce false alarms. The output is equal
to an average scaled by a factor of four. This is
done to decrease amount problems in the hit/miss
logic function.
112. Noise Estimate Function (GMTI Mode). This
function computes background noise estimates.
These noise estimates are used to form detection
thresholds for those range/doppler cells that are
036 00
Page 9
closer than the main lobe of the beam or are at the
edge of the main lobe clutter.
113. Main Channel Magnitude Detection and Post
Detection Integration Function (HPRF VS Mode).
This function converts I/Q samples to amplitude.
This allows the main channel thresholding and the
hit/miss logic to be done. The sizes are integrated
across several processing phases to improve signal
detection performance.
114. Batch Phase Correction Function (DBS
Mode). This function takes the packed, presumed
range samples from bulk memory and unpacks
them. This function uses the output from the range
dependent phase increment function to produce
phase correction factors. The phase correction
factors are applied to the unpacked, presumed
range samples.
115. Saturation Control Function (HPRF TRACK
Mode). This function detects and tries to prevent
saturation in the computation of the prefilter and
fast Fourier transform process. This function is
done by controlling the gain setting at the filter
input and at critical points through the fast Fourier
transform process.
116. Frequency Locating Function (HPRF RWS
Mode). This function locates a single target in
frequency when multiple hits from a single source
occurs. This function also uses the hit/miss logic
function to detect multiple targets that affect the
same filters.
117. Post Fast Fourier Transform Bulk Memory
Transfers Function (RAID Mode). This function
selects, based on inputs from the CPS, part of the
fast Fourier transform output for processing by the
post-fast Fourier transform.
118. The individual parts transferred from the bulk
memory to the working memory may be all the data
in range for one filter or a few filters. Processing
ordered by a filter, or a few filters at a time, is
required to free the bulk memory for the next
loading start. This function does not require an
order of processing for data in post-fast Fourier
transform functions.
119. Saturation Detection Function (FTT Mode).
This function inspects the data from the fast
Fourier transform for saturation. This function also
sends the large value count to the CPS.
A1-F18AC-742-100
120. Guard Channel Magnitude Detection and
Post Detection Integration Function (HPRF VS
Mode). This function converts I/Q samples to
amplitude. This allows the ground channel
thresholding and the hit/miss logic to be done. The
sizes are integrated across several processing phases
to improve signal processing performance.
121. Main Lobe Clutter Power Function (HPRF
TRACK Mode). This function determines the
power levels of the filters containing the main lobe
clutter frequency returns. Power levels are
computed for the filters. Main lobe clutter power
level estimates are taken from the fast Fourier
transform function filter data in the amplitude
weighting and fast Fourier transform function.
122. Pulse-To-Pulse Digital Variable Frequency
Oscillator Function (GMTT Mode). This function
frequency shifts the input so that the frequency of
main lobe clutter is shifted to dc on a pulse-to-pulse
basis. This function is completed by phase rotating
the input data across the pulses. The frequency
shift is done on the antenna data.
123. Multilook Overlay Function (DBS Mode).
The multilook overlay function is used to provide
reduction in variations. The image element values
are averaged over several process cycles when
commanded by the CPS.
124. Guard Channel Magnitude Detection
Function (HPRF RWS Mode). This function
converts I/Q samples to amplitude. This allows the
guard channel thresholding and the hit/miss logic to
be done. The sample size is computed in the
processed target region for better target signal
detection.
125. Thresholding Function (RAID Mode). This
function is done on each of the sum channel sizes,
when in a signal processing operation. Post
thresholding is done only on cells which have hits.
126. Vector Correction, Signal Magnitude, and
Noise Magnitude Function (FTT Mode). This
function applies the gain/phase adjustment to the
antenna track data. Signal sizes from the signal
filter/range bins are summed for signal estimation.
Signal sizes from the range and filter outrigger cells
are formed and sent to the CPS for target amount
and noise estimation.
127. Vector Correction, Signal Magnitude, Noise
Magnitude, and Data Output Function (GMTT
036 00
Page 10
Mode). This function applies gain/phase
adjustments to the antenna track data. In the
GMTT mode, the CPS commands the receiver to
bypass the track combining operation. This function
forms signal and noise sizes summed from various
filter/range combinations.
128. Output Scaling Function (DBS Mode). This
function converts filter outputs to display format
through a selected nonlinear transformation. The
sizes of the input data is separated in eight
intensity levels which coincide with eight shades of
grey on the display.
129. Doppler Frequency Acquisition Function
(AGR/PVU Mode). This function measures the
doppler frequency of main lobe clutter over the
whole prf interval. The pulse pair algorithm is used
to measure the frequency.
130. Large Ensemble Average Thresholding
Function (GMTI Mode). This function does an
amplitude thresholding of the input data.
131. Display Data Buffering Function (DBS Mode).
This function reorders the output data before it is
sent to the display refresh buffer.
132. Small Range and Doppler Extent Main Lobe
Clutter Error Measure Function (AGR/PVU Mode).
This function computes range and frequency error
between acquisition values or previous estimates
and true value. This function also computes
hit/miss data for on-target determination. The
locations of the measurement gates to be processed
are commanded by the CPS.
133. Range Centroiding Function (RAID Mode).
This function deletes multiple range hits from the
same target in the processed filters. This function
keeps all peak values of hits and deletes the
non-peak values of hits.
134. Vector Combination and Filter Output
Function (HPRF TRACK Mode). This function
forms the sum and difference vectors on filters
selected by the CPS command. Size detection of the
sum vectors is done on CPS command.
135. Notch, Count, and Removal Function (RAID
Mode). This function deletes altitude line hits.
When signal processing is being done, all filters are
inspected by this function.
A1-F18AC-742-100
136. Large Range, Small Doppler Extent Main
Lobe Clutter Error Measurement Function
(AGR/PVU Mode). This function estimates the
differences between the acquisition range and
doppler measurements and the true values or
between previous estimates and measured values of
range and doppler. The range and frequency of the
tracking region are commanded by the CPS. The
doppler frequency error is estimated using the
power of the input sum channel data.
137. Side Lobe Suppression Function (GMTI
Mode). This function rejects pulse compressed side
lobe hits while still detecting elements of hit groups.
This function is bypassed if pulse compression is
not commanded.
138. Filter Centroiding Function (RAID Mode).
This function deletes multiple hits caused by the
same target when signal processing is being done.
This function differentiates between one or more
than one target.
139. Large Doppler Extent Main Lobe Clutter
Measurement Function (AGR/PVU Mode). This
function estimates the difference between the
acquisition value, or an estimated value, and the
true value of the main lobe clutter frequency. This
function also computes various preliminary results
036 00
Page 11/(12 blank)
which are transmitted to the CPS at the end of
each phase.
140. Velocity Collapse Function (GMTI Mode).
This function reduces the input hit lists. Hits
recorded at individual range bins for one or more
different filters are reduced to one entry.
141. Filter Number Rescaling Function (RAID
Mode). This function rescales the major prf filter
number component of the data set related to a hit.
This is done because the major prf have a larger
number of processed filters than the minor prf
have.
142. Noise Estimation For Tracking Sub-Modes
Function (AGR/PVU Mode). This function
provides two samples of background noise, one at a
range from the main lobe clutter and the other at a
frequency from the main lobe clutter. These
samples are used in estimating signal
clutter-to-noise ratio.
143. Hit Confirmation Function (RAID Mode).
This function pairs the minor and major prf hits in
range and doppler dimensions. This is done to
differentiate between real and false target
detections.
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC - SIGNAL PROCESSING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Mode Dependent Signal Processing ................................................. WP036 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
AGR and PVU Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 9 .................................... 23
DBS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 7....................................................... 17
GMTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 10 ................................................ 26
GMTI and FTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 8 .................................. 20
GMTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 11 ................................................ 29
High/Med/Low PRF Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 3 ............... 9
High PRF RWS and VS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 2 .................... 6
Low/Med PRF Search, Med PRFLU Search, and ACM Signal Processing Function
Simplified Schematic, Figure 1 ............................................................................................................ 3
RAID Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 4..................................................... 11
RBGM, SEA, and FTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 6...................... 15
Short Range Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 5 ............................. 13

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 2

1. INTRODUCTION. h. raid assessment mode (RAID).

2. These simplified schematics support mode i. short range track (SRT) mode.
dependent signal processing operation (WP036 00).
The signal processing modes supported by this WP j. real beam ground map (RBGM).
are listed below:
k. doppler beam sharpened (DBS) mode.
a. medium pulse repetition frequency (MPRF)
search. l. ground moving target indication (GMTI)
mode.
b. medium prf look up (MPRFLU) search
mode. m. ground moving target track (GMTT) mode.

c. low/medium prf air combat maneuvering n. air to ground ranging/precision velocity

(L/MPRF ACM) mode. update (AGR/PVU) mode.

d. high prf velocity search (HPRF VS) mode. o. sea surface search (SEA) mode.

e. high prf range-while-search (HPRF RWS) p. ground moving target acquisition (GMTA)
mode. mode.

f. medium/low prf (M/LPRF) track mode. q. fixed target acquisition (FTA) mode.

g. high prf (HPRF) track mode. r. fixed target track (FTT) mode.
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Low/Med PRF Search, Med PRFLU Search, and ACM Signal Processing
Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Low/Med PRF Search, Med PRFLU Search, and ACM Signal Processing
Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Low/Med PRF Search, Med PRFLU Search, and ACM Signal Processing
Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 6

Figure 2. High PRF RWS and VS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic
(Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 7

Figure 2. High PRF RWS and VS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic
(Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 8

Figure 2. High PRF RWS and VS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic
(Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 9

Figure 3. High/Med/Low PRF Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic

(Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 10

Figure 3. High/Med/Low PRF Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic

(Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 11

Figure 4. RAID Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 12

Figure 4. RAID Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 13

Figure 5. Short Range Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 14

Figure 5. Short Range Track Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 15

Figure 6. RBGM, SEA, and FTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic
(Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 16

Figure 6. RBGM, SEA, and FTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic
(Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 17

Figure 7. DBS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 18

Figure 7. DBS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 19

Figure 7. DBS Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 20

Figure 8. GMTI and FTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 21

Figure 8. GMTI and FTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 22

Figure 8. GMTI and FTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 23

Figure 9. AGR and PVU Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 24

Figure 9. AGR and PVU Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 25

Figure 9. AGR and PVU Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)
A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 26

Figure 10. GMTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 27

Figure 10. GMTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 28

Figure 10. GMTA Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 29

Figure 11. GMTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 037 00
Page 30

Figure 11. GMTT Signal Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 038 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MODE DEPENDENT DATA PROCESSING

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Component Locator .................................................................................................. WP004 00
Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic ................................................. WP039 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Mode Dependent Data Processing ........................................................................................................... 2
Air-to-Ground Ranging Mode ........................................................................................................... 4
Calibration Mode ................................................................................................................................ 5
Doppler Beam Sharpened Map......................................................................................................... 7
Initiated Built-In Test........................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed Target Track Mode.................................................................................................................. 11
Ground Moving Target Track Mode................................................................................................ 12
Periodic Built-In Test ........................................................................................................................ 5
Precision Velocity Update Mode ...................................................................................................... 4
Raid Assessment Mode ...................................................................................................................... 10
Single Target Track Mode................................................................................................................. 3
Track While Scan Mode .................................................................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None
A1-F18AC-742-100 038 00
Page 2

1. INTRODUCTION. (10) Mode dependent signal processing,

operation (WP036 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set is required refer to the work packages listed (11) Mode dependent data processing,
below: operation (This WP).

a. Sequence of operation (12) Radar set doppler, operation

(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP015 00).
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
(WP016 00).
(4) Target acquisition, operation
(WP013 00).
(5) A/A track mode displays, operation
(WP018 00).
(WP022 00).
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00).
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3.MODE DEPENDENT DATA
PROCESSING.
4. This WP contains descriptions of the
Computer-Power Supply CP-1325/APG-65 (CPS)
modes and the related data processing functions.
The CPS modes contained in this WP are:

(6) Head-up displays, operation a. track-while-scan

(WP020 00).
b. single target track
b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
c. precision velocity update
c. Functional operation
d. air to ground ranging
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00). e. calibration

(2) Transmitter drive, operation f. periodic built-in test

(WP026 00).
g. initiated built-in test
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00). h. doppler beam sharpened

(4) Radar set receiving function, operation i. raid assessment mode

(WP030 00).
j. fixed target track
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00). k. ground moving target track.

(6) Data processing function, operation 5. Refer to WP039 00 for data processing function
(WP032 00). simplified schematic.

(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00).
(8) Cooling and pressurization function
operation (WP034 00).
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00).
6. Refer to WP004 00 for component locator.
7. TRACK WHILE SCAN MODE. The track while
scan (TWS) mode provides the radar system with
multiple target detection and tracking data. Track
files for up to 10 targets maintained and data on
the highest 8 primary targets are sent to the
A1-F18AC-742-100
mission computer (MC) system for display
processing.
8. TWS Track Storage Function. This function
provides the radar with the ability to track and
store tracking data for 10 targets. Tracks in TWS
track storage are maintained in inertial coordinates.
TWS ranks targets by the computed time to
intercept.
9. TWS Track Correlation and Association
Function. This function processing follows
bar-to-bar redundancy elimination processing at the
end of frame. This function takes the bar-to-bar
redundancy elimination processing data and
compares it with the TWS tracks maintained in the
TWS track file storage.
10. The TWS track correlation and association
function determines the correlation between views
and track files. This function also reduces the
possibility of false radar tracks.
11. TWS Tracking Filters Function. Tracking
filters processes each TWS track file one time
during each frame time interval. This filter
processing of the frame data follows the correlation
and association process. The primary inputs to the
filter are correlated range and range rate.
12. Auto Scan Selection Function. Auto scan
selection selects the antenna scan center and the
scan volume. This selection is done with the mode
specified by the TWS scan centering command from
the MC. The TWS auto scan flag indicates to the
antenna control whether manual or automatic scan
selection is to be used.
13. TWS Bar-To-Bar Redundancy Elimination
Function. This function is done for all targets
produced by the phase-to-phase redundancy
elimination function (display processing), when the
system is operating in the TWS mode.
14. Multiple targets occurring on two or more
elevation bars from a single target are centroided to
remove copies and to improve target azimuth and
elevation data. TWS track file initiation is
simplified and the probability that one real target
could be in two or more track files is reduced.
15. SINGLE TARGET TRACK MODE. In single
target track (STT) the radar continually monitors
the range and angle of the tracked target. This
mode does motion functions to track a specified
038 00
Page 3
target in the commanded waveform. It receives
inputs describing the target to be tracked and
waveform to be used.
16. STT Control Function. This function receives
target designation and mode commands from the
track verification and mode modification functions.
This function provides executive control for STT
processing. The STT control function starts and
controls filter cycle level, phase level, and subphase
level processing for the various STT modes. The
waveform command specifies the STT mode of
operation.
17. Discriminants Function. The discriminants
function is done one time each subphase in all STT
modes. It is activated on receiving the radar target
data processor (RTDP) input complete interrupt.
This indicates that the results of a signal processing
subphase has been put in the input/output buffer.
The discriminants function receives these signal
processing results and forms data for target range,
velocity, azimuth, and elevation. The same
discriminants function is used in all STT radar
modes.
18. Signal-To-Noise Function. This function
receives the filter data inputs from the RTDP and
processes them as commanded by control inputs.
This function sends out the processed
signal-to-noise and track angle ratios. Each cycle of
the signal-to-noise function processes the set of
inputs coinciding with one RTDP subphase.
19. Range Filter Function. The range filter
function receives range discriminant data from the
RTDP and combines it with its own output from
the last cycle. This combined data is used to form
an estimate of target range. Range estimate is used
by the STT control function for the single target
track range variable. All states of this function are
sent to the gate control function, where they are
used to predict the range value.
20. Velocity Filter Function. This function
receives velocity discriminant data from the
discriminants function and combines it with its own
output from the last cycle. This combined data is
used to form an estimate of relative velocity. The
velocity estimate is selected by the STT control
function for the single target track variable. This
data is sent to the gate control function where it is
used to predict relative velocity.
A1-F18AC-742-100 038 00
Page 4

21. Gate Control Function. This function receives position. A prf is selected to make the radar range a
target range, velocity, and acceleration data from true range.
the range filter and velocity filter functions. This
function predicts the target range and velocity that
28. PVU Coarse Doppler Acquisition Function.
would occur at the center of the next filter cycle.
This function determines the difference between the
This estimate is sent to the timing and control (T &
doppler los velocity, predicted on the basis of MC
C) function for use in adjusting the range and
parameters, and the true velocity measured by the
velocity discriminant measuring hardware.
radar. This function is used in the first three
antenna beam positions during PVU in-flight
22. Angle Filter Function. This function receives
alignment. It is also used in the first three antenna
range variables and the coinciding derivatives which
beam positions where the MC is using back-up data
are selected by the STT control function. The range
for velocity measurements.
variables are received from the range or velocity
filters for use as estimates by other system
29. PVU Time Range Function. This function uses
functions.
coarse range and prf from the PVU coarse range
acquisition function. The data is combined with a
23. PRF Select Function. This function
measurement of the split gate or one range bin
determines if the existing pulse repetition frequency
monopulse discriminant. It determines a more
(prf) is satisfactory for use during the next filter
accurate value of the ground range along the
cycle. If it is not satisfactory, a mode dependent
antenna boresight.
processing is done to determine the prf to be used
during the next filter cycle.
30. PVU Fine Doppler Function. The PVU fine
doppler function determines the difference between
24. PRECISION VELOCITY UPDATE MODE. PVU
the los velocity, predicted from MC parameters, and
processing is done when the PVU mode is
the true velocity measured by the radar.
commanded by the MC. In the PVU mode, the
radar automatically measures the aircraft velocity
31. PVU Kalman Filter Function. During normal
and sends the velocity error components to the MC.
operation the MC supplies inertial navigation
system (INS) velocity measurements. During
25. PVU Executive Function. This function
in-flight alignment the MC supplies air data
controls the flow of the PVU mode processing. On
velocity measurements. The PVU Kalman filter
the first entry into the PVU mode, the executive
function calculates the look vector for projecting the
function does mode start. It correlates with other
los error on the platform directions, the
PVU functions to make sure the processing is done
measurement noise estimate, and the gain vector in
in the correct sequence. The PVU executive
terms of the look vector.
function does the processing to cause the mode to
start processing at the next beam position.
32. AIR-TO-GROUND RANGING MODE.
26. Antenna Pointing Function. This function Air-to-ground ranging (AGR) is done when the
commands the antenna through three different AGR mode is commanded by the MC. AGR
beam positions. At each position, the PVU mode determines the range and doppler velocity error to
receives line-of-sight (los) doppler velocity the ground along the los commanded by the MC.
measurements. All elevation angles are space AGR also does the processing required to detect a
stabilized relative to the horizontal plane. All discrete target near the commanded los. The radar
azimuth angles are used as space stabilized values is commanded to fixed target track (FTT) if a
relative to the projection of the existing velocity discrete target is located.
vector estimate.
33. AGR Executive Function. This function
controls the operation of other AGR functions. This
27. PVU Coarse Range Acquisition Function.
function does mode reset, antenna positioning,
This function determines a coarse range at which
range acquisition, discriminant selection, and gate
the antenna beam boresight intersects the ground.
control. It also calculates phase gain alpha matrix
The function is commanded by the PVU executive
and signal-to-noise ratio.
function each time the antenna is moved to a new
A1-F18AC-742-100
34. Discriminants Function. This function
receives the discriminant from the RTDP during
each of the four phases of the filter cycle. It forms
the applicable discriminate at the end of each filter
cycle. A split gate or one range bin monopulse
discriminant is formed for the range filter. A
velocity centroid discriminant is formed for the
velocity filter.
35. Range Filter Function. The range filter
function is a fixed gain three stage filter. A single
filter cycle for the range contains four phases during
which the track angle values are changed in
sequence.
36. Velocity Filter Function. The velocity filter
function is a two state fixed gain filter. The doppler
velocity projected along the los is tracked in AGR.
A filter cycle for the velocity filter is made up of
four phases.
37. CALIBRATION MODE. Calibration is done,
during data processing, at specific intervals to
compensate for tolerances and environmental effects
on the radar set. The calibrations, which use radio
frequency (rf) test signals, are subject to extreme
interference. An rf interference test is done before
the calibration. After the rf interference test, the
calibration is done, if it is needed.
38. FMR Calibration Function. This function
calculates a weighted mean slope of the phase B
frequency ramping. This function detects a ranging
degraded state if any small segment of the ramp
slope exceeds a maximum deviation value.
39. The frequency modulation ranging (fmr) slope
setting of the Radar Receiver-Exciter
R-2089/APG-65 (R/E) is modified to keep the ramp
in the limit of the frequency rate. Tests are made
on the calibration signal level and frequency to
detect hardware failures that would result in false
calibrations.
40. Variable Frequency Oscillator Calibration
Function. This variable frequency oscillator (vfo)
calibration function is done at intervals to produce
bias correction for the vfo command. This makes
sure a specific vfo frequency is maintained. The vfo
calibration function receives input data from the
RTDP for vfo calibration and failure analysis. The
processing is done in three phases.
038 00
Page 5
41. Phase Gain Calibration Function. This
function provides mathematical corrections to allow
determination of the real target signal relative
phase and amplitude at the antenna. These
corrections are provided for antenna coarse
attenuation levels with azimuth and elevation
selected.
42. The function also provides evaluation of
parameters used to indicate failures in the radar
hardware. This is done as part of periodic and
initiated built-in tests.
43. Analog-To-Digital Offset Calibration Function.
The analog-to-digital (a/d) offset calibration
function evaluates the results of the a/d nulling
operation and RTDP data memory test. The a/d
offset calibration correction values are determined
and transmitted through the RTDP to the R/E and
the a/d converter.
44. This function also tests for excessive a/d offset,
a/d offset drift, automatic gain control (agc) parity,
and RTDP data memory failures. The pass/fail
conditions of the tests are sent to the bit matrix.
45. Radio Frequency Interference Test Function.
This test function determines if an external source
of rf exists in amounts large enough to affect
tactical calibrations that use the BIT antenna rf
signal. Phase and gain calibrations and vfo
calibrations require this test.
46. Zero Range Delay Calibration Function. This
function measures the range error for the tactical
pulse modes which require close range accuracy.
The range error is mainly caused by the delay in
processing the return target pulses through the R/E
video amplifiers and filters.
47. Another cause of range error is the time delay
between the transmitter gate pulse and the rf
output pulse from the transmitter. The zero range
delay calibration function measures the processing
delays and provides a verification of the general
operation of the radar set in the pulse modes.
48. PERIODIC BUILT-IN TEST. The periodic
built-in test (PBIT) evaluates the performance of
the radar equipment while operating in the tactical
mode. PBIT verifies the periodic and calibration
test results for normal values. The tests do not
interfere with the radar tactical operation.
A1-F18AC-742-100
49. Periodic Bit Supervisor Function. This
function provides timing and control to do PBIT for
the CPS, R/E, RTDP, antenna, and transmitter.
Detected failures are filtered to reduce false failure
alarms, then recorded in the PBIT matrix.
50. Computer-Power Supply Periodic Test
Function. This function verifies the operational
integrity of the CPS. This function does not
interfere with the tactical software program. The
CPS periodic test function makes the following
tests:
a. arithmetic and control (A & C) firmware
controlled tests
b. input/output controller (IOC) firmware test
c. software controlled tests.
51. Receiver-Exciter Periodic Test Function. This
function verifies the operational integrity of the
R/E. This function is done on a time-shared basis
with tactical and other BIT tests, one time each
processing cycle. The R/E periodic test function is
done after the R/E control function and does not
interfere with tactical processing.
52. Transmitter Periodic Test Function. This
function monitors operation of the transmitter and
the transmitter recycle profile sequence during
tactical and BIT operations. This function is done
one time each processing cycle, after the transmitter
control function is completed. The commands to the
transmitter are monitored to detect any changes. If
a change occurs that requires a settling time before
doing the periodic test, it is delayed.
53. Antenna Periodic Test Function. This
function tests the operation of the antenna. The
test results are processed by the periodic BIT
supervisor function for updating the periodic test
matrix. The antenna periodic test function is done
one time each display sync cycle. This function also
monitors the tactical antenna commands and tests
the antenna response to these commands.
54. Radar Target Data Processor Periodic Test
Function. This function tests the operation of the
RTDP. The results of the tests are processed by the
periodic BIT supervisor function for updating the
periodic test matrix.
55. The function is done on a time-shared basis
with tactical and other BIT routines one time each
038 00
Page 6
process sync cycle. If a master mode change is
commanded by the CPS, the periodic test is
stopped until the next process sync cycle.
56. INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST. Initiated built-in
test (IBIT) detects and isolates failures in the radar
without use of ground support equipment. IBIT
provides the ability to determine radar performance
and to identify failed or degraded modes in order to
determine operational readiness.
57. Initiated Bit Supervisor Function. This
function provides the control to do Operational
Readiness Test (ORT) at radar cold start or IBIT
tests when commanded by the MC. Failures
reported during the various tests are filtered to
reduce false alarms, then recorded in the IBIT
matrix. IBIT may be stopped by the BIT
initiate/test stop signal from the MC.
58. Computer-Power Supply Initiated Bit Test
Function. This function makes a test of the CPS.
The tests are done by a combination of hardware
controlled, firmware controlled, and software tests.
The pass/fail conditions are reported to the BIT
matrix.
59. Receiver-Exciter Initiated Bit Test Function.
This function does a series of tests, during IBIT, to
verify the operation of the R/E. The R/E rf and if
detectors are tested during the transmitter IBIT.
The R/E tests are done after the RTDP and CPS
IBIT tests are completed. The pass/fail conditions
are reported to the BIT matrix.
60. Transmitter Initiated Bit Test Function. This
function is done after the CPS, RTDP, and R/E
tests are completed. This function is commanded
during IBIT or initial radar turn on. It starts the
commands to test the transmitter and monitors
signals for detection of failures. The pass/fail
conditions are sent to the BIT matrix.
61. Antenna Initiated Bit Test Function. This
function detects and/or verifies an antenna failure.
It isolates failure to a shop replaceable assembly
(SRA). The antenna SRA are the azimuth and
elevation rate gyros, the servo electronics package,
and the antenna main frame.
62. The antenna IBIT test is started by sending the
control parameters to the antenna. The CPS
monitors the return parameters for test failure
conditions. The pass/fail conditions are reported to
the BIT matrix.
A1-F18AC-742-100
63. RTDP IBIT Test Function. The reason for the
test function is to test the CPS/RTDP interface and
to load, control, and monitor the RTDP internal
BIT. The results are evaluated and the pass/fail
conditions are reported to the BIT matrix.
64. DOPPLER BEAM SHARPENED MAP. The
doppler beam sharpened (DBS) map mode is a high
resolution mapping mode. Improved azimuth
resolution over real beam maps is done by
frequency separation of the ground clutter return.
Improved range resolution in DBS is arrived at by
use of short pulse widths.
65. DBS Executive Function. This function is
done each process sync phase and provides the logic
to control the various DBS scan sequences. It starts
and schedules the processing used in DBS
operation. The DBS mode is entered from the real
beam ground map (RBGM) mode. The DBS
executive function monitors the MC commands,
updates the motion parameters, computes mapping
parameters, and provides commands for antenna
positioning.
66. Mode Monitor Function With Computer-Power
Supply. This function initializes parameters on first
entry into, and continued operation in, either the
DBS sector (DBSS), DBS patch (DBSP) or DBS
synthetic aperture radar (DBSSAR) mode. The
DBSS, DBSP and DBSSAR commands are
monitored to determine the commanded mode to be
processed. The DBSS mode can be stabilized or
unstabilized but the DBSP and DBSSAR modes
must be stabilized. If the change from DBSS, DBSP
and DBSSAR is commanded, the new map center is
set.
67. Controls Monitor Function. This function
monitors the master reset, mode reset, slave-to-cue,
and destabilize commands. If master reset is
commanded, the initial map center range and
azimuth is set at a fixed value. If mode reset is
commanded, a gain scan is done. When the
destabilize command is set, the sector mode is in an
unstabilized state. When slave-to-cue is
commanded, a reinitialization is done.
68. Display Monitor Function. This function
determines the status of the freeze, erase, stabilize,
and cursor valid commands. This function also sets
the applicable flags for internal DBS use.
038 00
Page 7
69. DBS Map Center Update Function. This
function updates the map center vector each
computation cycle (10 milliseconds). Increments to
the last values of the map center vectors are
determined by the product of ground velocity and
integration time. The end result is motion
compensation of these vectors.
70. Elevation Rate Command Integrate Function.
This function computes the required increments to
the nominal command by integrating the elevation
rate command from the MC. The elevation rate
command is formatted by the antenna control
function before being integrated by this function.
71. Scan Set-Up, Part 1 Function. This function
computes the initial map center vector. If the
stabilized mode is not selected, the polar
coordinates are used for the vector. If the stabilized
mode is selected, the existing value of the map scan
center vector is used. This function also computes
the initial map center vector range, azimuth, and
the existing vector value.
72. Map Limits Function. This function monitors
whether the DBSS or DBSP mode is commanded. If
DBSS is selected, the initial range to the map
center is limited to between 3.4 and 28.3 nautical
miles. The absolute value of the initial map center
azimuth angle is also limited. If DBSP is selected,
the initial range to the map center is limited to
between 5.66 and 36 nautical miles. The map limits
function monitors whether the DBSS, DBSP or
DBSSAR mode is commanded. If DBSSAR is
selected, the initial range to the map center is
limited to between 2 and 28 nautical miles.
73. VM Range Scale Function. This function
selects the range scale for the doppler beam
sharpening velocity measurement (DBSVM) flyback
function in the CPS. It selects either a 40, 20, 10, or
5 nautical mile range scale.
74. Pulse Compression Function. This function
sets the pulse compression flags for use in the
RTDP timing and control. There are no inputs to
the pulse compression function.
75. Scan Set-Up, Part 2 Function. This function
determines values of parameters required for
scanning. It determines the values of filters formed,
the number of filters used, and the number of
patches in the scan. It also determines the
maximum azimuth line number, and the ratio of the
A1-F18AC-742-100
number of filters used per number of looks. The
determination is based on which DBS mode is
selected.
76. Estimated Scan Time Function. This function
estimates the time required for a map scan. The
estimate is made by simulating the existing aircraft
velocity vector and assuming the aircraft will fly
this path for the whole scan. Each path center is
found by adding the difference vectors to the scan
center vector. The time it takes to form the patches
is also calculated.
77. Scan Construction Function. This function
calculates the parameters required for map
construction. The calculations include the below
map parameters:
a. map center range
b. horizontal component of map center range
c. maximum and minimum ranges
d. scan center to patch vector
e. primary scan direction.
78. Range Resolution Function. This function
calculates the value of range resolution based on
whether DBSS is selected. It also computes the
values of a/d sampling interval and the transmit
pulse length required for the initialization of timing
and control.
79. Fan/Pencil Beam Function. This function
determines whether the antenna is commanded to
fan or pencil beam. The antenna depression angle is
compared with a set value. If the angle is more than
this value, fan beam is commanded. If not, pencil
beam is commanded.
80. Patch Azimuth, Elevation Function. This
function computes the azimuth and elevation to the
map patch element. The center of the map array is
determined by the vector summation of the scan
center vector and the scan center to patch vector.
81. Scanning Function. This function calculates
the azimuth endpoint for the DBS antenna control
function. Antenna azimuth position error and
position increment are calculated and then
compared.
038 00
Page 8
82. When the absolute value of the position error is
less than or equal to the position increment, the
antenna-in-position flag is set. Also, the azimuth
gimbal angle is set to the azimuth endpoint. If not,
the antenna-in-position flag is reset and the value
of azimuth gimbal angle is increased by the value of
the position increment.
83. RTDP Initial Conditions Function. This
function starts the parameters for the RTDP. All
outputs from this function are used in the RTDP.
84. Display Buffer Control Function. This
function determines which one of two buffers is
loaded with the contents of the construction buffer.
It indicates which one of the two buffers is updated
and which one is displayed. When a freeze
command is output, the contents of the display
buffer remains the same and the contents of the
update buffer collects the most up to date data.
85. Timing and Control Initialization Function.
This function initializes the number of range bins in
a swath for pulse compression, or no pulse
compression. This function also initializes values for
slant range to the patch, prf, transmit pulse length,
sampling interval, and nominal process sync time.
86. Patch Sequencer 1 Function. This function
sequences through the patches in the scan and
outputs the individual patch center vectors. First, a
test is made to see if the patch is inside the antenna
gimbal limits. If not, the test continues until a
patch is found that is inside the gimbal limits.
87. This function also sets up various display
control parameters. It controls where the patch data
goes on the display, and in multi-look, sets up the
overlay buffer controls. The patch sequencer 1
function computes the values of the stored aircraft
to patch vectors required for display.
88. Patch Sequencer 2 Function. This function
computes the values of stored aircraft to patch
vectors required for display. The determination of
last patch is done by comparing the value of the
azimuth angle between the ground velocity and the
map patch center to a constant for the secondary
map scan.
89. Overlay Buffer Control Function. This
function calculates the number of the array used for
overlay buffer control. The overlay buffer control
uses the number of the array in forming the DBS
A1-F18AC-742-100
map. The calculation is determined by the
commanded number of looks, the patch index
number, and last patch elements.
90. DSC Azimuth Function. The digital scan
converter (DSC) azimuth function computes the
display azimuth address and sends it to the RTDP.
This function uses the antenna scan direction, if
scan 2 is possible, and the value of the overlay
buffer control number in the computation of the
display azimuth address.
91. Fill Sequencer Function. This function
calculates the stored aircraft to patch vectors. The
vectors are used by the display.
92. DBS Scan 2 Function. This function
determines if the DBSS mode is being commanded.
If DBSS is selected, calculations are done to
determine whether a scan 2 is possible. Scan 2 is
commanded when the product of the primary scan
direction and azimuth between the ground velocity
vector and the last array is greater than the blind
zone limit constant.
93. Patch Calculations Function. This function is
the executive function for patch calculations.
94. Platform Antenna Corrections Function. This
function computes the platform to antenna phase
center vector in aircraft coordinates. This function
computes the vector over the process sync interval
to get the antenna phase center velocity with
respect to the platform. This velocity is also used in
the motion compensation equations.
95. Navigation Calculations Function. This
function calculates the antenna to patch vector,
ground range, slant range, look vector, antenna
velocity, los velocity, and cross velocity parameters.
96. Azimuth/Range Elements Function. This
function calculates azimuth and range element
vectors at the start of the array.
97. Array Time Function. This function calculates
the array time, the number of process syncs per
array time, and the average doppler width.
98. Initial PRF Function. This function calculates
the DBS initial prf and the initial ratio of cross
velocity to patch slant range for the determination
of adaptive prf. Also, this function calculates the
038 00
Page 9
presum ratio and the number of input pulses per
array for the RTDP.
99. Antenna Initialization Point Function. This
function calculates the initial value of the antenna
position vector.
100. Doppler, Doppler Rate Function. This
function calculates the values of los doppler, los
doppler rate, range gradient of los doppler, and
range gradient of los doppler rate parameters.
101. Phase Function. The phase function
calculates the below parameters for use in the
RTDP:
a. bin-to-bin digital variable frequency
oscillator phase
b. pulse-to-pulse phase change at the patch
center
c. pulse-to-pulse phase change per 16 range
bins
d. initial value of the phase correction
e. presum-to-presum phase change per 128
range bins.
102. Adaptive PRF Function. The adaptive prf
function calculates the values for the nominal
process sync time and DBS prf parameters. The
nominal process sync time is set to a constant value
of 10 milliseconds.
103. Antenna Point Function. The antenna point
function calculates the antenna position vector.
104. Timing and Control Parameters Function.
This function computes the below parameters
required for timing and control:
a. coarse and fine range
b. process sync time
c. total number of range bins
d. number of pulse repetition intervals in each
phase.
105. Antenna Control Function. This function
computes the antenna azimuth gimbal and elevation
gimbal commands.
A1-F18AC-742-100
106. DBS Display 1 Function. This function
transforms in-line video line numbers to the MC
commanded reference system.
107. DBS Display 2 Function. This function
transforms the MC commanded reference system to
in-video line numbers.
108. RAID ASSESSMENT MODE. The raid
assessment mode (RAID) provides high resolution
target detection and position data of other targets
in a small volume of space around the tracked
target. This provides the total targets in the raid
(size) as well as their relative position from the
tracked target.
109. Raid Timing and Control Function. This
function packs the output buffer to the
analog-to-digital calibration part of the receiver. It
also packs the output buffer to the prepacker, the
target simulator, and the timing and control unit.
110. Accessibility Function. This function tests
various conditions to determine whether active raid
mode is available.
111. Main Lobe Clutter Width Function. This
function computes the half main lobe clutter width
and related amounts in feet per second. If the
antenna is looking up, the half main lobe clutter
width is set at zero.
112. PRF Selection Function. This function
selects a prf and fast Fourier transform (FFT) size
so that the tracked target is clear in velocity and
range. It also sets the filter spacing so that separate
targets can be recognized. The prf selection function
provides an output of the tracked target range and
velocity.
113. Antenna Pointing Offset Function. This
function computes, at the start of each frame, the
antenna offsets relative to the tracked target
position. The sign of the elevation offsets are
alternated from frame to frame.
114. Range Gate Function. This function
computes a coarse range for use by the timing and
control function to selectively gate data to the
RTDP. This function also can bias the tracked
target with a bias from the prf select function.
038 00
Page 10
115. Variable Frequency Oscillator Control
Function. This function computes the best
frequency and rate of main lobe clutter. Then it
biases this value to get a value that represents the
first prf line below the tracked target doppler.
116. Velocity Gate Function. Velocity gates are
computed for both azimuth and elevation phases,
and sent to the RTDP. These gates are located at
the leading edge of main lobe clutter or around the
tracked target frequency, depending on which is
less.
117. Filter Renumbering Function. This function
computes a filter renumber bias and scale factor.
This data is sent to the RTDP.
118. Process Sync Parameters Function. This
function computes various parameters defining the
processing timeline. It defines the number of pause
pulses per phase and the number of subphases per
pulse. The function also computes the pulse
repetition interval and phase lengths as a function
of time.
119. Target Extrapolation Function. This function
computes the predicted target azimuth and
elevation using extrapolation.
120. Raid Antenna Control Function. This
function computes the antenna azimuth and
elevation gimbal angles required to move the
antenna to each of the seven points around the
tracked target. It also holds the antenna in position
at each of these points while data is received. The
calculations are done in body stabilized coordinates.
121. Altitude Notch Function. This function
computes the swath of range bins and filters where
the altitude return is expected. This function also
commands the RTDP not to process any hits in
that notch if it falls in the area that would normally
be processed.
122. Periodic Display Processing Function. This
function controls the formatting of non-hit display
data. This function also controls initialization,
aging, and erasing of hit data to the display.
123. Phase/Gain Values Function. This function
receives values of sum to difference channel phase
and gain unbalances. The values are received from a
table set by the phase/gain calibrate operation, for
both the azimuth and elevation antenna
A1-F18AC-742-100
configurations. These values are for the existing rf
channel setting and agc.
124. Hit Processing Function. Raw hit data, from
the RTDP is converted, to the display buffer
format. This processing includes range biasing,
magnitude detection, hit relation, and velocity
estimation.
125. Executive Control Function. This function
provides total control during active RAID.
126. RTDP Output Formatting Function. This
function formats the outputs to the RTDP.
127. System State Function. Some elements of
the system state are preserved at the boundary
between the azimuth and elevation phases. This
preserved data is used for hit processing at a later
time.
128. Hit Queuing Function. This function moves
the raw hit input data from the RTDP input buffer
to a working buffer. The data is sent from the
RTDP with a maximum of six hits per transfer.
This function moves hits until the count, indicating
hits remaining to be transferred, gets to zero. When
all the hits for a look have been transferred, the
buffer ready flag is reset.
129. Active/Passive Interleave Control Function.
This function controls the interleaving of active and
passive RAID. This function also controls the
entering of the RAID mode when the RAID mode
request flag is set.
130. FIXED TARGET TRACK MODE. The fixed
target track mode (FTT) uses a low PRF to track
fixed targets that have a large signal to clutter ratio
on the ground or sea surface. FTT mode can only
be selected after fixed target acquisition has
occurred while operating in an air to ground RBGM
or SEA modes.
131. Executive Control Function. This function
provides control for FTT processing. The executive
control function starts and controls filter cycle level,
phase level, and subphase level processing for
various FTT modes. It also determines the track
angle sequence (TAS) and decides whether to do a
normal track cycle or target estimation cycle.
132. The filter cycle level control is used to
initialize functions using coarse estimates of target
038 00
Page 11
range and velocity from acquisition. It also modifies
the timeline for the next filter cycle if system PRF
has changed.
133. The phase level controls the radar timelines by
way of the RTDP timing and control unit. It
outputs all the required parameters to the RTDP
for the tracking process.
134. The subphase level does gain computations for
discriminant and signal-to-noise ratio
accumulations. It also provides target extent
accumulations if a target is outside of tracking
parameters.
135. Discriminant and Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Function. This function produces the
discriminants for range, velocity and angle from
information supplied by the RTDP. It calculates
the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) from range and
velocity noise estimates taken from the sum
channel.
136. Angle Filter Function. This function
estimates antenna pointing errors, relative velocity,
and target acceleration components perpendicular
to the antenna radial axis. These estimates are
computed from elevation and azimuth filters.
137. Range Filter Function. The range filter
function receives range discriminant data from the
RTDP and combines it with its own output from
the last cycle. This combined data is used to
estimate target range. The target range estimate is
sent to the gate control function where it is used to
predict the center of the next filter cycle.
138. Velocity Filter Function. This function
estimates range rate and acceleration at the center
of the existing filter cycle. This information is sent
to the gate control to predict the position of the
next filter cycle.
139. Waveform Selection Function. The
waveform selection function determines if the
existing pulse repetition frequency (prf) is
satisfactory for the next filter cycle. The waveform
selection logic defines the parameters required for
continuous tracking and will change the radar prf to
center the next filter cycle.
140. Antenna Control Function. This function
computes the antenna drive commands from
azimuth and elevation errors to keep the radar
beam directly on the target.
A1-F18AC-742-100
141. Gate Control Function. The gate control
function receives range and velocity data from the
range filter and velocity filter functions. This
function predicts the target range and velocity that
would occur at the center of the next filter cycle.
142. GROUND MOVING TARGET TRACK MODE.
The ground moving target track mode (GMTT)
uses a low prf to track moving targets over short
distances. GMTT mode is selected after ground
moving target acquisition (GMTA) has been started
during GMTI or GMTI/MAP modes.
143. Executive Control Function. This function
provides control for GMTT processing. The
executive control function starts and controls filter
cycle level, phase level, and subphase level
processing for various GMTT modes. It also
determines the track angle sequence (TAS) and
decides whether to do a normal track cycle or target
estimation cycle.
144. The filter cycle level control is used to
initialize functions using coarse estimates of target
range and velocity from the acquisition mode. It
also modifies the timeline for the next filter cycle if
system PRF has changed.
145. The phase level controls the radar timelines by
way of the RTDP timing and control unit. It
outputs all the required parameters to the RTDP
for the tracking process.
146. The subphase level does gain computations for
discriminant and signal-to-noise ratio
accumulations. It also provides target extent
accumulations if a target is outside of tracking
parameters.
147. Discriminant and Signal-to-Noise Ratio.
This function produces the discriminants for range,
velocity, and angle from information supplied by
the RTDP. It calculates signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
from range and velocity noise estimates taken from
the sum and difference channels.
148. Angle Filter Function. This function
estimates antenna pointing errors, relative velocity,
and target acceleration components perpendicular
038 00
Page 12
to the antenna radial axis. These estimates are
computed from elevation and azimuth filters.
149. Range Filter Function. The range filter
function receives range discriminant data from the
RTDP and combines it with its own output from
the last cycle. This combined data is used to
estimate target range. The target range estimate is
sent to the gate control function where it is used to
predict the center of the next filter cycle.
150. Velocity Filter Function. This function
estimates range rate and acceleration at the center
of the existing filter cycle. This information is sent
to the gate control to predict the position of the
next filter cycle.
151. Clutter Filter Function. The clutter filter
function estimates the mainlobe clutter frequency
error from doppler error, sum channel noise
magnitude and the clutter discriminant. The
mainlobe clutter frequency error estimate is sent to
the gate control function.
152. Off-Null Tracking Function. This function
improves the target-to-clutter ratio when the target
speed is slow. When target speed is slow, the clutter
return can be as large as the target return. To
improve the ratio, the antenna boresight is
positioned off of the target and the clutter return is
then attenuated.
153. Waveform Selection Function. This function
determines if the existing pulse repetition frequency
(prf) is satisfactory for the next filter cycle. The
waveform selection logic defines the parameters
required for continuous tracking and will change
the radar prf to center the next filter cycle.
154. Antenna Control Function. This function
computes the antenna drive commands from
azimuth and elevation errors. This keeps the radar
boresight directly on the target.
155. Gate Control Function. The gate control
function receives range and velocity data from the
range filter and velocity filter functions. This
function predicts the target range and velocity that
would occur at the center of the next filter cycle.
A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC - DATA PROCESSING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Mode Dependent Data Processing.................................................... WP038 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 1................................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This simplified schematic supports data

processing function and mode dependent data
processing operation (WP032 00 and WP038 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 039 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Data Processing Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC - RADAR SET RECEIVING FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Operation - Radar Set Receiving Function........................................................... WP030 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Radar Set Receiving Function Simplified Schematic, Figure 1 ........................................................... 2

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION.

2. This simplified schematic supports radar set

receiving function operation (WP030 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 2

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 3

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 7)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 9

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 8)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 10

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 9)

A1-F18AC-742-100 040 00
Page 11/(12 blank)

LEGEND
1 RF POWER DEVELOPMENT BLOCK DIAGRAM, WP029 00.

2 SIGNAL PROCESSING FUNCTION SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC, WP037 00.

3
Ñ 161353 THRU 161528; ALSO 161702 THRU 162852 BEFORE F/A-18 AFC 050.

Figure 1. Radar Receiving Function Simplified Schematic (Sheet 10)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - MAINTENANCE BIT MODE

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-200
Initiated Built-In Test ............................................................................................. WP004 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Maintenance BIT ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Maintenance BIT Mode Display ...................................................................................................... 2
Maintenance BIT Display, Figure 1......................................................................................................... 4

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (6) Head-up displays, operation

(WP020 00).
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required refer to the work packages listed b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
below:
c. Functional operation:
a. Sequence of operation: (1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) (2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00) (3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP016 00)
(WP030 00)
(4) Target acquisition, operation (5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP013 00) (WP031 00)

(5) A/A track mode displays, operation (6) Data processing function, operation
(WP018 00) (WP032 00)
A1-F18AC-742-100
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (This WP)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(This WP)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(WP043 00).
3. MAINTENANCE BIT.
4. Maintenance BIT mode displays WRA failures,
test failures, and advisory conditions using
alphanumeric symbols on the digital display
indicator for accumulated PBIT (ABIT), initiated
BIT (IBIT), and operational readiness test (ORT)
matrices.
5. The ABIT matrix is formed from all PBIT test
failures which occurred since the radar was last
cycled through ORT in operate with weight on
wheels. A coldstart during flight does not clear the
ABIT matrix.
6. IBIT and ORT matrices are formed when either
of their respective tests are run. When operate is
first selected with weight on wheels, the IBIT and
ORT matrices are cleared and the ORT matrix is
updated with the latest history file. IBIT must be
run again to form its matrix. At takeoff, the IBIT
matrix again is cleared. A coldstart during flight
does not clear the IBIT or ORT matrices.
7. BIT test results are acquired from the previous
flight by turning on the radar in STANDBY and
inspecting ORT, ABIT and IBIT matrices in the
maintenance BIT mode. (IBIT must be run after
the flight to form its matrix first.) If the radar is
cycled to OPERATE, the matrices clear
automatically.
8. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
041 00
Page 2
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), maintenance BIT mode is
normally enabled by pressing in sequence the
pushbutton switches on the multipurpose display
group digital display indicators:
a. MENU (press and release until BIT
pushbutton option appears)
b. BIT
c. MAINT
d. RDR.
9. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), maintenance BIT mode is
normally enabled by pressing in sequence the
pushbutton switches on the multipurpose display
group digital display indicators:
a. MENU (press and release until SUPT
MENU appears)
b. BIT
c. SENSORS
d. RDR MAINT.
10. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP, the IBIT is
selected by pressing the BIT CODES pushbutton
from the maintenance BIT mode. When the BIT
CODES pushbutton is pressed, the radar is
commanded to enter relay mode. In response, the
radar enters IBIT test 10 (A1-F18AC-742-200,
WP004 00, Table 3), and displays BOA pushbutton
options.
11. MAINTENANCE BIT MODE DISPLAY. See
figure 1. When the maintenance BIT mode is
enabled, three symbols are displayed on the right
column of the display. These identify the three
pushbutton switches that are used to enable an
applicable matrix. The symbols and their
definitions are:
a. B - IBIT
b. O - ORT
c. A - ABIT.
A1-F18AC-742-100
When a matrix is selected, the pushbutton switch
symbol is boxed and the applicable matrix is
displayed. Maintenance BIT is stopped by selecting
either STOP, BIT or MENU pushbuttons on the
digital display indicator.
12. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP the radar
maintenance BIT displays shows TAC INFO, CAL,
and SENS pushbuttons. These pushbuttons are used
by the pilot to determine which radar modes are
degraded and to quickly determine if the radar
system is functioning normally. The TAC INFO
pushbutton is used to determine radar mode
degradation while the SENS and CAL pushbuttons
are used to determine if the radar is functioning
normally. The CAL and SENS pushbuttons are
abbreviated IBIT tests that, if a failure occurs,
cause the RUN IBIT code to be set. These
pushbuttons are not designed as maintenance tools.
For maintenance purposes, IBIT or ORT is to be
used.
13. B or O Selected. With B or O selected, the
display shows four lines of alphanumeric symbol
data. The first line indicates which WRA has failed.
These symbols and their corresponding definitions
are:
a. RTDP - Radar target data processor fail
b. XMTR - Transmitter fail
c. RE - Receiver/exciter fail
d. CPS - Computer-power supply fail
e. ANT - Antenna fail
f. SERV - Servo electronics gimbal assembly
fail.
14. The second line indicates which test number
has failed during either IBIT (B selected) or ORT
(O selected). The display can display only ten test
number fails. If more than ten test number fails are
recorded, FULL is displayed on the third line. The
remaining test number fails are displayed by
sequentially pressing the same pushbutton that was
041 00
Page 3
selected. When all fail test numbers have been
displayed, FULL disappears and then appears if the
selected pushbutton is pressed again.
15. The fourth line indicates advisory data. The
advisory numbers and their meanings are:
a. 146 - equipment NO-GO
b. 147 - IBIT complete
c. 148 - IBIT manually terminated
d. 193 - transmitter test skipped
e. 194 - antenna motion sensitive tests skipped
f. 195 - excessive RF interference detected
g. 197 - ORT/IBIT incomplete
h. 465 - RTDP PPM not installed
i. 476 - weight on wheels set.
16. When there are more advisories than can fit on
the advisory line, FULL is displayed. The remaining
advisories are displayed by sequentially pressing the
same pushbutton that was selected.
17. A Selected. See figure 1. With A selected, five
lines of alphanumeric data are shown on the digital
display. The first line indicates which WRA has
failed. The symbols are the same as when B or O
are selected with one more symbol addition. It is:
RBIT - Run Built-In Test.
18. The second line indicates which test number
has failed. FULL is displayed on the fourth line the
same as if B or O were selected.
19. The third line is an interval count number
which indicates the number of one minute intervals
in which a test number failed on the second line.
20. The fifth line indicates advisory data. Only one
advisory exists in the P-BIT matrix. It is: 146 -
Equipment NO-GO.
A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 4

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 5

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 6

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 3)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 7

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 4)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 8

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 5)

A1-F18AC-742-100 041 00
Page 9/(10 blank)

LEGEND
1
Ñ WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

2
Ñ WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 17C AND UP(A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. Maintenance BIT Display (Sheet 6)

A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
1 November 2002 Page 1

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

OPERATION - TRACK WHILE SCAN FUNCTION

RADAR SYSTEM

Reference Material
Mode Selection and Video Displays....................................................................... WP011 00
Radar System .................................................................................................................... A1-F18AC-742-100
Air to Air Search Mode Displays............................................................................ WP014 00
Antenna Control Function....................................................................................... WP033 00
Mode Dependent Data Processing ......................................................................... WP038 00

Alphabetical Index
Subject Page No.

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Track While Scan Function....................................................................................................................... 2
Mode Selection .................................................................................................................................... 2
TWS Antenna Control ....................................................................................................................... 8
TWS Data Processing......................................................................................................................... 8
TWS Display Symbology ................................................................................................................... 4
TWS Radar Controls .......................................................................................................................... 6
TWS Antenna Control Centering and Elevation Bar Selection, Figure 4.......................................... 14
TWS Data Processing Functions, Figure 3 ............................................................................................. 13
TWS Display Symbology, Figure 1 .......................................................................................................... 10
TWS Radar Pushbutton Controls, Figure 2 ........................................................................................... 11

Record of Applicable Technical Directives

None

1. INTRODUCTION. (3) Air to ground (A/G) displays, operation

(WP016 00)
2. If other operations of the radar system or radar
set are required, refer to the work packages listed (4) Target acquisition, operation
below: (WP013 00)

a. Sequence of operation: (5) A/A track mode displays, operation

(WP018 00)
(1) Mode selection and video displays,
operation (WP011 00) (6) Head-up displays, operation
(WP020 00).
(2) Air to air (A/A) search mode displays,
operation (WP014 00) b. Radar set operation (WP009 00).
A1-F18AC-742-100
c. Functional operation:
(1) Radar electrical power function,
operation (WP024 00)
(2) Transmitter drive, operation
(WP026 00)
(3) RF power function, operation
(WP028 00)
(4) Radar set receiving function, operation
(WP030 00)
(5) Signal processing function, operation
(WP031 00)
(6) Data processing function, operation
(WP032 00)
(7) Antenna control function, operation
(WP033 00)
(8) Cooling and pressurization function,
operation (WP034 00)
(9) Built-In Test, operation (WP035 00)
(10) Mode dependent signal processing,
operation (WP036 00)
(11) Mode dependent data processing,
operation (WP038 00)
(12) Radar set doppler, operation
(WP022 00)
(13) Maintenance BIT Mode, operation
(WP041 00)
(14) Track while scan function, operation
(this WP).
3. TRACK WHILE SCAN FUNCTION.
4. The track while scan (TWS) mode is an air to air
major mode of operation that provides multiple
target detection while providing target tracking
ability. The TWS mode keeps track files on 10
targets and the mission computer system (MC)
displays the 8 highest priority targets. The target
data is displayed in a range-azimuth format.
5. This WP provides a description of the operating
functions when the radar set is operating in the
043 00
Page 2
TWS mode. Operations of the TWS mode in this
WP include:
a. mode selection
b. TWS display symbology
c. TWS radar controls
d. TWS data processing
e. TWS antenna control.
6. MODE SELECTION. TWS can be selected from
single target track (STT) or A/A search modes. The
two A/A search modes are velocity search (VS) and
range while search (RWS).
7. When entering TWS from STT, the
computer-power supply (CPS) centers the scan
pattern around the tracked target. The acquisition
cursor and antenna elevation caret also center on
the tracked target. The target is processed as a
manually designated launch range and steering
(L and S) target and is not deleted on the basis of
target priority. If TWS is entered during break lock,
radar target acquisition is centered where the track
was lost.
8. When TWS is entered from an A/A search mode,
the radar initializes the MC system commanded
scan pattern to center around the previous center.
The antenna elevation caret and acquisition cursor
remain at their previous position.
9. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in TWS, the radar keeps
track files on 10 targets. The MC system provides
track data on the eight highest priority filed targets.
The two remaining tracked targets are used as
bump targets should their priority exceed any of the
8 tracked targets in the MC system. Priority of
tracked targets is determined by time to go
(range/range rate). The radar system also provides
up to 64 more search (unfiled) targets directly from
the CPS to the multipurpose display group. This
gives the radar the ability to display up to 72
targets while operating in the TWS mode.
10. A DT2 target can be assigned manually by
positioning the acquisition cursor on a filed target
and designating. A second designation of the DT2
target or actuation of the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch causes the L and S target and the DT2
A1-F18AC-742-100
target to switch positions. Actuation of the
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch with no DT2
target shifts the L and S designation down to the
next highest priority target.
11. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar set identifies the
targets to be displayed. The highest priority target
is automatically assigned as the launch and steering
(L and S) target. The L and S target is identified
with a star and launch parameters. Priority two
through eight targets are identified with numbers 2
through 8. All tracked targets have a target aspect
angle pointer.
12. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), in TWS, the radar maintains
track files on 10 targets. The digital data computer
MSI logic associates up to 25 targets from different
sensors, including up to four ALR-67 trackfiles and
one L and S trackfile. The digital data computer
ranks and assigns priority to them and displays a
hostile, ambiguous, friendly, or unknown (HAFU)
symbol for the eight highest ranking targets. Target
identification is indicated by the HAFU symbol and
target rank is indicated by the number inside the
HAFU symbol. The remaining MSI trackfiles are
low priority trackfiles and are indicated by a +
symbol. When the acquisition cursor is put on a low
priority target the + symbol is replaced by a HAFU
symbol. If a low priority target is designated as the
MSI L & S or DT2 target the + symbol is replaced
by a HAFU and applicable ranking symbol. Target
priority is assigned as shown below:
a. MSI L & S target (designated by a star
within its HAFU symbol)
b. targets that have missiles launched against
them
c. DT2 target (designated by a diamond within
its HAFU symbol)
d. targets with sensors fully dedicated to their
track (radar STT or FLIR auto track) if not
previously prioritized
e. other designated MSI targets.
The radar system has the ability to display 64 more
search targets (radar raw hits) by way of the display
mux between the CPS and multipurpose display
043 00
Page 3
group. These are displayed as solid rectangles. The
added ability to display 64 search targets and eight
highest priority targets and eight low priority
targets gives the radar and digital data computer
the ability to display up to 80 targets.
13. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the priority no. 1 target is
automatically assigned as the MSI L and S target.
Another filed target can be assigned as the second
designated (DT2) target by designating it with the
TDC. The L and S target is identified with a star
and launch parameters. The DT2 target is
identified with a diamond and launch parameters.
Priority 2 through 8 targets are identified with the
numbers 2 through 8. If the target has radar
contribution its rank symbol or number is circled. If
the MSI L and S trackfile does not have radar
contribution, a NO RDR cue is displayed in the
lower left part of the radar attack display. All eight
high priority targets have a target aspect angle
pointer.
14. A DT2 target can be assigned manually by
positioning the acquisition cursor on a filed target
and designating. A second designation of the DT2
target or actuation of the undesignate/nose wheel
steer switch causes the L and S target and the DT2
target to switch positions. Actuation of the
undesignate/nose wheel steer switch with no DT2
target, shifts the L and S designation down to the
next highest priority target.
15. If the MC has designated the priority no. 1 and
priority no. 2 targets, they are not deleted from files
based on target rank.
16. The priority no. 1 target is the L and S target
unless assigned manually. The radar automatically
acquires the L and S target if an AIM-7 launch
initiate exists. The L and S target designation does
not change until TWS is reinitialized, or AIM-7
illumination off is received.
17. If the sensor control switch is pressed to the
right during TWS, a transition to STT occurs on
the L and S target if no filed target is under the
acquisition cursor. If a filed target is under the
acquisition cursor, the filed target becomes the
L and S target. If an unfiled target is under the
acquisition cursor, a transition to STT occurs on
the unfiled target. While tracking an L and S target
with an AIM-7 selected and the radar not in STT,
pressing and releasing the cage/uncage switch
A1-F18AC-742-100
within .8 seconds commands the radar into STT on
the L and S target.
18. Targets detected outside the selected range
scale are not put in track files. If the range scale is
changed and a filed target is outside the range scale,
the target remains in the track file and is not
deleted.
19. If target detection is lost, an extrapolate
(memory) flag is set. The radar continues to
extrapolate tracked targets for six seconds if
detection is lost within antenna gimbal limits. If
detection is lost because the tracked target moved
outside of the antenna gimbal limits, the radar
track extrapolates for two seconds.
20. SCAN RAID mode can be selected in TWS
when a L and S target exists by pressing the RAID
switch on the left throttle grip. AUTO scan
centering is automatically selected and cannot be
adjusted. If a heading bias was inserted before
entering SCAN RAID, it is removed. During SCAN
RAID, the range increment/decrement option, EXP
option, HITS option, AUTO/MAN scan centering
option, elevation bar option, azimuth scan option,
grid marks and launch zone markers are removed
from the display. SCAN RAID is exited by
reselecting the RAID switch, selecting the RSET
option, or when the L & S target is within 5nmi,
undesignated, or becomes an AOT target. SCAN
RAID is also exited when an AMRAAM or sparrow
missile is launched, but can be recommended with
the missile in flight.
21. The SCAN RAID mode provides the ability to
concentrate the TWS scan volume in a small area.
This allows targeting data to be updated at a faster
rate. In SCAN RAID the radar enters a special
range versus azimuth format. During SCAN RAID
the L & S target is centered in an area 10 nmi
range by 22° azimuth.
22. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar enters a
continuous two bar by 22° high data rate scan.
23. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the radar enters a
continuous three bar by 22° high data rate scan.
24. The B-sweep is frozen at the azimuth position
where the L & S target was located based on a
043 00
Page 4
140° azimuth scale. A SCAN RAID cue appears at
the bottom center of the display.
25. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), a crossed out SCAN RAID
cue is displayed for 5 seconds when SCAN RAID is
commanded against a trackfile with no radar
contribution.
26. In SCAN RAID, trackfiles continue to be
displayed along with search type ‘‘raw hit’’ targets.
Trackfiles which fall outside the SCAN RAID
display area appear along the edge of the display.
Search type ‘‘raw hit’’ targets are displayed at a
lower intensity and cannot be designated. When a
new L & S target is designated either manually or
by bump acquisition, the display is adjusted to be
centered about the new L and S target.
27. TWS DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY. Refer to figure 1,
this WP for TWS display symbology.
28. Filed Target - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The tracked target is
displayed as an inverted half box. The radar set
keeps track files on up to 10 targets and displays
the eight highest priority filed targets. The two
remaining filed targets are displayed as unfiled
targets. Unfiled targets are displayed as solid
rectangles.
29. Filed Target - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The digital data computer
maintains up to 16 trackfiles. The eight high
priority trackfiles are displayed as HAFU symbols.
The eight low priority trackfiles are displayed as +
symbols.
30. Target Priority - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The radar system
determines the priority of the filed targets. The
highest priority target is identified the L and S
target and the next seven priority targets are
identified with the numbers 2 through 8 inside the
inverted half box. The second highest priority target
is the DT2 target. The radar determines target
priority based on time-to-go (range/range rate).
31. Target Priority - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
A1-F18AC-742-100
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The digital data computer
determines the rank and priority of the MSI
targets. MSI target rank is based on target identity,
time-to-go (range/range rate) for normal targets, or
angle to boresight for angle only track targets. The
highest ranked target is initially designated as the
MSI L & S target and the next seven targets are
identified with the rank of 2 through 8 inside their
HAFU symbols. One of these seven targets or a low
priority target may be designated as the DT2 target.
MSI targets are prioritized as described below:
a. MSI L & S target
b. targets under missile attack in decreasing
time-to-go order
c. MSI DT2 target
d. radar STT target or FLIR autotrack target
e. other MSI targets based on their rank.
32. Target Aspect Angle Pointer. The target
aspect angle pointer is a fixed length pointer that
indicates the horizontal angle that is created by the
intersection of the line of sight and the target’s
velocity vector.
33. Launch Range and Steering Designated
Target. The L and S target is displayed as a star
with mach and altitude numerics next to it. The
highest priority target is automatically designated
the L and S target.
34. Second Designated (DT2) Target . The DT2
target is displayed as a diamond with mach and
altitude numerics next to it.
35. Unfiled Targets - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When the MC system is at
its limit to display eight filed targets, the radar
displays all other detected targets as solid
rectangles without aspect angle pointers. The radar
has the ability to display 64 unfiled targets. This
gives the radar and the MC system the ability to
display up to 72 targets.
36. Unfiled Targets - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The digital data computer
displays 16 filed targets. The radar displays all
other detected targets as solid rectangles without
aspect angle pointers. The radar has the ability to
043 00
Page 5
display 64 unfiled targets. This gives the radar and
digital data computer the ability to display up to 80
targets.
37. Altitude Coverage. The numbers above and
below the acquisition cursor are the maximum and
minimum altitudes covered by the radar scan
pattern at the range the acquisition symbol is
positioned. The numbers are in thousands of feet.
38. Sensitivity Indicator. Radar sensitivity is
displayed as a one digit number between 1 and 9,
with 1 indicating minimum sensitivity and 9
indicating maximum sensitivity. A low sensitivity
indicates that the maximum range at which the
radar can detect, acquire, and track targets is
reduced. A high sensitivity indicates effective range
of the radar is increased.
39. Aircraft Magnetic Heading. Numeric readout
that indicates the aircraft heading in degrees
magnetic.
40. Aircraft Altitude. Barometric or radar altitude
readout which indicates altitude in feet.
41. Aircraft Airspeed. Airspeed is displayed in
knots and mach.
42. A/A Waypoint and North Pointer. The
waypoint and north pointer are displayed if the A/A
WYPT option on the HSI display is selected. The
waypoint and north pointer are only displayed if
the waypoint is within the radar field of view. The
waypoint is displayed as a circle if undesignated
and as a diamond if the waypoint is designated
(target).
43. A/A Waypoint and North Pointer - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The waypoint and
north pointer are displayed if the A/AWP option on
the HSI display is selected. The waypoint and north
pointer are only displayed if the waypoint is within
the tactical display area. The waypoint is displayed
as a circle. The bearing and range from the A/A
waypoint to the acquisition cursor is displayed
outside the upper left corner of the angle only track
zone. The A/A waypoint is not a steer-to-waypoint,
but a reference waypoint.
43A. A/A waypoint and North Pointer - WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 10A
A1-F18AC-742-100
AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000). In STT, TWS, and
RWS, the waypoint and north pointer are displayed
if the air to air waypoint (A/A WP) pushbutton
switch on the HSI display is selected. The waypoint
and north pointer is only displayed if the waypoint
is within the radar’s field of view. The waypoint is
displayed as a circle. Associated with the waypoint
symbol, a pointer is also displayed which will
indicate the direction of magnetic north. The
pointer will indicate true north if the heading
reference (HDG TRUE) pushbutton switch on the
HSI display is selected.
44. Target Heading. The target heading indicates
the magnetic heading of the L and S target. The
target heading is removed from the display if
DCLTR 2 is selected.
45. Target Bearing/Range - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The bearing and range of
the acquisition cursor relative to the A/A waypoint
is displayed when the A/AWP option is selected on
the HSI display.
46. Target Bearing/Range - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The L and S target’s
bearing and range relative to the A/A waypoint are
displayed if the A/A WYPT option on the HSI
display is selected with range track and angle track
valid.
47. TWS RADAR CONTROLS. Refer to figure 2,
this WP.
48. Elevation Bar Scan Select. The elevation bar
scans are two, four, and six bars (2B, 4B, and 6B).
When a bar scan is selected, it also assigns the
azimuth scan width. The azimuth scan widths are
listed below:
a. 2B elevation scan with available 80°, 60°,
40°, or 20° az scan
b. 4B elevation scan with available 40° or 20°
az scan
c. 6B elevation scan and 20° az scan.
The largest azimuth scan is automatically selected
unless a smaller azimuth scan had been previously
selected. WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the current elevation bar
043 00
Page 6
number is displayed directly to the right of the
elevation bar scan select.
49. Hits. This option provides search type raw hit
target symbols on the radar display when the radar
operating mode is TWS. The raw hit symbols are
displayed at a lower intensity level than track file
symbols at the same selected target aging.
50. Target Aging - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Target aging is fixed at 2
seconds for TWS tracked targets. Target aging of 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds is available for TWS search
targets. When exiting TWS Target Aging, the 2
second aging is retained for TWS search targets if
no manual selection was made. If a manual selection
is made during TWS Target Aging, this selection is
kept after exiting Target Aging. If TWS mode was
entered from VS or RWS, target aging is the same
as selected for those modes unless a different
selection is made.
51. Target Aging - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). Target aging is fixed at 2
seconds for TWS tracked targets. Target aging of 2,
4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds is available for TWS search
targets. If a manual selection for TWS search
targets is made during TWS target aging, this
selection is kept after exiting target aging. If no
manual selection is made during target aging, the
digital data computer returns to the pre-target
aging setting. If TWS mode was entered from VS or
RWS, target aging is the same as selected for those
modes unless a different selection is made.
52. Range Increment. The range increment switch
has an arrow pointing up displayed next to it.
Pressing this switch increases the range to the next
higher scale. Scales available are either 5, 10, 20, 40,
80, or 160 nautical miles. The selected range scale is
displayed above the range increment arrow. WITH
DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT
15C AND UP, the range scale is wrapped around
when upper limit is reached. If at 160 nmi scale and
the increment pushbutton is pressed, range scale is
changed to 5 nmi.
53. Range Decrement. The range decrement
switch has an arrow pointing down displayed next
to it. Pressing the switch does the reverse operation
of the range increment switch. WITH DIGITAL
DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND
A1-F18AC-742-100
UP, the range scale is wrapped around when lower
limit is reached. If at 5 nmi scale and the decrement
pushbutton is pressed, range scale is changed to 160
nmi.
54. Automatic/Manual Scan Centering. This
option is used to select either automatic or manual
scan centering. Either AUTO or MAN is selected
and boxed.
55. AUTO is automatically selected when entering
TWS from STT. With AUTO selected, the azimuth
and elevation scans are centered on the centroid of
the targets with track files and the elevation bar
scan is automatically selected to display as many
filed targets as possible.
56. While in AUTO scan centering, bias scan
centering allows the radar scan center to be moved
while maintaining TWS track files. Positioning the
acquisition cursor in the desired area with no
targets under the cursor and then pressing and
releasing the TDC causes a new scan center about
the cursor. A boxed BIAS legend replaces the boxed
AUTO legend. During bias scan centering priority
targets (L and S target, DT2 target, and any target
under AMRAAM attack) are maintained within 5°
of the scan limits and at the same time biased
toward the inserted heading by shifting the scan
center. Bias scan centering is deselected when any
of the below conditions exist:
a. platform heading and bias heading differ by
more than 90°
b. RSET is selected
c. TWS is deselected
d. RAID is selected
e. MAN scan centering is selected
f. an AMRAAM is launched
g. a track file no longer exists.
57. MAN is selected when entering TWS from
RWS or VS. With MAN selected, the scan center
does not change automatically. The azimuth scan
center can be moved by using the throttle
designator control (TDC).
58. Reset - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
043 00
Page 7
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When RSET is pushed, the
radar clears all manual filed targets and resumes
normal target track filing with priority assignment.
59. Reset - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). When RSET pushbutton is
selected, the DT2 target designation is removed and
the radar STT target is designated as the MSI
L & S target. If the radar is not in STT, the FLIR
autotrack target is designated as the L & S target.
When the RSET pushbutton is pressed and neither
radar or FLIR are in track then the L & S target
designation is removed.
60. Declutter 1/2 - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). There are two levels of the
DCLTR option. With DCLTR 1 selected, the A/C
velocity vector and the artificial horizon line are
removed from the display. With DCLTR 2 selected,
the A/C velocity vector, artificial horizontal line,
relative altitude characters, range rate caret, range
rate numerics and target heading are removed from
the display.
61. Declutter 1/2 - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). The declutter option is
selected from the A/A data sublevel display. There
are two levels of the DCLTR option. With DCLTR
1 selected, the A/C velocity vector and the artificial
horizon line are removed from the display. With
DCLTR 2 selected, the A/C velocity vector,
artificial horizontal line, relative altitude characters,
closing velocity value from the L & S target,
launch zones from the DT2 target, and tracked
target heading are removed from the display.
62. Expand. The EXP option is boxed when
selected. When the expand option is selected, the
display is rescaled to be expanded about the L & S
trackfile.
63. Pulse Repetition Frequency (prf). Prf is
initiated by the MC to interleaved (INTL). Pressing
the PRF select switch selects high (HI), medium
(MED), or INTL prf.
64. Instantaneous prf - WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP.
While operating in INTL mode, an instantaneous
prf indication is displayed directly above the INTL
selection. This shows the currently active prf.
A1-F18AC-742-100
65. Radio Frequency Channel Select. When the
CHAN (channel) pushbutton switch is pressed, it is
relabeled AUTO/MAN and the pushbutton to its
right is relabeled with the last RF channel
(MAN)/channel set (AUTO) selected. Either AUTO
or MAN can be alternately selected by pressing the
AUTO/MAN pushbutton switch. With MAN
selected (boxed), consecutive pressing of the RF
channel pushbutton steps through the RF channels.
With AUTO selected (boxed), consecutive pressing
of the RF channel set pushbutton steps through the
RF channel sets. With AUTO selected, the
frequency agility mode starts at the selected
channel set and steps through the channels of that
set. Channel sets available are A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
and *. If neither AUTO/MAN or RF
channel/channel set pushbutton is selected for five
seconds, the switches revert to their initial labels. If
MAN is being used and the radar receives jamming,
the radar automatically reverts to AUTO (frequency
agility mode).
66. Speed Gate. WITH DIGITAL DATA
COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 15C AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000), the speed gate option is
selected from the A/A data sublevel display. The
speed gate is initialized to normal (NORM).
Pressing the speed gate pushbutton switch toggles
between WIDE and NORM speed gate. If WIDE is
selected, only fast moving targets are displayed. If
NORM is selected, medium and fast moving targets
are displayed.
67. Reject - WITH DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER
CONFIG/IDENT 92A AND UP
(A1-F18AC-SCM-000). REJ is displayed as an
option when data link is in the vector mode. When
selected, REJ is boxed and data link symbology is
removed from the radar display.
68. TWS DATA PROCESSING. Refer to figure 3,
this WP. The TWS data processing functions are:
a. bar-to-bar redundancy elimination function
b. track file correlation and association function
c. tracking filters function
d. auto-scan selection function
e. TWS track storage function.
69. Refer to WP032 00 for a description of data
processing for other radar operations.
043 00
Page 8
70. Bar-To-Bar Redundancy Elimination Function.
This function reduces false targets by sampling
target data from the display process on a bar-to-bar
basis. It removes targets that are redundant on two
or more bars. Multiple target hits (from the same
target) occurring on two or more bars are
centroided and target copies are deleted. This
improves target azimuth and elevation data for the
tracking process.
71. Track File Correlation and Association
Function. This function comes after bar-to-bar
redundancy elimination processing at the end of
frame. This function takes the observed target data
from the bar-to-bar redundancy function and
compares it with the predicted target data from the
TWS track storage function.
72. The track file correlation and association
function determines the correlation between the
observed target data and predicted target data. This
function reduces false target tracks.
73. Tracking Filters Function. Tracking filters
processes each track file one time during each frame
time interval. This filter processing of the frame
data follows the correlation and association process
and provides estimated target data for the TWS
track storage function.
74. Auto-Scan Selection Function. Auto scan
selection selects the antenna scan center and
volume. This function receives estimated target
direction and target range, and centers the antenna
to follow all the tracked targets. This is done when
the MC system has selected auto scan in the TWS
mode. The TWS auto scan flag indicates to the
antenna control whether manual or automatic scan
selection is to be used.
75. TWS Track Storage Function. The TWS track
storage function provides the radar with the ability
to track and store tracking data for 10 filed targets.
Estimated target data from the tracking filters
function is stored and maintained in inertial
coordinates. Each tracked target is computed for
priority on an inverse time-to-go basis. The TWS
track storage data (with priority) is sent to the MC
for display.
76. TWS ANTENNA CONTROL. Refer to figure 4,
this WP. During TWS, the antenna control
processing receives antenna command signals
directly from the TWS auto-scan selection function
A1-F18AC-742-100
when auto centering is selected. The command
signals provide for azimuth and elevation centering
and number of bar scans selected.
77. A horizon stabilized scan is used during TWS.
A horizon stabilized scan is a scan pattern which is
stabilized with respect to the horizon and
referenced to the heading of the aircraft.
78. Scan Centering. This is a continual process to
keep filed targets centered on the display by
changing the antenna scan center to the centroid of
the filed targets. The azimuth scan center change is
limited to 6.25° each frame. The elevation scan
change is limited to 2.6° each frame. This results in
a smooth scan configuration change from frame to
frame.
79. Bar Scan Elevation. The bar scan selection
process selects the scan volume which provides the
best filed target coverage.
80. There are three scan volumes in TWS:
043 00
Page 9
a. 2 bar selection with available 80°, 60°, 40°,
and 20°azimuth coverage
b. 4 bar selection with available 40° or 20°
azimuth coverage
c. 6 bar selection gives 20° azimuth coverage.
81. Bar scan selection priorities are shifted as
below:
a. Coverage of the L and S target
b. Coverage of the priority 1 target
c. Coverage of the priority 2 target and as many
filed targets as possible.
82. Scan volume changes can only occur after three
consecutive frames have been used with the same
bar selected. This provides for a smooth display of
filed targets.
A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
Page 10

LEGEND
1
Ñ DIGITAL DATA COMPUTER CONFIG/IDENT 17C AND UP (A1-F18AC-SCM-000).

Figure 1. TWS Display Symbology (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
Page 11

LEGEND
1 REFER TO ECCM DISPLAYS, A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP003 00.

2 REFER TO NON-COOPERATIVE TARGET RECOGNITION (NCTR) DISPLAYS,

A1-F18AC-742-150/(C), WP004 00.

Figure 2. TWS Radar Pushbutton Controls (Sheet 1)

A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
Page 12

Figure 2. TWS Radar Pushbutton Controls (Sheet 2)

A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
Page 13

Figure 3. TWS Data Processing Functions

A1-F18AC-742-100 043 00
Page 14

Figure 4. TWS Antenna Control Centering and Elevation Bar Selection